Home

P1 Service Manual Vol ume 1

image

Contents

1. Fiber Cable Fiber Cable to Star Coupler A to Star Coupler B Opto Electrical Cable Opto Electrical Cable to Electrical Tap Box A to Electrical Tap Box B O O O Ll O TR TR Fiber Optic Tap A Fiber Optic Tap B Optical Tap _X__ Optical Tap X Electrical Tap Electrical Tap Ground Ground O Standard PeerWay Drop Cables Figure 2 2 5 Cable Connection to Optical Tap Box RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 6 Electrical Tap Box The tap consists of a mounting plate and two Electrical Tap Boxes e PeerWay A 1984 3211 0002 or 1984 1193 0002 e PeerWay B 1984 3214 0002 or 1984 1194 0002 Figure 2 2 6 shows the PeerWay Electrical Tap set Figure 2 2 7 shows the functional diagram of an Electrical Tap Box Optical Tap Electrical Tap X Ground Optical Tap Electrical Tap X Ground RS3 PeerWay Figure 2 2 6 Electrical Tap Box Set Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 7 gt PeerWay 4 gt Drop 1 DATA Optical Electrical amp
2. Copper Braid Conductor E ME gm d eerie o B Jf Ula L y Shield Cone Pin Solder Cone WEA eee Solder Turn p L MM 1 Conductor Body Hold Figure 2 1 10 Solder type Twinaxial Connector RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 2 1 Section 2 Optical PeerWay Optical Console ControlFile This section gives hardware descriptions and functional diagrams for the optical PeerWay The optical PeerWay uses fiber optic cable and provides complete electrical isolation between system components An optical PeerWay uses a passive star architecture with a star coupler feeding up to eight optical fiber runs Each optical fiber run terminates at an optical tap box The optical fiber run may include repeaters and or attenuators to adjust signal strength Figure 2 2 1 shows an overview of an optical PeerWay Electrical Tap ControlFile Tap E3 Card Cages ControlFile Card Cages Console Card Cages Opto Electrical Cable Optical bron
3. Figure 3 5 8 Pansonic JU475 4AEG 5 25 Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 21 Pansonic JU475 3AEG Figure 3 5 9 shows jumper positions The drive select jumpers are marked 1 2 3 and 4 In a two drive installation the left drive should be jumpered as drive 1 and the right drive as 2 Jumper TM must be installed in drive 1 and removed from drive 2 Jumper TM must be installed for a single drive installation If the drive shows many checksum errors try adding a standard RS3 jumper to MDB This changes the Drive Ready option which may correct the problem NAX MDB BX MDA NNI MS MM DA UA HA LA Figure 3 5 9 Pansonic JU475 3AEG 5 25 Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 22 Pansonic JU475 2AEG Figure 3 5 10 shows jumper positions The drive select jumpers are marked 1 2 3 and 4 In a two drive installation the left drive should be jumpered as drive 1 and the right drive as 2 The resistor pack must be installed in drive 1 and removed fro
4. RA A ARA DC Distribution O one ON o Figure 3 7 2 Standard non EMC Electronics Cabinet Rear View RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 4 System Manager Station The System Manager Station is a stand alone upright arrangement of the RS3 Operator Interface Console The System Manager Station SMS is EMC compliant The SMS is shown in Figure 3 7 3 Front Door Removed Panels Removed ECON E memes PeerWay Tap Keyboard Video Interface if internal mount Power Supply if present Figure 3 7 3 System Manager Station RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 5 Alarm Output Panel The Alarm Output Panel supports up to three Alarm Output Boards and has an optional marshaling panel for up to three sets of RGB red green blue video cables between Ol Card Cages and CRTs Figure 3 7 4 shows the Alarm Output Panel P140 P141 P142 S won fons so Te at A d os 0 7 9 ce GREEN BLUE Alarm signals from Ol Interface Card Cage Figure 3 7 4 Alarm Output Panel NOTE The Alarm Output Panel is optional with the 10P5282000
5. they 3942 yor L IL IL JL s JL JE JE J491 J492 J493 J495 J496 J497 HD2 Fod Ere A Keyswitch rd la 3414 fey 0 sl amp lt Trackball N 1984 3223 xxxx Configuror Keyboard Keyboard Cable and Remote Keylock 3222 only Operator Keyboard Figure 3 1 5 Typical 10P50840004 and 1984 3222 0004 Keyboard Interface Connections Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 18 1984 2889 0004 Keyboard Interface 1984 2889 0004 is used for standard keyswitch applications The card provides video isolation Figure 3 1 6 shows typical connections RS 422 Video Input Isolated Video Isolated Video Keyboard RGB Cables Output Output Communications Coaxial RGB Cable RGB Cables Keyboard Power Cable DM Twisted Pairs Coaxial Cable Wire 4942 o7 OL_JL_JL_J ses JL JL 11 J491 J492 J493 J495 J496 J497 HD2 a q P La Keyswitch DS3 xU DS1 DS2 J408 J409 Trackball Keyboard Figure 3 1 6 Typical 1984 2889 0004 Keyboard Interface Connections Operator Keyboard Multitube and Harden
6. MEASURED OUTPUT A POWER VOLTAGE CURRENT O lt Power Supply Volts Amps Normal Indicator Green LED 01 3 tO 02 d MEASURED 08 3 ses VOLTAGE 04 12 O PS 05 13 FAULT 06 18 O 07 21 O LINE RTN AC Input Indicator Ox C NEUT Orange AC IN GND POS O PS OUTPUT Figure 1 2 8 Power Supply Without Battery Backup Panel Indicators Table 1 2 8 Power Supply Without Battery Backup Indicators Orange Indicates that AC input is present POWER Indicates that the DC output voltage is in normal working range The power Green supply alarm is activated when this LED is off Table 1 2 9 10P5664000x AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Fuse FRSI Bussman 80PO3980007 8630 O 8630 O 30 80A300VTmeDelay 300 V Time 80A300VTmeDelay RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 18 MTCC Remote Power Supply The Multitube Command Console MTCC Remote Power Supply 10P5645000x and 1984 3023 000x is used when powering a MTCC from a remote location A remote location is defined as being more than 200 feet from the AC DC distribution panel The MTCC Remote Power Supply is mounted inside the electronics cabinet of a MTCC It receives AC power from an AC distribution switch assembly 1984 3004 000x also mounted in the electronics cabinet This power supply assembly consists of an electronics box and two attached cables There are no batteri
7. A0 A1 A2 WS EP SS Figure 3 5 2 1984 2780 000x ProDrive 80S Jumper Positions RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 12 There are three small computer system interface SCSI terminating resistors that remain in place unless the drive is not the last unit on the SCSI bus Figure 3 5 3 shows the location of jumpers and terminating resistors CAUTION It is possible to put the logic cable on incorrectly even though it is keyed The cable should be installed with pin 1 red wire on the end of the plug nearest to the center of the board coro 0 SCSI Terminators Pin 1 red wire c SCSI Bus Cable umen L Jumpers Figure 3 5 3 1984 2780 000x ProDrive 80S Drive Jumpers and Terminators RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 13 Quantum ProDrive Q280 5 25 Inch 100 MB Hard Disk RS3 Consoles The 1984 2307 000x Quantum ProDrive Q280 5 25 Inch 100 MB Hard Disk is a half height unit with built in SCSI board When formatted it holds 80 MB There are two versions of the drive Version 1 Table 3 5 13 shows the factory setting of the 1984 2307 000x Quantum ProDrive Q280 Version 1 Drive Option jumpers These jumpers should not be changed Table 3 5 13 1984 2307 000x Q280 Version 1 Drive Option Jumpers Wait Spin Option No ie Enable Parity Option ume Loo tn Version 2 Table 3 5 14 shows the factory setting of the 1984 2307 000x Quantum ProD
8. Bus B Bus B Figure 1 3 7 Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units Figure 1 3 8 represents a redundant DC power distribution configuration consisting of one System Power Supply Unit feeding bus A and another System Power Supply Unit feeding bus B Buses A and B are not connected Each bus A and B needs to have a separate redundant power supply module so a total of two redundant power supply modules are needed for a redundant DC power distribution This would be a redundant bus redundant power supply configuration which meets the N 1 redundancy requirement The redundant bus configuration must have the same number of power supply modules on each bus Four power supply modules two Power Supply Units is the maximum allowed for both buses RS3 Power System Power Supply Units Bus A B Power Supplies up to 4 System Power System Power Supply Unit 2 Supply Unit 1 DC Bus to DC Bus eigenen jx e Jumper ps2 Psi E SV 1 3 11 Figure 1 3 8 Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power Supply Units Alarm Wiring Figure 1 3 9 shows the alarm connections on the housing The housing contains separate alarm connections for each power supply module The alarm and interlock terminal blocks connect to alarm relay contacts and interlocks in the power supply modules The alarm terminal blocks do not require wire terminating lug
9. Watch Dog Timer LED Bus Cache Fast Latch Cont Memory Static ASIC 16KB RAM Reset 112KB Address gt Micro Data 68000 Micro Buffers LL processor i To RAM E EPROM Motherboard SU 64KB Bae ASIC 4MB EDAC Lu 32 BIT Buffer RS3 Consoles Figure 3 7 19 Ol Processor 68020 Functional Diagram OI Card Cage RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 31 The major functional blocks of the card are e 68020 microprocessor and support circuitry e EPROM for the boot program e Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC Bus Controller and ASIC RAM Controller e Dynamic RAM with error detection and correction circuitry e External cache memory e Fast Static RAM zero wait state memory e Interface for the 68000 motherboard The OI Processor 68020 runs at a clock rate of 16 MHz It has a full 32 bit data bus and address bus The 68020 microprocessor has dynamic bus sizing which allows the processor to interface to devices of any size from 8 to 32 bits in 8 bit increments The OI Processor 68020 has an internal 256 byte instruction cache memory to speed processing of tight loops Also to reduce the time to execute an instruction the processor decouples the instruction execution portion from the instruction fetch portion which enables the processor to execute an instruction while pre fetching the next instruction As part of the 68020 support circuitry the watchdog timer generates a re
10. 7 1 1 Supervisory Computer Interface SCI 7 2 1 RS 232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol sssue 7 2 3 RS 422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol 0 ce eens 7 2 6 RS 422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling 0c cece eee 7 2 8 RS 422 X 25 Protocol Lb ed LR hte ater aa hoe e ATE ri 7 2 9 RS 422 X 25 Cabling 0 TE EEEN tee teens 7 2 11 Checklist for CE Compliant Installation sese 7 2 12 RS 422 X 25 Clocking sssseesseeseee n 7 2 13 OI NV Memory Card aa a hh 7 2 14 EIA ODptIOnS np oe Eee Ex teen pep arta Les nahi re Ie E ER hes 7 2 15 Highway Interface Adapter HIA L eue 7 3 1 HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays 000 cece eects 7 3 3 HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems sssssssses 7 3 5 OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA 0 cece eee 7 3 7 OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Direct Connection 7 3 7 OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems 7 3 7 Checklist for CE Compliant Installation lesser 7 3 8 Configure HIA Screen occoooccccccocccc nen 7 3 9 HIA Stat s SCreen ca gU ehh PRU RA I ehh epu ex Red 7 3 11 VAX PeerWay Interface 00 ccc e eects 7 4 1 QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX Il lsssssesessee 7 4 3 MicroVAX II PeerWay Marshaling Panel essere 7 4 4 QBI Ha
11. 8 1 1 Serial I O Analog Output Points 0 eects 8 1 2 Checking Calibration of Serial I O Analog Output Points 8 1 3 Calibrating Serial I O Analog Output Points 0 cee eee 8 1 4 Serial I O Analog Input Points 0 0 cece tees 8 1 5 Checking Calibration of Serial I O Analog Input Points 8 1 6 Calibrating Serial I O Analog Input Points 00 c eee 8 1 7 Section 2 Calibrating Temperature Input FICS 8 2 1 Temperature Input FIC Calibration Procedure 0 cece eee eens 8 2 2 Thermocouple Sensor Calibration Verification cece eens 8 2 6 Thermocouple Sensor Redundancy cc cece eee e eee 8 2 7 Section 3 Calibrating Pulse Input FICS 000 cece eee eee eee 8 3 1 Pulse Input FICs Calibration Procedure cece eee eee 8 3 2 Section 4 Calibrating MUX FEMS seen 8 4 1 Entering Calibration Constants for Multiplexer FEMS 0 8 4 2 Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMS 00000 8 4 3 Checking and Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMS 8 4 5 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxvi Calibrating 4 20 MA FEMS ssssssssee ee nen 8 4 7 Checking and Calibrating the 4 20 mA FEM sseesseeeses 8 4 8 Checking Calibration of RTD FEMS sssssesree mmm 8 4 9 Checking RTD FEM
12. Drive Select Jumpers None installed j REAR fad d a ES Se OFF FF 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 O 8 Bit Switch 4 Bit Switch Figure 3 5 6 1984 2837 000x 3 5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Dip Switch Positions RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 18 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive RS3 Consoles The 5 25 inch Floppy Disk Drive 1984 1803 000x is used with the MiniConsole Three different drive models have been used e Pansonic JU475 4AEG e Pansonic JU475 3AEG e Pansonic JU475 2AEG Jumpering differs for different drive models See the heading MiniConsole 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers below for details Table 3 5 19 gives parts replacement data The replacement kit includes rubber U channel spacers attached to the bottom of the drive between the mounting holes These spacers must be in place to give the drive wheel clearance to turn and to insulate the drive from the mounting plate Table 3 5 19 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Parts Replacement 1984 1803 000x Kit includes drive and mounting hardware Figure 3 5 7 shows cabling for two floppy disk drives that use the 1984 1754 000x Mini Floppy Interface Card The bus terminator either resistor pack or jumper TM must be removed from drive 2 in a two drive installation The terminator must be installed in drive 1 drive 1 is the last drive on the cable The terminator must be installed for a single drive installation Disk and Tape Dr
13. MLC Fuses 000 cece ene eren SSC FUSES cmt heise teed thar Tete e Contact Controller Processor Parts Replacement Contact Controller Processor Fuse MUX and PLC Parts Replacement MUX and PLC Fuse 0 0c eee ee eee Controller Processor Fault Indications Image Jumper Positions Not for MPC II or MPC5 Image Jumper Positions for MLC and SS Communications Jumper Positions Not for MPC5 4 3 13 4 3 14 4 3 16 4 3 18 4 3 19 4 3 24 4 3 27 4 3 28 4 3 29 4 3 30 4 3 31 4 3 33 4 3 38 4 3 38 4 3 38 Contents SV 4 1 1 Section 1 ControlFile Card Cage These versions of the ControlFile Card Cage are in service e ControlFile Card Cage EMC compliant 10P52960001 e ControlFile Card Cage with blower 1984 3048 000x e ControlFile Card Cage 1984 0023 000x NOTE To retain EMC compliance in a 10P52960001 ControlFile you must use the MPCII 10P50400006 or MPC5 10P57520007 Controller Processor The ControlFile Card Cage houses the PeerWay Buffer Power Regulator Coordinator Processor Nonvolatile Memory and Controller Processor cards A redundant pair of PeerWay Buffer cards is standard One Power Regulator card and one Coordinator Processor card are standard though each can be made redundant with the addition of another card One Nonvolatile Memory card is standard There is a slot for a second memory card but only one card can be enabl
14. Slave Voltage Adjust Input gt Figure 4 2 5 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Functional Diagram RS3 ControlFiles The 5 V output is used for all logic circuitry The 5 volt power regulator is a buck type regulator The input voltage is turned on and off at a 25 KHz rate with a pulse width that varies with the input voltage Four parallel power field effect transistors FET are turned on by the switching regulator as the output sense determines the need for added current To turn on the FETs the gate voltage must be 10 volts above the input voltage rail A transformer and DC restoring circuit is used to provide the required voltage Power to the regulator is preregulated by a zener transistor combination Load sharing is accomplished by the current sense from the regulator being fed into an error amplifier The output of the amplifier is then used to raise or lower the output voltage of the slave card The 12 V and 12 V status lines are tied to ground in order to indicate proper 12 VDC status to the Coordinator Processor ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 9 The 5 VDC voltage output and both buses are monitored through a comparator for voltage tolerance Each has a yellow LED to indicate that the power is good If the 5 volt regulator fails a red LED lights In case of failure all output lines are statused and buffered to the Coordinator Processor through the motherboard bus to generate alarms Control
15. sssssssse e nh 3 7 67 OUNVIRAMs s most es vrbc OLET e e OE REM rro hut DE 3 7 69 OI NV RAM LEDs and Test Points 00 eee eee eee 3 7 74 OI NV RAM LED Sequences 0 000 cece eee ees 3 7 77 OI NV RAM Jumpers 000 cece teen 3 7 78 OI NV RAM Battery Replacement 000 e cece eee eee 3 7 81 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xvi Chapter 4 ControlFiles Section 1 ControlFile Card Cage ooooccoccccccon eee e eee 4 1 1 ControlFile Jumpers ssssssssesee RII HH nn 4 1 3 ControlFile Data Bus Terminators 000 ccc cece eee eet eens 4 1 5 ControlFile Terminator Il a 2 0 0 ccc cece etna 4 1 5 ControlFile Terminator Boards 0 000 cece eee eee 4 1 7 Section 2 ControlFile Support Section 4 2 1 PeerWay Bunter ocioteca caco ci ee on E TUE HL SR 4 2 2 PeerWay Buffer LEDs and Test Points 000 cece e eee ee 4 2 4 PeerWay Buffer Jumpers 000 0c cece tenes 4 2 5 PeerWay Buffer Fuse 0 00 cece en 4 2 6 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator o ooccooccccccccccc 4 2 7 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points 4 2 9 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumpers 4 2 11 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse ssuuuuussss 4 2 12 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC 0 cece eee eee 4 2 13 ControlFile Powe
16. 1x 14 Copper Bus Amp Max Figure 1 4 1 Standard DC Power Distribution System RS3 Power DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 2 A redundant DC power distribution system consists of one set of AC DC Power Supplies feeding the bus A and another set of AC DC Power Supplies feeding the bus B as shown in Figure 1 4 2 Buses A and B are not connected Bus A Power Supplies Up to six r Los KT Toe 1 1 gt N ee EN DC Bus to DC Bus E Jumper mc UJ Co pono UJ N G Sihat Bus B Power Supplies B1 Up to six Figure 1 4 2 Redundant DC Power Distribution System RS3 Power DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 3 DC Power Distribution Bus RS3 Power The DC Power Distribution Bus 1984 1144 000x distributes power to consoles ControlFiles FlexTerms card cages and some field devices Figure 1 4 3 shows a functional diagram of the DC Power Distribution Bus Each AC DC Power Supply is connected to the DC Power Distribution Bus by the AC DC Power Supply to DC Bus Cable 1984 0283 00xx The DC Power Distribution Bus consists of heavy copper terminals mounted directly on three bus bars bus A bus B and the return bus bus A bus B and the return bus run parallel to each other in a plastic channel Bus B is intended for use with an optional redundant DC distribution system The return bus is used to connect the DC return system to the chassis with a large w
17. 0 000 0c cece 3 1 26 Multitube Command Console CRT Hitachi HM 4721 D 3 1 26 Multitube Command Console CRT ViewSonic 17GS 3 1 26 Multitube Command Console CRT Mag Innovision 3 1 27 Multitube Command Console CRT Sony 00 0 cece eee eee 3 1 27 Multitube Command Console CRT Conrac 7122 and 7241 3 1 30 RS3 Consoles Contents SV ii Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Failures 0 0 cece ee eee 3 1 32 Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Adjustments 0000 ee ee 3 1 33 Conrac 7241 CRT Black Video or Black Bars on Screen 3 1 34 Conrac 7241 CRT Power up Diagnostics Failures 3 1 34 Multitube Command Console CRT Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 3 1 35 Section 2 Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console 3 2 1 Pedestal Command Console Keyboards ccc eee eee eens 3 2 3 Pedestal Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard 2 4 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Command Entry Keyboard 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Configuration Keyboard 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Trackball Keyboard luus 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Rotating Alphanumeric Keyboard 3 2 5 Pedestal Command Console Keyswitch Assembly LLue 3 2 5 Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface 000e cease 3 2 6 Pedesta
18. 0 000 cece eee eee teens 5 2 16 Contact Marshaling Panel Wiring 00 cece eee eee eee 5 2 17 Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses 000 c eee eect e eee eae 5 2 19 Optical Isolator Modules 000 cece e I n 5 2 20 Discrete Switch Panel 0 000 ccc eee ene nen 5 2 22 Contact Field Interface Cards 0 0 0 cece eese 5 2 23 Contact FIC LEDS 12 RR BAe eh gees 5 2 25 Contact FIC Jumpers 00 cece n 5 2 26 Contact FIC FUSES 0 cece eee n 5 2 27 Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Extender Card 5 2 28 Section 3 Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware Lees 5 3 1 MUX Flex Terr usen eR Ses UU LEER LC ECCO ta 5 3 2 MUX Power Regulator 0 cece ett ee 5 3 4 MUX Power Regulator LEDs 0 0c cece eee eee 5 3 5 MUX Communication Card 0 0 ccc tenes 5 3 5 MUX Marshaling Panels 0 0 cece eee e 5 3 7 Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel 0 0 eee eee 5 3 7 Current MUX Marshaling Panel ccc eee eee ee 5 3 9 RTD MUX Marshaling Panel oooccooccooccconc 5 3 10 MUX Front End Modules FEMS 000 eee eee teen eee 5 3 14 Thermocouple and Voltage FEM and Universal Voltage FEM 5 3 16 Section 4 PLC Programmable Logic Controller Hardware 5 4 1 PEG Flexletti o beber SEE 5 4 2 PLC FlexTerm Jumpers sssseseeee RI nn 5 4 8 PLG Redundancy cdta f
19. 0 0c cee eee eee eee 2 1 11 Installing Twinaxial Connectors 0 ccc eee 2 1 12 Section 2 Optical Peer Way iv ecs ra bee AR CR Ga Rin wea 2 2 1 Optical Tap BOX s ulcer PLUIE ERE ER I Ese PERRO at 2 2 3 Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box 00 c cece eee ee 2 2 5 Electrical Tap BOX eme a Seals 2 2 6 Optical Repeater Attenuator sssssssssssese e en 2 2 8 Optical Repeater Attenuator Jumpers and LEDs 00000 cues 2 2 8 Star Coples rta uem p RETE URGE I 2 2 9 Grounding an Optical PeerWay oooocccccccccc ees 2 2 10 Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories 000 cece ete eee 2 2 13 Installing Fiber Optic Connectors 00 eee 2 2 13 Section 3 Hybrid PeerWOay uana ok naa aada aiaa aiia eat Ra ta Weed 2 3 1 PeerWay Extender PX 00 0c cece eee cnet nen 2 3 2 PX System Cabling 0 00 cect eee 2 3 5 Twinax Gables gea e ADR adn 2 3 6 Fiber Optic Cables e Eo ei ae cd LU Ru uae T ed eus 2 3 6 DC Power Gable zu s EDO re ILC TG ETUR a Eee ee 2 3 6 Drop Cables ves iaa rra wees a LOERTS 2 3 7 Grounding the PX ascitis cede haere ad tae Dune IR 2 3 7 PX LEDS j 0 34 totus aalgen deh oe ana et un ae ales 2 3 7 PX SwItChes c o teat pea tu e UU ERU La aderit s 2 3 8 Fiber Optic Power Switch ooooooocccccccccnc o 2 3 8 Normal Test Switches oooccccoccccccccocn eee 2 3 8 PX FUSOS e Ern bem Manin Shs ewe CR eile nim Aes 2 3 9 Chapter 3 Consoles
20. Configuror Keyboard Figure 3 1 4 Typical 10P50842004 and 1984 3222 2004 Keyboard Interface Connections Operator Keyboard Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 16 Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface The standard keyswitch function is provided with video isolation by e 10P50840004 CE compliant e 1984 3222 0004 The dual keyswitch option is provided with video isolation by e 1984 3222 0004 The standard keyswitch function is provided with video isolation by e 1984 2889 0004 The standard keyswitch function is provided without video isolation by e 1984 1978 000x Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 17 10P50840004 1984 3222 0004 Keyboard Interface 10P50840004 is CE compliant It does not support the dual keyswitch option Keyboard Interface 1984 3222 0004 is used for standard keyswitch applications and for the dual keyswitch option In the standard keyswitch application there is a jumper wire in J414 In the dual keyswitch option a 1984 3223 xxxx Cable Keyboard Interface to Dual Keyswitch is plugged into J414 This cable provides the dual keyswitch Figure 3 1 5 shows the card and connections RS 422 Video Input Isolated Video Isolated Video Keyboard RGB Cables Output Output Communications Coaxial RGB Cable RGB Cables Keyboard Power Cable m Twisted Pairs Coaxial Cable Wire
21. 000 0 eee eee ee 3 7 18 3 7 13 Setting the Node Address Jumpers 0c eee eee eee ee 3 7 19 3 7 14 Ol Power Supply Functional Diagram 0 cece eee eee 3 7 20 3 7 15 Ol Power Supply LEDS 0 0 cece eee 3 7 22 3 7 16 1984 1137 000x OI Power Supply Fuse and Jumper Locations 3 7 23 3 7 17 Ol Processor 68040 Functional Diagram sssslusuue 3 7 27 3 7 18 Ol Processor 68040 LEDs sssssssssesee eese 3 7 29 3 7 19 OI Processor 68020 Functional Diagram ssssllususe 3 7 30 3 7 20 Ol Processor 68020 LEDs 2 c cece cece tees 3 7 32 3 7 24 Ol Processor 68020 Jumper Locations 2 0eeeeee 3 7 33 3 7 22 Ol Processor 68000 Functional Diagram ssseslesusue 3 7 35 3 7 28 Ol Processor 68000 LEDs 0 cece eee esses 3 7 36 3 7 24 Ol Processor 68000 Fuse and Jumper Location 3 7 37 3 7 25 Pixel Graphics Video Generator Functional Diagram 3 7 39 3 7 26 Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs 0 0 e eens 3 7 41 3 7 27 Character Graphics Video Generator Card Functional Diagram 3 7 42 3 7 28 Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs 000005 3 7 44 3 7 29 Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse Location 3 7 45 3 7 30 Printer Interface Functional Diagram 0 cece eee eee 3 7 47 3 7 31 Printer Interface Card 0001 0002 Without RS 422 Inter
22. Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes PeerWay Tap Test Points PeerWay Tap Fuses Grounding an Electrical PeerWay 00 cece tees Twinax PeerWay Cable Twinax PeerWay Cable Termination eee Installing Twinaxial Connectors 0 ccc eee Optical PeerWay Optical Tap Box Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap BOX 0 cece eee ee Electrical Tap Box Optical Repeater Attenuator Optical Repeater Attenuator Jumpers and LEDs _ 1 eee eee eee Star Coupler Grounding an Optical PeerWay 6 tees Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories 0 0 cece cette Installing Fiber Optic Connectors 6 ees Hybrid PeerWay PeerWay Extender PX PX System Cabling Twinax Cables Fiber Optic Cables DC Power Cable Drop Cables Grounding the PX PX LEDs PX Switches Fiber Optic Power Switch oooooocccccccccnc rn Normal Test Switches PXFuses 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1 7 2 1 9 2 1 11 2 1 12 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 5 2 2 6 2 2 8 2 2 8 2 2 9 2 2 10 2 2 13 2 2 13 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 7 2 3 7 2 3 7 2 3 8 2 3 8 2 3 8 2 3 9 Contents SV ii List of Figures Figure Page 2 1 1 PeerWay Tap Box Connection 0 0 ccc eee eee
23. Trackball Keyboard Operator Keyboard Callup Option Keyboard 1 Left Callup Option Keyboard 2 Middle Callup Option Keyboard 3 Right Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 6 Configuration Keyboard and Enhanced Engineering Keyboard The Configuration Keyboard 1984 1654 000x also known as the Engineering Keyboard is a PC compatible alphanumeric keyboard The Enhanced Engineering Keyboard 1984 2386 000x combines the functions of the Configuration Keyboard and the Operator Keyboard NOTE The Enhanced Engineering Keyboard requires software Version 15 or higher There are no field replaceable parts in either keyboard Upgrade kits are available to change 1654 keycaps to 2386 format A Keycap Puller 1984 3017 000x is available to assist in the keycap change operation A new Keyboard Interface microprocessor or a new Keyboard Interface board may also be required for the upgrade Operator Keyboard The Operator Keyboard comes in two versions e Main Keyboard Trackball 1984 1634 000x e Main Keyboard Trackball Option 1984 2372 000x Subassemblies are available to replace the keyboard tops for each of the three component keyboards The subassemblies are without base or cable Keyboard Electronics boards are also available See the individual keyboard assemblies listed below for details A single elevated base is standard issue Sep
24. Fiber Optic Cable nr nnr an A A Optical Tap DUC ULUA O TESTO M Attenuator Optical Tap MAX 4 NODES Figure 2 2 2 Optical PeerWay Components RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 3 Optical Tap Box The tap consists of a mounting plate and two Optical Tap Boxes e PeerWay A 1984 3211 0001 or 1984 1191 0001 e PeerWay B 1984 3214 0001 or 1984 1192 0001 The Optical PeerWay Tap should always be used with a Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly 1984 2231 0001 to securely dress and tie down fiber optic cables The cable tie assembly mounts at the top of the Optical PeerWay Tap Figure 2 2 3 shows the Optical PeerWay Tap and the Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly TR TR Fiber Optic Tap A Fiber Optic Tap B Optical Tap X Optical Tap X Electrical Tap Electrical Tap Ground Ground Figure 2 2 3 Optical PeerWay Tap and Cable Tie Panel Assembly RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 4 Up to three Electrical Tap Boxes may be daisy
25. RTS Interface Electrical 9VI gt PeerWay x gt Interface to IGND Drop 2 Optical Tap Box TXD LLB gt RTS RXD __ PeerWay CPLST f gt Drop 3 9VI m IGND TXD Data Transmit LLB Local Loop Back gt PeerWay 4 RTS Ready to Send Drop 4 RXD Data Receive 2 VI Volts Isloated IGND Isolated Ground Figure 2 2 7 Electrical Tap Block Diagram Up to 3 Electrical Tap Boxes may be daisy chained to an Optical Tap Box using special Opto Electrical cables The maximum allowable length of the chain is 30 meters 100 feet Devices are connected to the electrical tap box with normal PeerWay drop cables Use Opto Electric Cable 1984 1195 9999 to connect Electrical Tap Boxes A Use Opto Electric Cable 1984 1196 9999 to connect Electrical Tap Boxes B The 3211 and 1193 parts are fully interchangeable Similarly the 3124 and 1194 parts are fully interchangeable as shown in Table 2 2 2 Table 2 2 2 Electrical Tap Box Replacement Data mue NC mmm 1984 3211 0002 1984 1193 0001 PeerWay A Electrical Tap Box 1984 1193 0001 1984 3211 0002 PeerWay A Electrical Tap Box 1984 3214 0002 1984 1194 0001 PeerWay B Electrical Tap Box 1984 1194 0001 1984 3214 0002 PeerWay B Electrical Tap Box RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 8 Optical Repeater Attenuator The Optical Repeater Attenuator 1984 2350 000
26. There are two clocks on the Pixel Graphics Video Generator a 25 MHz video clock and a 20 MHz processor clock Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 41 Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs The Pixel Graphics Video Generator has LEDs to indicate status Figure 3 7 26 shows the LEDs DS1 Green No faults are detected on the card DS1 lights when the Ol Processor completes power up diagnostics DS2 Red The Pixel Graphics Video Generator has a fault The Graphics Processor on the Pixel Graphics Video Generator DS8 Yellow is executing commands DS8 lights when the CRT screen is periodically updated DS9 Yell The specific area of memory where commands are stored is being Yellow used When the Graphics Processor is finished executing commands DS9 goes out and the command area can be accessed The memory bus is in use DS10 lights when the Ol Processor is DS10 Yellow reading into or writing from the Pixel Graphics Video Generator memory DS11 Yellow Text fields on the CRT screen are being updated DS11 goes out after the fields are updated DS12 Yellow PA sync Under normal operation DS12 blinks at a regular Figure 3 7 26 Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 42 Character Graphics Video Generator Input Signals from Controller Processor Card The Character Graphics Video Generator card 1984 1064 0001 generates color video signals for the command console CRT It is marke
27. 00 cece eects 3 7 32 Ol Processor 68020 Jumpers 00 eects 3 7 33 Ol Processor 68020 FUSES 2 cee tees 3 7 33 Ol Processor 68000 nescence eis Sat ore ees ar eb E ES 3 7 34 Ol Processor 68000 LEDs 0c cece eee 3 7 36 Ol Processor 68000 Jumpers 00 cece eee 3 7 37 Ol Processor 68000 Fuses 00 cece tee ae 3 7 38 Pixel Graphics Video Generator 0 00 0 c cece eee 3 7 39 Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs 0 0000 cece ee eens 3 7 41 Character Graphics Video Generator 3 7 42 Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs nannan 3 7 44 Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse 0 eeruan 3 7 45 Printer Interface 0 aa eee ms 3 7 46 Printer Interface LEDS 0 0 cc cece ete ent ne 3 7 49 Printer Interface Jumpers 00 teens 3 7 51 SCSI Small Computer System Interface 0 00 e cece 3 7 52 SGSI LEDS hone cies eed a eun a ee aed dde 3 7 55 SCSI J mpers eas ae hao eh xe UR reU ha ie aes 3 7 56 1984 3301 000x SCSI Board 2 0 eee ee 3 7 56 1984 1140 0001 OI SCSI Host Adapter 0 0 e eee eee 3 7 58 OI Nonvolatile Memory 0 0 00 cece eet m nn 3 7 60 Ol B bble Memory x 00d cria iekRRiR Derbi ene tied acta teed gud 3 7 62 OI Bubble Memory LEDs sssssssssese ee nh 3 7 65 OI Bubble Memory LED Sequences sssssssesselee esee 3 7 66 OI Bubble Memory Jumpers
28. 1 Mounting Plate 3 PX for PeerWay B 2 PX for PeerWay A 4 Fiber Optic Cable Tie Assembly Figure 2 3 2 PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 3 Table 2 3 1 PX Parts Replacement Data armo memes Name Come Tap A 10P52760001 Twinax Tap Box A Provides only two PeerWay drops 10P50930001 1984 0488 0001 Twinax Tap Box A Provides only two PeerWay drops Provides only two PeerWay drops 1984 3211 0001 Optical Tap Box A Cannot connect to Electrical Tap Boxes Provides only two PeerWay drops 1984 1191 0001 Optical Tap Box A Cannot connect to Electrical Tap Boxes Tap B 10P52760002 Twinax Tap Box B Provides only two PeerWay drops 10P50960002 1984 0488 0002 Twinax Tap Box B Provides only two PeerWay drops Provides only two PeerWay drops 1984 3211 0002 Optical Tap Box B Cannot connect to Electrical Tap Boxes Provides only two PeerWay drops 1984 1191 0002 Optical Tap Box B Cannot connect to Electrical Tap Boxes RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 4 The parts of a PX are shown in Figure 2 3 3 S3 HIGH D LOW POWER POWER STATUS O 0 Y Z NORMAL GROUND OPEN F O DISABLE PEERWAY A F O DISABLE F O XMT TES BARCODE LABE GND A B 0000 PEERWAY PEERWAY 18 36 VDC DROP 1 o een e en gt omar sono 10452 e po oner comer 0 sum 0 EN mewwee em s mesereroneiiorpones rooms Figure 2 3 3 PeerWay Extender PX RS3 PeerWay
29. 10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications This configuration supplies power to Ol card cages located away from the main system DC bus Figure 1 2 16 shows the 10P54090003 and 4 CS CO TS A CA mea LED 6 Connector DC output cable connector P981 goes to DE Socket for output voltage measurement Rl J907 PWRA on the OI Card Cage AC input P846 1 Black L1 Potentiometer for output voltage adjustment P846 2 White L2 N P846 3 Green Ground Figure 1 2 16 10P5409 Power Supply The power supply can be mounted in a Suspended Cabinet 7U a 11U or a 13U enclosure using the Power Supply Mounting Bracket 10P53760001 which is part of the assembly The bracket attaches to the drive mounting bracket NOTE A cooling fan assembly is required under the slot that holds the power supply RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 34 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out A connector is used to mount the cables on the power supply The pin out of the connector is shown in Table 1 2 18 Table 1 2 18 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out Pm Description O ie DC output Jumper to pin 32 connects DC return to AC safety ground E Li AC ne 7 L2 N AC line 2 230 V or neutral 115 V Ea AC safety ground 10P5409 Remote Power Supply LEDs The power supply has one green LED that lights when the unit is operating normally 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Outp
30. C305 o GAIN COMP GAIN P302 O P202 o C205 P301 gt BLUE TRACKING O TP301 P20 C105 1 GREEN 2 TRACKING Q TP201 COMP P102 o P101 o RED TRACKING O TP101 Figure 3 1 21 Barco CRT RGB Input Output Amplifier and Remote Control RS3 Consoles Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 40 o Beam Current Limiter oll P6 RS3 Consoles Figure 3 1 22 shows the power supply board High long High short 4 Low long Low short vvv A adj O P1 WARNING Sealed preset potentiometers Do not adjust J7 J6 J5 J4 o P2 E adj m oJ P4 EHT limit Follow the adjustment procedure of the technical manual for service or repair Overload EHT adj Figure 3 1 22 Barco CRT Switched Mode and EHT Power Supply Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager
31. DS10 12 V pee Replace Fuse F2 supplies 12 VDC to the card The microprocessor is evaluating an input or output block Block eae With redundant MultiLoop processors this LED indicates DS8 which one is active The Coordinator Processor is accessing the MultiLoop CP Access Processor RAM Memory and transferring configuration DS7 and dynamic data to the NV Memory If the MultiLoop Processor loses memory current data is quickly reloaded from Nonvolatile Memory Interrupt The MultiLoop Processor is resetting its watchdog timer DS6 either to prevent timing out or to acknowledge the synchronizing clock pulse 5 V Fuse Blown Replace Fuse F4 Supplies 5 VDC to the MultiLoop DS3 Processor Card Fault A fault has been detected on the MultiLoop Processor or DS2 the ENABLE DISABLE Switch is in the disable position If the switch is enabled and this LED is on replace the MultiLoop Processor Card Enable The ENABLE DISABLE Switch is enabled and no DS1 hardware faults are detected on the MultiLoop Processor ENABLE DISABLE Switch Test Points Hail ll Figure 4 3 14 MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs and Test Points RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 36 Controller Processor Enable Disable Switch The ENABLE DISABLE switch can be used as follows during operation RS3 ControlFiles If the switch is disabled on the primary card with a redundant backup present
32. Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses The state of the Alarm Output is determined by which power input is being applied The state of the Alarm Output under primary or secondary power is Power Normally Open Contacts Normally Closed Contacts Primary closed open Secondary open closed Table 1 1 2 gives fuse data for the Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Table 1 1 2 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses Fuse FRSI Part No Bussman Part No Littelfuse Part No Characteristics F1 Do onoo wove o osazsovsiowsto RS3 Power AC Input SV 1 1 6 RS3 Power AC Input SV 1 2 1 Section 2 Power Supplies RS3 Power This section gives the hardware descriptions and functional diagrams for these power supplies AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Multitube Command Console MTCC Remote Power Supply OI Remote Power Supply DC DC Power Supply AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Remote I O Power Supply Remote Power Supply Distribution Blocks NOTE Information on System Power Supply Units is in Section 3 Power Supplies SV 1 2 2 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup A A RS3 Power The AC DC Power Supply with battery backup 10P5658000x 1984 2298 000x and 1984 0298 000x provide 30 volts DC to the DC bus AC DC power supplies are rack mounted in the console cabinet The 2298 supply is an internal redesign of the 0298 supply they are c
33. The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical contact with the mounting frame in the console Use either the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating pads between the drive and the yellow can DC power cable 10P56840001 is required with the IBM Deskstar 540 drive RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 8 Quantum ProDrive LPS 270S Table 3 5 7 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers They set the drive to address 5 Table 3 5 7 10P5280000x ProDrive LPS 270S Drive Address Jumpers ON Jumper Warning The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical contact with the mounting frame in the console Use either the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating pads between the drive and the yellow can RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 9 Quantum ProDrive LPS 170S Table 3 5 8 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers They set the drive to address 5 Table 3 5 8 1984 3100 000x ProDrive LPS 170S Drive Address Jumpers ON Jumper Warning The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical contact with the mounting frame in the console Use either the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating pads between the drive and the yellow can RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 10 Quantum ProDrive LPS 105S 3 5 Inch 102 Meg Hard Disk Table 3 5 9 shows the factory setting of the 1984 3100 0001 Quantum ProDrive LPS 105S Drive Opti
34. e Receive cr T Data m m Status zi Section 1 Section 2 Same as Section 1 jia Male Connector Section 3 HOLD 4 Places Same as Section 1 1 Meg 3 Section 4 Ohm Same as Section 1 PeerWay Tap Box B Female Connector 4 Places Jumper e HOLD 1 Meg S Ohm Figure 2 1 3 PeerWay Tap Functional Diagram RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 5 Each PeerWay Tap Box has four identical circuits that connect to four different nodes system devices The four circuits are isolated from each other so that if one node fails other nodes will not be affected There are four connections from the tap boxes to system device drop cables The A tap box uses male connectors the B tap box uses female connectors Each tap box has two fuses F1 and F2 The fuses are in line with the PeerWay so a problem with either box is indicated by a communication failure on one line but not on the other The PeerWay Tap is considered to be one drop on the PeerWay Connections are made between two A tap boxes and two B tap boxes with twinax cable and a T connector Buffers transmit and receive data to the different nodes For power an onboard 5 volt regulator is provided for each of the four nodes with the unregulated 9 volts brought to each tap circuit from the originating node Thus each tap receives power from the node to which it is cabled The PeerWay Tap connects to a PeerWay Buffer Card in a ControlFile or
35. eee 5 5 34 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxi Chapter 6 Multipoint I O Section 1 Multipoint I O Installation and System Wiring 6 1 1 Multipoint I O Addressing 0 0c cece eect I 6 1 4 Multipoint I O Termination Panel Address Jumpers luus 6 1 4 Multipoint I O Scanning Rates 0 0 sess 6 1 5 Multipoint I O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement 6 1 6 Multipoint I O FIM Online Replacement 0 0 0c eee eee eee 6 1 6 Multipoint I O FIM Redundancy 0 000 cece eee en 6 1 6 Multipoint I O Termination Panel Installation 0 0 0 c cee eee ee 6 1 8 Multipoint I O Termination Panel Grounding sese 6 1 8 Multipoint I O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring sess 6 1 8 Multipoint I O Termination Panel Communication Wiring 6 1 10 Multipoint I O Termination Panel Communication Wiring Online Replacement ssseusssessee nh 6 1 10 Multipoint I O Termination Panel Communication Wiring Redundancy 6 1 11 Section 2 Communication Devices 0ccee cece ence eens 6 2 1 Remote Communications Termination Panel 0000 ee eee eee eee 6 2 2 Remote Communications Termination Panel Il 0000 eee 6 2 4 Remote Communications Termination Panel II Installation 6 2 6 Remote Communications Termination Panel Il Wiring 6 2 6 Remote C
36. pin 7 of U9 P13 P1 a P2 P1 o o P14 P1 Vertical Frequency o Horizontal Parabola Horizontal Amplitude Horizontal Trapezium r4 Figure 3 1 20 Barco CD 551 CRT Deflection Board Horizontal Blanking Vertical Clamp Width Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 39 Figure 3 1 21 shows the Input Output Amplifier and Remote Control board P307 BLUE TP303 TP302 LOWLIGHTS P207 TP203 Q TP202 GREEN LOWLIGHTS Q TP102 P107 RED LOWLIGHTS TP1 93 TP401 TP2 TP1 O eo PICTURE BACKGROUND e TP3 P1 P2 P305 P205 P105 BLUE BIAS GREEN BIAS RED BIAS o o o P303 C211 P203 C111 P103 04 ff P104 s C311 P304 e o BLUE o GREEN o BLUE FREQ GREEN FREQ RED RED FREQ GAIN COMP
37. 4 20 MA FEM calibrating 8 4 7 4 20 MUX MARSHALLING PANEL 5 3 9 5 1 4 inch floppy disk drive 3 5 18 50P 0589 0103 6 2 6 6 2 15 551 Barco CRT 3 1 35 55P 0144x022 3 1 26 3 4 3 0416X012 9 1 3 601077 6 6 3 68020 OI Processor 3 7 30 68040 OI Processor 3 7 27 70983 0039 9 3 2 7122 Conrac CRT 3 1 30 7211 Conrac CRT 3 2 8 7241 Conrac CRT 3 1 30 7900 0317 0023 3 2 8 408 0001 7 5 6 A A Bus DC Power Distribution Cable 1 4 9 AC Distribution Block 1 2 28 fuse 1 2 37 AC distribution switch assembly 1 2 18 AC Entrance Panel 1 1 1 dual feed 1 1 4 single feed 1 1 3 AC input 1 1 1 AC DC Power Supply 1 3 1 with battery backup 1 2 2 fuses 1 2 8 LEDs 1 2 7 without battery backup 1 2 13 measuring output current 1 2 15 battery and charger replacement 9 2 2 checking battery 9 1 27 installing 1 3 1 with battery backup alarm contacts 1 2 6 without battery backup alarm contacts 1 2 16 RS3 Service Manual LEDs 1 2 16 AC DC Power Supply to DC Bus Cable 1 4 3 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply 1 2 26 fuses 1 2 27 active hardware alarms checking 9 1 13 alarm contacts AC DC Power Supply with battery backup 1 2 6 without battery backup 1 2 16 Alarm Output Board 3 7 5 Alarm Output Panel 3 7 5 alphanumeric keyboard 3 1 6 Pedestal Command Console 3 2 5 Analog Card Cage 5 1 2 address label 5 1 3 FICs 5 1 23 hardware 5 1 1 Analog Extender Card 5 1 53 Analog FIC 5
38. G G 53373 0103 6 2 6 6 2 15 Grant Continuity Card 7 4 8 grounding electrical PeerWay 2 1 7 Optical PeerWay 2 2 10 tape drive 3 5 24 H hard disk hardware 3 5 2 Hardened Command Console 3 1 1 HIA Configure HIA Screen 7 3 9 direct connection of PeerWays 7 3 3 hardware 7 3 1 HIA Black Box Cable Assembly 7 3 5 Link Cable 7 3 3 modem 7 3 5 OI NV Memory jumpering 7 3 7 Status screen 7 3 11 HIA Bubble Memory 3 7 60 HIA Link Cable 7 3 3 HIA Modem 7 3 5 HIA Status screen 7 3 11 HIA Black Box Cable Assembly 7 3 6 HIGH DENSITY ISOLATED DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL 6 3 41 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 1 6 3 41 field wiring 6 3 43 jumpers 6 3 44 label 6 3 43 solid state relays 6 3 45 Highway Interface Adapter See HIA host 10 2 14 hubs 3 4 11 Hybrid PeerWay 2 3 1 2 3 2 IAC5 5 2 20 6 3 38 IAC5A 5 2 20 6 3 38 IBM Deskstar 3 5 2 1C454 187 7 3 5 IDC5 5 2 20 6 3 38 IDC5 B 6 3 38 F 6 3 38 IDC5B 5 2 20 Index SV Index 10 IDC5F 5 2 20 IDC5G 6 3 38 IDC5N 6 3 38 installing AC DC Power Supply 1 3 1 Remote Communications Terminal Panel Il 6 2 6 Remote Communications Termination Panel 6 2 9 Smart Transmitter Daughterboard 5 1 37 INTERFACE RS422 RS232 5 4 13 INTERFACE RS422 RS422 5 4 20 Intrinsic Safety 6 6 1 6 6 2 Elcon IS Termination Panel 6 6 3 MTL IS Termination Panels 6 6 14 6 6 25 IS See Intrinsic Safety Isolated Analog Input
39. c O E 96 N o9 m seas 19 o Oo oo llt o 99 n o9 gt o q HES eo 9 x L p o i C lt ul E E J088 C FAN co O ios O er Gi Figure 3 7 7 Rear View of EMC OI Card Cage 10P52820001 Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 11 Table 3 7 3 EMC OI Card Cage 10P52820001 Connectors and Fuses wo Besson NO meme qua Keyboard Interface cable connection DC power A cable connection J907 SCSI cable J088 SCSI power cable connection J933 RS 232 printer cable connection J085 Power Switch cable connection J906 Process Alarm cable connection TB2 PeerWay A Drop Cable connection J084 5 Hardware Alarm cable connection TB1 36 Video BNC Output RED J646 EX Video Output cable connection to the BNC Alarm Circuit fuses F1 F2 1 5 A max 1 Breakout Panel replacement use only J082 Hardware Alarm Opto 1 RL1 Video BNC Output BLU J648 Alarm Output cable connection to Alarm ES Output Panel replacement use only J284 PeerWay B Drop Cable connection J083 6 7 7 Process Alarm Opto 2 RL2 Video BNC Output GRN J647 0 1 Keyboard SCSI power cable connection J920 Fan cable connection J919 41 DC power B cable connection optional 908 NOTE The Alarm Output Panel is optional with the 10P52820001 OI Card Cage 10 RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 12 Follow these rules to ensure EMC CE compliance 1 Use cables listed in Table 3 7 4 as required 2 The Keyboard Video In
40. 1 2 12 Character Graphics Video Generator 3 7 45 Contact Card Cage 5 2 12 Contact FIC 5 2 27 Contact FlexTerm 5 2 12 Contact Marshaling Panel 5 2 19 Contact Termination Board 5 2 15 Contact Termination Panel 5 5 6 ControlFile 5 V DC Only Power Regulator 4 2 12 Power Regulator 5 and 12 V DC 4 2 19 CP 4 2 38 DC Distribution Block 1 2 37 DC Output Card 1 4 6 DC DC Power Supply 1 2 25 Direct Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 22 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il 6 3 13 Floppy Disk Power Supply 3 3 16 Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 18 Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 32 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 40 Keyboard Interface 3 1 25 MARK 1 Remote Power Supply 1 2 31 1 2 34 Monochrome Video Generator 3 3 10 MPC 4 3 19 MPCII 4 3 19 MTCC Remote Power Supply 1 2 19 MUX 4 3 31 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 12 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 26 NV Memory bubble 4 2 53 RAM 4 2 49 OI Power Supply 3 7 24 OI Processor 68000 3 7 38 OI Processor 68020 3 7 33 OI Processor 68040 3 7 29 OI Remote Power Supply 1 2 20 Output Bypass Card 5 1 22 PeerWay Buffer 4 2 6 PeerWay Tap 2 1 6 Pulse I O FIC 5 1 45 PX 2 3 9 RS422 RS232 Port I O Card 5 4 19 RS422 RS422 Port I O Card 5 4 24 Smart Transmitter FIC 5 5 14 Temperature Input FIC 5 1 53 fuse label Remote I O Power Supply 1 2 28 RS3 Service Manual SV Index 9 fuses AC DC Power Supply with battery backup 1 2 8 used in RSS list A 1
41. 3 1 6 Pedestal Command Console 3 2 1 Alphanumeric Keyboard Rotating 3 2 5 Command Entry Keyboard 3 2 4 Configuration Keyboard 3 2 4 CRT 3 2 8 Disk Interface Card SCSI 3 2 11 Keyboard Interface 3 2 6 keyboards 3 2 3 Keyswitch Assembly 3 2 5 Loop Callup Keyboard 3 2 4 Power Supply 3 2 11 Printer Interface Card 3 2 11 Trackball Keyboard 3 2 4 PeerWay Backup Node screen 10 2 12 cable fault diagnostics 10 2 40 electrical 2 1 1 fault conditions 10 2 30 fault detection 10 2 31 fault diagnostics 10 2 35 hybrid 2 3 1 2 3 2 Node screen 10 2 12 optical 2 2 1 Overview screen 10 2 9 Performance screen 10 2 3 sample problems 10 2 29 screens 10 2 1 twinax 2 1 1 PeerWay Backup Node screen 10 2 12 field definitions 10 2 12 PeerWay Buffer 4 2 2 fuse 4 2 6 jumpers 4 2 5 LEDs and test points 4 2 4 PeerWay Drop Cables MicroVAX 7 4 3 7 4 5 RS3 Service Manual PeerWay Extender See PX PeerWay Field Termination Kit 9 3 3 PeerWay Interface 3 7 15 jumpers 3 7 18 LEDs and test points 3 7 17 PeerWay Interface Card QBI 7 4 3 7 4 5 PeerWay Interface Devices troubleshooting 10 6 1 PeerWay Node screen 10 2 12 field definitions 10 2 12 PeerWay Overview screen 10 2 9 field definitions 10 2 9 use in fault detection 10 2 33 PeerWay Performance screen 10 2 3 field definitions 10 2 3 PeerWay Tap fuses 2 1 6 test points 2 1 6 Peripheral Devices disk drives 3 5 1 Pixel Graphics Video Generator
42. Analog I O 10 5 8 consoles 10 3 1 ControlFiles 10 4 1 fiber optic PeerWay cables 10 2 42 Input Output 10 5 1 OI Card Cage problems 10 3 24 PeerWay 10 2 1 PeerWay Interface Devices 10 6 1 power system 10 1 1 Serial I O 10 5 3 Twinax PeerWay cables 10 2 41 Twinax PeerWay 2 1 1 cable 2 1 9 termination 2 1 11 troubleshooting cables 10 2 41 Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes 2 1 3 twinaxial connector crimp type 2 1 12 solder type 2 1 12 U uninterruptible power supply 3 4 16 RS3 Service Manual SV Index 17 Universal Voltage FEM 5 3 16 UPS 3 4 16 V Vacuum Cleaner 9 3 2 VAX QBUS Interface 7 4 1 VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 jumpers 7 4 10 VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 jumpers 7 4 13 LEDs 7 4 15 VAX QBUS Interface Marshalling Panel LEDs 7 4 7 Video Generator Character Graphics 3 7 42 Monochrome 3 3 7 Pixel Graphics 3 7 39 Viper 2060S 3 5 23 2150S 3 5 23 Voltage Input FEM calibrating 8 4 3 Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel 5 3 7 VOLTAGE MUX MARSHALLING PANEL 5 3 7 W Winchester disk drive See hard disk drive Wipe Bubble procedure 10 4 9 wiring color codes 1 4 10 X X 25 protocol 7 2 9 SCI 7 2 9 cabling 7 2 11 clocking 7 2 13 Y Y cable 5 3 3 Index SV Index 18 RS3 Service Manual Index
43. Analog I O Serial I O MAIO Contact Dd MIX Multiplexer Programmable Logic Controller PLC Rosemount Basic Language RBLC Smart Pulse RTD Thermocouple Discrete vr vr NIASSA YX X X X x NINININ J N Table 4 3 3 shows parts replacement data A change of MPC may require a software change Table 4 3 3 MPC Parts Replacement Dm ree mm meis 1984 4068 000x MPCII 10P50400006 1984 2500 000x 1984 1494 000x 1984 1445 000x 1984 1374 000x Replaces MPCII MPC CC PLC and MUX Controller Processors Requires jumper setting 1984 2500 000x 1984 1494 000x 1984 1445 000x 1984 1374 000x Replaces MPC as well as CC PLC and MUX Controller Processors Requires jumper setting MPCII 1984 4068 000x Multiplexer MUX Controller Processor MPC 1984 2500 000x 1984 1494 000x Programmable Logic Controller PLC Controller Processor 1984 1445 000x Contact Controller CC Controller Processor 1984 1374 000x Contact Controller CC Controller Processor RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 4 RS3 ControlFiles The MultiPurpose Controller can be installed in any slot A through H When a MultiPurpose Controller is used in a redundant pair configuration only slots AB CD EF and GH can be used as redundant pairs MultiPurpose Controllers can be used in redundant pairs if the image being run supports redundancy and the controllers are identical Flat redundanc
44. Consoles All hubs accept 115 or 230 VAC 50 to 60 Hz The FMS II hubs are autosensing The TP 8 hub requires a power pack specified for voltage and frequency They can operate over 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F with up to 90 humidity noncondensing and be stored in 22 to 60 C 30 to 140 F with 10 to 90 humidity noncondensing Hub specifications are listed in Table 3 4 1 Table 3 4 1 Hub Specifications Power Heat 20 1 x 2 7 x 11 1 cm 0 57 kg 6 5W 8 x1x4 5 in 1 25 Ib 22 2 BTU hr 44 x 30 4 x 6 6 cm 2 6 kg 28W 17 5 x 9 x 1 66 in 5 75 Ib 100 BTU hr 44 x 30 4 x 6 6 cm 2 7 kg 36W 17 5 x 9 x 1 66 in 6 Ib 123 BTU hr RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 15 Router RS3 Consoles When connecting to a plant network a router must be used to isolate your process network Which to chose depends heavily on the nature of the plant network Consult with your plant network administration or a knowledgeable networking service to select the proper connection mechanism for your installation Consult Fisher Rosemount Systems for the recommended router CAUTION The process network must be isolated from the plant network with a router If it is not isolated a misbehaving device on the plant network could cause loss of control on the process network Be sure to use the router s controlled access list functionality to provide isolation from network traffic RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 16 Uninterruptible
45. DC Distribution Block 1 2 28 fuse 1 2 37 DC OUTPUT 1 4 5 DC Output Card 1 4 5 fuses 1 4 6 DC Power Distribution Bus 1 4 3 DC DC Power Supply 1 2 23 fuses 1 2 25 degaussing Command Console CRT 9 1 15 Degaussing Coil 9 3 2 diagnosing Console PeerWay problem 10 2 36 ControlFile PeerWay problem 10 2 37 multiple ControlFiles 10 2 39 one ControlFile 10 2 37 SCI PeerWay problem 10 2 36 diagnostic programs console 9 1 16 Diogenes Communication Converter Box 7 5 7 Interface 7 5 1 Interface Software 7 5 5 TI Communications Card 7 5 6 Direct Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 1 6 3 3 6 3 14 field wiring 6 3 16 fuses 6 3 22 input points 6 3 20 installation 6 3 16 jumpers 6 3 21 labels 6 3 18 output points 6 3 20 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il 6 3 1 6 3 3 6 3 4 field wiring 6 3 9 fuse 6 3 13 installation 6 3 8 jumpers 6 3 10 DIRECT DISCRETE TERMINATION PNL 6 3 14 DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE 6 3 46 Discrete Field Interface Module FIM 6 3 1 6 3 46 DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE HIGH SIDE SWITCH 6 3 46 DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE LOW SIDE SWITCH 6 3 46 Discrete FIM LED patterns 6 3 51 LEDs 6 3 50 online replacement 6 3 48 precision 6 3 49 redundancy 6 3 48 Discrete I O 6 3 1 6 3 2 Discrete Switch Panel 5 2 22 Discrete Termination Panel Direct 6 3 14 Direct Il 6 3 4 High Density Isolated 6 3 41 Index SV Index 8 Isolated 6 3 28 Multi FIM 6 3 23 disk onl
46. MPC5 only Analog high low alarms MLC and SS only To prevent continuous Controller Processor switching a mechanism limits switches to no more than three in a 5 5 minute period Another mechanism limits switching due to consecutive instances of the same alarm If a specific block alarm causes a controller switch another instance of the same alarm during the next 10 seconds cannot cause another controller switch The use of redundant Controller Processors requires the use of an additional cable and the setting of jumpers on the Comm Connect card Contact FlexTerms and the comm termination panels NOTE When a redundancy switch occurs with an MPC5 Controller Processor the controller that was formerly primary will reboot and the Control File Status CFS screen will momentarily display the message Redun Cont Missing anda 1025 hardware alarm will be generated This is an intentional change in system operation for the MPC5 Controller Processors SV 4 3 40 RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors FISHER ROSEMOUNT RS3 Service Manual SV Index 1 Index 54850001 5 4 20 Numbers 5488 0001 5 4 13 5503000x 1 2 28 1012 VO 0444 AA 6 6 11 55270010 3 7 27 1022 AO 0242 AA 6 6 11 55270011 3 7 27 1026 AO 0242 AA 6 6 11 5590 xxxx 5 1 4 1032 HO 0242 AA 6 6 11 56120001 3 1 26 1034 HO 0242 AA 6 6 11 56450002 1 2 28 1072 D3 0510 AA 6 6 11 5645000x 1 2 18 1072 F3 0510 AA 6 6 11 5658000x 1 2 2 10P 566
47. PeerWay Interface LEDs and Test Points LEDs on the PeerWay Interface card indicate different status conditions Figure 3 7 11 shows the LEDs The test points are e TP1 5V Isolated DC for Tap A Yellow e TP2 A Return Gray e TP3 5V Isolated DC for Tap B Yellow e TP4 B Return Gray DS1 Card Good No faults are detected on the card DS2 Card Fault A fault is detected in the communication link 909 SNS SONO SONO DS4 PW Tap STA The timer in tap A has timed out DS5 PW Tap STB The timer in Tap B has timed out DS6 RTS Ready to send generated from PeerWay Interface DS7 Bus Active The PeerWay Interface is receiving data DS8 A Active The Interface is using the A PeerWay DS9 B Active The Interface is using the B PeerWay DS10 CMD Active Command active The software is actively executing a command on the Interface Board Figure 3 7 11 PeerWay Interface LEDs RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 18 PeerWay Interface Jumpers RS3 Consoles Four jumpers on the PeerWay Interface set the node address of the Console and the OI Card Cage The sum of the jumper values plus 2 determines the node address which can only be an even number Figure 3 7 12 shows the PeerWay Interface jumper locations Table 3 7 6 shows the jumper values Figure 3 7 13 shows the jumper setting for a PeerWay node address of 16 The name of each jumper is marked at the right of the jumper The least significant LS jumper is at th
48. RAM RAM NV Memory See NV Memory RAM Raster Test Button Monochrome Video Generator 3 3 9 RBLC FlexTerm 5 4 2 reactivity coupon use 1 3 5 1 3 16 1 3 18 1 3 19 1 3 20 1 3 21 Recommended Resistance 6 3 4 redundancy Analog FIC 5 1 28 Analog FIM 6 4 43 Controller Processor 4 3 39 CP 4 2 27 Discrete FIM 6 3 48 Multipoint I O 6 1 6 PLC 5 4 9 PLC Port I O Card 5 4 11 power 1 5 1 Thermocouple Sensor 8 2 7 Remote Communications Termination Panel 6 2 2 Remote Communications Termination Panel I 6 2 2 6 2 9 installing 6 2 9 jumpers 6 2 10 Remote Communications Termination Panel Il 6 2 2 6 2 4 field wiring 6 2 6 installing 6 2 6 jumpers 6 2 8 Remote I O Power Supply 1 2 28 Remote Keyswitch 3 1 20 Remote Power Supply 1 2 32 RS3 Service Manual SV Index 15 remote power supply I O 1 2 28 MTCC 1 2 18 Ol 1 2 20 remote termination panel standard 6 5 2 Repeater Attenuator optical 2 2 8 Resistance Temperature Detector 5 3 16 restore operations redundant FICs 10 5 2 RNI 3 4 9 7 6 1 7 6 2 Fan Assembly 7 6 7 PeerWay Node Label 7 6 3 ROS CRT Hitachi 21 3 4 3 liama Vision Master 17 3 4 3 ROS Hardware 3 4 1 Rotating Alphanumeric Keyboard Pedestal Command Console 3 2 5 router 3 4 15 RPQNA 7 4 5 RS 232C pin assignments 7 2 4 SCI cabling 7 2 3 signal names 7 2 3 RS 422 pin assignments 7 2 7 SCI cabling 7 2 6 X 25 cabling 7 2 11 X 25 clocking 7 2 13
49. SV 3 6 7 Table 3 6 4 Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Setup Menu 1 and 2 me m 3 Press F1 until Hardware Features appears in the display window Scroll through the options and verify the settings in Table 3 6 5 Scroll with F2 Change options with F3 Table 3 6 5 Fujitsu DL 4600 Printer Setup Hardware Features eum me omm o BUFFER 8 KBYTE DUPLEX FULL NOTE Do not usea buffer size larger than 8 kilobytes RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 8 4 Press F1 until Save appears in the display window Press F3 to save the configuration 5 Press F1 until Func LIST appears Press F3 to print the option lists Verify the printed lists 6 Press F1 until Self Test appears in the display window Press F3 to start the test and press F2 to stop it after about 30 seconds Press F1 to exit the self test 7 Press the ON LINE button to resume normal operation RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 9 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer The Fujitsu DL2600 color printer 1984 0533 000x runs at 288 cps draft quality 96 characters per second letter quality and 8 inches per second graphics It prints 10 characters per inch and 6 lines per inch It should be operated at 4800 Baud See the Fujitsu Maintenance Manual 1984 0533 0021 for troubleshooting procedures and the User Manual 1984 0533 0022 for user information Figure 3 6 1 shows the Fujitsu DL2600 printer Control Panel Each key has th
50. Section 1 Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station o ooooococcccnccnn eee eee eens 3 1 1 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies 0oooooco oooo 3 1 4 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Error Reporting 3 1 5 Configuration Keyboard and Enhanced Engineering Keyboard 3 1 6 Operator Keyboard 0 c cece eee pE EENE 3 1 6 Main Keyboard gt hitmen echoes dae ead Mabe Gee Sea 3 1 7 Trackball Keyboard Assembly 0 0 c cee e eet ees 3 1 8 Option Keyboard 0 0 ccc eet m 3 1 9 Touchpaq nia rr a a Gd ee es eS 3 1 10 JOySUCK ir Gee Pe camino eee ee eee es 3 1 11 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xii Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics ooooooco oooo 3 1 12 Keyboard Electronics Board 0 0 e eee eet eee eee 3 1 12 Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board 0 00 cece eee eee eee 3 1 13 Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board 00 0c eee eee eee ee 3 1 13 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Interface 0 cee eee eee 3 1 14 Password Keyboard Interface 0c cece ccna etn eese 3 1 15 Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface c cece eee eee 3 1 16 10P50840004 1984 3222 0004 oro rota Bees Oe Sa abies Bae a dinar 3 1 17 1984 2889 0004 ovine dite wale dy nee ied tee bale bale eam dere ale eds 3 1 18 1984 1978 000X ir cim nee Lecter edna NUES Cte ecu eee Bee 3 1
51. They are both marked SINGLE STRATEGY PROCESSOR on the PWA One Single Strategy FlexTerm is connected to the SSC through one cable One Single Strategy FlexTerm can contain FICs for two SSCs The Single Strategy Processor has three RS 422 communication ports and 6 analog inputs Each Output FIC requires one communication port and one analog input Each Input FIC requires one analog input Each Contact FIC requires one communication port The SSC can control four 4 20 mA inputs two outputs and six contact points Three RS 422 communications ports are provided two for the output FICs and one for the contact FIC Six analog inputs are also provided two for the Output FICs and four for the input FICs Any or both of the output FICs can be removed and input FICs can be placed in the slots to provide added flexibility in the FlexTerm Output FICs cannot be placed in the dedicated input slots Communication to the two Output FICs and the Contact FIC is handled by the three dual port serial communication converters that transfer the parallel data from the data bus to serial RS 422 data Analog Input The Single Strategy Processors have an analog input section that performs the analog to digital A D conversion The analog input section is used for two purposes The first is to bring in the 4 20 mA input and drop it across a precision 250 ohm resistor on the Input FIC This voltage is then fed to the analog input of the controller card a
52. Without Battery Backup The AC DC Power Supply without battery backup 10P5664000x and 1984 0390 000x provides 30 volts DC to the DC bus It is intended for systems that do not require battery backup CAUTION AN The power supply unit is heavy approximately 25 kg 55 pounds CAUTION AN The top surface of the power supply may be hot Figure 1 2 6 shows the power supply front panel MEASURED OUTPUT VOLTAGE CURRENT Volts Amps MEASURED VOLTAGE Cable From AC Distribution System PS OUTPUT DC Output Cables Orange and Brown Figure 1 2 6 Power Supply Without Battery Backup Front Panel RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 14 RS3 Power Table 1 2 7 gives parts replacement data This power supply can be used with a battery backed power supply provided the BATT switches are turned OFF This power supply can replace a battery backed supply ONLY if the battery is not being used the BATT switch is turned off and the PS FAULT alarm contacts if used are jumpered as Normally Closed N C Table 1 2 7 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Parts Replacement rene mee O come Power supplies are interchangeable only in systems that do not use batteries The 10P5658000x BATT switch on the replaced unit must be 1984 0390 000x turned OFF The PS FAUL
53. X 25 protocol 7 2 9 signal names 7 2 6 RS3 Network Interface RNI 3 4 9 Operator Station 3 4 2 RS3 Network Interface 7 6 1 7 6 2 RS422 RS232 Port I O Card 5 4 13 fuse 5 4 19 jumpers 5 4 17 LEDs 5 4 16 RS232 pin assignments 5 4 15 RS422 RS422 Port I O Card fuse 5 4 24 jumpers 5 4 23 LEDs 5 4 22 RS422 pin assignments 5 4 22 RTD 5 3 16 RTD FEM checking calibration 8 4 9 RTD MUX MARSHALLING PANEL 5 3 10 Rush Brush 9 3 2 S scheduled maintenance 9 1 1 SCI Supervisory Computer Interface EIA options 7 2 15 hardware 7 2 1 SCI Bubble Memory 3 7 60 Scorpion 5945C 3 5 23 5945S 3 5 23 Index SV Index 16 Scratchpad 3 1 10 screen Configure HIA 7 3 9 ControlFile Status 10 4 7 FIC Detail 10 5 18 FIC Status 10 5 13 Field I O Status 10 5 13 FIM Detail 10 5 18 FIM Status 10 5 13 HIA Status 7 3 11 Memory Dump 10 3 12 Memory View 10 3 16 Menu Confidence 10 3 20 Node Dump 10 3 19 Off Line Diagnostics 10 3 8 PeerWay Backup Node 10 2 12 PeerWay Node 10 2 12 PeerWay Overview 10 2 9 PeerWay Performance 10 2 3 Plant Status 10 2 2 Screwdrivers 9 3 1 SCSI 3 7 52 jumpers 3 7 56 LEDs 3 7 55 SCSI BOARD 2 3 7 52 Serial I O troubleshooting procedures 10 5 3 Serial I O FIC calibrating 8 1 1 SERIAL MARSHALLING PANEL 5 1 54 SERIAL PROCESSOR 4 3 2 Server 10 2 14 Single Feed AC Entrance Panel 1 1 3 SINGLE STRATEGY PROCESSOR 4 3 25 Single Strategy Controller Processor See SSC
54. procedure HD1 HD2 X 5 El 2 ROFF SJT o lt ON Un BATT E HD19 3 DOWNLOAD WNORMAL HD13 12 11 9 8 HD6 321 HD17 HD21 HD5 CS2 SYNC eg CS1 1 HD15 ES SYNC 2 1 M 2 D MI 2 HD3 3 T 1 NIB 3 Mm 1 Til 5 UN E gt i E HD10 HD7 HD16 HD18 HD20 Figure 3 7 41 Ol Bubble Memory Jumpers RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 68 Table 3 7 26 Ol Bubble Jumper Values forearm on Rene Cookie come DS ce IN 0 UN emen mem Se ooo me m Se oo mee m Se ooo me m Se o mem m OOO ee CA EEES A rra ww o rmm P emscmmmeaos meam Address this board as Secondary HD19 DOWNLOAD See text Address this board as Primary em m oRememema memes C 0 NTE C ee RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 69 OI NV RAM RS3 Consoles The OI NV RAM uses battery backed RAM as the storage medium This allows much faster data transfer between the OI NV RAM and the OI Processor and also provides an optional larger memory The part number is 1984 1547 000Xx It is marked Ol NV RAM on the PWA See Table 3 7 24 Ol NV Memory Replacement Data for OI NV RAM parts replacement data The Ol NV RAM duplicates all Ol Bubble Memory functions and is a fully qualified replacement for the bubble card A RAM card reads and writes faster than the bubble card and may have twice the memory so in some cases a bubble card cannot replace a RAM card The OI NV RAM card consists of e Bus Arbitra
55. 0 ccc cece eee 3 7 12 3 7 5 OI Card Cage 10P5282000x Fuses 0 ccc eee eee eens 3 7 13 3 7 6 PeerWay Interface Jumper Values 00 ccc eee eee 3 7 18 3 7 7 OI Power Supply Parts Replacement 00 cee eee eee 3 7 21 3 7 8 1984 1137 000x Ol Power Supply Jumper Settings 3 7 23 3 7 9 Ol Jumper Settings for a System Power Supply Unit 3 7 23 RS3 Consoles Contents SV xii RS3 Consoles 3 7 10 3 7 11 3 7 12 3 7 13 3 7 14 3 7 15 3 7 16 3 7 17 3 7 18 3 7 19 3 7 20 3 7 21 3 7 22 3 7 23 3 7 24 3 7 25 3 7 26 3 7 27 3 7 28 3 7 29 OI Power Supply Fuses OI Processor Replacement Data oooccoocccoocc OI Processor 68040 Jumper OI Processor 68020 Jumper OI Processor 68000 Jumper OI Processor 68000 Fuses POSITIONS Ee eU des Positions unida er res eal POSITIONS i cce EIL ERE hue Idus Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse 000eeeeeee Printer Interface Parts Replacement iuusssellusessssuu Printer Interface Jumper Placement ssellussssses SCSI Card Parts Replaceme DU sedated tees deed ew head wees teda SCSI Board 2 1984 3301 000x ID Jumper Setting SCSI Board 2 1984 3301 000x Bus Terminator Jumper Setting OI SCSI Host Adapter 1984 1140 000x Device ID Jumper OI SCSI Host Adapter 1984 1140 000x Address Jumpers OI NV Memory Replacement Data 6
56. 0002 eee 9 1 28 Checking Backup Cards in Redundant Pairs 0 ccc c cece cece eee 9 1 29 Checking Redundant Coordinator Processor Cards luus 9 1 29 Checking Redundant Controller Processor Cards Luuuuss 9 1 30 Removing and Installing Cards ooocococccoccccccc 9 1 31 Cleaning Cards dnd lar de ted Lr EE WEE S ERR 9 1 32 Storing Cards s eue oreet a tcc teed eae ates 9 1 32 Cooling Fan System Power Supply Units ooooocccccccccccoo 9 1 32 Section 2 Parts Replacement ciudad a n RR RA 9 2 1 AC DC Power Supply Battery and Charger Replacement 9 2 2 OI NV RAM Battery Replacement ooccccccccccccr eee eee eee 9 2 4 Command and Basic Command Console Parts Replacement 9 2 5 Command Console Hard Disk Drive Removal 00eee eee 9 2 6 Command Console Keyboard Tape or Floppy Disk Removal 9 2 9 FlexTerm Replacement 00 cece eect eens 9 2 11 MultiLoop and Single Strategy FlexTerm Replacement 9 2 11 Contact FlexTerm Replacement ccc eee ener e eee eee 9 2 13 Section 3 Recommended Tools eese 9 3 1 Hand TOOS ce P 9 3 1 Elac tonie Se x rt ct See a pie ale tp ios 9 3 2 CIS ANING oren ere Shh Ge ER equ PR DRE ee PE Es 9 3 2 PeerWay fees cite cee eit p pie E UE ole ete ates VOD gies eee es 9 3 3 Fiber Optics 1o ets rene A Geek EA 9 3 3
57. 005 Setting the ControlFile Node Address Jumpers Setting the CE ControlFile 10P52960001 Node Address Jumpers ControlFile Motherboard Terminator II Installation ControlFile Motherboard Terminator Board Installation ControlFile Card Cage Front 00 cece eee eee PeerWay Buffer Functional Diagram 0 0c eee PeerWay Buffer LEDS 0 0 cece cece eee nnn PeerWay Buffer 1984 1502 000x Fuse and Jumper Locations ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Functional Diagram ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper and Fuse Locations ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Functional Diagram ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test POIS ure a dns oe hast dane EE dae ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC 1984 1505 000x Jumper and Fuse Locations Coordinator Processor IV CP IV Block Diagram CP I and CP II Coordinator Processor Functional Diagram Coordinator Processor LEDs and Test Points CP IV and CP IV Fuse and Jumper Locations CP II Fuse and Jumper Locations 0 0 cece eee CP I Fuse and Jumper Locations 00 cece eee ene RAM Nonvolatile Memory Block Diagram sssss RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit oooooooooooo RAM N
58. 1 Disk Drive Number 2 Disk Data Cable Figure 3 3 9 MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drives With 1984 1017 0001 Power Regulator Only RS3 Consoles The Floppy Disk Power Supply regulates the 30 volt bus to provide the 12 volts needed to power the two disk drives Figure 3 3 10 shows a block diagram of the card No provisions are made to communicate the power fail status bits to the Console Processor However a front panel red green LED is mounted on the disk drive assembly to indicate power good or bad MiniConsole SV 3 3 15 30 volts is provided through isolating diodes from the A and B supplies and is fused on the card The power regulator is a flyback switching type that is capable of supplying 12 volts output throughout the full power input specification of 19 to 36 volts The voltage to the regulator chip is pre regulated to 14 volts through a simple zener transistor regulator Two operational amplifiers are used for integrating and filtering the output voltage to the regulator for optimum voltage control Current is limited to 3 amps and overvoltage protection is accomplished using an overvoltage protection chip driving an Silicon Controlled Rectifier SCR A voltage comparator monitors the output voltage in comparison to a stable temperature compensated reference zener It uses a single red green LED to indicate if the output voltage is out of tolerance This circuit is
59. 1 18 3 1 19 3 1 20 3 1 21 3 1 22 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 3 1 RS3 Consoles Multitube Command Console 0 c cece eee eee System Manager Station 0 0 cece eee Hardened Command Console Doors Open Typical 10P50842004 and 1984 3222 2004 Keyboard Interface Conriectlons sessbseeres ferc As oe ee LORS PS tada tends Typical 10P50840004 and 1984 3222 0004 Keyboard Interface Connections aeos recs epum rebus OC eee pee bee TIE Typical 1984 2889 0004 Keyboard Interface Connections Typical 1984 1978 000x Keyboard Interface Without Video Isolation GOMMECUIONS taaan baa d S tan ari Typical 1984 3222 1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface CONNECTIONS viaria sia rao rd Dra OU C eo ES BR OR A i Typical 1984 3222 1004 Replacing 1984 2889 1004 Typical 1984 2889 1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface COH nections rias pensi ei re Ra oe WTR e i e Pe wae Removing the Console Keyboard Interface 0 005 Cable Routing for 14 Inch Sony Monitor oooccccocccccco oo 14 Inch Sony Monitor Adjustments luuseeslsesessss Conrac 7241 CRT Block Diagram 006 eee eee Conrac 7241 CRT Back View ooooccccccccccncc Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustment Locations Barco CD 551 CRT Block Diagram 0 2 cee eee Barco CD 551 CRT Back View 000 eee eee eee Barco CD 551 C
60. 1 2 Sl T Front Door Removed Panels Removed Description Description PeerWay Tap Keyboard Video Interface if internal mount Tape Drive Power Supply if present Disk Drive OI Card Cage door closed Figure 3 1 2 System Manager Station Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 3 Monitor CRT Power Brightness and Degauss Assembl Base Console Keyboard Interface Callup Button Operator Keyboards Keyboard Optional To Configuration Keyboard A Hard Disk Drive Rear Joystick or Resistive 1 Dri FI Touch Pad ape HIVE OFT OppY Disk Front C AC DC Power Supply With Battery o Backup optional PeerWay Taps A 8 B Alarm Output Board Card Cage O AC DC Distribution Box optional The AC distribution box for the optional air conditioner must be supplied separately by the customer and must be on a different circuit than the circuit powering the CRT and card dage electronics Figure 3 1 3 Hardened Command Console
61. 1 2 2 0303 000x 1 1 1 0317 000x 3 6 20 0359 000X 9 1 3 0360 000x 5 2 22 0361 00xx 5 2 22 0373 00xx 1 4 3 0373 xxxx 1 3 9 0390 000x 1 2 13 0393 000x 1 2 23 0484 0002 2 1 3 2 3 2 0488 000x 2 1 3 0489 000x 2 1 3 0498 0005 6 3 28 0510 000x 3 6 16 0514 000x 2 2 8 0533 000x 3 6 9 0543 000x 3 6 6 0605 000x 5 3 4 0607 0003 5 3 16 0009 5 3 16 000x 5 3 14 8 4 9 0620 000x 5 3 2 0628 000x 5 3 5 0657 000x 3 2 5 0660 000x 3 7 7 3 7 14 0672 000x 3 3 11 0744 000x 3 7 5 1002 000x 3 3 7 1011 000x 3 7 46 1017 000x 3 7 20 1045 000x 3 7 15 1046 000x 1 2 20 1050 000x 3 3 14 1053 000x 3 3 12 1064 000x 3 7 42 1089 000x 1 2 26 1129 000x 5 5 34 1137 000x 3 7 20 1140 000x 3 7 52 1144 000x 1 4 3 1147 000x 3 7 60 3 7 62 1161 000x 3 7 30 1167 000x 3 7 60 3 7 62 1175 000x 5 2 2 5 2 7 1176 000x 5 5 2 1189 0001 2 2 13 1191 0001 2 2 3 1192 0001 2 2 3 1193 0002 2 2 6 1194 0002 2 2 6 1195 000x 2 2 7 1195 xxxx 2 2 5 1196 000x 2 2 7 1196 xxxx 2 2 5 1198 000x 2 2 9 1224 000x 4 2 39 1231 0001 4 1 7 1240 000x 4 2 20 RS3 Service Manual 1243 0001 1249 000x 1273 000x 1274 000x 1283 000x 1288 000x 1300 000x 1304 000x 1321 000x 1325 000x 1334 000x 1336 000x 1356 000x 1362 000x 1364 000x 1371 000x 1374 000x 1394 000x 1402 000x 1432 000x 1439 000x 1442 000x 1445 000x 1448 000x 1460 000x 1463 000x 1469 000x 1483 000x 1490 000x 1494 00
62. 1 24 fuses 5 1 34 jumpers 5 1 31 LEDs 5 1 30 redundancy 5 1 28 Analog FIC Extender Card 5 5 33 Analog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard 5 1 35 fuses 5 1 37 jumpers 5 1 37 LEDs 5 1 36 Analog I O troubleshooting procedures 10 5 8 ANALOG I O CAGE MOTHERBOARD 5 1 2 Analog I O FIC calibrating 8 5 1 Analog Input FIC 5 5 7 ANALOG INPUT NON ISOLATED 5 5 8 ANALOG MARSHALING PANEL 5 3 7 Analog Marshaling Panel 5 1 54 ANALOG MARSHALLING PANEL 5 1 54 Analog Output FIC 5 5 20 ANALOG OUTPUT ISOLATED 5 5 27 ANALOG TRANSFER 5 1 13 Analog Transfer Card 5 1 13 fuse 5 1 17 LEDs and test points 5 1 16 Analog FIM redundancy 6 4 43 automatic memory dump 10 3 12 Auxiliary Terminal Block 5 1 57 B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable 1 4 9 Balance Mode 5 1 19 Barco CD 551 Service Manual 3 1 35 User Manual 3 1 35 Basic Command Console 3 2 1 3 2 2 parts replacement 9 2 5 BATTERY CHARGER AND DISPLAY DRIVER ALARM 1 2 9 Battery Charger Card 1 2 9 fuse 1 2 12 jumpers and test points 1 2 11 Index Battery Replacement battery charger card 1 2 12 battery replacement AC DC Power Supply 9 2 2 OI NV RAM 3 7 81 OI NV RAM Card 9 2 4 RAM NV Memory 4 2 49 Black Box Cable Assembly 7 3 5 Data Converter 7 3 5 BLOCK CONFIGURATOR SWITCH MATRIX 3 2 4 broadcast messages 10 2 14 bubble See NV Memory Bubble Nonvolatile Memory See NV Memory bubble Bubble NV Memory See NV Memory bubble Bus A B DC Po
63. 1 4 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses 00 cece eeee ee eae 1 1 5 Section 2 Power Supplies acceso xxr e RERO ads 1 2 1 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup 0 0c e eee 1 2 2 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Alarm Contacts 1 2 6 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup LEDs and Controls 1 2 7 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Fuses 1 2 8 Battery Charger Card 0 0 cece een 1 2 9 Battery Charger Card Jumpers and Test Points lusus 1 2 11 Battery Charger Card Fuses o occcoccccccccocn eese 1 2 12 Battery Replacement 0 cece eet ees 1 2 12 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup 00 0005 1 2 13 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Measuring Output Current 1 2 15 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Alarm Contacts 1 2 16 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup LEDs and Fuses 1 2 16 MTCC Remote Power Supply 0000 cece eee e eet eh 1 2 18 MTCC Remote Power Supply Jumper 000 e cece tenes 1 2 18 MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuse ocococcccccccccc 1 2 19 Ol Remote Power Supply 00 0c eee eee eee nen 1 2 20 Ol Remote Power Supply Fuse 00 c cece eee eee eae 1 2 22 DC DC Power Supply orrera uerrini RI nn 1 2 23 DC DC Power Supply Fuses 00 cece eects 1 2 25 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply ocoooccccccoc
64. 1 6 Command Console Fan Filter 0 0 0 cece eee eee 9 1 6 Cleaning Cabinet Filters and Screens 0c cece ents 9 1 8 Cabinet Door Filter 0 0 cee cect eee eee 9 1 9 Cabinet Fan Screen oococccccccncc tenet tenes 9 1 9 ControlFile Fan Filter 0 0 e cece tena 9 1 9 OI Card Cage HIA SCI and SRU Fan Filter oooooooooo 9 1 10 Cleaning Cabinet Surfaces 0 0 0 c ccc tenes 9 1 11 Checking LEDS mrri E exeD LIE REA Dee WIEN RR ate 9 1 12 Checking Active Hardware Alarms 0000 c cece eee eese 9 1 13 Maintaining the CRT 0 0 cece cee mn 9 1 14 Cleaning Glare Filter on a Command Console CRT 9 1 14 Degaussing a Command Console CRT 0 000 cece teens 9 1 15 Console Diagnostic Programs 0c cece eee ees 9 1 16 Running Off Line Diagnostics 0 0 eee 9 1 17 Checking Calibration seie ae a aa eaa teens 9 1 18 Checking VoltageS cirer recura po o a e hn 9 1 19 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxvii ControlFile Power Regulator Card 0 00 ccc eee 9 1 19 ControlFile Power Regulator Card Adjustment 0000 0005 9 1 21 Operator Interface Ol Power Regulator Card oocooccccccccccc 9 1 24 System Power Supply Units oooccccocccccccccnc o 9 1 26 Checking the AC DC Power Supply Battery 00 cee eee eee 9 1 27 Replacing the AC DC Power Supply Battery
65. 14 Keyboard Interface Jumper Setting HD2 1 2 Console software is at revision 12 86 or lower 12 86 HD2 2 3 Console software is at revision 12 90 or higher 12 901 J414 1984 3222 0004 only Jumper wire Standard keyswitch application J414 1984 3222 0004 only Dual keyswitch cable Dual keyswitch application Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 25 Keyboard Interface Fuses Table 3 1 15 provides fuse data for the Keyboard Interface cards Table 3 1 15 Keyboard Interface Fuses FRSI Schurter Littelfuse ee 10P5084x00x 1984 3222 000x MSF 1984 2889 000x Keybd Interface 2A125V G50382 0021 273002 Video Isolator 034 4224 Plug In Console 1984 1978 000x Keyboard G50382 0021 Interface MSF 2A125V 034 4224 273002 Plug In Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 26 Console CRTs The color CRT monitors that can be used with the Multitube Command Console include e 17 inch IIYAMA Vision Master CRT e 21 inch Hitachi HM 4721 D CRT e 17 inch ViewSonic 17GS CRT e 15 inch Mag Innovision CRT e 14 inch Sony CRT e 19 inch Conrac 7241 CRT Conrac 7122 in 220 volt version e 20 inch Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 CRT ROS CRT IIYAMA Vision Master The IIYAMA Vision Master CRT 55P0144x022 is a 17 inch color unit The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC 50 or 60 Hz 108 132 19
66. 1984 1089 000x AC DC Unregulated Power Supply supplies power to a remote MiniConsole positioned more than 200 feet from the system 30 volt DC bus Figure 1 2 13 shows a functional diagram for the AC DC Unregulated Power Supply The power supply input is protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker The output of the power supply is fused at 10 amps An overvoltage protection circuit in the AC DC supply activates at voltages greater than 40 volts DC Table 1 2 14 has specifications for the AC DC unregulated power supply 10 Amp Fuse w Line 15 Amp Line AC DC Over Voltage Ta a Neutral aie Neutral Supply Protection 27 5 VDC Gnd Circuit Return Y Figure 1 2 13 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Functional Diagram Table 1 2 14 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Specifications Voltage 1984 1089 0001 115 volts AC 1984 1089 0002 220 volts AC Input Voltage Range 1984 1089 0001 104 to 127 volts AC 1984 1089 0002 198 to 242 volts AC Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz Output Source Nominal 27 5 volts 7 5 amps RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 27 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuses Table 1 2 15 shows fuse data for the AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Table 1 2 15 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuse FRSI Bussman Littelfuse x G01940 0046 AGC 10 311010 10 A 32 V Regular RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 28 Remote I O Power Supply The DIN rail mounted Remote I O Power Supply can be used to su
67. 1984 2500 000x Labeled SERIAL PROCESSOR on the PWA The MPC5 has a 68020 256 byte instruction cache 24 MHz 32 bit databus while the MPCII has a 68000 no cache 16 MHz 16 bit databus The MPC5 also has hardware support for higher performance I O communications including PLC connectivity The MPCII performs all of the functions of the original MPC but has a faster clock and more memory The MPCII Processor can be jumpered to accept different software images so that it can replace a Contact a Multiplexer MUX or a PLC Controller Processor It cannot replace a MultiLoop or a Single Strategy Controller Processor The MPCII can be configured with 1024 I O points They can be a mixture of analog and discrete points An MPC can communicate with a variety of I O or other interface devices via eight digital RS 422 communications lines The communication rates are listed in Table 4 3 1 The Baud rate is set bya jumper for all MPCs except the MPC5 where it is set by software Table 4 3 1 MPC Communication Rates RS3 1 0 10 4K Baud 10 4K Baud 200 9600 Baud 300 192K Baud Controller Processors SV 4 3 3 The MPC supports the Controller images and associated Card Cages or FlexTerms listed in Table 4 3 2 The MPC cannot fully support these images or associated FlexTerms e Single Strategy e MultiLoop e AutoTuning MultiLoop Controller Table 4 3 2 Controller Images and Associated Card Cages or FlexTerms MPC or MPCI
68. 2 1 1 2 1 2 Electrical PeerWay A or B Side Only 00 eee eee 2 1 2 2 1 3 PeerWay Tap Functional Diagram 0 eee eee eee 2 1 4 2 1 4 PeerWay Tap Test Points oasi rerasane ees 2 1 6 2 1 5 Tap Boxes 10P52760001 and 10P52790001 2 1 7 2 1 6 PeerWay Tap Ground Jumper oocccccccccc erre 2 1 8 2 1 7 PeerWay Tap Box Connection sssllusssselleseserren 2 1 10 2 1 8 Electrical PeerWay Termination sisse 2 1 11 2 1 9 Crimp type Twinaxial Connector 000 cece eee eee 2 1 12 2 1 1 OSolder type Twinaxial Connector 00 ee eee eee 2 1 14 2 2 1 Optical PeerWay A or B 00 ccc eee 2 2 1 2 2 2 Optical PeerWay Components 00 cece eee eee 2 2 2 2 2 3 Optical PeerWay Tap and Cable Tie Panel Assembly 2 2 3 2 2 4 Optical Tap Block Diagram 0 0 cece eee 2 2 4 2 2 5 Cable Connection to Optical Tap Box 0 6 c eee eee 2 2 5 2 2 6 Electrical Tap Box Set 0 0 cece cece tenets 2 2 6 2 2 7 Electrical Tap Block Diagram 0 cece ees 2 2 7 2 2 8 Optical Repeater Attenuator LED and Jumper Locations 2 2 8 2 2 9 Star Coupler er E Sadie ethan eats pu e ES 2 2 9 2 2 10 Optical PeerWay Grounding 00 eee eee 2 2 10 2 2 11 Grounding the Optical Tap Box 00 cee eee eee 2 2 12 2 2 12 Fiber Optic Connector 0 0 0 cece eee 2 2 13 2 3 1 Sample Hybrid PeerWa
69. 2 2 PeerWay Buffer 1984 1502 000x Jumper Positions Not used Not used Receive Clock 2 3 Transmit Clock 2 3 Receive Data 2 3 Transmit Data 2 8 Ready to Send 2 3 BSL Coupler Status 2 3 Clear to Send 2 3 RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 6 PeerWay Buffer Fuse Figure 4 2 4 shows the PeerWay Buffer fuse location Table 4 2 3 gives fuse data Table 4 2 3 PeerWay Buffer Fuse Bussman Littelfuse a G09149 0022 AGC 1 312001 1 A 250 V Quick Acting RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 7 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator 1984 3505 000x provides power to all cards in the ControlFile except the two PeerWay Buffers The card is marked CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR 5V ONLY on the Printed Wiring Assembly PWA The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator is used only in ControlFiles with RAM NV Memory 1984 2347 00xx It does not supply 12 VDC and 12 VDC required to support Bubble NV Memory 1984 1598 000x 1984 1483 000x or 1984 1224 000x CAUTION Disable the NV Memory and then the Coordinator Processor cards before removing any card other than a PeerWay Buffer card from the ControlFile Failing to do so may cause a corrupted data transfer A redundant Power Regulator is optional If two Power Regulators are used the one in the left slot becomes the master and controls the output of the one in the right slot t
70. 25 inch Floppy Disk Drive is described in this chapter Section 5 Disk and Tape Drives RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 12 MiniConsole Floppy Interface SCSI The Floppy Interface SCSI 1984 1053 000x is marked Ol MINI FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER on the PWA The board controls the 5 25 iinch floppy disk drives used with the MiniConsole The interface card provides interface and data buffering between the Processor and the Floppy Disk Drives Figure 3 3 7 shows a block diagram of the card This is an intelligent controller used to transfer data to and from the disk drives The Processor tells the interface which drive track and sector to use whether to read or write and the interface does the rest Data to and from the drives is in the Non Return to Zero NRZ format The disk drives need 5 VDC and 12 VDC to operate Both voltages are supplied from the console Power Regulator board Older MiniConsoles that use the 1984 1017 000x Power Regulator also use the 1984 1050 000x Floppy Disk Power Supply for 12 VDC power LED Latch Bidirection Data BUS Buffers To 5 25 Inch Disk Drives gt 5 gt NRZ Serial To Motherboard Buffers Bus Controller Support Logic Figure 3 3 7 Floppy Interface SCSI RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 13 MiniConsole Floppy Interface SCSI LEDs Figure 3 3 8 shows the LEDs on the Floppy Interface board Card Good No faults are detect
71. 2818 1103 1984 2812 0808 1984 2643 21x0 1984 2646 21x0 1984 2645 21x0 1984 2647 19x1 1984 2650 21x0 1984 2653 21x0 1984 3356 03x1 1984 3357 02x5 10P574830x1 10P569902x1 10P57000201 10P56870304 10P56870206 1984 2641 21x0 About This Manual SV viii RS3 Service Manual About This Manual Contents of Volume 1 Chapter 1 Power Section 1 AC Input i c cei ete ised eee deni ai deed 1 1 1 AC Entrance Panel 5 isses chs sees bed ties alae eae ee ILU RR ER 1 1 1 Single Feed AC Entrance Panel 0 0 cece eects 1 1 3 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel 0 00 cece eee eee eee eee 1 1 4 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses 00 cece eeee eee 1 1 5 Section 2 Power SUppll8s year Rin ined reads 1 2 1 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup 000 2 cece eee eee 1 2 2 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Alarm Contacts 1 2 6 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup LEDs and Controls 1 2 7 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Fuses 1 2 8 Battery Charger Card 0 00 cece ects 1 2 9 Battery Charger Card Jumpers and Test Points lusus 1 2 11 Battery Charger Card Fuses 00 cece cee eee eee eee 1 2 12 Battery Replacement oocoooccoccccooc ees 1 2 12 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup 000 000 1 2 13 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Measuring Output Current 1
72. 3 4 LEDs 5 3 5 N node address 3 7 18 Node Dump screen 10 3 19 NON ISO amp ISO ANALOG OUTPUT INPUT CARD EXTENDER 5 5 33 NON ISO ANALOG OUTPUT 5 5 21 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 8 fuses 5 5 12 jumpers 5 5 11 LEDs and test points 5 5 10 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 21 fuses 5 5 26 jumpers 5 5 25 LEDs and test points 5 5 24 NON ISOLATED OUTPUT 5 5 21 Nonvolatile Memory See NV Memory NV BUBBLE MEMORY 4 2 39 NV MEMORY 4 2 39 NV Memory 4 2 39 bubble 3 7 62 4 2 50 fuses 4 2 53 jumpers 4 2 53 LEDs 4 2 52 problems 10 6 1 test points 4 2 52 RAM 3 7 69 4 2 41 battery replacement 4 2 49 fuse 4 2 49 jumpers 4 2 48 LED sequences 4 2 46 LEDs 4 2 44 test points 4 2 44 NV RAM OI 3 7 69 O OAC5 5 2 20 6 3 38 OAC5 1 5 2 20 6 3 38 A 5 2 20 6 3 38 OAC5A5 5 2 20 6 3 38 OBC 5 1 18 OBU 5 5 34 RS3 Service Manual SV Index 13 ODC5 5 2 20 6 3 38 ODC5A 5 2 20 6 3 38 ODC5RM 6 3 38 OI BUBBLE MEMORY 3 7 60 3 7 62 Ol Bubble Memory 3 7 62 jumpers 3 7 67 LED Sequences 3 7 66 LEDs 3 7 65 OI BUBBLE MEMORY SC 3 7 60 3 7 62 Ol Card Cage 3 7 1 3 7 7 3 7 14 cleaning filter 9 1 10 EMC Compliant 3 7 7 3 7 10 troubleshooting 10 3 24 OI COLOR VIDEO 3 7 42 OI GRAPHICS VIDEO GEN 3 7 39 OI KEYBOARD INTERFACE 3 2 6 OI MINI FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER 3 3 12 Ol Nonvolatile Memory 3 7 60 OI NV RAM 3 7 60 3 7 69 3 7 74 battery replacement 3 7 81 9 2 4 jump
73. 32 V Regular AGC 15 311015 15 A 32 V Regular AGC 15 15 A 32 V Regular AGC 10 10 A 32 V Regular AGC 10 10 A 32 V Regular AGC 10 10 A 32 V Regular y FRSI Device Part No Multitube Command ConsoleL 4 Tube G09140 0047 Multitube Command ConsoleL amp 09140 0061 N 4 c o D o Multitube Command ConsoleL amp 09140 0061 Command Console G09140 0047 MiniConsole G09140 0047 ControlFile G09140 0061 ControlFile Fan G09140 0046 I O Card Cage G09140 0047 G09140 0046 3 Tubes FlexTerm Highway Interface Adapter G09140 0047 HIA Supervisory Computer Interface SCI System Manager Station SMS G09140 0047 G09140 0047 RS3 Network Interface RNI G09140 0046 Multipoint I O Term Panels G09140 0046 Fiber Optic I O Converter G09140 0046 RS3 Power DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 7 DC Distribution Cabling The DC power distribution system may be e Standard with bus A jumpered to bus B e Redundant with bus A and bus B independently powered Standard DC Distribution Cabling The Bus A B DC Power Distribution Cable 1984 0158 20xx is used on the Analog Card Cage and on the Analog Contact MUX and PLC FlexTerms This cable allows upgrade to redundant DC power without adding another cable When using the Bus A B DC Power Distribution Cable with a standard DC power system attach it to the DC Output card as shown in Figure 1 4 5 Connection may be made to either the bus A or bus B por
74. 4 3 37 LED sequence on power up 4 3 32 LEDs 4 3 32 Multi Loop 4 3 20 MultiPurpose 4 3 2 Single Strategy 4 3 25 MPC 4 3 2 Index Multiplexer 4 3 30 Programmable Logic Controller 4 3 30 redundancy 4 3 39 COORDINATOR PROCESSOR 4 2 20 Coordinator Processor See CP COORDINATOR PROCESSOR EXTENDER 5 2 28 COORDINATOR PROCESSOR II 4 2 20 COORDINATOR PROCESSOR IV 4 2 20 COORDINATOR PROCESSOR IV 4 2 20 Cover Plate DEC 7 4 5 CP 4 2 20 enable disable switch 4 2 29 fuses 4 2 38 jumpers 4 2 34 LED sequences 4 2 31 LEDs 4 2 29 redundancy 4 2 27 test points 4 2 29 CP l 4 2 20 Il 4 2 20 IV 4 2 20 IV 4 2 20 CP I 4 2 20 circuit description 4 2 24 CP Il 4 2 20 circuit description 4 2 24 CP IV 4 2 20 circuit description 4 2 21 CP IV 4 2 20 CPD 1304 3 1 27 1304S 3 1 27 1430 3 1 27 CPU Card QBI 7 4 3 7 4 5 Crimp Tool Kit 2 1 12 CRT Barco 20 3 1 35 Conrac 19 3 1 30 Console 3 1 26 Hitachi 21 3 1 26 liama Vision Master 17 3 1 26 Mag Innovision 15 3 1 27 maintaining 9 1 14 problems 10 3 22 Sony 14 3 1 27 ViewSonic 17 3 1 26 Current MUX Marshaling Panel 5 3 9 D Data Bus Terminators 4 1 5 DATAWAY TAP A 2 1 3 DATAWAY TAP B 2 1 3 daughterboard 5 1 36 DC color codes 1 4 10 distribution cabling 1 4 7 RS3 Service Manual SV Index 7 output card 1 4 5 power distribution 1 4 1 power distribution bus 1 4 3 DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper Cable 1 4 3
75. 5 27 Non Isolated Analog Input 5 5 8 Non Isolated Analog Output 5 5 21 Pulse I O 5 1 41 restoring redundant 10 5 2 RTD TC 5 1 46 Smart Transmitter 5 5 13 Status screen 10 5 13 TC RTD 5 1 46 Temperature Input 5 1 46 FIC 2 IN 1 OUT COMM EXTENDER BD 5 1 53 FIC 4 20 MA 5 1 24 FIC Detail screen 10 5 18 field definitions 10 5 18 FIC NON ISOLATED INPUT 5 5 8 Field I O Status screen 10 5 13 Field Interface Card See FIC Field Interface cards 5 1 23 field wiring Direct Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 16 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 43 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 31 Remote Communications Termination Panel I 6 2 9 Remote Communications Termination Panel ll 6 2 6 filter console fan 9 1 6 replacement 9 1 3 FIM Discrete 6 3 46 FIM Detail screen 10 5 18 FIM Status screen 10 5 13 FlexTerm MUX 5 3 2 replacement 9 2 11 floppy disk drive 3 5 16 3 1 2 inch 3 5 16 5 1 4 inch 3 5 18 cleaning 9 1 4 Floppy Disk Power Supply 3 3 14 fuses 3 3 16 Floppy Drive Cleaner Kit 9 1 4 FMS Il Hubs 3 4 12 Front End Modules FEMs 5 3 14 Fujitsu DL2600 3 6 9 DL3800 3 6 2 DL4600 3 6 6 DPL24C 3 6 16 Index fuse CC 4 3 29 MLC 4 3 24 MPCI 4 3 19 PLC 4 3 31 SSC 4 3 27 AC Distribution Block 1 2 37 AC input 1 1 5 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply 1 2 27 Analog FIC 5 1 34 Analog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard 5 1 37 Analog Transfer Card 5 1 17 Battery Charger Card
76. 5 8 Quantum ProDrive LPS 1708 0 0 cece eee 3 5 9 Quantum ProDriver LPS 105S 3 5 Inch 102 Meg Hard Disk 3 5 10 Quantum ProDriver 80S 3 5 Inch 100 MB Hard Disk 3 5 11 Quantum ProDriver Q280 5 25 Inch 100 MB Hard Disk 3 5 13 Quantum ProDriver Q540 5 25 Inch 40 MB Hard Disk 3 5 15 Floppy Disk Brive 2240 50 oe ee tes 3 5 16 3 5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive seas tasnia iapa a a a BR 3 5 16 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive rreren e n a a i E 3 5 18 MiniConsole 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers 3 5 20 Magnetic Tapa Drive rA RR Ree RES 3 5 23 Magnetic Tape Drive Cabling and Grounding sssesesesuse 3 5 24 Magnetic Tape Drive Jumper and Switches 0 cece eee neces 3 5 25 Section 6 Printers lingo raesent ono n wa Ei e cea ace eet at te ear 3 6 1 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer ocooocoocccoooccon II 3 6 2 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Set Up 2 0 0 eee 3 6 2 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Self Test liissssssssseseeseeeesesese 3 6 5 Fujitsu DE4600 Printer ii LEER ER p 3 6 6 Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Set Up 0 0 2 eee 3 6 6 Fujitsu DE2600 Printer iori a ee ae wd eee aie 3 6 9 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Error Messages 0 ce eee eee eee ees 3 6 9 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Handling eee eee eee eee 3 6 10 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Set Up 0 2 eee 3 6 11 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Self Test 0 c ce
77. 53 0 4 mm 0 38 EC 0 016 in 46 0 44 mm gt 0 19 0 016 in d 3d 24 61 mm ref 0 97 in 7 14 0 4 mm 0 28 0 016 in Figure 2 1 9 Crimp type Twinaxial Connector RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay RS3 PeerWay SV 2 1 13 1 To install a solder type twinaxial connector 1 Place the wrench crimp nut on the cable Refer to step A of Figure 2 1 10 Strip the cable as shown and bend the braid outward to allow free entry of cone 3 Push the cone under the braid until bottomed step B 4 Bend the long conductor outward and install the shield over the copper conductor 5 Position the pin and solder in place 6 Wrap the conductor between the shield ridges and solder step 9 C Do not allow the solder to extend above ridges Bring the wrench crimp nut onto the tapered portion of the cone step D Assemble the connector body over the cable assembly and engage with the wrench crimp nut Hold the cable and the connector body stationary while tightening the nut Wrench tighten the nut to 4 5 5 5 Nem 40 50 in Ib torque 10 Put an insulating sleeve over the connector Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 14 16 6 mm 0 66 in 6 35 mm Wrench ju d Crimp Nut DEIA IE LJ 6 35 mm 0 25 in
78. 551 CRT Back View Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station RS3 Consoles REMOTE ay SV 3 1 37 xk D Q D SYNC EXTERNAL INTERNAL HS CS O 4 O Y O O WO 75E O lO 75E Iy 75E Figure 3 1 19 Barco CD 551 CRT Input Panel Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 38 Figure 3 1 20 shows the Deflection board Adjustments on this board include horizontal vertical blanking skew clamping scan selection Vertical Amplitude RS3 Consoles Horizontal Linearity 2 J6J5 J4J3 High Short High Long Low Short Low Long Skew o Fail LED indicates incorrect selection of deflection range A P4 P3 o o Vertical Shift Vertical Linearity 45 65 Hz 65 85H lt gt 1 Horizontal Shift Clamp Position P15 Scan Selection Pg Phase o o P10 P11 7 Vertical Blanking Horizontal Frequency Factory adjusted for 7 5 Vu at
79. 6 6 12 KOVINO ere TT EEE coe ea ages CU RU oe ean as EU Ee ex 6 6 13 MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications ooo oooooo 6 6 14 Mapping I O points to MTL Discrete Isolators 6 6 18 DG POWOF eese se odie et oes Eee RE eet wees I GITERE DG LUERTS 6 6 19 Grounding 2 30 fer pee me eee Mew eke eee eta cae Pob E 6 6 19 Communication Wiring 000 cece 6 6 19 Field WING es Ait eet tk eG S eREDCESUPERIGUETCEBDCRERUURQUCEER 6 6 19 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxiv Chapter 7 Labels AA We r E eh IET ee ae Shee We he 6 6 19 FUSES euni bx pte et Ante EE Ate antennas etter aden hides 6 6 20 Line Fault Detection LFD 0 0 cece eee ees 6 6 20 MTL Discrete Isolators 0 eects 6 6 21 Panel A Jumpers 3 oor uo bis a RE 6 6 23 Panel B Jumpers uus pude a pU EU BEI egi cea EA a 6 6 24 MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications 0ooooo omoooo 6 6 25 DG POWOL inni cepe RUPEE Pune eg uo ed Role be e ON E 6 6 28 Grounding EE 6 6 28 Communication Wiring 00 cece I 6 6 28 Field WIRING iieri f LEUR LUC DIEA DEC ied PU paf dd 6 6 28 Labels 2 ebbe hee ate ek eta dev tpe ete 6 6 28 FUSES kye AAN 6 6 28 MTL Analog Isolators e a aT E E ATA E E T E E e 6 6 29 Jurmipets a eE Denm eee EEO Sa T E ERE es Sa eee oe VR 6 6 29 PeerWay Interface Devices Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 System Resource Unit SRU
80. Bus Buffer Buffer Boot ROM Error Dynamic EOM NVRAM Detection RAM 8K x 16 2Kx8 Correction Refresh amp Control Control ab Image Selection Jumpers 128K Dynamic RAM 6 BITS EDAC Dual Port Serial Comm Controllers Comm OSC Up GT TED RS 422 Comm Lines to FlexTerms Figure 4 3 4 MPCI Functional Diagram The data from two Coordinator Processors on separate redundant buses is selected and buffered on the card to isolate the two in case of a failure of either bus These two buffers come together at the dual port bus that also has the 64K x 22 dynamic RAM with Error Detection and Correction EDAC The remainder of the card is separated from the dual port bus because the Coordinator Processor card must have access to the dynamic RAM on the controller to permit it to download the operation and configuration data After the data is downloaded the Controller Processor limits the memory access of the Coordinator Processor to the area containing the dynamic and configuration data RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors RS3 ControlFiles SV 4 3 11 The MPC card contains dynamic RAM and EDAC control circuitry The dynamic memory controller does the required address multiplexing for the RAM chips and handles the refresh cycle The dynamic RAM chips have separate pins for the r
81. Command Console Rear View RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 3 Pedestal Command Console Keyboards The Pedestal Command Console keyboards are arranged as shown in Figure 3 2 3 They are e Loop Callup Keyboard e Command Entry Keyboard e Configuration Keyboard e Trackball Keyboard e Rotating Alphanumeric Keyboard e Keyswitch Assembly Tape Disk and Command Entry e Loop Callup Keyboard Trackball Keyboard Configuration Keyboard Rotating Keyboard Q Figure 3 2 3 Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Layout RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard The Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard 1984 1915 000x is marked LOOP CALLUP 32 SWITCHES on the printed wiring assembly PWA There are no field replaceable parts Pedestal Command Console Command Entry Keyboard The Command Console Command Entry Keyboard 1984 1731 O00x or 1984 1934 000x is marked COMMAND ENTRY SWITCH MATRIX on the PWA There are no field replaceable parts Pedestal Command Console Configuration Keyboard The Command Console Configuration Keyboard 1984 1776 000x is marked BLOCK CONFIGURATOR SWITCH MATRIX on the PWA There are no field replaceable parts Pedestal Command Console Trackball Keyboard The Command Consol
82. Communication Rate Jumper LOCATIONS RUE 4 3 7 4 3 10 4 3 12 4 3 15 4 3 19 4 3 23 4 3 24 4 3 27 4 3 29 4 3 31 4 3 34 4 3 35 4 3 37 Contents SV v List of Tables Table Page 4 1 1 Parts Replacement for the ControlFile Card Cage 4 1 2 4 1 2 ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Values lesse 4 1 3 4 2 1 Parts Replacement for PeerWay Buffer ooocccooooo oo 4 2 3 4 2 2 PeerWay Buffer 1984 1502 000x Jumper Positions 4 2 5 4 2 8 PeerWay Buffer Fuse 000 eee eee ee 4 2 6 4 2 4 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Parts Replacement 4 2 7 4 2 5 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper Positions 4 2 11 4 2 6 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse 4 2 12 4 2 7 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Parts Replacement 4 2 13 4 2 8 ControlFile Power Regulator 1984 1505 000x Jumper Positions 4 2 19 4 2 9 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses 4 2 19 4 2 10 Coordinator Processors sssessssese esee 4 2 20 4 2 11 Coordinator Processor Parts Replacement uuuss 4 2 21 4 2 12 CP Fault Indications Green LED OFF Red LED ON 4 2 32 4 2 13 CP Fault Indications Green LED ON Then OFF Red LED ON 4 2 33 4 2 14 CP IV Jumper Positions 00 cece eee eh 4 2 34 4 2 15 CP IV Jumper Positions 0 00 c cee ee
83. Doors Open Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 4 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies RS3 Consoles The Multitube Console may have these keyboard assemblies Alphanumeric keyboard PC or QWERTY style Configuration Keyboard or Engineering Keyboard Enhanced Engineering Keyboard Combines Operator and Engineering Keyboard functions Operator Keyboard Assembly also called the Main Keyboard Option Keyboard Assembly with up to 3 units of 32 configurable keys each Trackball Assembly Touchpad Assembly Hardened Command Console only Joystick Hardened Command Console only The Keyboard Interface card connects these keyboard assemblies to the console electronics The Alarm Output Board provides console alarm signals as contact closures See Section 5 of this chapter for details Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 5 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Error Reporting If a key is shorted or held down for more than 20 seconds hardware alarm 090 will be issued The message indicates the problem area by keyboard number p and key number kkk Board Key lt p kkk gt is bad Table 3 1 1 shows the keyboard number assignments for Multitube Command Console keyboards Table 3 1 1 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Numbers Keyboard Number Keyboard Configuration Keyboard Alphanumeric Keyboard
84. FIC 5 5 15 fuses 5 5 18 jumpers 5 5 17 LEDs and test points 5 5 16 Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 27 5 5 30 fuses 5 5 32 LEDs and Test Points 5 5 29 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 1 6 3 28 field wiring 6 3 31 fuses 6 3 40 input points 6 3 37 jumpers 6 3 39 labels 6 3 33 output points 6 3 36 solid state relays 6 3 38 ISOLATED DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL A 6 3 28 ISOLATED DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL B 6 3 28 ISOLATED INPUT 5 5 15 ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC 5 5 27 ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC 0 20 MA 5 5 27 J Joystick 3 1 11 Upgrade Kit 3 1 11 JU475 2AEG 3 5 18 SAEG 3 5 18 4AEG 3 5 18 jumpers Analog FIC 5 1 31 Analog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard 5 1 37 Battery Charger Card 1 2 11 Communications Connect Card III IV V 5 1 8 Contact Card Cage 5 2 10 Contact FIC 5 2 26 Contact FlexTerm 5 2 10 ControlFile 4 1 3 5 V DC Only Power Regulator 4 2 11 Power Regulator 5 and 12 V DC 4 2 18 RS3 Service Manual Controller Processor 4 3 37 CP 4 2 34 Direct Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 21 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il 6 3 10 floppy disk drive 3 5 inch 3 5 16 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 44 Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 17 Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 30 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 39 Keyboard Electronics Board 3 1 12 Keyboard Interface 3 1 24 MiniConsole 5 1 4 inch floppy disk drive 3 5 20 MPCII 4 3 12 4 3 15 MTCC Remote Power
85. Field Termination Board 5 2 13 LOOP CALLUP 32 SWITCHES 3 2 4 Loop Callup Keyboard Pedestal Command Console 3 2 4 Loop Power Module See LPM LPM 6 4 39 fuses 6 4 41 LEDs 6 4 41 LPS 105S 3 5 2 LPS 170S 3 5 2 LPS 270S 3 5 2 M9047 7 4 8 Mag Innovision CRT 3 1 27 magnetic tape drive 3 5 23 cleaner kit 9 1 4 MAI32 Termination Panel 6 4 29 Main Keyboard 3 1 7 jumpers 3 1 7 Replacement Subassembly 3 1 7 Main Keyboard Trackball 3 1 6 Main Keyboard Trackball Option 3 1 6 maintaining CRT 9 1 14 maintenance scheduled 9 1 1 MAIO 6 4 1 FIM LEDs 6 4 49 FIMs 6 4 42 termination panels 6 4 2 MAIO TERMINATION PANEL 6 4 17 MAIO Termination Panel 6 4 17 MAIO16 TERMINATION PANEL 6 4 4 MAIO16 Termination Panel 6 4 4 MARK 1 Remote Power Supply fuses 1 2 31 1 2 34 Marshaling Panel Analog 5 1 54 Contact 5 2 16 Current MUX 5 3 9 MicroVAX PeerWay Interface 7 4 4 MPC 5 1 54 RTD MUX 5 3 10 Serial 5 1 54 VAX 3xxx VAX4xxx PeerWay 7 4 6 Voltage MUX 5 3 7 Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block 5 1 57 MC PEERWAY 3 7 15 Index SV Index 12 MC VIDEO GENERATOR 3 3 7 MDIO 6 3 1 6 3 46 MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel 6 6 14 MDIO MTL I S ISOLATOR BARRIERS TERMINATION PANEL A 6 6 14 MDIO MTL I S ISOLATOR BARRIERS TERMINATION PANEL B 6 6 14 MDIOH 6 3 1 6 3 46 MDIOL 6 3 1 6 3 46 memory dump 10 3 12 automatic 10 3 12 Memory Dump screen 10 3 12 Memory View screen 10 3 16 field definiti
86. Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 5 PX System Cabling The PeerWay Extender is cabled as shown in Figure 2 3 4 Table 2 3 2 identifies the parts M HIGH LOW yu status t REC ME O e GROUND OPEN PEERWAY A BARCODE BARCODE I osain PEERWAY Bi S S hartes GND A B A 00 PEERWAY PEERWAY PEERWAY PEERWAY 18 36 VDC DROP 1 DROP 2 RECV XMT DROP 1 DROP 2 RECV XMT Figure 2 3 4 PX System Cabling RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 6 Table 2 3 2 PX System Cabling Components e neenon COS Peerway A Twinax connector and cable ES PeerWay B fiber optic cables and connectors Peerway B Twinax connector and cable PeerWay A Drop Cable to device DC power cable for PX A ES PeerWay B Drop Cable to device DC power cable for PX B ES Device connected to the PeerWay Twinax Cables Twinax cables are attached to the top of the unit by a T connector Use a terminator if this tap box is at the end of the twinax run If there are no twinax cables attached you must put a terminator on the single twinax connector at the top of the unit Use only one terminator CAUTION The barrel of each twinax connector and terminator must be covered with an insulating sleeve to prevent inadvertent grounding of the twinax cable to the mounting plate Fiber Optic Cables Fiber optic cables require strain relief near the connector It is customary to leave about 3 meters 10 feet of cable to allow replacement
87. Interface Cable from Operator Interface from Operator Card Cage Interface Card Cage Figure 3 1 12 Cable Routing for 14 Inch Sony Monitor Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 29 The adjustments available on the side of the Sony CRT are shown in Figure 3 1 13 and in Table 3 1 17 Auto Size H Size H Shift V Size V Cent Figure 3 1 13 14 Inch Sony Monitor Adjustments Table 3 1 17 Sony Monitor Adjustments Control Function AUTO SIZE Must be set to ADJ to enable use of the other controls H Size Used to adjust the horizontal size of the display horizontal size V Size Used to adjust the vertical size of the display vertical size V Cent Used to adjust the center of the display vertically vertical center H Shift Used to adjust the center of the display horizontally horizontal shift Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 30 Multitube Command Console CRT Conrac 7122 and 7241 The model 7241 and 7122 19 inch color CRT 1984 1651 0027 is manufactured by Conrac Inc 220 volt applications use model 7122 Figure 3 1 14 shows a block diagram of the CRT circuitry See the Conrac 7241 User Guide 1984 1651 0013 and the Conrac 7241 Installation and Operation Manual 1984 1651 0006 for detailed information The Co
88. Option Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement 3 1 9 3 1 6 Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions 3 1 9 3 1 7 Touchpad Replacement 00 cece eects 3 1 10 3 1 8 Joystick Parts Replacement 0 00 c cece eee 3 1 11 3 1 9 Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions 3 1 12 3 1 10 Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement 3 1 12 3 1 11 Trackball Electronics Board Replacement uuuss 3 1 13 3 1 12 Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement 00eeeee 3 1 14 3 1 13 Keyboard Interface LEDs 0 ccc ene eens 3 1 24 3 1 14 Keyboard Interface Jumper Setting 0c eee eee eee 3 1 24 3 1 15 Keyboard Interface Fuses 0 ccc eects 3 1 25 3 1 16 Adaptor Cables for Sony CRTS 0 0 eee e eee 3 1 27 3 1 17 Sony Monitor Adjustments 0 0 c eee eee 3 1 29 3 1 18 Conrac 7241 Components 0 6 0 cee ee 3 1 31 3 1 19 Conrac 7241 Low Voltage Regulator Test Points 3 1 32 3 1 20 Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustments ssusuuuue 3 1 33 3 2 1 Command Console Key Map 00 cece eect eens 3 2 6 3 2 2 Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement Luuussuuu 3 2 7 3 2 3 Conrac 7211 CRT Components 00 cece eee eee 3 2 10 3 3 1 Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Data o ococoooocccoo 3 3 10 3 3 2 Floppy Disk Power Sup
89. Power Supply UPS The workstation must be powered from an uninterruptible power supply UPS Two suitable systems are the Liebert Power Sure PS600 60 55P0566x012 NRTL and the Liebert Power Sure PS600 50 55P0567x012 CE The UPS should be able to signal when primary power fails and when the battery is getting low This signal is carried by cable to a dedicated serial port on a workstation computer The NT operating system can be configured to warn users of power failure and to shut down the system when the UPS batteries are low With the Liebert Power Sure PS600 60 NRTL or the Liebert Power Sure PS600 50 cable 10P56820001 WIN NEG 48A is connected from COM on the PC to the communications port on the UPS The UPS should be sized to operate the equipment for at least five minutes to allow for an orderly shutdown The minimum volt ampere rating for a UPS on a single workstation is 600 VA Table 3 4 2 lists typical power consumption examples Table 3 4 2 Typical Power Consumption Examples oem ETE RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 17 UPS Software Setup RS3 Consoles Windows NT under Control Panel provides the UPS configuration software In order to make changes to the UPS configuration you must be logged in as an NT Administrator With the Liebert Power Sure PS600 60 NRTL or the Liebert Power Sure PS600 50 the following configuration should be set e Select Uninterruptible Power Supply is inst
90. Power Supply Unit can weigh as much as 13 29 kg 29 3 Ib if two power supply modules are installed To install a power supply housing in a system cabinet Place all external circuit breakers that control AC power inputs to the power supply housing in the OFF position CAUTION The DC Distribution Bus and associated power cables may have DC power still applied if the load is backed up by a redundant power source located elsewhere Personal injury and equipment damage can occur if a DC Distribution Bus or cable is accidentally shorted Turn off any backup power sources Position the power supply housing on the EIA rails Provide sufficient support to hold the housing in place until the flange lock screws are installed and tightened System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 20 Install the four M6 Phillips Screws and M6 cage nuts and tighten them until the housing is securely attached to the cabinet rails Connect DC output and alarm wiring as required for your installation Connect the AC inputs to the input terminal blocks on the right side of the housing front panel Install power supply modules in the housing if they are not already installed See nstalling a Power Supply in a Housing following After following appropriate procedures for energizing circuits place all circuit breakers that control cabinet AC power in the ON position Installing a Power Supply in a Housing RS3 Power To install a
91. Processor 68020 Fuses There are no fuses on the Ol Processor 68020 RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 34 Ol Processor 68000 The OI 68000 PWA can be marked e OI PROCESSOR III e OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG e OI PROCESSOR The OI Processor 68000 controls these functions e EPROM Memory timing e Dynamic RAM timing e Motherboard bus buffering e Reading Power Regulator Status bits e Screen RAM update e PeerWay communications e Disk operations e Printer e Reading Real Time Clock e NVRAM update e Keyboard operation The OI Processor 68000 has five main circuits e Microprocessor e RAM e ROM e Motherboard bus buffers e Keyboard buffers Figure 3 7 22 shows a functional diagram of the card RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 35 Watch LED p Dog 4 Latch Keyboard i To Loop Operation Panel Timer Buffers Data Entry Keyboard RS 422 and Callup Panel Reset Address 7 Data To PETE Buffers gt Motherboard Micro Control Bus processor gt lois EPROM SCI 1 2 Meg BCC amp CC 1 Meg MTCC 1 Meg RS3 Consoles Figure 3 7 22 Ol Processor 68000 Functional Diagram The microprocessor is a Motorola 68000 running at a clock rate of 12 MHz which is provided by the onboard clock The watchdog circuit provides two functions for the microprocessor a low level interrup
92. RS 422 Comm Lines to FlexTerms Multiplexer Multiplexer a er Ee E AA AA p Eo xd From FlexTerms 1 5 Volt Analog Inputs or 5 2 5 Volt Feedback from Analog Outputs Figure 4 3 8 MultiLoop Controller Processor Functional Diagram RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 24 MLC LEDs The LEDs of all Controller Processor cards are essentially identical See the LED description later in this section MLC Jumpers The jumpers of all Controller Processor cards except MPCII are essentially identical See the jumper description later in this section MLC Fuses Figure 4 3 9 shows the MLC fuse locations Table 4 3 9 gives fuse data Figure 4 3 9 MLC Fuse Locations Table 4 3 9 MLC Fuses FRSI Part Bussman Littelfuse ne G09140 0016 AGC 1 2 312 500 1 2 A 250 V Quick Acting G09140 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250V Regular RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 25 SSC Single Strategy Controller Processor RS3 ControlFiles The Single Strategy Controller Processor SSC is similar in function to the MultiLoop Controller discussed earlier in this section See the MLC functional description for a summary of SSC processing There are two models of SSC 1984 1442 000x and 1984 1371 000x
93. Real 12V Buffer NVROM Time P S RAM Clock Printer Port Printer AA Figure 3 3 2 MiniConsole Block Diagram RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 4 MiniConsole Keyboards RS3 Consoles The MiniConsole keyboards provide operator interface with the console through the alphanumeric keyboard loop control loop callup keyboard loop alarm LEDs speaker and keyboard switch Figure 3 3 3 shows a functional diagram for a MiniConsole keyboard All connections to the keyboard are made through a single cable from the console motherboard and driven by RS 422 signals from the processor The loop control buttons are in a configuration similar to the Analog Panel Stations and are used to control the loop displayed on the CRT The loop callup buttons are used to address any one loop in the system for display on the CRT Each is configurable through the main operator keyboard The Keyboard switch is used to limit configuration access in the system An audio alarm generator is used to indicate alarm status in the system and has variable frequency and volume The main keyboard has the standard alphanumeric keyboard and some special keyboards for screen control All control of the front panel is handled by the Console Processor card via an extension of the bus through the cable Bus buffers isolate the card from the rest of the system The 12 loop control and
94. TI 810 Printer Modification for 30 5 Cm Paper The TI 810 Printer is designed to work with standard U S paper which is 11 inches long It can be modified to use standard European 30 5 cm 12 inch paper with the following procedure NOTE A special jumper wire is required Order it from your normal FRSI parts source 1 To modify the TI 810 Printer for 30 5 cm paper 1 2 3 Turn the power off Remove the plastic paper cover and the access door Remove the five screws that hold the cover down three in front and two in back Locate connector J7 it may be marked as J16 on the motherboard which is just behind and to the left of the paper drive motor The cable connects the motherboard to the Auxiliary Control Panel 5 Pull the cable off of the motherboard pins 6 Insert the special jumper wire into the cable connector as shown in Figure 3 6 2 7 Reinsert the cable connector on the motherboard pins 8 Replace the cover paper cover and access door Turn the power RS3 Consoles on cef 12 1 Figure 3 6 2 TI 810 Jumper Wire Printers SV 3 6 23 TI 810 Printer Modification for Lowercase Printing The TI 810 printer can be modified to print lowercase characters while connected to the system The modification does not affect operation of the printer with VDS 25 systems A ROM TI part number 1166 0505 0021 must be inserted at U67 located at the to
95. The third connector on this board is used to connect to the FlexTerm This connector board also has a jumper between pins 7 and 8 to indicate to the controller that it is redundant It is important to note that a redundant flat cable cannot be used on a nonredundant controller for the upper connectors Should a redundant flat cable be used on a nonredundant controller the controller assumes it is redundant and clears out the configuration for the adjacent slot because a redundancy indication for one controller is assumed for both If the controller processor loses RS 422 communications with the FIC the redundant controller will take over Note that this will happen any time an FIC is removed from the FlexTerm Also if an Instrument High or Low alarm is generated on a redundant controller pair the redundant controller will take over assuming that the A D on the primary controller has failed If the controller switchover was for one of these reasons the alarm indication on the ControlFile Status Screen can be cleared by rebooting the redundant controller Instrument HIGH and LOW alarms must be configured before the redundant controllers will switchover in case of a controller A D fault Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized If both controllers have active alarms the controller with the lowest priority alarm will take over as primary controller SSC Jumpers The LEDs of all Controller Processor cards are essentially iden
96. and Tape Functions IO 1 O Block Configuration OP Operator s Guide OV System Overview and Glossary PW PeerWay Interfaces RB Rosemount Basic Language RI RNI Installation Guide RR RNI Release Notes RP RNI Programmer s Reference Manual SP Site Preparation and Installation SV Service RS3 Service Manual About This Manual SV vii Reference Documents RS3 Service Manual Prerequisite Documents You should be familiar with the information in the following documents before using this manual NOTE The x in the part number is O for US size 8 1 2 x 11 inches and 1 to 9 for A 4 size System Overview Manual and Glossary Software Release Notes Performance Series 1 Related Documents 1984 2640 21x0 10P56870106 You may find the following documents helpful when using this manual ABC Batch Software Manual Alarm Messages Manual ABC Batch Quick Reference Guide Configuration Quick Reference Guide Console Configuration Manual ControlBlock Configuration Manual I O Block Configuration Manual Operator s Guide PeerWay Interfaces Manual Rosemount Basic Language Manual RNI Programmer s Reference Manual RNI Installation Guide RNI Release Notes Site Preparation and Installation Manual Service Quick Reference Guide Software Discrepancies for Performance Series 1 Software Loading and Upgrade Procedure Including Batch Performance Series 1 User Manual Master Index 1984 2654 21x0 1984 2657 19x1 1984
97. and should not be moved Table 4 2 15 CP IV Jumper Positions 1 2 Factory set do not move RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 38 CPI 1984 1594 000x CP II has Jumpers HD8 and HD16 which are adjustable for the basic CPxxxx operating program being loaded The remainder of the jumpers are factory set and should not be moved Figure 4 2 16 shows the jumper positions for CP II Table 4 2 16 shows the software jumper positions Set the other jumpers as shown in Table 4 2 17 HD10 15 HD16 HD8 Figure 4 2 16 CP II Fuse and Jumper Locations Table 4 2 16 CP Il Software Jumper Positions CPBATxx 2 3 2 3 CPxx V9 1 2 1 2 CPMAXXxx V9 and above 2 3 1 2 CPxx V11 and above Table 4 2 17 CP Il Factory Set Jumpers HD5 HD7 HD10 through HD15 RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 39 CP 1984 1448 0001 or 1984 1240 0001 CP I has no field adjustable jumpers The jumpers are factory set and should not be moved Jumpers HD2 and HD5 are set to 2 3 Jumper HD7 is set to 1 2 Figure 4 2 17 shows fuse and jumper locations Table 4 2 18 shows the jumper positions Figure 4 2 17 CP I Fuse and Jumper Locations Table 4 2 18 CP I Factory Set Jumpers RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 40 CP Fuses Figure 4 2 17 shows the fuse location Table 4 2
98. anywhere along the twinax run Y O al TT 6 9 O Description Description Twinax PeerWay cable DC power cable 18 36 VDC PeerWay Extender PX Fiber Optic PeerWay cable DC power cable 18 36 VDC Peerway Drop Cables to devices PeerWay Extender PX Peerway Drop Cables to devices Twinax PeerWay cable Figure 2 3 1 Sample Hybrid PeerWay RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 2 PeerWay Extender PX A PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly consists of a PeerWay A PX 10P50930001 a PeerWay B PX 10P50960001 and a mounting plate 1984 0484 0002 FRSI recommends using a Fiber Optic Cable Tie Assembly 1984 2231 0001 A typical unit is shown in Figure 2 3 2 O O O XMT s3 XMT s3 HIGH LOW qD QD HIGH Y Low status See status 2 Q nec OER POWER NORMAL e e NORMAL Q GROUND OPEN GROUND OPEN FO FO DISABLE PEERWAY A DISABLE BARCODE FO DISABLE FO DISABLE PEERWAY B FO BARCODE FO XMT TEST XMT TEST PEERWAY PEERWAY PEERWAY PEERWAY 18 36 VDC DROP 1 DROP 2 RECV XMT DROP 1 DROP 2 RCV XMT O No Description No Description
99. cece ee eee OI Bubble LED Sequences OI Bubble Jumper Values OI NV RAM Memory Test Points a na aaeeea OI NV RAM LED Sequences OI NV RAM Jumper Values 3 7 24 3 7 26 3 7 29 3 7 33 3 7 37 3 7 38 3 7 45 3 7 46 3 7 51 3 7 52 3 7 56 3 7 57 3 7 59 3 7 59 3 7 61 3 7 66 3 7 68 3 7 76 3 7 77 3 7 79 Contents SV 3 1 1 Section 1 Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station This section covers the free standing operator interface portion of the Multitube Console including the keyboards and CRT The operator interface portion of the Hardened Command Console and System Manager Station is also covered here The Hardened Command Console uses many of the same assemblies as the Multitube Console The Operator Interface console Card Cage and electronics are covered in Section 6 of this chapter Peripheral devices disk tape and printer are covered in Sections 4 and 5 of this chapter Maintenance and troubleshooting of the console is covered in chapters 9 and 10 Figure 3 1 1 shows the Multitube Command Console operator interface Figure 3 1 2 shows the System Manager Station Figure 3 1 3 shows the interior of a Hardened Command Console CRTs Keyswitch Operator Keyboard Option Keyboard Interface Keyboard Figure 3 1 1 Multitube Command Console Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3
100. chips for the MBM These chips format data drive currents for the X and Y coils that move the magnetic bubbles within the MBM and move the bubbles to storage For the read cycle the circuitry detects the bubbles and formats and transfers the data back to the nonvolatile controller memory for serial to parallel data conversion The ControlFile motherboard has two slots for Nonvolatile Memory cards These are not intended for redundancy but are useful during troubleshooting and recovery from a nonvolatile memory fault The MBM modules also contain error detection and correction EDAC circuitry for all data stored in the MBM This EDAC circuitry is in the Formatter Sense Amplifier FSA The error detection code used by the FSA is a 14 bit Fire code that is appended to each 256 bit block of data The code is capable of correcting all single error bursts up to and including 5 bits in length It takes four times as much current to write a bubble as it does to copy a bubble Each MBM has a seed bubble that is used to copy from Any time an address is to be written to it is copied from the seed bubble If this seed bubble is corrupted through a card fault or an improper insertion or removal procedure the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory must be returned Contact your local FRSI service center for more information Current bubble technology cannot produce perfect bubble matrices To map around the faulty areas of the bubble the manufacturer has a boot p
101. contacts ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 14 RS3 ControlFiles Figure 4 2 8 is the functional diagram for the ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC The 5 V output is used for all logic circuitry and the 12 volt and 12 volt outputs are used for the analog circuits on the Single Strategy and MultiLoop Controller Processor cards The 12 volt output is also used for the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory The 5 volt power regulator is a buck type regulator The input voltage is turned on and off at a 25 kHz rate with a pulse width that varies with the input voltage Four parallel power field effect transistors FETs are turned on by the switching regulator as the output sense determines the need for added current To turn on the FETs the gate voltage must be 10 volts above the input voltage rail A transformer and DC restoring circuit is used to provide the required voltage Power to the regulator is preregulated by a zener transistor combination Load sharing is accomplished by feeding the current sense from both regulators into an error amplifier The output of the amplifier is then used to raise or lower the output voltage of the slave card The 12 and 12 volt supplies are derived from the same transformer through a combination push pull and flyback switching supply The primary of the transformer has a pair of switching FETs on each leg that are driven 180 degrees out of phase A voltage regulator produces an alternating cu
102. eee 3 4 14 E OS 3 4 15 Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS 0 0000 cece eee 3 4 16 UPS SOM Ware Seti Ga a eee Sea RE 3 4 17 Section 5 Disk and Tape Drives esee 3 5 1 Hard Disk Drive i ter po Mx RN RE 3 5 2 Quantum QM32100 sc 0er ees wees exi gp LEER daa peed mend 3 5 5 Quantum Thunderbolt 000 cc ccc cece eee n 3 5 6 IBM Deskstar 540 3 brin eae tie rl verha des eels edi enu 3 5 7 Quantum ProDrive LPS 2708 0c ccc ect es 3 5 8 Quantum ProDrive LPS 1708 0c cece cette tent 3 5 9 Quantum ProDriver LPS 105S 3 5 Inch 102 Meg Hard Disk 3 5 10 Quantum ProDriver 80S 3 5 Inch 100 MB Hard Disk 3 5 11 Quantum ProDriver Q280 5 25 Inch 100 MB Hard Disk 3 5 13 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xiv Quantum ProDriver Q540 5 25 Inch 40 MB Hard Disk 3 5 15 Floppy DISK DFIVE nce es tis cere UE Bee US TELLUO EVER 3 5 16 3 5 Inch Floppy Disk Driya serrie eeta enpi e BB 3 5 16 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive sre peren ek oo E ERE EER EA RO 3 5 18 MiniConsole 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers 3 5 20 Magnetic Tape Drive i cs sive evo RERO vb ta eae ae 3 5 23 Magnetic Tape Drive Cabling and Grounding llssesesresses 3 5 24 Magnetic Tape Drive Jumper and Switches s suus 3 5 25 Section 6 dile 3 6 1 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer ocooocoooccoocccrr RII 3 6 2 Fujit
103. for details Remote Command Console Power Supply The Remote Command Console Power Supply 1984 1046 000x is described in Chapter 1 Section 2 Power Supplies Pedestal Command Console Printer Interface Card The Pedestal Command Console uses the same Printer Interface card 1984 1011 000x as the Multitube Console See the discussion in this chapter Section 6 Ol Card Cage for details RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 12 RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 3 1 Section 3 MiniConsole This section covers the operator interface and electronics of the MiniConsole Many cards of the MiniConsole are identical to those used in the Pedestal Command Console and Multitube Command Console These will be described in Section 6 of this chapter Ol Card Cage This section covers the MiniConsole Block Diagram Keyboards Power Regulator card see Section 6 PeerWay Interface card see Section 6 Ol Processor card 68000 see Section 6 Monochrome Video Generator card Monochrome CRT SCSI card see Section 6 Floppy Interface I F Connect card 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Section 4 Disk and Tape Drives Floppy Disk Power Supply Section 4 Disk and Tape Drives Remote Power Supply see Chapter 1 Section 2 Power Supplies Maintenance and troubleshooting are covered in chapters 9 and 10 Figure 3 3 1 shows front and rear
104. for more jumper information on MPCII and MPC5 cards A Controller Processor must have the correct software image to communicate with the desired I O or to utilize special software programs Software images are downloaded from the NV memory to the MPC card The Controller Processor card is jumpered to receive specific images Figure 4 3 15 shows the locations of the software Image and communication rate jumpers Table 4 3 16 and Table 4 3 17 show the jumper positions HD24 HD23 HD22 HD21 HD8 HD7 HD6 Figure 4 3 15 Controller Processor Software and Communication Rate Jumper Locations Standard images are included with the CPxxxx Plant Program file Additional images are loaded from the console into the CP separately from the CPxxxx file The first file loaded into the CP after the CPxxxx file is called additional image 1 The second file loaded into the CP after the CPxxxx field is additional image 2 and so on The number of additional images available for a CP depends on the system configuration The ControlFile Status screen shows the images loaded into a CP The Jumper Code field is always blank for an MPCI or an MPCII operating as an MPCI RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 38 RS3 ControlFiles Table 4 3 16 Image Jumper Positions Not for MPC II or MPC5 e ec tumour sos 1 2 1 2 3 2 2 Additional Image 3 Table 4 3 17 Image Jumper Positions f
105. of the connector FRSI recommends using Fiber Optic Cable Tie Assembly 1984 2231 0001 DC Power Cable A standard DC Bus to System Device cable 1984 0158 xxxx can be used to connect system DC power to the tap box Any other reliable source of DC in the range of 18 to 36 V can be used A Mate N Locke connector Gi11262 1004 is used CAUTION The PX must be supplied with a reliable source of DC power If the PX loses power the PeerWay is broken into separate twinax segments at that point RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay Drop Cables SV 2 3 7 Sandard PeerWay Drop Cables 1984 0473 xxxx are used to connect devices to the tap box Tighten the connector captive screws at both ends of the cable run NOTE The PX can be powered through the Drop Cables but only if turning the devices off will not break the PeerWay by removing power from the PX Grounding the PX PX LEDs Each tap box assembly must be grounded Mounting the assembly in a properly grounded system cabinet grounds the assembly If the assembly is mounted on a non conducting surface a ground wire must be run to the nearest system grounding point One tap box set and only one tap box set in each twinax PeerWay segment must have the twinax shield connected to chassis ground To make the connection at the PX tap box set move the screw from the OPEN position to the GROUND position Move the screws on both tap boxes A and B To make the connection at anothe
106. on the other Controller Processor cards Figure 4 3 6 shows MPCII jumper locations Table 4 3 6 shows the MPCII jumper label HD1 HD2 HD4 HD5 HD9 Figure 4 3 6 MPCII Fuse and Jumper Locations RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 16 Table 4 3 6 MPC II Jumper Label 01984 4086 0006 CONTROL PROCESSOR Il JUMPER SETTINGS COMMUNICATION RATE FISHER ROSEMOUNT INDUSTRY 1 2 1 2 1 2 STANDARD PROCESSOR FUNCTIONALITY MPC MPCII PROCESSOR TYPE PROCESSOR TYPE IMAGE HD6 HD7 IMAGE HD6 SELECT SELECT CONTACT 2 3 ADDITIONAL 1 2 IMAGE 1 MULTIPLEXER 2 ADDITIONAL 1 2 IMAGE 2 ADDITIONAL 1 2 ADDITIONAL 1 2 IMAGE 1 IMAGE 3 ADDITIONAL 1 2 ADDITIONAL 1 2 IMAGE 2 IMAGE 4 ADDITIONAL 1 2 MPC2 IMAGE IMAGE 3 FUNCTIONALITY N N I 1 1 1 l U no n x N N 1 I 1 l C N C N ADDITIONAL 1 2 IMAGE 4 MPC 01984 2572 0002 REV C RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors RS3 ControlFiles SV 4 3 17 Communication Rate HD21 HD24 Select 10 4 K Baud speed for use with most FICs or the Industry Standard 9600 Baud speed for special applications specifically MUX and PLC Processor functionality HD2 This jumper controls the clock speed of the on board computer chip CAUTION HD2 must be set to agree with the image being loaded Setting it for MPC func
107. or the bus B portion of the DC Output card Up to 12 devices may be connected to a single DC Distribution Bus in standard configuration A redundant DC distribution system has separate buses A and B Up to six devices may be powered from a single DC Distribution Bus in the redundant configuration Each device draws power from the bus A and the bus B portion of the DC Output card Bus A and bus B fuses must be identical DC Distribution Bus E E Fuse 1 Bus A To Additional DC Distribution Buses Bus A Return gt Bus A Bus A Power Bus B Power Bus B Return Bus B Bus B DC Output Card RS3 Power Figure 1 4 4 DC Distribution Bus and DC Output Card DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 6 DC Output Card Fuses Table 1 4 1 shows the DC Output card fuses for various hardware devices Table 1 4 1 DC Output Card Fuses ead Characteristics AGC 15 15 A 32 V Regular ABC 20 20 A 250 V Regular ABC 20 20 A 250 V Regular AGC 15 15 A 32 V Regular AGC 15 15 A 32 V Regular ABC 20 20 A 250 V Regular AGC 10 10 A 32 V Regular AGC 15 15 A 32 V Regular AGC 10 10 A 32 V Regular AGC 15 311015 15 A
108. others Jumpers on the back are unmarked Those on the front are marked HAA and HAB and are numbered as shown in Figure 4 1 3 and Figure 4 1 4 Table 4 1 2 gives jumper values Figure 4 1 3 shows the Jumper setting to give a node address of 29 NOTE The H and L positions are reversed when the jumpers are on the back of the motherboard HAB HAA HL HL Figure 4 1 2 ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Locations Table 4 1 2 ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Values ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 1 4 HAB 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 HL HD5 at H 16 HD2 at H 8 HD3 at H 4 HD4 atL 0 HD4 atL 0 Sum of Jumpers 28 1 Node Address 29 Figure 4 1 3 Setting the ControlFile Node Address Jumpers H 16 H 8 H 4 H 2 H 1 1 HAA 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 HL HAB 5 ilo 4 Hilo 3 ilo 2 om 1 of HL H 16 H 8 H 4 H 2 H 1 1 HAA 5 Eo 16 4 o A 3 o 0 2 o ad 1 of HL 29 Figure 4 1 4 Setting the CE ControlFile 10P52960001 Node Address Jumpers RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 1 5 ControlFile Data Bus Terminators The motherboard data bus is terminated with two Data Bus Terminators Non EMC ControlFile Card Cages 1984 3048 000x and 1984 0023 000x use removable terminators These terminators sometimes are dislodged when w
109. processors CP IV works only with MPC II processors Figure 4 2 12 shows the functional diagram of a CP IV Coordinator Processor ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 24 PeerWay To PeerWay Buffers Buffer Board PTM1 PTM2 S W PeerWay Support 128 kB Circuits EPROM Address Bus 68020 ControlFile Micro Data Bus Motherboard Processor Bus Buffers Control Bus ADLC Advanced Data Link Controller ARB Arbitration ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit DMA Direct Memory Access DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DUART Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter EDAC Error Detection and Correction EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory SRAM Static Random Access memory S W Software Synch Synchronous 128 kB Fast SRAM RAMCON ASIC 32 Bit EDAC 4 Mbyte DRAM Figure 4 2 12 Coordinator Processor IV CP IV Block Diagram RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 25 The MC68020 microprocessor has a 32 bit architecture and a 16 MHz clock rate The microprocessor support circuits provide a watchdog timer clock generation circuitry and an interrupt encoder The microprocessor can interface with devices from 8 bits to 32 bits wide It has an internal 256 byte instruction cache that speeds up tight loops The clock generation circuits provide 32 16 8 4 and 2 MHz clocks for t
110. standing alone when used with a MiniConsole The OI Remote AC DC power supply operates similarly to the system AC DC power supply Figure 1 2 10 shows a functional diagram of the power supply The Ol Remote AC DC supply does not use an AC distribution panel so a fan filter fuse and circuit breaker have been added to the power supply itself A 10 amp thermal type circuit breaker is used at the input An optional Battery Charger card in the power supply slowly charges the backup batteries protects against momentary AC voltage drops and contains contacts for external alarms if a voltage drop occurs The Battery Charger card and batteries are not required for DC output from the power supply The Battery Charger card contains a battery charging circuit and a battery test circuit The battery charging circuit charges two 12 volt gel cell batteries in series Charge current is limited to 1 2 amp average with a nominal charge voltage of 27 6 volts To prevent complete discharge and possible damage to the batteries the Battery Charger card contains control circuitry to disconnect the battery if the battery voltage drops below 18 volts If during testing the power supply voltage drops to 26 4 volts the control circuitry turns on a red LED and activates an alarm relay The battery backup circuit can maintain the output load for approximately 30 seconds The power supply output circuit and battery backup circuits are diode isolated from each other
111. te acti en ect c esce t nates tet 4 3 29 CG FUSQ cim toe AURORA ERI eA QA E Rr ai eer uis 4 3 29 MUX Multiplexer Controller Processor PLC Programmable Logic Controller Processor suus 4 3 30 MUX and PLC LEDS ion ya ene men aho doe c ER aida 4 3 30 MUX and PLG Fuse coimas o ei UAI Dach ae Duck ee 4 3 31 Controller Processor LEDS 0 000 cece ete e 4 3 32 Controller Processor LED Sequence on Power Up 000 005 4 3 32 MPC CC MUX and PLC Controller Processor LEDS 4 3 33 MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs 4 3 35 Controller Processor Enable Disable Switch 00 cee ee eee ee 4 3 36 Controller Processor Jumpers 00 ete 4 3 37 Controller Processor Redundancy 0 0c cece eee eee eee ees 4 3 39 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xviii Contents of Volume 2 Chapter 5 Serial and Analog I O Section 1 Analog Card Cage si cic ortis tek a dk EA 5 1 1 Analog Card Cage oooccccoccocc s ren 5 1 2 Analog Card Cage Address Label ssssssssssssssseseen 5 1 3 Communications Connect Card o oocccccccccoccccn es 5 1 4 Communications Connect Card IIl IV Vo oe eee 5 1 6 Communications Connect Card III IV V Communication Wiring 5 1 7 Communications Connect Card III IV V Jumpers Lise 5 1 8 Communications Connect Card Il 5 1 10 Communications Connect Card Il Ju
112. the limit a Low Battery Alarm is sent to the Read Latch Once every 24 hours the Ol Processor initiates a BRAM current draw test The current used by the BRAM is measured and reported by the battery control circuit This can be used to detect static electricity damage to BRAM cells or other abnormal BRAM power conditions Damaged cells typically draw a much larger current than do normal cells If a battery fails the test a Low Battery Alarm is sent to the Read Latch The OI Processor periodically accesses the Read Latch If the Low Battery Alarm is active the Ol Processor lights the low battery LEDs You can start the battery voltage test by hand with the momentary contact switch at the top of the card The test points allow direct measurement of battery voltage Two 3 6 V AA lithium batteries chosen for long life and high reliability are used New batteries can keep RAM in continuous data retention mode for several years Disable both batteries if Ol NV Memory is not used for data retention and normal 5 VDC is not available This prevents unnecessary battery discharge Since RAM cells that have been damaged by static electricity discharge draw considerably more power than undamaged cells it is possible that battery drain in the standby condition can be much higher than normal with the resulting shortened battery life An Ol NV RAM that shows an abnormal BRAM current draw should be returned to the factory for repair If one batter
113. the test point locations TP1 2 TP7 8 Figure 2 1 4 PeerWay Tap Test Points PeerWay Tap Fuses The PeerWay Tap has two special fuses F1 F2 soldered into the board These fuses are not field replaceable RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 7 Grounding an Electrical PeerWay RS3 PeerWay Each tap box assembly must be grounded by having the metal case connected to ground The twinax PeerWay shield must be connected to ground at only one tap box set The shield is grounded by having the screw at the GROUND position or the jumper at GND on the A and B boxes of the set The tap nearest to the system ground point should be used to ground the PeerWay shield I To ground the Twinax PeerWay Shield on Tap Boxes 10P52760001 and 10P52790001 GROUND Position OPEN Position PEERWAY PEERWAY PEERWAY PEERWAY DROP 1 DROP2 DROP 3 Figure 2 1 5 Tap Boxes 10P52760001 and 10P52790001 1 Move the grounding screw from the OPEN to the GROUND position on tap boxes A and B 2 To prevent a multiple ground of the Twinax PeerWay shield check all other taps on the PeerWay to make sure that the grounding screws or jumpers are in the OPEN or HOLD position 3 Check that no connector body can touch grounded metal Grounding a connector body can lead t
114. the top connector of the ControlFile card cage to the upper connector of the FlexTerm carries the communications lines and analog feedback for eight output Field Interface Cards FIC The lower cable carries the analog inputs for the eight input ICs Each output FIC requires one communication port and one analog input Each input FIC requires one analog input Any or all of the output FICs can be removed and input FICs can be put in their place to provide added flexibility in the FlexTerm Output FICs cannot be placed in the lower eight dedicated input slots of the FlexTerm Redundancy The MultiLoop Controller can be installed in any slot A through H When a MultiLoop Controller is used as a redundant pair only slots AB CD EF and GH can be used as redundant pairs Flat and round cables are used for redundancy Flat cables have two connectors at one end These two connectors connect to the adjacent controller slots For the round cable version two short cables are connected from the two adjacent controller slots to a special connection board The third connector on this board is used to connect to the FlexTerm This connector board also has a jumper between pins 7 and 8 to indicate to the controller that it is redundant It is important to note that a redundant flat cable cannot be used on a nonredundant controller for the upper connectors Should a redundant flat cable be used on a nonredundant controller the controller assumes itis re
115. to prevent loading in case either circuit fails The battery test circuit consists of a 100 Hz oscillator divided down to 24 hours and 5 12 seconds Five minutes after power is applied a test is performed on the batteries under a 16 amp load for 5 12 seconds The test is automatically repeated every 24 hours or can be initiated manually If the battery voltage drops below 20 volts a red LED lights and the alarm relay is activated NOTE A manually initiated battery test will not be permitted until approximately five minutes after power up or after a previous manual test The Ol Remote Power Supply is essentially identical to the AC DC Power Supply 1984 2298 000x 1984 0298 000x or 10P5658000x covered earlier in this section Power Supplies SV 1 2 21 echo a 28VDC DC Out 115 OR 220 i i gt Volts SQ HN i CR uL MEME EE Ey Y Circuit Breaker Switch 9 Battery i OFF Control Battery Switch Circuitry amp DC Fail Alarm Contacts Battery Charger 1 16A Control e Manual Battery Circuitry Test Test 24 Hour Pushbutton F1 Resistor i Automatic AS ca JZ Test d 12 V Battery 12 V Battery lt Battery Charger Card Figure 1 2 10 OI Remote Power Supply Functional Diagram RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 22 Ol Remote Power Supply Fuse The OI Remote Power Supply has a fuse between the battery charger card and t
116. to NORM Power up for normal operation Table 3 7 29 OI NV RAM Jumper Values HDi aTT oN Battery 1 Connected OFF Battery 1 Disconnected gara ON Battery 2 Connected or Battery 2 Disconnected continued on next page OI Card Cage SV 3 7 80 Table 3 7 29 OI NV RAM Jumper Values continued HD4 NVM SIZE 512 KB Hardwired for pen of RAM chips 256 KB Hardwired for ed of RAM chips HD5 PEERWAY BOOT PWAY Force PeerWay boot HD7 HD10 Run Normal Communications RS 232 Communications Loopback Test RS 232 Function as a Modem RS 232 HD9 9 14 18 18 Remove for Soba Test Function as a Terminal RS 232 Remove for Loopback Test a dy a Test Run Normal Communications RS 422 HD19 Address this board as Secondary BD ADRR ARO See text DECODE PRIMARY Address this ede Primary See E Function as a Modem RS 422 Function as a Terminal RS 422 Hardwired for non X 25 operation Function as a Modem RS 422 Hardwired for non X 25 operation Function as a Terminal RS 422 RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 81 Ol NV RAM Battery Replacement RS3 Consoles Replace the batteries at least once a year or if any Low Battery LEDs light Replace both batteries but disable them one at a time to allow the other to retain the RAM contents Use only 3 6 volt lithium batteries C52932 0002 NOTE A disk backup should be made before the OI NV RAM card is removed f
117. versions of the CP5 perform all the functions of the CP IV and CP II but have increased processor speed A MC68EC040 microprocessor is used CP5 will work with MPC5 or MPCII processors Figure 4 2 12 shows the functional diagram of a CP5 Coordinator Processor RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 22 Support Circuits 68EC040 Micro Processor RS3 ControlFiles PTM1 PTM2 S W PeerWay PeerWay To PeerWay Buffers Buffer Board ControlFile Motherboard Bus Buffers 128 kB EPROM Address Bus Data Bus Control Bus 4 Mbyte 512 kB SRAM Fast SRAM ADLC Advanced Data Link Controller ARB Arbitration DMA Direct Memory Access DUART Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory SRAM Static Random Access memory S W Software Synch Synchronous Figure 4 2 11 Coordinator Processor 5 CP5 Block Diagram ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 23 The MC68EC040 microprocessor has a 32 bit architecture and a 48 MHz clock rate The microprocessor support circuits provide a watchdog timer clock generation circuitry and an interrupt encoder The microprocessor can interface with devices from 8 bits to 32 bits wide It has an internal 4 kB instruction and data caches that speed up tight loops The clock generation circuits provide 48 24 and 2 MHz clocks for timi
118. views of the MiniConsole Figure 3 3 2 gives a block diagram of the MiniConsole RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 2 CRT Floppy Disk Drive Processor UA Yo y B TE Floppy Interface eo t Ih Printer Interface x PeerWay Interface Video Generator Board Power Regulator TO al v Motherboard Keyboard Power Regulator Floppy Disk Power Cable E p Floppy Disk E 4 a 4 gt mt 4 MESS 4 pa Y 5 p d Y le i W se Remote Power Supply DC Floppy Power 1 Ol CRT Cable Connector Figure 3 3 1 MiniConsole RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 3 68000 Processor uP RS 422 Data Power Switch 30V A A Nd Power Regulator 30 V B Return E Control 1 Video Generator Disk Drive Interface Buffer RAM Upper PeerWay Interface Printer Interface Disk Drive Unit
119. 0 Printer Printing Half Page of Data 0 cece eee eee 3 6 23 Section 7 Ol Card Gaga uisa ete kh ara ex iR ia 3 7 1 Electronics Cabinet ooooccococcccoco em 3 7 2 System Manager Station 0 c cece eae 3 7 4 Alarm Output Panel 0 00 cece eee etn enna 3 7 5 Alarm Output Boards o cet ncn atraer eee ER ies 3 7 5 Ol Card Cage visionar uM Peer DU aa 3 7 7 OI Card Cage 10P52820001 0 eae 3 7 10 OI Card Cage 1984 0660 0001 oocccccccccc cette 3 7 14 PeerWay Interfa6e s c tiveae te his ced ed ed RU RARE rea DeL 3 7 15 PeerWay Interface LEDs and Test Points 0c cece nee ences 3 7 17 PeerWay Interface Jumpers 0 00 cette 3 7 18 Ol Power Supply sspe bes ce ree ER Debt ese es ees eee SS 3 7 20 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xv Ol Power Supply LEDs and Test Points 0 00 cee eens 3 7 22 Ol Power Supply Jumpers 0 0 0 cece eee eae 3 7 23 OI Power Supply Jumpers for a System Power Supply Unit 3 7 23 Ol Power Supply Fuses ssssssssssese n 3 7 24 Ol Processori oc trig ds E DRE C up en alg ND AE e APR 3 7 25 OL Processor 68040 eeu ELSE x beret been ee eee Ru 3 7 27 Ol Processor 68040 LEDs 1 teens 3 7 29 Ol Processor 68040 Jumpers 00 cece eect eee 3 7 29 Ol Processor 68040 FUSES 00 ccc eee 3 7 29 Ol ProGessor 68020 cea wipe ota eek ag ata ea ee le 3 7 30 Ol Processor 68020 LEDs
120. 0x 1502 000x 1505 000x 1525 000x 1540 000x 1543 000x 1547 000x 1587 000x 1594 000x 1598 000x 1631 000x 1632 000x 1634 000x 1651 0006 1651 0013 1651 0027 1651 00xx 1653 000x 1654 000x 1693 000x 1694 000x 1695 000x 1731 000x 1754 000x 1776 000x 1779 000x 1782 000x 1803 000x 1825 000x 1872 000x 1915 000x 1921 000x oOo o W 00 O O 6 aN H 6d0 e DADALHKASANODHHH Index 1927 000x 1928 000x 1934 000x 1970 000x 1975 000x 1978 0004 1978 000x 1981 000x 1989 000x 2154 000x 2171 000x 2231 0001 2307 000x 2321 000x 2347 00xx 2350 000x 2372 000x 2386 000x 2402 000x 2409 000x 2412 000x 2415 0001 2441 000x 2448 000x 2456 000x 2457 000x 2458 000x 2459 000x 2461 000x 2462 0001 2466 000x 2483 000x 2491 000x 2494 0001 2497 000x 2500 000x 2503 000x 2504 9002 2507 0002 2507 000x 2510 0001 2510 000x 2512 000x 2518 000x 2519 000x 2526 000x 2530 0001 2533 0001 2533 000x 2535 9901 2543 000x 2546 000x 2551 000x 2552 000x 2576 000x 2597 000x 2616 000x 2618 000x 2622 0001 2624 0001 2627 0001 o OOBbBN 2L22 ADD Co Co S cO C2 IO DO UL 2 NO M0 1 Tog 1 woo LOOOL Co ORORO 1 1 W 0 Oo ao 1 1 an 1 1 0o LI NN Www OwWWWW NNN O1 O1 O1 O1 OQ C1 OI O1 I I NAAMA I E 0M E IO 4 O1 gi O1 O1 C IO O1 C1 O1 C OI CO Oi CT OI CT Q
121. 1 32K x 8 32K x 8 Bus Arbitration DMA Bus Buffers Bus Buffers To O I Motherboard DMA SCSI Controller Controller To Hard Disk Tape or Floppy Figure 3 7 34 SCSI Board 2 Functional Diagram Figure 3 7 35 shows a functional diagram of the OI SCSI Host Adapter RAM 1 RAM2 RAM 3 RAM 4 8Kx8 8Kx8 8Kx8 BKx8 RAM 1 RAM 2 RAM 3 RAM 4 8Kx8 8Kx8 8Kx8 BKx8 Bus Arbitration DMA Bus Buffers To Hard Disk Tape or Floppy To O I Motherboard Bus Buffers DMA SCSI SCSI Bus Controller Controller Buffers Figure 3 7 35 OI SCSI Host Adapter Functional Diagram RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 54 RS3 Consoles In a Multitube console one of the Multitube Card Cages acts as the SCSI master A 50 pin ribbon cable and a power cable with 5 VDC and 12 VDC lines connect the SCSI card to devices such as a disk or a tape drive The SCSI card has two controllers a direct memory access controller DMAO and a SCSI controller Address data and timing lines are sent across the motherboard under the direction of the Ol Processor card The DMAC handles the data transfer between the SCSI card and static RAM The DMAC transfers bytes of memory to or from sequential memory locations in 16 bit words Data from the SCSI card in the
122. 1 OI Card Cage Alarm Output Board RS3 Consoles The 1984 0744 0005 Alarm Output Board mounts on the Alarm Output Panel It is connected to the OI Card Cage alarm outputs and has optical isolation for two sets of alarm contacts Figure 3 7 5 shows wiring for the Alarm Output Board The optically isolated alarm circuits are rated for 5 40 VDC and up to 1 Amp The alarm contacts are fused as shown in Table 3 7 1 CAUTION Do not power the alarm circuit with AC Use of AC and AC rated optical isolators can result in problems that are very hard to locate OI Card Cage SV 3 7 6 DC Power Supply ROSEMOUNT INC oie ALARM OUTPUT BOARD J f l G External Enunciator OUTPUT Alarm Relay OPTO 1 HARDWARE ALARM F1 1 5A t aa eS cc RERO External gt Enunciator OUTPUT Alarm Relay OPTO 2 PROCESS ALARM F2 1 5A F z C Alarm signals from Ol Interface Card Cage Figure 3 7 5 Alarm Output Board Wiring Table 3 7 1 Alarm Output Board Fuses Fuse FRSI Part No Bussman Part No Characteristics F1 G09140 0029 MDQ 1 1 2 1 5 A 250 V Slow Blow RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 7 Ol Card Cage The OI Operator Interface Card Cage is also called the Console Card Cage Figure 3 7 6 shows the front of the Ol Card Cage Table 3 7 2 shows parts replacement data PeerWay Interface Video Generator Printer Interf
123. 100 Meg Unformatted 1984 1928 000x 5 25 inch Quantum Q540 40 Meg NOTE The IBM Deskstar 540 and above requires minimum boot ROM and software versions Table 3 5 1 gives parts replacement data Figure 3 5 1 shows a typical hard disk drive Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 3 Table 3 5 1 Hard Disk Drive Parts Replacement 3 5 inch disk Quantum QM32100 2 1 Gigabyte Formatted 3 5 inch disk 10P58050001 Quantum Thunderbolt 540 Meg Formatted 3 5 inch disk 10P5665000x 10P52800002 IBM Deskstar 540 540 Meg Formatted 3 5 inch disk 1984 3500 000x Quantum ProDrive LPS 270S 10P52800002 1584 3100 000x 270 Meg Built in SCSI 10P58570001 3 5 inch disk Quantum ProDrive LPS 170S 1984 3500 000x 1984 3100 000x 170 Meg Built in SCSI 1984 2780 000x 3 5 inch disk 1984 3100 000x 1984 2307 000x Quantum ProDrive LPS 105S 1984 1928 000x 102 Meg Formatted 3 5 inch disk 1984 2780 000x 1954 1998 oboe Quantum ProDrive 80S 100 Meg Unformatted 84 Meg Formatted 5 25 inch disk 1984 2307 000x 1984 1928 000x Quantum Q280 100 Meg Unformatted 80 Meg Formatted 5 25 inch disk 1984 1928 000x Itself only Quantum Q540 40 Meg Unformatted 34 Meg Formatted RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 4 Figure 3 5 1 Hard Disk Drive Front View Table 3 5 2 lists the DC power cable assemblies Table 3 5 3 lists the specifications for cable 10P56840001 inline fuses Table 3 5 2 Hard Disk Driv
124. 1137 0001 has two sets of purple and gray test points for the 9 volt unregulated supplies that power the PeerWay Tap Boxes NOTE Read voltages at the PeerWay Tap Box not at the card itself To determine the card s condition install the card alone in the card cage and observe the LEDs DS1 Card Good Comparators are within tolerance DS2 Card Fault 5 V or 12 V comparator has sensed voltage out of tolerance DS3 Fuse F1 is bad Regulator DS4 Fuse F2 is bad Fan DS6 5 V Good The 5 V comparator is within tolerance DS7 12 V Good The 12 V comparator is within tolerance DS8 30 V Bus A Good The 30 VDC power bus A is within tolerance B O O O Y DS9 30 V Bus B Good The 30 VDC power bus B is within tolerance Figure 3 7 15 Ol Power Supply LEDs RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 23 Ol Power Supply Jumpers The 1984 1137 0001 Ol Power Supply may be jumpered for 30 VDC or 24 VDC input Figure 3 7 16 shows jumper locations Table 3 7 8 gives jumper positions for the two input voltages Figure 3 7 16 1984 1137 000x Ol Power Supply Fuse and Jumper Locations Table 3 7 8 1984 1137 000x Ol Power Supply Jumper Settings Jumper HD1 Position Input Voltage Ol Power Supply Jumpers for a System Power Supply Unit RS3 Consoles The power regulators for the ControlFile and Ol card cage must be set to use 24 VDC Jumpers on the ControlFile Power Regulator an
125. 1140 0001 Jumper Locations Consoles SCSI DE HD1 e gt HD2 oe HD3 HD4 o HD5 e HD6 e e HD7 e HD8 VICE ID NO oO FR WDM O SCSI BUS ID HD9 HD10 HD11 29 iJ AJ IJ EJ EJ Ug AJ EJ UJ OI Card Cage SV 3 7 59 Table 3 7 22 shows positions of the SCSI Device ID jumper Note that only one jumper is used to specify the device address Table 3 7 22 OI SCSI Host Adapter 1984 1140 000x Device ID Jumper CardcageC QadCmeC C These device IDs are not used MER eee in Console Card Cages Table 3 7 23 shows positions of the three SCSI card Address jumpers Table 3 7 23 OI SCSI Host Adapter 1984 1140 000x Address Jumpers SCSI Bus E CardCageA Lo CardCageA A O es RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 60 Ol Nonvolatile Memory The OI Nonvolatile NV Memory is used in the Supervisory Computer Interface SCI Highway Interface Adapter HIA Rosemount Factory Interface RFI and the Diogenes Interface There are two versions OI NV RAM using battery backed RAM 1984 1547 0001 marked OI NV RAM on the PWA e Ol Bubble Memory using bubble memory modules 1984 1147 0001 marked Ol BUBBLE MEMORY on the PWA 1984 1167 0002 marked Ol BUBBLE MEMORY SC on the PWA The card may be referred to by a name associated the unit usin
126. 19 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface sssssslssseesessss 3 1 20 1984 3222 1004 cei Dt REIR ELERORE Deben Doe 3 1 20 1984 2889 1004 pi De CU Ru ERR 3 1 22 Keyboard Interface ACCESS ooocccccccoccc n 3 1 23 Keyboard Interface LEDs 0occccccccccoccccnc ees 3 1 24 Keyboard Interface Jumper ssssssssesesee teens 3 1 24 Keyboard Interface FUSES oooccccccoccc n 3 1 25 Console CATS vv ds een Eu kien a 3 1 26 ROS CRT IIYAMA Vision Master 0 000 cece eee eens 3 1 26 Multitube Command Console CRT Hitachi HM 4721 D 3 1 26 Multitube Command Console CRT ViewSonic 17GS 3 1 26 Multitube Command Console CRT Mag Innovision LLe 3 1 27 Multitube Command Console CRT Sony 00 cece eens 3 1 27 Multitube Command Console CRT Conrac 7122 and 7241 3 1 30 Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Failures oooooooccccooocmoo 3 1 32 Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Adjustments 00020 00 3 1 33 Conrac 7241 CRT Black Video or Black Bars on Screen 3 1 34 Conrac 7241 CRT Power up Diagnostics Failures 3 1 34 Multitube Command Console CRT Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 3 1 35 Section 2 Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console 3 2 1 Pedestal Command Console Keyboards 0 ccc eee eee 3 2 3 Pedestal Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard 004
127. 19 gives fuse values for the Coordinator Processors Table 4 2 19 CP Fuses cH i 1984 4164 0004 RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 41 NV Nonvolatile Memory The Nonvolatile Memory is available in two forms Table 4 2 20 Nonvolatile Memory Cards RAM Nonvolatile Memory 1984 2347 00xx NV MEMORY 1984 1598 0001 NV BUBBLE MEMORY Bubble Nonvolatile Memory 1984 1483 0001 NV BUBBLE MEMORY RS3 ControlFiles 1984 1224 000x NV BUBBLE MEMORY The two forms differ in speed available memory size and in the mechanism used to provide the nonvolatile memory The RAM Nonvolatile Memory card uses battery backed SRAM whereas the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory card uses Magnetic Bubble Memory MBM modules The Nonvolatile Memory card is responsible for e Storing the CP operating program e Storing operating programs for each Controller e Providing backup storage for the Plant Configuration CAUTION Disable the NV Memory and then the Coordinator Processor cards before removing any card other than a PeerWay Buffer card from the ControlFile Failure to do so may result in a corrupted data transfer The Nonvolatile Memory is an extension of the memory on the Coordinator Processor Nonvolatile memory is capable of storing data without power being applied yet can be readily changed when power is applied It stores the operating program and configuration data for the Coordinator P
128. 1984 0158 10xx are used as dual power cables for the ControlFile and the Multitube because a single redundant power cable as in Figure 1 4 6 cannot carry the load They are connected to the DC Output card as shown in Figure 1 4 7 NOTE The Pxxx tags on the cable will match the Jxxx tags on the DC Output card To Device Power Brown Bus A Cable uot A Orange y 2 s ee gt y 7 To Device Bus B Cable Orange Black Power Connector B Brown gt NCW WU NCW Figure 1 4 7 Dual DC Power Cables NOTE The fuses in the sides of the output card of buses A and B must be identical RS3 Power DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 10 DC Power Distribution System Color Codes Table 1 4 3 shows the standard color codes used for DC wiring throughout the system Table 1 4 3 Standard Color Codes for Wiring and Test Points m ome 9 VDC Unregulated Purple NOTE Violet is used for test points on the 2494 Analog Transfer Card RS3 Power READ DC Power Distribution SV 1 5 1 Section 5 Redundant Power This section shows different ways in which system power can be made redundant Figure 1 5 1 shows examples of single and redundant system power With single source AC Power no redundancy if the AC power source fails the system fails With redundant AC Power if one
129. 1984 2759 0008 2759 0008 No movable Jumpers movable No movable Jumpers No movable Jumpers movable No movable Jumpers ELLEN 37 0008 1984 2122 0007 1984 2120 0008 1984 2107 0005 1984 1061 0005 256K EPROM installed Normal 128K EPROM installed RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 38 Ol Processor 68000 Fuses Figure 3 7 24 shows the fuse locations for the Ol Processor 68000 Table 3 7 15 shows fuse data NOTE Fuses on the Ol Processor 68000 III are in the same area but are oriented vertically Table 3 7 15 Ol Processor 68000 Fuses Bussman Littelfuse FRSI Part No Part No Part No Characteristics G09140 0036 MDL 3 313003 3A 250 V Slow Blow G09140 0041 MDL 5 312005 5 A 250 V Regular RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 39 Pixel Graphics Video Generator The Pixel Graphics Video Generator 10P58900001 or 1984 2503 0001 generates color video signals for the command console CRT It is marked Ol GRAPHICS VIDEO GEN on the PWA It uses a 30 5 KHz horizontal scan rate Figure 3 7 25 is a schematic diagram of the card Input Signals from Controller Processor Card Buffer RS3 Consoles Red Blue h and Green P Output gt Signals to CRT Memory 82786 Gr
130. 2 is used to adjust signal levels in an optical PeerWay It is marked FIBER OPTIC REPEATER on the PWA 1984 0514 000x Optical Repeater Attenuator Jumpers and LEDs Figure 2 2 8 shows the jumper and LED locations on the card within the Optical Repeater Attenuator Table 2 2 3 gives the jumper settings for normal and test operation 000000 ae O DS7 LEDs DS1 DS6 DS1 Hardware Good DS2 Hardware Bad DS3 30V Fuse Blown DS4 FO TX1 Failed DS5 FO TX2 Failed DS6 Data 1 DS7 Data 2 FO Fiber Optic Figure 2 2 8 Optical Repeater Attenuator LED and Jumper Locations Table 2 2 3 Optical Repeater Attenuator Jumper Settings Normal Position Test Position HD1 1 2 2 3 HD2 1 2 2 3 RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 9 Star Coupler The Star Coupler 1984 1198 000x provides optical connection for up to eight fiber optic cable pairs transmit and receive The coupler is a passive device that connects the optical fibers to provide circuit continuity Figure 2 2 9 shows the Star Coupler label and the eight fiber optic connectors There are no serviceable parts in a Star Coupler PEERWAY ROSEMOUNT INC P N 1984 1198 0002 O STAR A Made in USA REV SER__ O Front View with cover in place Front View with cover removed Figure 2 2 9 Star Coupler RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 10
131. 2 1 1 shows a PeerWay with two Tap Boxes and five nodes Each node is attached to PeerWay A and PeerWay B through the Tap Box If there are four or fewer nodes twinax PeerWay cables are not required All connections can be made at a single PeerWay Tap as shown on the right hand side of Figure 2 1 1 PeerWay A Twinax Cable PeerWay B Twinax Cable A D en PeerWay Tap poea WE B PeerWay Drop Cable Node Node Node Node Node 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2 1 1 PeerWay Tap Box Connection RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 2 Figure 2 1 2 shows one side A or B of a typical electrical PeerWay Up to 32 nodes may be attached to a PeerWay Highway Interface Adaptors HIA may be used to connect multiple PeerWays Console ControlFile a ius Card Cages Console ControlFile Card Cages Twinax Cable odis Mrs Console Console ControlFile Card Cages Twinax Cable PeerWay Tap Figure
132. 2 1 2 Electrical PeerWay A or B Side Only RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 3 Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes The PeerWay Tap Box is the connection between the electrical PeerWay and drop cables to ControlFiles consoles or other devices These tap boxes are availible e PeerWay A Tap Box 10P52760001 CE Approved 1984 0488 0001 e PeerWay B Tap Box 10P52790001 CE Approved 1984 0489 0001 e Mounting Plate 1984 0484 0002 One A and one B Tap Box are normally mounted on the mounting plate to make an assembly They are marked DATAWAY TAP A and DATAWAY TAP B on the printed wiring assembly PWA Table 2 1 1 PeerWay Tap Box Parts Replacement Part No Replaces Comment 10P52760001 1984 0488 0001 All installations 1984 0488 0001 10P52760001 Only in non CE installations 10P52790001 1984 0489 0001 All installations 1984 0489 0001 10P52790001 Only in non CE installations Figure 2 1 3 shows a functional diagram of a PeerWay Tap Box RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 4 Cable to 100 or 124 Ohm Card Cage A Terminator AATA PeerWay Tap Box A 4 Places l Unreg 9 VISO uu Local Loop m z Back q lt Ready to x x Send RTS 2 E Transmit lt m Data lt x x ve
133. 2 11 1 2 5 Battery Charger Card Test Points 000 ee eee eee eee 1 2 12 1 2 6 Battery Charger Card Fuses 000 c cece cece eee eee 1 2 12 1 2 7 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Parts Replacement 1 2 14 1 2 8 Power Supply Without Battery Backup Indicators 1 2 17 1 2 9 10P5664000x AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Fuse 1 2 17 1 2 10 MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuses 20 0ce eee eee 1 2 19 1 2 11 Ol Remote Power Supply Fuse 00 0 cece eee eee 1 2 22 1 2 12 DC DC Power Supply Specifications 0 eee eee 1 2 24 1 2 13 DC DC Power Supply Fuses 0 000 c cece eee eee 1 2 25 1 2 14 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Specifications 1 2 26 1 2 15 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuse 000 0005 1 2 27 1 2 16 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out 1 2 31 1 2 17 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuse 00ee ee eee 1 2 31 1 2 18 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out 1 2 34 1 2 19 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuse 00ee eee 1 2 34 1 2 20 Distribution Block Fuses ooccoccocccccoocc 1 2 37 1 3 1 System Power Supply Unit Specification o o o omoooo 1 3 21 1 4 1 DC Output Card Fuses ooccccccccccc eee 1 4 6 1 4 2 Power Cable Plugs and Jacks 0 cece cece eee eee 1 4 8 1 4 3 Standard Color Codes for Wiring and Test Point
134. 2 15 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Alarm Contacts 1 2 16 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup LEDs and Fuses 1 2 16 MTCC Remote Power Supply 0 0000 cece cece eee eee eee 1 2 18 MTCC Remote Power Supply Jumper 000 cece eee eee ees 1 2 18 MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuse 000 eee eee eee ees 1 2 19 Ol Remote Power Supply 000 cece eee eee een 1 2 20 Ol Remote Power Supply Fuse 0 ccc eee eee eee eee 1 2 22 DC DC Power Supply 0 00 cece eee n 1 2 23 DC DC Power Supply Fuses 0 00 cee eee eee eens 1 2 25 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply oooooccccccccccc eee 1 2 26 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuses 0 ccc eee eee 1 2 27 Remote I O Power Supply 0 cece eee cette 1 2 28 10P5503 for I O Applications 0 00 eee 1 2 30 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out 1 2 31 10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs 000 cece eeeeeee 1 2 31 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output 1 2 31 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuses 00 cece eee eens 1 2 31 Remote Operator Interface Power Supply c cece eens 1 2 32 10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications 0 0 eee eee 1 2 33 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out 1 2 34 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV x 10P5409 Remote Power Supply LE
135. 2 Q Io P 02 Q I5 cx OO Co bahbosr NN papbpho gt ppp 222 O ASNO SALIA i ADGAGNHYYNHAAKAHDABDIANANTHHHDHOHANNAABDBEZHAAONZANGAND RS3 Service Manual 3 5 15 ha m ev qe gt N Co 7 4 5 7 4 5 7 4 5 Ee hed 7 4 6 2628 x006 2633 000x 2662 000x 2731 000x 2780 000x 2783 9045 2837 000x 2844 000x 2859 00xx 2871 000x 2889 0004 2889 1004 2891 000x 3004 000x 3005 9030 3017 000x 3023 000x 3028 000x 3038 000x 3040 000x 3062 00xx 3065 00xx 3067 XXXX 3100 000x 3202 0010 3211 0001 3211 0002 3214 0002 3222 0004 3222 1004 3222 2004 3223 xxxx 3245 0001 3246 000x 3261 0002 3267 XXXx 3270 0001 3278 000x 3286 000x 3287 9500 3289 000x 3301 000x 3318 000x 3389 000x 3442 0003 3500 000x 3505 000x 4064 000x 4068 000x 4080 000x 4121 000x 4124 000x 4127 000x 4164 000x 4167 000x 4186 00xx 4195 000x 4195 00xx 4196 0001 4196 000x 4205 000x SV Index 3 16 3 1 18 3 1 21 2 6 3 18 6 3 33 6 4 25 6 3 18 6 3 33 6 2 2 6 2 6 Index SV Index 4 4282 000x 4302 000x 4309 0004 4329 000x 4344 000x 4350 000x 4383 000x 6 4 17 4398 000x 6 4 39 4409 000x 6 2 2 6 2 9 4414 000x 6 4 44 4418 000x 6 4 46 4433 000x 1 2 28 4438 000x 7 6 3 3 5 inch floppy disk drive 3 5 16 32 Point Input FIM 6 4 48 3M Static Pad 9 3 2 4 20 mA ANALOG INPUT FIELD INTERFACE MODULE 6 4 44 6 4 46
136. 2000x 1 1 1 5037000x 6 6 14 5664000x 1 2 13 50400006 4 3 2 5665000x 3 5 2 50450001 3 7 10 56700015 3 4 7 5049000x 6 6 14 5685000x 3 5 23 50660002 3 1 27 57070001 6 4 39 50840004 3 1 14 3 1 16 3 1 17 57240002 5 1 35 50842004 3 1 14 3 1 15 57520007 4 3 2 5087000x 4 2 20 50930001 2 3 2 50960001 2 3 2 5270 0001 6 3 1 6 3 3 6 3 4 52790001 2 1 3 5280000x 3 5 2 52820001 3 7 7 3 7 10 5285000x 3 1 13 52960001 4 1 1 53190004 6 4 48 5319000x 6 4 29 5320000x 5 4 2 5324000x 3 1 8 5349000x 6 4 29 5352 0006 6 3 1 6 3 46 53520006 6 6 7 5355 0006 6 3 1 6 3 46 53910001 7 6 7 54040004 6 4 44 6 6 10 5408 0004 6 4 46 54080004 6 6 10 5409000x 1 2 32 54340xxx 7 2 3 54440002 5 1 24 5 1 35 54470002 5 1 41 54500005 5 1 35 54530001 5 1 4 54560001 5 1 4 5477000x 6 4 4 RS3 Service Manual 57560001 1 2 32 57700005 6 4 44 6 6 10 58050001 3 5 2 58570001 3 5 2 1166 0505 0021 3 6 23 0524 0010 3 1 31 0524 00xx 3 2 10 1167 0016 0002 2 1 12 0016 0006 9 3 3 0016 0007 2 1 12 0016 000x 2 1 12 1216 CW ROS4 6 6 3 12P 0373x032 3 1 26 3 4 3 1301 PZ 6 6 3 16 Point Input FIMs 6 4 44 16 Point Output FIMs 6 4 46 1822 CO 0030 CC 6 6 8 1842 CO 0030 CC 6 6 8 1862 LO 0060 CC 6 6 8 1872 LO 0060 WW 6 6 8 1882 LO 0060 UU 6 6 8 1882 LO 0060 WW 6 6 8 1984 0023 000x 4 0158 00xx 1 0158 10xx 1 0158 20xx 1 Index SV Index 2 0283 000x 1 4 3 0298 000x
137. 3 2 o O Local Loop Back Coupler Status No Clear To Send Energy Detect Circuit Figure 4 2 2 PeerWay Buffer Functional Diagram RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section RS3 ControlFiles SV 4 2 3 Data is buffered through a single buffer chip for isolation An onboard 16 MHz clock and clock divider generate the necessary timing signals for data communication A switching regulator provides 5 V with overvoltage protection for the card and is checked by comparators for voltage tolerance The same transformer also generates isolated 9 V for isolation circuitry necessary for the PeerWay interface devices and tap card A three terminal 5 volt regulator supplies the proper isolated voltage to the optical isolators and the RS 422 transmitters and receivers Transmit TX data goes from the buffer chip to the Manchester encoder decoder There data is encoded with a 1 MHz clock signal optically isolated and then transferred to the tap by an RS 422 transmitter The local loop back LLB signal used to drive the tap relay is transferred from the buffer to the tap through the optical isolators and the RS 422 transmitter The Ready To Send RTS signal is first disabled by a power up reset flip flop to ensure all circuitry is stable before the card is enabled to transmit on the PeerWay Receive data is fed through an optical isolator to the Manchester encoder decoder where data is separated from th
138. 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Command Entry Keyboard 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Configuration Keyboard 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Trackball Keyboard suus 3 2 4 Pedestal Command Console Rotating Alphanumeric Keyboard 3 2 5 Pedestal Command Console Keyswitch Assembly Luue 3 2 5 Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface luuuussuuu 3 2 6 Pedestal Command Console CRT 00 cece cnet n esee 3 2 8 Pedestal Command Console Disk Interface Card SCSI 3 2 11 Remote Command Console Power Supply 0e cece e eens 3 2 11 Pedestal Command Console Printer Interface Card 000 0 cease 3 2 11 Section 3 MiniConsole oo urere xm Roe ce wi e Lone we e e 3 3 1 MiniConsole Keyboards ssssssssssssee enn 3 3 4 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xiii MiniConsole Power Regulator Card 000 cece eee eee 3 3 6 MiniConsole PeerWay Interface Card 000 ccc cece 3 3 6 MiniConsole Ol Processor Card 0 0000 cece eens 3 3 6 Monochrome Video Generator o ococcccccccccoccn 3 3 7 Monochrome Video Generator LEDs 000 c cece teens 3 3 9 Monochrome Video Generator Raster Test Button o o ooooooo 3 3 9 Monochrome Video Generator Fuse 00 cece eects 3 3 10 MiniConsole CRT e ote ect CC eR e Rn ER CR IRIS ORE Deh a RE A 3 3 11 MiniCon
139. 3 7 39 LEDs 3 7 41 Plant Status screen 10 2 2 PLC 4 3 30 5 4 1 Fuse 4 3 31 FlexTerm 5 4 2 hardware 5 4 1 Port I O Card Redundancy 5 4 11 redundancy 5 4 9 PLC FlexTerm 5 4 2 jumpers 5 4 8 point to point messages 10 2 14 Port I O Card 5 4 13 redundancy 5 4 11 RS422 RS232 5 4 13 RS422 RS422 5 4 20 power redundancy 1 5 1 power regulator MUX 5 3 4 Ol 3 7 20 Power Regulator Card 5 and 12 Volt DC 4 2 13 5V DC Only 4 2 7 checking voltages 9 1 24 ControlFile checking voltages 9 1 19 Inserting 4 2 7 4 2 13 power supplies 1 2 1 POWER SUPPLY DISPLAY Ill 1 2 14 power wiring Multipoint I O 6 1 8 printer 3 6 1 DL2600 Fujitsu DL3800 Fujitsu DL4600 Fujitsu DPL24C Fujitsu TI 810 3 6 20 printer interface 3 7 46 jumpers 3 7 51 LEDs 3 7 49 ProDrive See Quantum Programmable Logic Controller See PLC PULSE I O 5 1 41 Pulse I O FIC fuses 5 1 45 w a CO 6 9 6 2 6 6 Co 6 16 Index jumpers 5 1 44 LEDs 5 1 43 Pulse Input FIC calibrating 8 3 1 PX 2 3 2 Q QBI 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 Hardware Kit 7 4 1 QBUS Board 1 7 4 3 7 4 5 7 4 8 QBUS Board 2 7 4 3 7 4 5 7 4 8 QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I 7 4 8 QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I 7 4 8 QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE ll 7 4 8 Quantum 80S 3 5 2 3 5 11 LPS 105S 3 5 10 Q250 3 5 2 Q280 3 5 2 3 5 13 Q540 3 5 15 Quantum QM32100 3 5 2 Quantum Thunderbolt 3 5 2 R RAM Nonvolatile Memory See NV Memory
140. 3 Power Supply NOTE A cooling fan assembly is required for the cabinet holding the power supply RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 31 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out A connector is used to mount the cables on the power supply The pin out of the connector is shown in Table 1 2 16 Table 1 2 16 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out ppm Description O O ER DC output Jumper to pin 32 connects DC return to AC safety ground ES L1 AC tne 7 L2 N AC line 2 230 V or neutral 115 V cs AC safety ground 10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs The power supply has one green LED that lights when the unit is operating normally 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output Adjustment should not be required Attach a voltmeter to the test jack to monitor the output voltage Adjust the voltage 1 Volt with the adjustment potentiometer AU1 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuses Table 1 2 17 shows fuse data for the Remote Power Supply Table 1 2 17 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuse FRSI Wickman Schurter ee a 3 15 A 250 V RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 32 Remote Operator Interface Power Supply RS3 Power The Remote Power Supply is available in these versions For Operator Interface products 230 VAC input 115 VAC input 110 230 VAC input 110 230 VAC input 10P54090001 3 10P54090002 4 10P57010001 10P57560001 Power Supplies SV 1 2 33
141. 30V m E Master Current Current Sense T Over Voltage Sense ke lave Voltage Adjust Input Switching Slave ol age Adjust Inpu Regulator dL Slave Current Output gt Slave Voltage Adjust Output Hp reer Slave Current Input ee OU gt Slave Voltage Adjust Input 412 V Output y 15 V I y p 12 V Current Sense Over Voltage Slave Voltage Sense Adjust Input Olave Current Output 9lave Voltage Adjust Output Slave Current Switching Output 12 V Output Voltage Sense Regulator Slave Voltage Adjust Input Figure 4 2 8 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Functional Diagram RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 16 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC has LEDs to indicate card status Figure 4 2 9 shows the LEDs and test points Test points are accessible from the top of the ControlFile RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 17 LEDs Input capacitors are charging during card insertion with v AE card cage power on The proper procedure is to slowly DS11 insert the card into the ControlFile Motherboard connector 12 AND 5 V Power C
142. 32 loop callup buttons are sensed by driving each of the 8 strobe lines low one ata time The sense lines are pulled up to 5 V through pullup resistors The strobe and sense lines form a matrix with a momentary contact switch at each intersection point As a button is pushed the sense line is pulled low The microprocessor senses the line pulled low and knows which strobe line is activated at that point Each intersection point is a different key Each loop has a process alarm LED associated with it and is driven by a latch off the bus There are 32 LEDs driven by these latches The alphanumeric keyboard has its own microprocessor that handles all keyboard strobing and sensing It outputs the ASCII character code for the key to the front panel circuitry through a buffer to the console bus This keyboard is designed so that if any key fails closed it will not cause all the keys to lock up The microcomputer in the keyboard sends a periodic null character to indicate that it is still operating If the console processor does not receive this character every 100 microseconds it will send a reset command to the keyboard The speaker has a 555 timer that provides an oscillator frequency This output is divided through a programmable counter whose output frequency is controlled by the console bus whose amplitude is controlled through several Field Effect Transistors FETs MiniConsole SV 3 3 5 The keyswitch is sensed through 5 buffer line
143. 4 Troubleshooting ControlFiles eL ControlFile Status Screen 0 0 teens Wipe Bubble Procedure Las ss ieee iaaea E E nets Section 5 Troubleshooting Input Output Lseeeeeeee Restoring Redundant FICS 0 02 cece eect eh Troubleshooting Procedures for Serial Input Output 00 Troubleshooting Procedures for Analog Input Output 00 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxix Field I O Status Screen FIC Status Screen 0 0 e eee eee 10 5 13 FIG DetallScreen eder EDI tae ea tee ELE eee aA bie eee ete ey 10 5 18 RBL Controller and Cards 0 000 cece eet eh 10 5 21 Section 6 Troubleshooting PeerWay Interface Devices 10 6 1 Ol Bubble Memory Problems ssssssssese teens 10 6 1 Appendixes Appendix A Fuses cvoiisciossinsis sucus eae edi a ete ews A 1 Appendix B IEC and ISO Symbols eeseeeseeese B 1 Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations o ooooooomommm C 1 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxx RS3 Service Manual Contents 10P56987101 10P56987111 FISHER ROSEMOUNT RS3 Service Manual Chapter 1 Power Section 1 AG Inputs sci itor dera Sd vba iio 1 1 1 AC Entrance Panel eu e E oce RR ios e aee cce ace eet 1 1 1 Single Feed AC Entrance Panel ccc cece eee eee 1 1 3 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel 0 00 c cece eects 1
144. 40 VAC 50 60 Hz The software printer driver is the HP560 driver in Windows NT The printer cable number is 10P55800003 Refer to the printer user s manual RS3 Operator Station ROS CRTs SV 3 4 3 The color CRT monitors that can be used with the RS3 Operator Station include e 21 inch Hitachi HM 4721 D CRT e 17 inch liyama Vision Master CRT ROS CRT Hitachi HM 4721 D The Hitachi HM 4721 D CRT 12P0373x032 is a 21 inch color unit The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC 50 or 60 Hz 100 120 200 240 VAC auto selecting Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies the unit ROS CRT liyama Vision Master RS3 Consoles The liyama Vision Master CRT 55P0144x022 is a 17 inch color unit The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC 50 or 60 Hz 108 132 198 264 VAC auto selecting Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies the unit RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 4 ROS Operator Keyboard The RS3 Operator Station has a variety of keyboard options Figure 3 4 2 shows the dimensions of the optional operator keyboard with a single option button panel Up to three option button panels may be provided OPTIONS Top View Ue 3 8 en Side View Figure 3 4 2 Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters Inches RS3 Consoles RS3 Ope
145. 551 User Manual 1984 3065 0032 e CD 551 Service Manual 1984 3065 0034 Figure 3 1 17 shows the block diagram of the Barco CD 551 or 651 CRT Control Panel Adj LED Drive Voltages Voltages RGB IN OUT a CRT Socket gt Gt G2 Gs B Remote Control UE VG3 vava HV H CS Pulse 26 kV H amp V VS Pulse SYNC FIL HI Switched Mode amp Degauss Control Voltage EHT Power Supply i Degauss Coils B Figure 3 1 17 Barco CD 551 CRT Block Diagram Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 36 Figure 3 1 18 and Figure 3 1 19 show the rear view of the monitor with switches and connections for the input cables SYNC must be set to INTERNAL The three switches on the R G and B panels select the input impedance for the RGB coaxial cable 1984 1691 0003 These must be set to 75 ohms NOTE If two or three monitors are daisy chained on the line the switches of the last monitor on the line must be set to 75 ohms The others must be set to a high impedance Connect the cables to the right hand set of coaxial connectors on the input panel The left hand set of connectors can be used to daisy chain additional monitors Brightness and contrast adjustments are also on the input panel RE POWER Figure 3 1 18 Barco CD
146. 6 000 Output 7 UF 25 E Current V 60 Cycle Ohm LEDs V 30 INE E 27 Turns ON 51 50 Cycle _ Below 2 A s 115 V Amps 9 or Z 220 V d 3 Control Circuits OFF Battery amp Switch DC Fail T Alarm Contacts Battery Charger 16A Control apela Manual Battery Circuitry Test Test 24 Hour Pushbutton F1 50A Resistor Automatic s v Test bt ce 12 V Battery 12 V Battery nui Battery Charger MN E UN E Figure 1 2 2 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Functional Diagram RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 6 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Alarm Contacts The front panel provides two sets of terminals for battery fault and power supply fault alarm contacts The cards are shipped with the contacts set to be normally open N O They may be changed to normally closed N C by changing jumper positions on the Battery Charger Card 1984 1283 000x The appropriate contact will be closed or opened if the red BATT FAULT or PS FAULT LED is lighted The supply will continue delivering power while the alarm condition is present Figure 1 2 3 shows the alarm contacts The alarm contacts are rated for switching a resistive load e Maximum switching voltage 100 VDC e Maximum switching current 250 mA e Maximum current 500 mA RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 7 AC DC Power Supply With Batt
147. 8 264 VAC auto selecting Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies the unit Multitube Command Console CRT Hitachi HM 4721 D The Hitachi HM 4721 D CRT 12P0373x032 is a 21 inch color unit that connects to the Keyboard Interface This CRT requires video isolation provided by the keyboard interface card The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC 100 120 200 240 VAC auto selecting Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies the unit Multitube Command Console CRT ViewSonic 17GS RS3 Consoles The ViewSonic 17GS CRT 10P56120001 is a 17 inch color unit that connects to the Keyboard Interface via a D Sub connector and twisted pairs of wires This CRT requires video isolation provided by the keyboard interface card The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC 100 240 VAC auto selecting Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies the unit Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 27 Multitube Command Console CRT Mag Innovision The Mag Innovision CRT 10P50660002 is a 15 inch color unit that connects to the Keyboard Interface via a D Sub connector and twisted pairs of wires This CRT requires video isolation provided by the keyboard interface card This unit can replace any 14 inch Sony unit The adapter cable is part of the assembly The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC Setup and controls are describe
148. 89 1004 Remote Keyswitch Uses 1984 3267 xxxx Remote Keyswitch Cable 10P50840004 1984 3222 0004 CE compliant console Standard Keyswitch only 1984 3222 0004 1984 2889 0004 1984 1978 000x Standard Keyswitch or Dual Keyswitch Uses 1984 3223 xxx Dual Keyswitch Cable 1984 2889 0004 1984 1978 000x Standard Keyswitch or Dual Keyswitch 1984 1978 000x None Standard Keyswitch No video isolation 1984 2889 1004 RS3 Consoles None Remote Keyswitch with pigtail cable Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 15 Password Keyboard Interface Keyboard Interfaces used with password security software have no keyswitch or connector for keyswitches Keyboard Interface 10P50842004 is used with password security software in the Console e 10P50842004 marked KEYBD INT VIDEO ISOLATOR on the PWA this card is CE Compliant e 1984 3222 2004 marked KEYBD INTERFACE VIDEO ISOLATOR on the PWA Figure 3 1 4 shows connections for these cards RS 422 Video Input solated Video Isolated Video Keyboard RGB Cables Output Output Communications Keyboard Power Cable Ground Cable Wire Coaxial RGB Cable RGB Cables Twisted Pairs Coaxial LL fL ji j Jj j J491 J492 J493 J495 J496 J497 F1 J408 J409 J410 Trackball Keyboard
149. 9 Jumpers on the ControlFile Power Regulator and OI Power Regulator must be set for 24 VDC as follows Refer to the Site Preparation and Installation Manual SP for more information about system cabinet configurations dimensions grounding etc The DC power distribution system consists of a DC Distribution Bus installed in the system cabinet DC Output card attached to the DC Distribution Bus and various cables Each DC Distribution Bus assembly within a system cabinet consists of three copper bus bars with a current carrying capacity of 200 amperes DC Distribution Bus assemblies can be daisy chained as required using a Jumper Cable DC bus to DC bus 1984 0373 xxxx Bus A is normally jumpered to bus B giving a bus A B A standard non redundant DC power distribution system consists of one or more System Power Supply Units feeding one or more DC Distribution Bus assemblies Figure 1 3 7 shows a standard bus A B operation A DC Distribution Bus should have no more than two System Power Supply Units four DC outputs wired to it redundant power supplies included This applies to both redundant and non redundant buses NOTE If a single System Power Supply Unit is used the configuration should be the standard A B distribution as shown in Figure 1 3 7 System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 10 Bus A B Power Supplies up to 4 System Power System Power Supply Unit 2 Supply Unit 1 DC Bus to DC Bus SS eS Jumper
150. AC power source fails the system relies on the second AC power source Single AC Power Source Redundant AC Power Sources AC Input AC Input Panel Panel Bus A Bus A Return Return Bus B Bus B System System Device Single Source AC Power Device Figure 1 5 1 Examples of Redundant System Power RS3 Power Redundant AC Power Redundant Power SV 1 5 2 Figure 1 5 2 adds redundant power supplies The DC power supplies share the load If one DC power supply fails the other DC supply assumes the load Redundant AC Power Sources DC Power Load Sharing DC Power Supply Supplies Bus A Return Bus B Figure 1 5 2 Redundant AC Power and Load Sharing DC Power Supplies Figure 1 5 3 adds redundant power supply buses in addition to giving redundant AC power load sharing DC power supplies and redundant power buses Redundant AC power is fed to each AC input panel Load sharing DC power supplies provide power to bus A and bus B The system device is connected to redundant buses A and B Redundant AC Power Sources AC Input AC Input Panel Panel DC Power Load Sharing Supply DC Power Supplies Bus A Return Bus B Redundant Buses A and B DC Power Supply System Device Figure 1 5 3 Redundant AC Power Load Sharing DC Power Supplies and Redundant Power Buses RS3 Power Redundant Power FISHER ROSEMOUNT RS3 Service Manual Chapter 2 PeerWay
151. AM NV Memory Fuse ee eee teens NV Memory and Powering Down the ControlFile Bubble NV MOMON sa ucc rer eR RR Pret e Rr eR EEG eec EAR Bubble NV Memory LEDs and Test Points 5 ee eee eee Bubble NV Memory Jumpers ees Bubble NV Memory Fuses 1 ee ees Section 3 Controller Processors esesere nn Inn MPC MultiPurpose Controller Processor 0 cece cent nets MPC5 FUNCION ui adan eh e ieee va m iii MPEIEFUNCUON ratita ma ele ace wet odes metet acce te Sa a Re en ns MPC Function ui ty RR Xe ORG OX RC ORI XE e ORG UR ACT CD ca MEOCIFEDS UE C toto necu RR ut aces al coger tont E LAESA MPC5J mpers a ELEC REDE RSEES MPGIlLJ mperS JceDsenlieier degener terca gehen redo MPG I J mpets acciona it ar etd rab ed an MPG Fuses otitis Tua ae aa a d d MLC MultiLoop Controller Processor 0000 cece cece eee MEG Funcion DE Seer ede bob ue eene deed obe ee UH aA ood AA MEG LEDS p c EE MEC J rmpers sors ezescove ene ev Raed bis Bae DOE LOCO ata MEG FUSES acaricia acr ra e Ead dua Pad a a n SSC Single Strategy Controller Processor 0 ccc eee cece eens SSC LEDS 3 eile EPA EE EIE e I MESES SSC JUImipets 1 5 esr cero deaf pct oh tee ts paleo ores ns SSGITUSeSc foeda Spa dt b e ario e ME REA TE AUR CC Contact Controller Processor 000 cece eee COMEDIA ett Bishan eee i ms DCO FUSO ada ite eed na a nan had whens Haaren heehe
152. Battery Backup Fuses The 10P5658000x power supply has two fuses F1 and F2 and the 1984 0298 000x and 1984 2298 000x power supplies each have one fuse F1 between the battery charger card and the batteries Figure 1 2 4 shows the location of the fuse s Table 1 2 3 gives fuse data There are additional fuses on the Battery Charger Card 1984 1283 000x Table 1 2 3 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse G50527 0004 50 A 300 V Time Delay 50P03980007 30 A 300 V Time Delay RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 9 Battery Charger Card RS3 Power The Battery Charger card 1984 1283 000x contains a battery charging circuit a battery test circuit and a board current sense circuit The card is marked BATTERY CHARGER AND DISPLAY DRIVER ALARM on the printed wiring assembly PWA The battery charging circuit charges two 12 volt gel cell batteries in series Charge current is limited to 1 2 amp average with a nominal charge voltage of 27 6 volts To prevent complete discharge and possible damage to the batteries the Battery Charger card contains control circuitry to disconnect the battery if the battery voltage drops below 18 volts If during testing the power supply voltage drops to 26 4 volts the control circuitry turns on a red LED and Activates an alarm relay The battery backup circuit can maintain the output load for approximately 30 seconds The power supply output circuit
153. C Secondary AC A Supplies i j and Fans This section only on Dual AC Entrance Panels Figure 1 1 1 AC Distribution System RS3 Power AC Input SV 1 1 3 Single Feed AC Entrance Panel Power distribution for a single AC input panel includes an internal filter to reduce the incoming AC line noise Three output breakers protect up to three AC DC power supplies The output breakers can also be used for AC cooling fans Figure 1 1 2 shows a Single Feed AC Entrance Panel The lamp labeled INPUT indicates AC input to the system The lamps labeled OUTPUT indicate AC out of each of the three circuit breakers 10 amp for 230 VAC and 15 amp for 115 VAC WARNING N For personal safety use a circuit breaker lockout device to ensure that an opened breaker is not accidentally closed while you are working on the line Input Lamp Plastic Guard AC Breaker Output Lamp Input Terminal Block AC Output AC Output AC Output Figure 1 1 2 Single Feed AC Entrance Panel RS3 Power AC Input SV 1 1 4 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel A A AC Input A Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel accepts AC from two independent sources If the primary upper AC line drops out the secondary lower AC line automatically switches in within 500 milliseconds The 500 millisecond delay prevents arcing during switching if the two AC lines are out
154. Calibration 0 0c cece eee 8 4 10 Section 5 Calibrating Analog I O Field Interface Cards 8 5 1 Analog I O Output Points go d o A o A A aA hasi 8 5 3 Checking Calibration of Analog I O Output Points 4 8 5 4 Calibrating Non Isolated Analog I O Output Points 8 5 6 Calibrating Isolated Output FICS 0 0 cee eee 8 5 7 Analog I O Input Points 20 0 0 cece eet eee eae 8 5 8 Checking Calibration of Analog I O Input Points o o oooooomo o 8 5 9 Calibrating Analog I O Input Points 0 0 cece eee eee eee 8 5 10 Calibrating Analog I O Input Points Setup Using Current Input 8 5 10 Calibrating Analog I O Input Points Setup Using Voltage Input 8 5 11 Calibrating Analog I O Input Points oooooccccccccccoo 8 5 12 Section 6 Calibrating Multipoint Analog I O MAIO Output and Input POINTS i lie wits nga ee n amr ec e 8 6 1 Checking and Calibrating MAIO Output Points 0 00 cence ee 8 6 1 Checking and Calibrating MAIO Input Points 2 00 c eee eee eee 8 6 4 Chapter 9 Maintenance Section 1 Scheduled Maintenance 0ccee eee ee eee eee eee 9 1 1 Cleaning Tape Drives 0 0 cece eee 9 1 4 Cleaning Floppy Disk Drives ssssssssseees eens 9 1 4 Cleaning the Trackball 00 cece cette 9 1 5 Cleaning Console Fan Filters 0 0 cece eee tenes 9
155. Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Section 1 Troubleshooting the Power System 10 1 1 Section 2 Troubleshooting a PeerWay eee 10 2 1 PeerWay Screens ite obi asceoveLsW at B TREE CE DU IR RE 10 2 1 Plant Status Screen 0 20 cc e nnn 10 2 2 PeerWay Performance Screen ccc cece ete ees 10 2 3 PeerWay Overview Screen 000 c cece teeta 10 2 9 PeerWay Node Screen 00 cece eee eet 10 2 12 PeerWay Node Screen General Definitions o 0oooooooomo o 10 2 13 Time Interval Controller TIC 0 00 cece eee eens 10 2 13 TIC MASItGr Leer PS ea Erud iecur Gia 10 2 13 MOS Ein esi acne REEL UG RUE eee p EPERDUGEE 10 2 14 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxviii SONET o ase eink ep ELI EVI ERU Me MEUM EUR Phe Hae Broadcast Messages oucas ar encara a Eaa nen Point To Point Messages 0 cece eet tees Socket Loss Seni nate bene iis Rote POE farte UL DC Pane PeerWay Node Screen Field Definitions 0ooo ooooommmmm m o PeerWay Node Screen Column 1 006 cece cece teens PeerWay Node Screen Columns 2 and 3 2 0 cece cent oo PeerWay Node Screen Column 4 000 cc cece e ect n een nee PeerWay Node Screen Column 5 0c ccc nananana PeerWay Node Screen Lower Part 0 cece eee n eee eese Sample PeerWay Problems 0000000 cece eee en PeerWay Fault Conditions 0 cece c
156. Command Console CC MiniConsole MC Basic Command Console BCC Supervisory Computer Interface SCI Highway Interface Adapter HIA System Resource Unit SRU Diogenes Interface Table 3 7 11 lists the models the RAM size and the equipment when the part is applicable NOTE Some software versions require at least 1 Meg of memory The OI Processor 68020 1984 1540 000x or 1984 1161 000x may replace any of the OI Processor cards listed below them but new software and pixel graphics are required OI Card Cage SV 3 7 26 Table 3 7 11 Ol Processor Replacement Data wesmon eme OI PROCESSOR V 10P55270010 1984 3202 0010 16 Meg MTCC OI PROCESSOR V 1984 1540 0009 1984 3202 0010 1984 1161 000x 16 Meg MTCC OI PROCESSOR V All below NOTE Use of this 1984 1540 0009 processor requires 4 Meg OI PROCESSOR 68020 W ASIC may require changing of software 10P57140008 1984 2759 0008 OI PROCESSOR III 1984 2759 0008 All below OI PROCESSOR III 1984 2137 0008 All below OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG 1984 2122 0007 All below pes OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG 1984 2107 0005 MC 1984 2120 1984 2107 0005 1984 1061 0005 a OI PROCESSOR a AS Mo PROCESSOR RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 27 Ol Processor 68040 Ol Processor 68040 1984 3202 0010 10P55270010 and 10P55270011 is marked Ol PROCESSOR V on the printed wiring assembly PWA It performs 68020 or 68000 OI processor functions but has more memory and is enhanced for incr
157. Console Card cage goes on the SCSI bus From the SCSI bus information goes to a SCSI board mounted in the tape or disk drive Each device on the SCSI bus has its own SCSI bus address The disk and tape drives are considered separate from the console hardware although disk and tape drives are powered by the SCSI master Each SCSI card has its own SCSI address and is to be considered an equal device The synchronous bus has arbitration to assure that the two controllers DMAC and SCSI cannot be enabled at the same time Bus arbitration occurs between the OI Processor card SCSI controller and the DMAC Either the SCSI controller or the DMAC may request control of the synchronous bus When control is given to one device another device cannot access the bus until the current request is completed A decoder selects one of the static RAM chips used for buffer memory storage of messages to and from the SCSI mass storage devices OI Card Cage SV 3 7 55 SCSI LEDs Figure 3 7 36 shows the LEDs for the SCSI card DS1 No faults are detected on the card Green DS1 lights when the card has passed power up diagnostics DS2 A fault has been detected on the card DS2 lights when the card aya Red has failed power up diagnostics DS6 SCSI bus is busy DS6 is a hardware driven LED and will flicker Yellow under normal operation DS7 Message or status information is being transferred on the SCSI Yellow bus
158. DS7 is driven by the target device and will flicker under normal operation A steady ON indicates the bus is locked La lai OO C DS8 Indicates data is being transferred to the tape or drive VA Yellow DS8 is driven by a target device and will flicker under normal operation A steady ON indicates the bus is locked COM Y DS9 Indicates messages or commands are being transferred on the Yellow SCSI bus DS9 is driven by a target device and will flicker under normal operation A steady ON indicates the bus is locked DS10 Direct memory access request Indicates a data transfer between o3 Yellow the disk or tape and SCSI Interface card DS12 Hard disk access A command is being issued to the hard disk Yellow DS13 Indicates a command is being issued to the tape drive Yellow DS13 will blink every second as the tape drive is monitored for tape insertion or removal DS14 Indicates cache memory on the SCSI board is being accessed Yellow The most recently used disk sectors are stored in cache memory Figure 3 7 36 SCSI Card LEDs RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 56 SCSI Jumpers The boards differ in jumper usage NOTE The SCSI address is independent of the PeerWay node address of the console and card cage 1984 3301 000x SCSI Board 2 This card has two sets of jumpers one sets the SCSI ID and one enables or disables the bus active termin
159. Diogenes Interface The operator interface portions of the console keyboard CRT tape drive and floppy disk drive are covered in earlier sections of this chapter Maintenance and troubleshooting are covered in chapters 9 and 10 Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 2 Electronics Cabinet The Electronics Cabinet houses one or more OI Card Cages disks and tape drives The Tower and System Manager Station SMS versions house a single Ol Card Cage The standard version houses up to three Ol Card Cages and power supplies Figure 3 7 1 and Figure 3 7 2 show the front and rear view of a standard Electronics Cabinet Configurations vary LLLI Tape Drive or Floppy Disk ODIDODIOO Card Cage A Figure 3 7 1 Standard Electronics Cabinet Front View RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 3 DEDE y du pestes R4 E eee S ai NE RGB Video Alarm Output Ve XEM epu c do a EB AE PI EE M E E Pupo Cable Panl f gt qu dix E vi Pri Une Arete UE NM Connections y Khe ane d n Te te pet al 5 Lic Se Se LAA Pret cass eme Bo asp iat esr rm oo S omo e Ge ce ES 4 Card Cage Dto e Q 00 Card Cage B i IR
160. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers esses 6 3 21 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses 0 2c esses 6 3 22 Multi FIM Discrete Termination Panel 0 cece ee eee eee ees 6 3 23 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxii Multi FIM Discrete Termination Panel Label 0 0a eee 6 3 25 Multi FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers sesssssse 6 3 26 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 0 0 0 cee eee ees 6 3 28 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring o o ooooooo 6 3 31 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Labels 6 3 33 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Output Points 6 3 36 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Input Points 6 3 37 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays 6 3 38 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers 0 eee eee eee 6 3 39 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses 0 00 0 eee eee eee 6 3 40 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 0 00 eee 6 3 41 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring 6 3 43 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Label 6 3 43 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers 6 3 44 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays 6 3 45 Discret
161. Disable Switch is in the DS2 DISABLE position If the switch is ENABLED and this LED is on replace the Coordinator Processor The Enable Disable Switch is ENABLED and no xoc x hardware faults are detected on the Coordinator Processor Enable Disable Switch Test Points Figure 4 2 14 Coordinator Processor LEDs and Test Points ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 33 CP LED Sequences RS3 ControlFiles Normal operation of the CP card is signified by the green LED being ON and the yellow LEDs flashing The red LED will be ON when the Enable Disable switch is in the Disable position or if a fault has been detected The Coordinator Processor Power Up Sequence begins when the Enable Disable switch is placed in the ENABLE position For a successful power up test the red LED comes ON the yellow LEDs cycle the red LED goes OFF and the green LED comes ON A power up fault is indicated by the green LED lighting briefly followed by the red LED turning ON The yellow LEDs will cycle stop briefly and cycle again The top four yellow LEDs are counting in hex from 1 to 15 The fault condition can be found by comparing the yellow LED pattern at the pause with those shown in Table 4 2 12 and Table 4 2 13 When the Coordinator Processor passes the power up diagnostics it then requests a program load from the Nonvolatile Memory If it cannot access the nonvolatile memory all of the yellow LEDs will flash simultaneously approxim
162. Ds 0 00 e ee eeeee 1 2 34 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output 1 2 34 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuses 2 00 cee eee eee 1 2 34 10P5701 for Operator Interface Applications 0 cee eee 1 2 35 10P5756 for Operator Interface Applications 0 cee eee 1 2 36 Distribution Blocks oe RR y e aie aa 1 2 37 Distribution Block Fuses 0 eee eh 1 2 37 Section 3 System Power Supply Units 1 3 1 Physical Description resi eei arn cece Ie 1 3 1 FIOUSING curas bep eee erty ined eee iU eene pe begs ued 1 3 3 Power Supply Modules ooccccoccccccccccn 1 3 5 Electrical Bescription AA oe ee aA GSAT orn Pea A SGA Dees 1 3 6 Planning x oiov ton erue A Meakin e eed 1 3 7 System Cabinet and AC Wiring 0 00 0 c cece eee 1 3 7 System Cabinet DC Power Configurations 000 cece eee eee 1 3 8 Alarm Wing 2i dern a ae si ee ERES EM E E 1 3 11 Special Conditions 0oooooocococcncnr ro 1 3 12 INStallationy roet a k e A O ee NE he Re eee SS 1 3 13 Physical Installation htt eh ta ea eee hes 1 3 13 Installing a Housing in a Cabinet lilius 1 3 13 Installing a Power Supply in a Housing sees 1 3 14 Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs 00 000 cee en 1 3 15 M lhteriariCe uote oet eee ead a ire n ene eee e s 1 3 16 General Maintenance 0 00 cece eect eee eee 1 3 16 Replacing a Co
163. Ds and Test Points 5 5 10 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers ssseeseleeesese 5 5 11 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses 00 cece e eee eee 5 5 12 Smart Transmitter FIC 1 0 0 nh 5 5 13 Smart Transmitter FIC LEDs and Test Points 00 0005 5 5 13 Smart Transmitter FIC Jumpers 0 000 c cece eee eee 5 5 14 Smart Transmitter FIC Fuses 0 000 cece eee eee 5 5 14 Isolated Analog Input FIC 0 cece eee 5 5 15 Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points 5 5 16 Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers 000 ee eee eee 5 5 17 Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses 0 00 cee eee eee 5 5 18 Analog Input Field Wiring 0 eects 5 5 19 Analog Output FICS icerir hanka aenar rh 5 5 20 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC ooccccccccccccccccc 5 5 21 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points 5 5 24 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers 000 0 c cece eee 5 5 25 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses 000 ee eeeee eee 5 5 26 Isolated Analog Output FIC 0 0 00 cece eee 5 5 27 Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points 5 5 29 Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers 0 000 cece eee eee eee 5 5 30 Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses 00 cece eee eee 5 5 32 Analog FIC Extender Card oooocccccccccc nn aaneen 5 5 33 Output Bypass Unit OBU 0
164. E NUMBER E NET HOST MAC ADDRESS B E NET 10 BASET LI E NET 10 BASE2 J Figure 3 4 7 RNI Write on Label RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 11 Ethernet Hubs A hub provides the common connection point for devices on the process network and a connection to the plant LAN Fisher Rosemount supports use of these hubs from the 3Com LinkBuilder series e TP 8 8 port Unmanaged TP Hub 10P55200001 115V e FMS II 12 Port TP Hub 10P55200002 Autosensing power supply e FMS II 24 port TP Hub 10P55200003 Autosensing power supply The hubs require a source of AC power NOTE The material below has been freely adapted from 3Com product literature TP 8 Hub The LinkBuilder TP 8 8C16180 is a basic twisted pair hub offering cost effective connectivity for small process networks It does not support network management The TP 8 Hub e Provides eight RJ 45 ports e Can be connected to another TP 8 hub to provide fourteen RJ 45 ports e Provides one thin coaxial BNC port for backbone connections e Provides full compliance with IEEE 802 3 10BaseT standards e Has LED status indicators which make faults easy to identify e Has bandwidth utilization LEDs to show network utilization e ls powered by an external AC power adapter RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 12 FMS Il Hubs The LinkBuilder FMS II Flexible Media Stack hub family provides t
165. FEM 8 4 8 AC DC Power Supply battery 9 1 27 active hardware alarms 9 1 13 Analog I O FIC Input Points 8 5 9 Output Points 8 5 4 Console Power Regulator Card voltages 9 1 24 I O calibration 9 1 18 LEDs 9 1 12 RTD FEM calibration 8 4 9 Serial I O FIC Analog Input Points 8 1 6 Analog Output Points 8 1 3 System Power Supply voltages 9 1 26 Temperature Input FIC 8 2 6 Thermocouple FEM 8 4 5 Thermocouple Sensor calibration 8 2 6 Voltage Input FEM 8 4 5 voltages 9 1 19 cleaner kit tape drive 9 1 4 cleaning cabinet door filter 9 1 9 cabinet fan screen 9 1 9 cabinet filters and screens 9 1 8 cabinet surfaces 9 1 11 Command Console Fan filter 9 1 6 Command Console glare filter 9 1 14 console fan filter 9 1 6 ControlFile Fan Filter 9 1 9 floppy disk drives 9 1 4 Ol Card Cage filter 9 1 10 tape drives 9 1 4 trackball 9 1 5 Cold Junction Compensator 5 1 57 color codes DC wiring 1 4 10 COMM TERM PNL Il 6 2 2 COMM TERMINATION PNL 6 2 2 Command Console cleaning CRT 9 1 14 degaussing CRT 9 1 15 fan filter 9 1 6 hard disk drive removal 9 2 6 keyboard tape or floppy disk removal 9 2 9 parts replacement 9 2 5 Command Entry Keyboard Pedestal Command Console 3 2 4 Index SV Index 6 COMMAND ENTRY SWITCH MATRIX 3 2 4 Communication Card MUX 5 3 5 communication wiring Multipoint I O 6 1 10 Communications Connect Card 5 1 4 Communications Connect Card ll 5 1 4 5 1 10 jumpers 5 1 10 Communi
166. FISHER ROSEMOUNT RS3 Service Manual Volume 1 August 1998 U S Manual PN 10P56980201 A 4 Size Manual PN 10P56980211 10P56985101 10P56985111 Fisher Rosemount Systems Inc 1987 1998 All rights reserved Printed in the U S A Components of the RS3 distributed process control system may be protected by U S patent Nos 4 243 931 4 370 257 4 581 734 Other Patents Pending RS3 is a mark of one or more of the Fisher Rosemount group of companies All other marks are property of their respective owners The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees express or implied regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products without notice Fisher Rosemount Systems Inc 12000 Portland Avenue South Burnsville Minnesota 55337 U S A Telephone 612 895 2000 TWX Telex 192177 FAX 612 895 2044 Comment Form RS3 Manuals Service Manual 10P569802x1 Please give us your feedback to help improve this manual Never Rarely Sometimes Usually 1 Do you actually use this manual when you are configuring making changes or enhancements operating the system troubleshooting other 2 Does this manual answer your questions 3 What could
167. File 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator has LEDs to indicate card status Figure 4 2 6 shows the LEDs and test points for the Power Regulator Test points are accessible from the top of the ControlFile RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 10 LEDs Input capacitors are charging during card insertion with 5 V POWER card cage power on CHARGE The proper procedure is to slowly insert the card into the DS10 ControlFile Motherboard connector the LED will blink on briefly INPUT B STATUS Bus B 24 VDC or 30 VDC from the DC distribution DS9 system is within operating tolerance Normally OFF if only one DC bus is used INPUT A STATUS Bus A 24 VDC or 30 VDC from the DC distribution DS8 system is within operating tolerance 5 ope The 5 VDC regulator is within operating tolerance CARD FAULT The 5 VDC regulator section is out of operating tolerance DS4 Replace the card 5V ik ad Replace Fuse F2 Power to the 5 VDC Power Regulator CARD GOOD 5 VDC Supply is within operating tolerance DS1 Does not include status of the DC buses ECE EE Test Points YELLOW 5 VDC Regulator WHITE 5 V Relative current indication A 9 9g Figure 4 2 6 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 11 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumpers The ControlF
168. G Output Gard FUSES i His ek pl ine cake e FREU Eua 1 4 6 DC Distribution Cabling sssssssseeessm RII 1 4 7 Standard DC Distribution Cabling 0 0 0 cece ee 1 4 7 Redundant DC Power Distribution Cabling 000 cece 1 4 8 DC Power Distribution System Color Codes 000 eee eee ee 1 4 10 Section 5 Redundant Power 2 iios eee cee deere ewe eee eae 1 5 1 RS3 Power Contents SV iii List of Figures RS3 Power Figure Page 1 1 1 AC Distribution System 0 0 cece eae 1 1 2 1 1 2 Single Feed AC Entrance Panel 000 e eects 1 1 3 1 1 3 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel 0 cece eee 1 1 4 1 2 1 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Front Panel 1 2 3 1 2 2 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Functional Diagram 1 2 5 1 2 3 Power Supply With Battery Backup Panel Features 1 2 7 1 2 4 Accessing the Battery Charger Card 0 cece cece ee 1 2 10 1 2 5 Battery Charger Board Fuse and Jumper Locations 1 2 11 1 2 6 Power Supply Without Battery Backup Front Panel 1 2 13 1 2 7 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Functional Diagram 1 2 15 1 2 8 Power Supply Without Battery Backup Panel Indicators 1 2 17 1 2 9 10P5645000x and 1984 3023 000x MTCC Remote Power Supply 1 2 18 1 2 10 OI Remote Power Supply Functional Diagram 1 2 21 1 2 11 DC DC Power Supp
169. Grounding an Optical PeerWay Shaded Taps Are Grounded Each fiber optic run from the star coupler must be grounded at one and only one tap box optical or electrical The tap should have low resistance to earth ground preferably less than one ohm Both tap box A and tap box B must be grounded As an example Figure 2 2 10 shows a fiber optic PeerWay All of the shaded tap boxes are grounded LA 1 hA AA jan nr 1innr n A f Optical Tap Star Coupler nr innr an A A Optical Tap RS3 PeerWay Figure 2 2 10 Optical PeerWay Grounding Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 11 1 To ground an optical or electrical tap box 1 Free the fiber optic tap A by loosening the four captive screws that secure it to the mounting plate Refer to Figure 2 2 11 NOTE Perform this procedure before connecting the fiber optic cables to the tap boxes However if the fiber optic cables are attached to the tap do not turn the tap over Move the tap away from the mounting plate just enough to move or check the jumper position Turn the tap over to expose the circuit board Place the jumper in the GND ground position Reinstall the tap on the mounting plate Repeat the procedure for the other PeerWay tap at this location 9 Mr dm PS To prevent multiple grounds remove and check all other taps on the fiber optic connection to make sure that the jumper
170. IO16 Termination Panel Fuses ccc eee e eee eee es 6 4 16 MAIO Termination Panel ssssssssssse e nen 6 4 17 MAIO Termination Panel Installation ooooooocccccccccoconoo o 6 4 19 MAIO Termination Panel Loop Power sssssssesee rese 6 4 19 MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring ssaa aaea 6 4 20 MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring Output Points 6 4 21 MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring Input Points 6 4 22 MAIO Termination Panel labels 0 0000 cece eee eens 6 4 25 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xxiii MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers 0 00 cece eee eene 6 4 27 MAIO Termination Panel Fuses 000 cece eee eects 6 4 28 MAI32 Termination Panel 00 000 cece eh 6 4 29 MAI32 Termination Panel Installation 0 c cece eee 6 4 32 MAI32 Termination Panel Loop Power 0 c seen eee eens 6 4 32 MAI32 Termination Panel Field Wiring sls 6 4 33 MAI32 Termination Panel labels sssesseeeeeeeeeeese 6 4 33 MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers 00 cee eee eens 6 4 35 MAI32 Termination Panel Fuses 0c cece eee eens 6 4 38 Loop Power Module LPM cee eee eee eens 6 4 39 Loop Power Module LEDs 0c cece eee eet 6 4 41 Loop Power Module Fuses ce eee eee eens 6 4 41 MAIQEIMS ui Itn pad hue Sad repre casti Ege amemus 6 4 42 Analog FI
171. Jumper Locations RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors RS3 ControlFiles SV 4 3 13 Table 4 3 4 MPC5 Jumper Label 10P57520007 MPC5 JUMPER SETTINGS SELECT GIN EC IC CDA a IMAGE 4 MPC5 IMAGE FUNCTIONALITY Image Select HD6 HD8 These jumpers select one of the images shown on the label under Processor Type Four images are listed for MPC5 functionality The actual image loaded depends on the system configuration CAUTION No mixing of MPC Iis with MPC5s in a ControlFile is allowed The ControlFile Status screen has a three digit Jumper Code field that shows the placement of all jumpers This code is shown when using an MPC5 image Jumper position 1 2 is 1 and 2 3 is O The first digit is always 1 The second digit reports the positions of HD6 HD7 and HD8 as an octal number 0 7 with HD6 as the high order bit The third digit reports on HD4 HD5 and HD9 NOTE With the MPC5 the I O communication baud rate is set by software instead of by a hardware jumper as done by the MPCII and MPC The baud rate is set automatically when either the PLC or MUX image is selected Controller Processors SV 4 3 14 Table 4 3 5 ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code MPC5 Jumper MPC5 Code Image selection Image Functionality tas Additionalimage 2 Additionalimage 2 2 p M O RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 15 MPC II Jumpers MPCII jumpers differ from those
172. M Redundancy 0c cece eet tne eens 6 4 43 16 Point Input FIMS 0 eects 6 4 44 16 Point Output FIMS 0 0 teens 6 4 46 32 Pomt Input FIM onere ee Sheer ead e nma Res 6 4 48 MAIO FIM LEDET consi beue eee erue cese tute E eaters 6 4 49 MAIO FIM LED Patterns ssssssssssee n 6 4 50 Single FIM Operation lsssssssssseee III 6 4 50 Redundant FIM Operation ssssssssesesss eee 6 4 50 Failed FIM Indications ocoooccooccooccor I I 6 4 51 Section 5 Multipoint I O Marshaling Panel 6 5 1 Standard Remote Termination Panel 0 ccc cece eee e eee ee 6 5 2 Section 6 Intrinsic Safety IS ivi a rk RARE wake 6 6 1 Elcon Series 1000 IS Termination Panel 000 cece eee eee 6 6 3 Elcon Panel for Discrete Applications 0 60 cece eee eee ee 6 6 6 Elcon Panel Discrete Cross Wiring 0 600 c eect e eee 6 6 7 Elcon Discrete IS Barriers 0 00 c cece eee eee 6 6 8 Elcon Panel for Analog Applications liiis 6 6 9 Loop Power and Jumpers 0 eee ees 6 6 10 Elcon Panel Analog Cross Wiring o occoocccccoccccnc ro 6 6 10 Elcon Analog IS Barriers 0 0 cece eee 6 6 11 Elcon Panel Common Features 0000 cece eee eee eee 6 6 12 DC uio RR DE 6 6 12 Gro rndilg operetur Deo ER ete utu VS parka eR RE 6 6 12 JUmp6erS Oi 6 6 12 FUSES aet better epe d npe e eg epe obedit ee ed ers
173. OR CP IV 1984 4064 000x Coordinator Processor IV PROCESSOR IV COORDINATOR CP II 1984 1594 000x Coordinator Processor II PROCESSOR II 1984 1448 000x i COORDONATOR CP 1984 1240 000x Coordinator Processor PROCESSOR RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 21 WARNING Disable the NV Memory and then the Coordinator Processor cards before removing any card other than a PeerWay Buffer card from the ControlFile Failure to do so may result in a corrupted data transfer Table 4 2 11 gives parts replacement data Table 4 2 11 Coordinator Processor Parts Replacement mas Remus O Chess NOTE For use with MPCII MPC5 or a EMC compliant 10P57360007 combination of MPCII and MPC5 68040 microprocessor 1984 4164 000x 1984 4064 000x EMC compliant 10P50870004 CP5 CP IV 64 MHz oscillator 4 Meg RAM NOTE For use with MPCI MPCII MPC5 68020 CORO CST or a combination of MPC and MPCII 10P50870004 except where EMC compliance is required CP IV 1984 4164 000x 1984 4064 000x 64 MHz oscillator 4 Meg RAM a 68020 microprocessor NOTE For use with MPCI MPCII MPC5 or a combination of MPC I and MPCII 1984 4164 000x 64 MHz oscillator 4 Meg RAM CP IV 1984 4064 000x d i ES NOTE For use with MPCII only 68020 microprocessor 1984 1448 000x oe CP Il 1984 1594 000x 1984 1240 000x 48 MHz oscillator 512K RAM 1984 1448 000x 1984 1240 000x 40 MHz Oscillator 128K RAM CP5 Circuit Description The
174. Parts Replacement Multiplexer MUX or EOS econ A RISO non Programmable Logic Controller PLC The card has two full duplex RS 422 communications ports and no analog circuitry MUX As a MUX the RS 422 ports are used to communicate with the Multiplexer FlexTerm Each Multiplexer FlexTerm accommodates 100 inputs An additional oscillator is used exclusively on the Multiplexer Processor to set up the 9600 Baud communication rate to the FlexTerm The field inputs may be TCs RTDs Voltage and 4 20 mA The Controller can scan all 100 inputs from the FlexTerm approximately once every 7 seconds PLC As a PLC the RS 422 ports are used to communicate with the PLC FlexTerm The PLC FlexTerm changes the RS 422 protocol to RS 232 The FlexTerm can support RS 422 communications to the PLC bus as well The PLC communicates at 9600 baud with the FlexTerm Redundancy The MUX or PLC can be installed in any slot A through H It cannot be made redundant either as a MUX or as a PLC MUX and PLC LEDs The LEDs of all Controller Processor cards are essentially identical See the LED description later in this section RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 31 MUX and PLC Fuse Figure 4 3 12 shows the location of the fuse on the card Table 4 3 14 gives fuse data Figure 4 3 12 MUX and PLC Fuse Location Table 4 3 14 MUX and PLC Fuse FRSI Bussman Littelfuse em 1984 1494 000x G09140 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250V Regu
175. Power 1 3 12 1 3 13 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 3 1 4 4 1 4 5 1 4 6 1 4 7 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 Power Supply Housing AC Input and Auxiliary AC Output Schematic Diagram 00 0 e a a eee ene 1 3 16 Replacing the Fan and Grill in a Power Supply 1 3 17 Standard DC Power Distribution System lLuuussuuu 1 4 1 Redundant DC Power Distribution System 1 4 2 DC Power Distribution Bus 00ccoooccccoccccnc 1 4 4 DC Distribution Bus and DC Output Card luuuuusuuu 1 4 5 Non redundant DC Power Cable 000 cece eee eee 1 4 7 Redundant DC Power Cable 0 0 cece eee ee eee 1 4 8 Dual DC Power Cables 000s cece cette 1 4 9 Examples of Redundant System Power 00ee ee eeeee 1 5 1 Redundant AC Power and Load Sharing DC Power Supplies 1 5 2 Redundant AC Power Load Sharing DC Power Supplies and Redundant Power Buses 0 cece eee eee eens 1 5 2 Contents SV v List of Tables Table Page 1 1 1 AG Input Wiring dris ELSE tenete c Ec IS EELUPCIAERE 1 1 1 1 1 2 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses uuaa 1 1 5 1 2 1 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Parts Replacement 1 2 4 1 2 2 Power Supply With Battery Backup Indicators and Controls 1 2 8 1 2 3 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Fuses 1 2 8 1 2 4 Battery Charger Board Jumper Positions ooooooooooo 1
176. RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 75 Figure 3 7 45 shows test points and the Battery Load test switch on the OI NV RAM card You can start the battery load test by hand by closing this switch momentarily An alarm is issued if the battery fails the test a nn lt TP1 TP2 TP3TPATP5 TP6 TP7 Lj TP 8I TP 9mm Battery Load Test Switch Battery 1 EE ON OFF mm Battery 2 TP 10 7 L 4 ZH Figure 3 7 45 OI NV RAM Memory Test Points RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 76 Table 3 7 27 lists the name color and purpose of the test points Table 3 7 27 OI NV RAM Memory Test Points RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 77 OI NV RAM LED Sequences In normal operation the green LED is ON DS6 through DS8 flash for RS 422 communications DS9 through DS11 flash for RS 232 communications DS12 through DS14 flash as reads and writes are made to the RAM The boot sequence has the red LED DS2 ON with the three yellow status LEDs DS12 DS13 DS14 flashing If a power up test succeeds the green LED lights If the power up test fails the red LED will stay ON and the number of the failed test will be displayed in the status LEDs as indicated in Table 3 7 28 Table 3 7 28 OI NV RAM LED Sequences Status LEDs DS12 13 14 Failed Test pA Failure in read write tests of RAM Bad program length failed SCI image checksum or both 30 VDC power
177. RT Input Panel 00 e cece ee eee Barco CD 551 CRT Deflection Board 00 cee eee eee Barco CRT RGB Input Output Amplifier and Remote Control Barco CRT Switched Mode and EHT Power Supply Pedestal Command Console 00 cece eee eee ene Pedestal Command Console Rear View ssessue Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Layout Basic and Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface 1984 1921 000x nett n Conrac 7211 CRT Block Diagram 00 eee Conrac 7211 CRT Back View 0 cece eee MiniConsole 0 00 00 ccc ee ee eee lan Page 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 15 3 1 17 3 1 18 3 1 19 3 1 20 3 1 21 3 1 22 3 1 23 3 1 28 3 1 29 3 1 30 3 1 31 3 1 34 3 1 35 3 1 36 3 1 37 3 1 38 3 1 39 3 1 40 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 7 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 3 2 Contents 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 3 9 3 3 10 3 3 11 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 7 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 5 4 3 5 5 3 5 6 3 5 7 3 5 8 3 5 9 3 5 10 3 5 11 3 5 12 3 5 13 3 5 14 3 5 15 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 7 1 3 7 2 RS3 Consoles MiniConsole Block Diagram 000 cece eee MiniConsole Front Panel Keyboard Functional Diagram Monochrome Video Generator Functional Diagram Monochrome Video Generator LEDs 00 eee aeee Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Locatio
178. SABLE position or if the card has failed power up diagnostics The RAM NV Memory power up sequence begins when the battery control circuit detects restoration of 5 VDC A power up test sequence may take up to 1 minute and 40 seconds depending on the memory size and the condition of the RAM First the power up diagnostics are performed and then a memory check is run The red Card Bad LED will be ON during the power up diagnostics The yellow LEDs will flash as the tests are run If the power up tests fail the red Card Bad LED will stay ON The yellow status LEDs will flash as the power up tests are run A pattern will hold in the yellow LEDs for a second or two and then the sequence will repeat The pattern indicates which power up test failed Table 4 2 23 shows the pattern and its meaning The RAM is checked next The red and green LEDs will flash alternately and all of the other LEDs will blink A Cyclical Redundancy Check CRC is made on each block of RAM and the result is compared with a stored value If the CRC check fails the block of memory is cleared When this memory scrubbing operation is completed the red Card Bad LED will go OFF the green LED will go ON and the yellow LEDs will flash as the card performs its normal functions If the red LED goes off and the yellow LEDs do not flash the card has no images Download new images The yellow LEDs will flash and the card will run normally when the download is c
179. Single Strategy FlexTerm 5 5 1 5 5 4 analog wiring 5 5 5 contact wiring 5 5 5 replacement 9 2 11 SIO RTD TC 5 1 46 Small Computer System Interface See SCSI Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Analog FIC 5 1 35 installation 5 1 38 Kit 5 1 37 LEDs 5 1 40 Smart Transmitter FIC 5 5 13 fuses 5 5 14 jumpers 5 5 14 LEDs and test points 5 5 13 SMART TRANSMITTER OPTION 5 1 37 SMART XMTR FIC 5 5 13 Socket 10 2 14 solid state relay High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 45 Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 38 Sony 14 CRT 3 1 27 SRU hardware 7 1 1 SSC 4 3 25 fuses 4 3 27 LEDs 4 3 35 Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface 3 1 16 RS3 Service Manual STANDARD REMOTE TERMINATION PANEL 6 5 2 Standard Remote Termination Panel 6 3 1 6 5 2 Star Coupler 2 2 9 static pad 9 3 2 status bits analog 10 5 13 contact 10 5 13 discrete I O 10 5 13 10 5 18 pulse 10 5 13 Supervisory Computer Interface See SCI System Manager Station 3 1 1 electronics cabinet 3 7 4 System Power Supply checking voltages 9 1 26 System Resource Unit See SRU T Tandberg 5623 3 5 23 tape drive 3 5 1 3 5 23 cleaning 9 1 4 grounding 3 5 24 jumpers 3 5 25 switches 3 5 25 Tape Drive Head Cleaner Refill Kit 9 1 4 Tape Drive Head Cleaning Kit 9 3 2 TC RTD FIC 5 1 46 Temperature Input FIC 5 1 46 calibrating 8 2 1 fuse 5 1 53 jumpers 5 1 52 LEDs 5 1 51 Terminal Block Marshaling Panel Auxi
180. Station SV 3 2 1 Section 2 Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console This section covers the free standing operator interface portion of the Pedestal Command Console and the Basic Command Console The console card cage and electronics are covered in Section 6 of this chapter Peripheral devices disk tape and printer are covered in Sections 4 and 5 of this chapter Maintenance and troubleshooting of the console are covered in chapters 9 and 10 Figure 3 2 1 shows front and side views of the Pedestal Command Console Figure 3 2 2 shows the back of the console with access covers removed 7 Front View Side View Figure 3 2 1 Pedestal Command Console RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 2 Hard Disk Drive e e 30 VDC Circuit Breaker Card Cage M AC outlets only Power Pedestal Cover RS 232 Printer Output removed J346 PeerWay Tap A i J349 A IOD F qa 1 EIL ESO AN sal om PeerWay Tap B P J348 B i 0000 O 30 VDC Input J932 A QOO Hardware i i Alarm Cost 30 VDC Input co oH l Process Alarm Outpu Alarm Board AC Outlets i i Rear Column Panel I oh oo removed Access Cable Tray Cable Access Access Panel Cover Tray Panel Panel Figure 3 2 2 Pedestal
181. Supply 1 2 18 Multi FIM Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 26 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 11 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 25 NV Memory bubble 4 2 53 RAM 4 2 48 OI Bubble Memory 3 7 67 OI NV RAM 3 7 78 OI Power Supply 3 7 23 OI Processor 68000 3 7 37 OI Processor 68020 3 7 33 OI Processor 68040 3 7 29 Optical Repeater Attenuator 2 2 8 PeerWay Buffer 4 2 5 PeerWay Interface 3 7 18 PLC FlexTerm 5 4 8 Printer Interface 3 7 51 Pulse I O FIC 5 1 44 Remote Communications Termination Panel I 6 2 10 Remote Communications Termination Panel Il 6 2 8 RS422 RS232 Port I O Card 5 4 17 RS422 RS422 Port I O Card 5 4 23 SCSI 3 7 56 Smart Transmitter FIC 5 5 14 tape drive 3 5 25 Temperature Input FIC 5 1 52 VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 7 4 10 VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 7 4 13 K KEYBD INT VIDEO ISOLATOR 3 1 15 KEYBD INTERFACE VIDEO ISOLATOR 3 1 15 keyboard problems 10 3 21 KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS 3 1 12 Keyboard Electronics Board 3 1 12 jumpers 3 1 12 Touchpad 3 1 13 trackball 3 1 13 Keyboard Interface access 3 1 23 fuses 3 1 25 jumper 3 1 24 Index LEDs 3 1 24 Multitube Command Console 3 1 14 Pedestal Command Console 3 2 6 Keycap Puller 3 1 6 Keyswitch Assembly Pedestal Command Console 3 2 5 L LEDs Controller Processor 4 3 32 MPC 4 3 33 MUX 4 3 33 PLC 4 3 33 AC DC Power Supply with battery backup 1 2 7 without battery backup 1 2 16 Analog FIC 5 1 30 An
182. T contact if used must be jumpered as Normally Closed N C 10P5664000x Power supplies are interchangeable only in systems that do not use batteries The BATT switch on the replaced unit must be turned OFF The PS FAULT contact if used must be jumpered as Normally Closed N C 1984 0298 000x 1984 0390 000x or 1984 2298 000x NOTE The 1984 0390 000x and 10P5664000x power supplies are rated at 20 amps and the 1984 x298 000x and 10P5658000x power supplies are rated at 22 amps If you replace a 22 amp supply with a 20 amp supply make sure that the DC load does not exceed the rating of the replacement power supply Figure 1 2 7 shows the functional diagram The AC DC power supply uses a ferroresonant core transformer for partial regulation The transformer primary and secondary have selectable taps for 50 or 60 Hz line frequency The primary also has taps for 115 or 220 volts AC input The third winding on the primary side is isolated and has a parallel capacitor This regulates transformer output voltage by providing extra voltage to the circuit from power stored in the resonant circuit The third winding also inherently limits current NOTE Because the transformer is self regulating no other power conditioning is necessary Do not use an isolation transformer voltage regulating power source or uninterruptible power supply with a ferroresonant transformer as its output device unless it is rated at least 3 kVA for each sta
183. Termination Panel 6 3 1 6 3 23 jumpers 6 3 26 label 6 3 25 MULTI FIM TERMINATION PANEL 6 3 23 Multi Loop Controller Processor See MLC Multi Loop FlexTerm 5 5 1 replacement 9 2 11 MULTI PURPOSE CONTROLLER ll 4 3 2 MULTI STRATEGY MARSHALLING PANEL 5 1 54 5 3 10 MultiLoop FlexTerm 5 5 2 Multiplexer Controller Processor See MUX Multiplexer FEM calibrating 8 4 2 Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware 5 3 1 MULTIPLEXER PROCESSOR 4 3 30 Multipoint Analog I O See MAIO Multipoint Discrete I O See MDIO Multipoint I O address jumpers 6 1 4 addressing 6 1 4 communication wiring 6 1 10 grounding 6 1 8 installation 6 1 1 6 1 8 online replacement 6 1 6 power wiring 6 1 8 redundancy 6 1 6 scanning rate 6 1 5 system cabling 6 1 1 MultiPurpose Controller Processor See MPC MultiPurpose Controller Processor Il 4 3 2 Multitube Command Console 3 1 1 CRT Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 3 1 35 Hitachi 21 3 1 26 liyama 17 3 1 26 Mag Innovision 3 1 27 Sony 3 1 27 ViewSonic 17 3 1 26 keyboard assembly 3 1 4 keyboard electronics 3 1 12 keyboard error reporting 3 1 5 Keyboard Interface 3 1 14 Multitube Electronics Cabinet 3 7 2 MUX 4 3 30 Index Communication Card 5 3 5 fuse 4 3 31 LEDs 4 3 33 Power Regulator 5 3 4 MUX Cable Assembly 200 Points 5 3 3 MUX FEM calibrating 8 4 1 MUX FlexTerm 5 3 2 MUX Front End Modules FEMs 5 3 14 MUX MARSH PANEL 5 3 9 MUX Marshaling Panels 5 3 7 MUX Power Regulator 5
184. V Memory LEDs Test Points and Enable Disable Switch RAM NV Memory Fuse Jumper and Test Point Locations Bubble NV Memory Functional Diagram esses Bubble NV Memory LEDs and Test Points 2 45 Bubble NV Memory Fuse Locations ocoococcocccccn oo ControlFile Card Cage Front 0 00 cece eee eee MPC5 Functional Diagram sssssssee ere Page 4 1 1 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 6 4 1 8 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 8 4 2 10 4 2 11 4 2 15 4 2 17 Contents SV iv RS3 ControlFiles 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 4 3 9 4 3 10 4 3 11 4 3 12 4 3 13 4 3 14 4 3 15 MPC II Functional Diagram ooocccccccccc m8 MPC Functional Diagram ssseeesree em MPC5 Fuse and Jumper Locations cocoooccccoccccc MPC II Fuse and Jumper Locations 006 cece eens MPC I Fuse Location o occccocccccconcccn MultiLoop Controller Processor Functional Diagram MLC Fuse Locations sssssssssssesse ne SSC Fuse Locations ese cepe te cd EIU pad a Contact Controller Processor Fuse Location 0 MUX and PLC Fuse Location 00 0 cece eee eee MPC CC MUX and PLC Controller Processor LEDs and Test Polnits use eI Eee eR qeu iate Sees MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs and Test Points cp RIO OC ka ee AA de CS Controller Processor Software and
185. VDC Jumpers Model 1984 1505 000x can be jumpered for 30 volt or 24 volt DC input This Power Regulator card should be jumpered for the 30 volt DC input unless it is necessary to use the 24 volt DC input to allow a 24 volt uninterruptible power supply source to tie in with a ControlFile The card can be jumpered to supply either 3 or 6 amps at 12 volts Supplying 6 amps may put the 12 volt supply out of spec Figure 4 2 10 shows the jumper locations for the 1984 1505 000x Power Regulator card Table 4 2 8 shows the jumper positions Jumpers HD2 and HD3 use a bar that connects all pins The bar should be on HD2 for 6 amp output and on HD3 for 3 amp output HD5 HD1 HD2 HD3 F1 HD4 F2 Figure 4 2 10 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC 1984 1505 000x Jumper and Fuse RS3 ControlFiles Locations ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 19 Table 4 2 8 ControlFile Power Regulator 1984 1505 000x Jumper Positions 30 V Input 24 V Input me 9 1 IE 1 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses Figure 4 2 10 shows the 5 VDC and 12 VDC ControlFile Power Regulator fuse locations Table 4 2 9 gives the fuse values and part numbers Table 4 2 9 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses Bussman Littelfuse mem 12 VDC G09140 0044 AGC 7 1 2 311075 7 5A32 V Reg
186. Y 15AMPS OUTPUT2 O O 2 OUTPUT2 O O Figure 1 3 4 Input and Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 5 Power Supply Modules Each power supply module 12P0238X012 has a brushless DC fan to provide cooling Air flow is front to rear and the rear of the power supply module and the housing are slotted to exhaust heat Figure 1 3 5 shows a front view of a power supply module and a detail view of the label The upper right corner of the label shows the rated output wattage of the power supply module The additional information on the label includes the part number and the serial number FRS 1200W CP6103X1 CA1 12P0238X012A S N 1094 2327C Power Supply Fan Connector Label Typical LED Indicators and Current Monitor Test Points Power Switch Lock Locking iN Pawl Figure 1 3 5 Power Supply Module RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 6 Electrical Description RS3 Power Each power supply module converts AC line voltage to the DC voltage required by the equipment and field instruments The power supply module output is rated at 1200 watts The switching power supplies have universal AC inputs with power factor correction and can operate over an input range of 85 264 VAC 47 63 Hz without reconfiguration However this supply voltage will be passed t
187. Z serial data Data is then transferred to either the A or B PeerWay Buffer The programmable timer modules PTMs are used for the bus access scheme that performs time out functions This allows other devices to access the bus at given times ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 29 CP Coordinator Processor Redundancy RS3 ControlFiles Coordinator Processors CP are made redundant simply by adding a second unit The CPs must be of the same type One CP will become the primary processor the other will be the secondary Many events can cause a switch in roles between the primary and secondary CP When a switch occurs the secondary CP becomes primary and the primary becomes the secondary CP The primary CP will allow the secondary CP access to the controllers once every minute to allow it to talk to all controllers If the error statistics on the primary CP are worse than the secondary the secondary CP will switch to the primary and an appropriate alarm will be generated All errors and conditions that cause a CP switchover are prioritized If both CPs have active error conditions the one with the lowest priority error will act as primary For instance if the primary CP develops a weak RAM chip the secondary will switch in as primary If the new primary then develops a higher priority error the CP with the weak RAM chip will take over again Each CP has its own dedicated data bus to communicate with power supplies nonvol
188. a PeerWay Interface Card in a console through a PeerWay Drop Cable The Loopback circuit on the PeerWay Tap drives the local loopback relay When the loopback relay is de energized data is not transmitted to the PeerWay A transmit circuit on the tap takes the data transmitted from the node and changes it to transistor to transistor logic TTL and then to RS 422 for transmission on the PeerWay The Ready To Send RTS circuit drives the RTS signal to enable the transmitter output This circuit has a watchdog timer on its output to disable the loopback relay This prevents a problem on the node from tying up the PeerWay A feedback transmitter is used to tell the node that a time out is in progress The Receive circuit in the tap buffers data from the PeerWay to the node Communications with the node are in RS 422 format In a system with four nodes or less and in which a twinax is not needed for long communication distance all connections can be made through the PeerWay Tap with 100 ohm terminators installed on all of the twinax connectors RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 6 PeerWay Tap Test Points To access the PeerWay Tap test points loosen the four captive screws on the tap and turn the tap cover so that the board is visible There are four sets of brown and yellow test points on each board Each point is a 5 volt DC 4 75 5 25 voltage regulator with power drawn from the node to which it is connected Figure 2 1 4 shows
189. a Power Supply To remove and replace a power supply module follow the procedures below The housing and power supply modules can be removed from a cabinet as a unit however removing the power supply modules from the housing first makes the housing lighter and easier to handle NOTE System Power Supply Units cannot be used in a redundant bus scheme with AC DC power supplies NOTE Because of the wide variety of existing installations it is not possible to include procedures for replacing an AC DC power supply and AC entrance panel with a System Power Supply Unit If your installation requires such a change consult with your Fisher Rosemount Systems representative or sales office for assistance Removing a Power Supply Housing from a System Cabinet RS3 Power To remove a power supply housing from a system cabinet 1 Place all external circuit breakers that control AC power inputs to the power supply housing in the OFF position 2 After initiating an approved lockout procedure disconnect the AC input or inputs from the terminal blocks on the right side of the housing and disconnect any wiring to auxiliary outputs 3 Disconnect the DC outputs and alarm wiring from the terminals on the left side of the housing Note that the DC power cables and associated cabinet bus bars could still be powered if the load is backed up by a redundant power source located elsewhere The alarm wiring could also be powered by an external s
190. able 4 2 26 gives fuse data Table 4 2 26 RAM NV Memory Fuse Data FRSI Bussman Littelfuse m3 G09140 0037 AGC 4 311004 4 A 32 V Regular NV Memory and Powering Down the ControlFile Perform the Disk Shutdown DS command before powering down the console This will purge the cache and prevent possible loss of data First disable the NV Memory card and then the primary and secondary Coordinator Processor cards by placing the ENABLE DISABLE switches to the DISABLE position The ControlFile cards can now be pulled RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 52 When powering up the ControlFile first enable the NV Memory card and then enable the primary and secondary Coordinator Processor cards Bubble NV Memory The Bubble NV Memory uses Magnetic Bubble Memory MBM modules for data storage Figure 4 2 22 shows the function diagram for a Bubble Nonvolatile Memory card Nonvolatile Data amp Control 1 2 Megabyte Capacity n Control Magen Upper Circuit Bytes 8 Bits 16K x 16 i 1 Megabit Static Lower o Control OK RAM d olatile Circuit Buffer 8 Bits Controller Bytes Control L e Circuit Bytes SYNC Bus Enabispisable Buffers Control 11 Megan NEG Circuit Bytes e Buffer Control Circuit Circuit Figure 4 2 22 Bubble NV Memory Functional Diagram The card is fused for 5 volts and 12 volts The 12 volts is us
191. abled but only after the CP passes power up diagnostic tests and data is downloaded from the Nonvolatile Memory If a redundant backup CP is disabled the backup ceases to perform background tests and tells the primary CP that it is out of service It can return to backup status after it passes power up diagnostic tests and after data is downloaded from the Nonvolatile Memory NOTE If the CP switch is disabled and then quickly enabled the CP may refuse to boot up Wait for the red LED to come on before throwing the switch again ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 32 RS3 ControlFiles LEDs Flashes at the beginning of a new time interval counter TIC period one tic is 1 4 second The system operates on DS10 a 1 4 second data transfer rate for all PeerWay nodes electrical drops The Coordinator Processor is communicating with a CONT Controller via the Motherboard With redundant DS9 Coordinator Processors this LED indicates which one is active BUS A The Coordinator Processor is using PeerWay A to DS8 transmit or receive data BUS B The Coordinator Processor is using PeerWay B to DS7 transmit or receive data RTS PEERWAY The Ready To Send signal is active and data DS6 should be transmitting on one of the two PeerWays 5 V FUSE BLOWN Replace Fuse F1 supplies 5 VDC to the Coordinator DS3 Processor A fault has been detected on the Coordinator CARD FAULT Processor or the Enable
192. ables each power supply in a housing to be connected to a separate AC source The chassis of the power supply housing is internally bonded to the ground terminal of each AC input terminal block INPUT 1 is routed directly to PS1 the power supply module on the right side of the housing and is routed to AUXILIARY OUTPUT 1 through the AUX OUT 1 circuit breaker INPUT 2 is routed directly to PS2 the power supply module on the left side of the housing and is routed to AUXILIARY OUTPUT 2 through the AUX OUT circuit breaker see Figure 1 3 1 and Figure 1 3 4 Separate 5 position terminal blocks are provided on the front left hand side of the housing to access the alarm relay contacts and interlock for each power supply see Figure 1 3 1 Figure 1 3 2 and Figure 1 3 3 Terminal blocks circuit breakers and all wiring connections are on the front of the housing The housing does not require side or rear access Auxiliary O O AC Input PS1 Output 1 vd Circuit AUX OUr 1 PS Break ON PUTA o INPUT 1 INPUT 1 rea M L es 26avac HON Auxiliary AC 50 60 Hz Os O Po as Output 1 Os OL x OFF AuxiLiARY lO Ol N AUXILIARY Auxiliary 1SAMPS OUTPUT y OUTPUT 4 a Output 2 g Circuit PS2 aaa Breaker oe Y Os Oji L AC Input ON se zea vao HOON N meura PS2 50 60 Hz O O uH OOl Auxiliary AC OON EN Output 2 OFF AUXILIARY AUXILIAR
193. ace Power Regulator NG d a SCSI Card Power Switch and Cable OI Processor ODDOIODIOD DIO OIOOIODI OO Figure 3 7 6 Ol Card Cage Front These versions are available e Ol Card Cage EMC compliant 10P52820001 e Ol Card Cage 1984 0660 000x Table 3 7 2 OI Card Cage Parts Replacement Part Number Replaces Comments All installations except MiniConsole Enhanced Command 10P52820001 1984 0660 000X Console ECC and BCC Supports single tube only 1984 0660 000X 10P52820001 Only where EMC compliance is not a requirement The Ol Card Cage motherboard is the central signal distribution point for all console lines There are no active components or fuses on the motherboard RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 8 The following are routed through the motherboard e DC distribution bus e DC power switch e Dual PeerWay interface e Fan e CRT screen e Keyboards e Printer e Magnetic storage media floppy disk or hard disk and tape e Power Regulator e Video Generator e PeerWay Interface e Printer Interface e Nonvolatile Memory e Disk Drive or SCSI Interface e Ol Processor RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 9 Circuit card components face to the left The bottom 20 pins component and solder side are assigned individual functions according to the card slot Pin numbering begins at the bottom and goes
194. age Comparators 30 V A 5 V Peat 12 V 5V Regulator with current limit and overvoltage protection 12V Regulator with current limit and overvoltage protection 9 V Unreg A gt e gt 9 V Unreg B 45V gt RTN 12 V 30 V B RS3 Consoles 2 To Address and Data Bus Figure 3 7 14 Ol Power Supply Functional Diagram Input power from power buses A and B is diode isolated and fed through two fuses F1 and F2 F1 feeds the regulators and F2 feeds power to the DC fan Each fuse has a red LED indicator OI Card Cage RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 21 The 30 VDC supply is applied to the 5 volt switching regulator circuit This circuit supplies regulated 5 volts and unregulated 9 volts A voltage sensing and integration network regulates the supply by referencing the oscillations of the 5 volt switching regulator The regulator chip limits current The circuit has an overvoltage protection circuit If voltage goes above a set level an SCR is turned on the output is shorted and fuse F1 is blown The 12 volt regulator controls the state of the pass transistor as the buffer integrator senses voltage changes The regulator output is filtered and protected from over voltage conditions LEDs indicate supply status Voltage comparators give a stable voltage s
195. all Computer System Interface RS3 Consoles The Small Computer System Interface SCSI card in the Ol Card Cage provides the interface to hard disks magnetic tape drives floppy disks optical disks printers and local area networks These versions are in use e 1984 3301 0001 marked SCSI BOARD 2 on the PWA e 1984 1140 0001 and 0004 marked Ol SCSI HOST ADAPTER on the PWA The SCSI card performs the following functions e Allows alarm messages to be sent from console to console over the SCSI interface bus e Provides data transfer from mass storage devices tapes and disks to the OI Processor Card e Provides the host computer with peripheral device independence by translating SCSI commands into disk or tape commands Table 3 7 19 shows parts replacement data Table 3 7 19 SCSI Card Parts Replacement Part Number Characteristics Requires Ol 68040 Processor with 1984 1140 0001 a minimum boot ROM of 10 08 NOTE You cannot mix NOTE See the Software Release 1984 3301 000x 3301 and 1140 boards Notes for the current boot ROM to in a Multitube console be used with your version of software NOTE With a disk only console SCSI termination is required Use 1984 3301 0001 with the proper termination jumper settings Table 3 7 21 or use 1984 1140 0003 which has termination resistors OI Card Cage SV 3 7 53 Figure 3 7 34 is the functional diagram of the SCSI Board 2 RAM 1 RAM
196. alled on COM2 Under UPS Configuration e Select Power failure signal select Negative for UPS Interface Voltages e Select Low battery signal at least 2 minutes select Negative for UPS Interface Voltages e Select Remote UPS Shutdown select Positive for UPS Interface Voltages Under UPS Service e Set Time between power failure and initial warning message to O seconds e Set Delay between warning messages to 30 seconds e Click on OK RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 18 RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station SV 3 5 1 Section 5 Disk and Tape Drives This section covers the disk and tape devices used with consoles and PeerWay interface devices e Hard disk drive Winchester e Floppy disk drive e Magnetic tape drive RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 2 Hard Disk Drive RS3 Consoles Hard Winchester disks used with the Multitube Command Console Pedestal Command Console and System Resource Unit include 10P58570001 Quantum QM32100 2 1 Gigabyte 10P58050001 Quantum Thunderbolt 540 Meg 10P5665000x 3 5 inch IBM Deskstar 540 540 Meg Unformatted 10P52800002 3 5 inch Quantum ProDrive LPS 270S 270 Meg Unformatted 1984 3500 000x 3 5 inch Quantum ProDrive LPS 170S 170 Meg Unformatted 1984 3100 000x 3 5 inch Quantum ProDrive LPS 105S 102 Meg Formatted 1984 2780 000x 3 5 inch Quantum ProDrive 80S 100 Meg Unformatted 1984 2307 000x 5 25 inch Quantum Q280
197. alog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard 5 1 36 Analog Transfer Card 5 1 16 CC 4 3 33 Character Graphics Video Generator 3 7 44 checking 9 1 12 Contact FIC 5 2 25 ControlFile 5 and 12 V DC Power Regulator 4 2 16 ControlFile 5V DC Power Regulator 4 2 9 CP 4 2 29 DC Output Card 1 4 5 Discrete FIM 6 3 50 Fiber Optic I O Converter 6 2 16 Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 16 Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 29 Keyboard Interface 3 1 24 LPM 6 4 41 MAIO FIM 6 4 49 Mark 1 Remote Power Supply 1 2 31 1 2 34 MiniConsole Floppy Interface 3 3 13 MLC 4 3 35 Monochrome Video Generator 3 3 9 MUX Power Regulator 5 3 5 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 10 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 24 NV Memory bubble 4 2 52 RAM 4 2 44 OI Bubble Memory 3 7 65 OI NV RAM 3 7 74 OI Power supply 3 7 22 OI Processor 68000 3 7 36 OI Processor 68020 3 7 32 OI Processor 68040 3 7 29 Optical Repeater Attenuator 2 2 8 Output Bypass Card 5 1 21 PeerWay Buffer 4 2 4 Pixel Graphics Video Generator 3 7 41 Printer Interface 3 7 49 Pulse I O FIC 5 1 43 RS3 Service Manual SV Index 11 PX 2 3 7 RS422 RS232 Port I O Card 5 4 16 RS422 RS422 Port I O Card 5 4 22 SCSI 3 7 55 Smart Transmitter Daughterboard 5 1 40 Smart Transmitter FIC 5 5 13 SSC 4 3 35 Temperature Input FIC 5 1 51 VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 7 4 15 VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel 7 4 7 LFD See Line Fault Detection Line Fault Detection 6 6 20 Local
198. an maintain the RAM in continuous data retention mode for approximately the times listed in Table 4 2 22 The batteries should be disabled if the RAM NV Memory is not being used for data retention and normal 5 VDC is not available This prevents unnecessary discharge of the batteries Table 4 2 22 RAM NV Memory Retention Because RAM cells that have been damaged by static electricity discharge draw considerably more power than undamaged cells it is possible that battery drain in the standby condition can be much higher than normal This can result in shortened battery life ARAM NV Memory card that shows an abnormal BRAM current draw should be returned to the factory for repair If a battery requires replacement both batteries should be replaced and the battery manufacture date entered on the label area provided on the board Remove one battery at a time to allow the other battery to power the RAM It is recommended that a disk backup be made of the ControlFile static data prior to changing the batteries A PeerWay boot of the Coordinator Processor will be required when a RAM NV Memory card is installed unless the RAM already contains the required software A PeerWay boot will also be required if the RAM is somehow erased RAM NV Memory LEDs and Test Points Figure 4 2 20 shows the LEDs Test Points and the Enable Disable Switch on the RAM Nonvolatile Memory LED sequences are shown in the next paragraph RS3 ControlFiles Contro
199. and battery backup circuits are diode isolated from each other to prevent loading in case either circuit fails The battery test circuit consists of a 100 Hz oscillator divided down to 24 hours and 5 12 seconds Five minutes after power is applied a test is performed on the batteries under a 16 amp load for 5 12 seconds The test is automatically repeated every 24 hours The test may also be initiated manually If the battery voltage drops below 20 volts a red LED lights and the alarm relay is activated NOTE A manually initiated battery test will not be permitted until approximately five minutes after power up or after a previous manual test 1 To Access the Battery Charger card refer to Figure 1 2 4 1 Remove the four screws securing cover A and remove cover A 2 Remove the single screw securing cover B and open cover B 3 Disconnect the batteries plug G 4 Push the upper edge of the Battery Charger circuit card C toward the rear of the power supply just enough to free it from the standoff Pull up the card slightly to free it from the card connector oo Disconnect cable D from connector J193 7 Lift the card out of the power supply far enough to note the orientation of connectors JO and J192 E On connector JO the orange wire is nearest the large heat sink on connector J192 the yellow wire is nearest T1 8 Disconnect the cables 9 Separate the two cards F 10 Position the jumpers as desired Power Suppl
200. aphics Coprocessor Graphics Display Processor Processor Memory Bus Controller Interface f Buffer Y gt D A Converter A Y Alarm p Output 4 Board Good Latch A Aani p 4 is Output Board Fault DEI Figure 3 7 25 Pixel Graphics Video Generator Functional Diagram The inputs to the Pixel Graphics Video Generator include address lines and data lines from the Console Processor through the console motherboard The input signals include the DTACK signal for synchronization the SYSTEM CLOCK signal and the RESET signal OI Card Cage SV 3 7 40 RS3 Consoles The output signals of the Pixel Graphics Video Generator include red blue and green color signals and alarm contact signals The color signals are sent to the CRT monitor The alarm contact signals are sent to the Alarm Output Panel Video information goes out with the red blue and green color signals In addition the sync signal is superimposed on the green color signal There are three major parts of the Pixel Graphics Video Generator e the 82786 graphics coprocessor e the memory e the video output section The 82786 graphics coprocessor includes a graphics processor a display processor a memory controller 1 Meg video RAM and a bus interface unit The 82786 graphics processor draws all geometric objects and characters with attributes such as color texture path rotation and proportional spacing The display processor takes the bitmaps generated by the gr
201. aphics processor or external processor organizes the data and displays the bitmaps as a window on the screen The display processor generates and synchronizes the Horizontal Synch Vertical Synch and Blank signals to the CRT display The console processor loads a character set into memory on power up The bus interface unit controls communication between the 82786 coprocessor and the Console Processor The memory array has a 2 Meg capacity currently stuffed to 1 Meg Sixteen bits of data can be accessed at one time either by the coprocessor or by the console processor The video output section includes three digital to analog converters DACs that convert the digital signal from the display processor into analog signals that drive the red blue and green electron guns The 4 bit digital signal from the display processor defines the pixel color by pointing to an address in an array Each address has 24 bits divided into 3 sets of 8 bits each Each set of 8 bits defines color intensity for the red blue or green color signal In the output section a parallel interface unit drives the blanking signal the LEDs and the alarm contact and tests the outputs As part of the testing the parallel interface unit takes the voltage comparators output and checks synch level green level red level and blue level for frequency and amplitude Output of the voltage comparators appears as horizontal red blue and green lines on the CRT during power up
202. arate bases for each subassembly are available for the Main Trackball and Option Keyboards Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 7 Main Keyboard The Main Keyboard is the flat panel membrane key part of the Operator Keyboard assembly The keyboard top may be replaced with the Main Keyboard Replacement Subassembly 1984 1695 000x The subassembly has no base or cable The Main Keyboard uses the Keyboard Electronics board 1984 2871 O00x or 1984 1970 000x They are completely interchangeable NOTE The same Keyboard Electronics board with different jumper settings is also used in the Option Keyboard Table 3 1 2 gives parts replacement data Table 3 1 2 Main Keyboard Parts Replacement Replaces Characteristics Keyboard Electronics 1984 2871 000x 1984 1970 000x 68HCO05 Keyboard Electronics boards are completely interchangeable Keyboard E as E 2 Keyboard Electronics boards are Electronics 1992 19 0 SOBOX 1904 gr Dax completely interchangeable Main Keyboard Replacement 1984 1695 000x Keyboard top Without base or cable Subassembly Jumpers HD1 through HD4 or J1 through J4 on the Keyboard Electronics board must be set to indicate that the board is being used with the Main Keyboard Jumper positions are shown in Table 3 1 3 NOTE The table printed on some boards refers to HD1 HD4 as J1 J4 Table 3 1 3 Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper P
203. ately once per second This indicates that the Coordinator Processor is waiting for a disk PeerWay boot Check to see that the Nonvolatile Memory is enabled and properly seated ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 34 Table 4 2 12 CP Fault Indications Green LED OFF Red LED ON Yellow LED Conditions Fault Condition CPU Test fault Boot ROM Checksum fault Vector Test fault Watchdog Timer fault Nondestructive RAM Destructive RAM Test or EDAC fault Synch Bus Test Level 1 amp 2 and checks on interrupts RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 35 Table 4 2 13 CP Fault Indications Green LED ON Then OFF Red LED ON Yellow LED Conditions Fault Condition Nonvolatile Memory write test failed before the PeerWay boot procedure was performed The Nonvolatile Memory card should be replaced No Nonvolatile Memory card is present or the Nonvolatile Memory card switch is in the DISABLE position Checksum invalid after load If the problem persists a nonvolatile memory reload from disk may be necessary Uncorrectable error detected in CP card communications The CP card should be replaced Nonvolatile memory initialize failed Nonvolatile Memory card problem See Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Nonvolatile memory table checksum bad Nonvolatile Memory card problem See Chapter 10 Troubleshooting No program image stored
204. atile memory and all controllers All cards other than the CP and the PeerWay Buffers have two sets of buffers for addresses and data Thus should an open or short happen on any card the redundant CP can still operate unaffected Although the two Coordinator Processor boards operate on different buses they must still communicate with each other A dedicated communications bus is provided to allow redundant Coordinator Processors to communicate directly with each other Each Coordinator Processor has dedicated 16 bit wide read and write buffers that are used to transfer data between Coordinator Processors The redundant Coordinator Processors also use the static RAM area in the NV Memory to exchange information Messages from the primary CP are deposited in the nonvolatile memory Then while the primary CP is communicating with the controllers the secondary CP accesses the nonvolatile memory reads the message and leaves its message for the primary CP ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 30 RS3 ControlFiles The conditions that cause a CP switch are e The operator performs a manual switch from the ControlFile Status screen e The primary CP no longer communicates with the backup CP e The primary CP communicates with the backup CP but has a higher priority error condition than the backup CP CP error conditions listed in decreasing priority are Backplane data integrity error PeerWay health Primary CP cannot see all
205. ators Figure 3 7 37 shows the jumper locations on the card Table 3 7 20 shows the SCSI ID jumper settings G R Y Y cx Y HDO HD1 HD2 X gt E Y HD3 x men 1 sl Y en Y Figure 3 7 37 SCSI Board 2 1984 3301 000x Jumper Locations Table 3 7 20 SCSI Board 2 1984 3301 000x ID Jumper Setting RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 57 Bus termination is used only when the card is at the physical end of the bus and there is only one other terminated device on the bus Table 3 7 21 shows the SCSI Bus Terminator jumper settings NOTE With a disk only console the bus termination jumper on this board must be enabled Table 3 7 21 SCSI Board 2 1984 3301 000x Bus Terminator Jumper Setting Enabled Diskonly Consol Disabled Normal seti OI Card Cage SV 3 7 58 1984 1140 0001 Ol SCSI Host Adapter RS3 This card has two sets of jumpers to select addressing The SCSI DEVICE ID jumpers set the data bus to communicate by using the correct ID SCSI BUS ID jumpers tell the SCSI controller communications chip its address Figure 3 7 38 shows the jumper locations on the console SCSI card Set both jumpers at address 2 if the card is installed in a Pedestal Command Console NOTE Both sets of jumpers must be set to the same address RN3 RN4 RN6 Figure 3 7 38 Ol SCSI Host Adapter 1984
206. attery voltage falls below 20 V during the test the BATT TEST BATT FAULT LED lights and the battery alarm activates Pushbutton NOTE The battery cannot be tested until the system has been running for at least five minutes or until five minutes after the last battery test AC IN Indicator Orange Indicates that AC input is present This is a series of LEDs indicating the relative current being delivered to the OUTPUT CURRENT DC distribution system by the AC DC power supply It indicates the load Bar Graph LED share provided by the power supply with a readout in 3 amp intervals Power Red supplies should be within 1 to 2 LEDs of the others on the DC distribution system for proper load sharing PS FAULT The 30 volt DC output dropped below 26 volts The power supply alarm is LED DS1 Red actuated when this LED is on PS NORM The DC output voltage and battery status if the battery is used with the LED DS2 Green header jumper enabled is in normal working condition The battery has failed the periodic load test Approximately once every 24 hours the unit automatically tests the batteries under a 16 amp load for five BATT FAULT seconds If battery voltage drops below 20 volts DC 24 volts nominal the LED DS3 Red BATT FAULT LED will light the PS NORM LED will go out and the battery fault alarm will activate The battery fault alarm will also activate if the battery test fails AC DC Power Supply With
207. backed up by a redundant power source located elsewhere Personal injury and equipment damage can occur if a DC Distribution Bus or cable is accidentally shorted Turn off any backup power sources 2 Position the power supply housing on the EIA rails Provide sufficient support to hold the housing in place until the flange lock screws are installed and tightened 3 Install the four M6 Phillips Screws with nylon splash G12215 2006 0116 and M6 cage nuts G53426 0601 0716 and tighten them until the housing is securely attached to the cabinet rails System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 14 Connect DC output and alarm wiring as required for your installation Connect the AC inputs to the input terminal blocks on the right side of the housing front panel Install power supply modules in the housing see nstalling a Power Supply in a Housing following After following appropriate procedures for energizing circuits place all circuit breakers that control cabinet AC power in the ON position NOTE Be sure to place the startup voltage jumpers on the Ol and ControlFile power regulators in the 24 Volt position when using a System Power Supply Unit Installing a Power Supply in a Housing RS3 Power The following procedure describes installation of a power supply module in the housing 1 Ensure that the AC power switch on the front of the power supply module is in the off O position and that the locking pawl is in the
208. batteries RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 45 Power Microprocessor to BRAM BRAM Reset Signal Enable Disable Signal Power Control Circuits 5 VDC From ControlFile Battery Voltage Isolated Supply Diode Isolation Current Monitoring Signal to Microprocessor Battery Voltage Check Y Low Battery LEDs Battery Test Points Low Battery Alarm Battery 1 Battery 2 Figure 4 2 19 RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit When the 5 VDC supply raises to the threshold level the battery control circuit acts to restore normal BRAM operation The battery control circuit continuously monitors the voltage of each battery If a battery voltage falls below the limit a Low Battery Alarm is generated to the Coordinator Processor and the proper Low Battery LED is lighted Test points are provided to allow direct measurement of battery voltage The microprocessor initiates a BRAM current draw test once every 24 hours The current used by the BRAM is measured and reported by the battery control circuit This can be used to detect static electricity damage to BRAM cells or other abnormal BRAM power conditions Damaged cells typically draw a much larger current than do normal cells RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 46 Two 3 6 V AA size lithium batteries are used The batteries were selected for their reliability and long life New batteries c
209. be changed in this manual to make it more useful Errors and Problems Please note errors or problems in this manual including chapter and page number of affected information if applicable or send a marked up copy of the affected page s May we contact you about your comments Name Company Phone Date Fisher Rosemount FAX 612 895 2044 Thank you Name Company Address Fisher Rosemount Systems Inc RS3 User Documentation Mail Station G30 12000 Portland Avenue South Burnsville MN 55337 U S A Seal with tape FISHER ROSEMOUNT RS3 SV v Service Manual About This Manual The Service Manual provides information on service calibration maintenance and troubleshooting RS3 hardware The Service Manual provides a brief idea of the function of each device along with details of cabling LEDs jumpers and fuses Installation planning data is covered in the Site Preparation and Installation Manual SP Devices are arranged in functional groups within the Service Manual To quickly find specific information use the Index You can look up a device by name part number or the legend printed on the silkscreen An abstract of the service data appears in the Service Quick Reference Guide SQ which is small enough to be readily portable Factory Repair Items Parts of devices that are listed as replacement parts are permitted to be replaced in the field with the s
210. ble 4 3 5 translates the Jumper Code Controller Processors SV 4 3 18 Table 4 3 7 ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code MPC2 Jumper Processor MPC2 Functionality Image Selection Image Functionality e A Red with an MPCII Image MPC Jumpers MPCI jumpers are essentially identical to the other CP cards See the jumper description at the end of this section for MPCI jumpers RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 19 MPC Fuses Table 4 3 8 gives fuse data for the MPC MPCII and the MPC5 Fuse locations are shown in Figure 4 3 5 MPC5 Figure 4 3 6 MPCII and Figure 4 3 7 MPCI MPC5 10P57520007 Table 4 3 8 MPCI MPCII and MPC5 Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse G09140 0034 AGC 3 312003 3 A 250 V Regular MPCI 1984 2500 000x MPC II 10P50400006 F1 G09140 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250 V Regular 1984 4068 000x G09140 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250 V Regular Figure 4 3 7 MPCI Fuse Location RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 20 MLC MultiLoop Controller Processor RS3 ControlFiles There are two MultiLoop Controller Processor MLC versions e MLC 1984 1439 000x Marked MULTILOOP PROCESSOR on the PWA e MLC 1984 1249 000x Marked MULTISTRATEGY PROCESSOR on the PWA The MLC has eight RS 422 communication ports and 16 analog inputs One MultiLoop FlexTerm is connected to the Controller Processor through two cables The upper cable connected from
211. bracket NOTE A cooling fan assembly is required under the slot that holds the power supply RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 37 Distribution Blocks The AC and DC distribution blocks have all like terminals jumpered together on the input side Jumper the neutrals with an internal bar The active terminals are jumpered with an external bridging jumper which must not be removed The input side is marked with an I CAUTION Input power must be connected to the input side of the distribution block All circuits will be controlled by a single fuse if this is not done Distribution Block Fuses Distribution block fuses are mounted inside the black fuse module at the top of the block Each fuse module has a bulb that lights if the fuse is blown The fuse module also acts as a disconnect switch remove the fuse module to open the circuit The fuse is reached by prying the fuse module cover open Table 1 2 20 shows the factory installed fuse values Table 1 2 20 Distribution Block Fuses Block Wickman PIN Lease PIN FRSIPIN 3 0 amp AC Distribution Series 19197 Series 235 G53394 3000 1 250 V CSA approved e 1 0 amp c Series 19197 Series 235 G53394 1000 1 250 V CSA approved Lnd aL 3 0 amp ed Series 19197 Series 235 G53394 3000 1 250 V CSA approved A label 1984 4350 000x is provided to record the actual fuse sizes dion in the AC and DC distribution blocks The label should be installed inside the I O cab
212. c ci e fatte nein e t e ee ee 4 2 50 Bubble NV Memory LEDs and Test Points 0 cece eee ees 4 2 52 Bubble NV Memory Jumpers 000 eee 4 2 53 Bubble NV Memory Fuses 00 0 eee eens 4 2 53 RS3 Service Manual Contents Section 3 Controller Processors 00 eee eee eee o 4 3 1 MPC MultiPurpose Controller Processor 0 cece cnet n eee n ees 4 3 2 MPG FUNGON 23 cc2 cgi RO ias ia das 4 3 5 MPC Il F nction uere RR xe Ree abe RD aia Re bees 4 3 7 MPC L F riction te a X eH Ges Se ROI A ate 4 3 10 MPG LEDS uta rete eii ate Fee x eee ets 4 3 12 MPCS Jumpers ac Soi sevo ON uar eee PEN ERE RO IR es 4 3 12 MPG IL Jurpers a ieri LU eta dr UP PER RR IE UE ie P ERR 4 3 15 MPG I J rmpers t aana dS eter end A Sect tee utes 4 3 18 MPC Fus8S x cic Diu Segue Ew e pais 4 3 19 MLC MultiLoop Controller Processor 00000 cc cece tenets 4 3 20 MEG RURCHOMN S fuses tote at rele ec o Ede a rds t 4 3 21 MLC LEDS cei vers aha pee ive da retenue EE 4 3 24 MLC Ju rpers c te hee ete eee Vee tak RO eee ee eee tas os 4 3 24 MEC FUSES d o ds re tat a tee aed ea ee fa TERT ee d n 4 3 24 SSC Single Strategy Controller Processor 0 cece cece e eee nee 4 3 25 SSG LEDS i usc4 cue ie elon 4 3 26 SSC J rmpels 43 os er ei A e REP UE eR lade pecu eek 4 3 26 SSC FUSES merida eoi A bebe ea we ee he EA 4 3 27 CC Contact Controller Processor 00 eect eee 4 3 28 GG EDS scott ote anc
213. ca ControlFile Tap O Optical Cable Star Coupler Console Card Cages Console Optical Cable Optical Cable Repeater Optical Attenuator RS3 PeerWay Tap Figure 2 2 1 Optical PeerWay A or B An optical tap box can support up to four directly connected devices Additional devices may be connected to the optical tap box by daisy chaining up to three electrical tap boxes using special opto electrical cables Each electrical tap box may support up to four devices Figure 2 2 2 shows one side A or B of an optical PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 2 Each side A and B of the optical PeerWay uses a dual fiber optic cable one fiber for transmission and one for reception The fiber optic cable carries messages serially at a rate of one million bits per second A maximum of 32 system devices can be connected to an optical PeerWay A Highway Interface Adaptor HIA can be used to connect two optical PeerWays or an optical and an electrical PeerWay Star Coupler Fiber Optic Cable Fiber Optic Cable nr nnr n A d Optical Tap a J Optical Tap ULC TUUL UJL TU ol Ju Fiber Optic Cable
214. cannot access the Nonvolatile Memory Nonvolatile memory functions resume when the switch is enabled and the card has diagnostic tests Test Points at Top of Card Not on 1984 1224 000X Ground Return Figure 4 2 23 Bubble NV Memory LEDs and Test Points RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 55 Bubble NV Memory Jumpers Bubble Nonvolatile Memory jumpers are only for factory use and should not be changed Changing the jumpers could cause the bubbles to become corrupted Bubble NV Memory Fuses Figure 4 2 24 shows fuse locations Table 4 2 27 gives fuse values for the Bubble NV Memory card UE Test Points F1 a Figure 4 2 24 Bubble NV Memory Fuse Locations Table 4 2 27 Bubble NV Memory Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse aM G09140 0060 MTH 4 312004 4 A 250 V Regular G09140 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250 V Regular 1984 1598 0001 F1 1984 1483 000x F1 G09140 0060 MTH 4 312004 4 A 250 V Regular ee ee G09140 0030 AGC 2 312002 2 A 250 V Quick Acting F1 F2 1984 1224 000x G09140 0038 MDL 4 313004 4 A 250 V Slow Blow G09140 0030 AGC 2 312002 2 A 250 V Quick Acting RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 56 RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 3 1 Section 3 Controller Processors Controller Processors include e MultiPurpose MPC e MultiL
215. cations Connect Card Ill 5 1 4 Communications Connect Card III IV V 5 1 6 communication wiring 5 1 7 jumpers 5 1 8 Communications Connect Card IV 5 1 4 Communications Connect Card V 5 1 4 COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT Ill 5 1 4 COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT IV 5 1 4 COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT V 5 1 4 Communications FlexTerm 5 4 2 Communications Register Unit 7 5 6 Communications Termination Panel 6 2 2 Configuration Keyboard 3 1 6 Pedestal Command Console 3 2 4 Configure HIA Screen 7 3 9 connector fiber optic PeerWay 2 2 13 twinaxial PeerWay 2 1 12 Connector Crimp Tool 2 1 12 Conrac 7122 3 1 30 Conrac 7211 maintenance manual 3 2 8 spare parts 3 2 10 Conrac 7241 3 1 30 components 3 1 31 Installation and Operation Manual 3 1 30 User Guide 3 1 30 Conrac 7241 CRT black video or black bars 3 1 34 power up diagnostics failures 3 1 34 Scan Board adjustments 3 1 33 Scan Board failures 3 1 32 Console CRT 3 1 26 console Basic Command 3 2 1 diagnostic programs 9 1 16 Hardened Command 3 1 1 Memory Dump screen 10 3 12 Multitube 3 1 1 Off Line Diagnostic screen 10 3 8 off line diagnostics 9 1 17 10 3 8 Pedestal 3 2 1 power up diagnostics 10 3 3 troubleshooting procedures 10 3 1 Console Card Cage See Ol Card Cage console node address 3 7 18 Console Off Line Diagnostics screen 10 3 8 Contact Card Cage 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 4 FIC addressing 5 2 5 fuse 5 2 12 jumpers 5 2 10 wiring 5 2 6 Contact Card Cage Extend
216. ccc eee 1 2 26 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuses 0 0 cece eee eee 1 2 27 Remote I O Power Supply 0 cece cece eect eee nh 1 2 28 10P5503 for I O Applications 0 0 eee 1 2 30 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out 1 2 31 10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs 000 cece ee eee 1 2 31 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output 1 2 31 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuses oococccccccccccco 1 2 31 Remote Operator Interface Power Supply sssslsssseesesesee 1 2 32 10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications ooococooococoooo 1 2 33 RS3 Power Contents SV ii 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin Out 1 2 34 10P5409 Remote Power Supply LEDs 0 cee ee eeeeee 1 2 34 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output 1 2 34 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuses 00 cee eens 1 2 34 10P5701 for Operator Interface Applications 0 cee eee 1 2 35 10P5756 for Operator Interface Applications 00 cee eee 1 2 36 Distribution Blocks oc eee eines pine eee bel AIO VET 1 2 37 Distribution Block FUSES 0 cece cette 1 2 37 Section 3 System Power Supply Units 1 3 1 Physical Description oe eee pede ees wee belle de OP OLET pda 1 3 1 HOUSING sc csb ed cd oie DUOC opm Her eb Ce eE I E eee oes PES 1 3 3 Power Sup
217. ce 3 6 13 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Functional Test 00 cece eee ee eee 3 6 14 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Operation 000 c eee eee es 3 6 15 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer 0 000 c cece eens 3 6 16 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings 0 00 cece eee eee ee 3 6 16 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Self Test 0 c cece eee 3 6 17 RS3 Consoles Contents SV iv Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Vertical Alignment 0 00 e cence ee 3 6 17 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Error Signals 000 e cece eee eee 3 6 18 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Paper Handling cece ee eee eee 3 6 18 TES10PDnnter ear Le UA 3 6 20 TI 810 Printer Jumpers and Switches 0 0 cece eee eee 3 6 20 TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks 00 cece eee 3 6 21 TI 810 Printer Modification for 30 5 Cm Paper 00 eee eee 3 6 22 TI 810 Printer Modification for Lowercase Printing sisse 3 6 23 TI 810 Printer Printing Half Page of Data ococcoccccccccccco 3 6 23 Section 7 Ol Card Cage ores koe ri o E iw RO a i can DR aaa 3 7 1 Electronics Cabinet a c cece Ih 3 7 2 System Manager Station ooooccccoccccccc 3 7 4 Alarm Output Panel aac eet PED A 3 7 5 Alarm Output Board er ee de 3 7 5 Ol Card Gage obe pepe ERROR Eee ce t ee ee 3 7 7 Ol Card Cage 10P52820001 ccc n eee 3 7 10 OI Card Cage 1984 0660 0001 ooccoocccccc anane 3 7 14 PeerWay Inte
218. cept in CE Complaint consoles Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board The Touchpad Keyboard Electronics board 1984 1981 000x is mounted behind the touchpad It is marked TOUCHPAD KEYBOARD on the PWA NOTE If the Touchpad Keyboard Electronics board requires replacement the touchpad should be replaced with a joystick When a Touchpad is replaced by a Joystick the Touchpad Keyboard Electronics board must be replaced with a Trackball Keyboard Electronics board The replacement board is part of the Joystick upgrade kit 1984 3040 000x Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 14 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Interface The Keyboard Interface connects the keyboard assemblies to the console electronics e Password Security Software 10P50842004 CE Compliant Console 1984 3222 2004 e Standard Keyswitch 10P50840004 1984 3222 0004 also supports dual keyswitch option 1984 2889 0004 1984 1978 000x without video isolation e Remote Keyswitch 1984 3222 1004 1984 2889 1004 CE Compliant Console Table 3 1 12 shows parts replacement for the Keyboard Interface Only CE compliant boards can be used in CE compliant consoles Table 3 1 12 Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement 10P50842004 1984 3222 2004 CE compliant console Password Security Software 1984 3222 2004 None Password Security Software 1984 3222 1004 1984 28
219. chained to an Optical Tap Box using special Opto Electrical cables Figure 2 2 4 shows the functional diagram of an Optical Tap Box PeerWay To Fiber Optic PeerWay E From Fiber Optic Fiber Optic Receiver PeerWay Optical Electrical 4 amp 39 DATA Interface Electrical Interface RTS to 9V Other Tap Boxes GND Figure 2 2 4 Optical Tap Block Diagram The 3211 and 1191 parts are fully interchangeable Similarly the 3214 and 1192 parts are fully interchangeable as shown in Table 2 2 1 Table 2 2 1 Optical Tap Box Replacement Data DCI NC mmm 1984 3211 0001 1984 1191 0001 PeerWay A Optical Tap Box 1984 1191 0001 1984 3211 0001 PeerWay A Optical Tap Box 1984 3214 0001 1984 1192 0001 PeerWay B Optical Tap Box 1984 1192 0001 1984 3214 0001 PeerWay B Optical Tap Box RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 5 Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box Figure 2 2 4 shows the fiber optic opto electric cable and PeerWay drop cable connections to an optical tap box e Optical Tap Box A to Electrical Tap Box A use Opto Electric Cable 1984 1195 xxxx e Optical Tap Box B to Electrical Tap Box B use Opto Electric Cable 1984 1196 xxxx The Optical Tap Box can be in the middle of the daisy chain if desired Both electrical connectors may be used at the same time Devices connect to the optical tap box with normal PeerWay drop cables
220. ches It has a full 32 bit data bus and address bus Because the 68040 does not have dynamic bus sizing the buffered motherboard interface communicates with the 16 bit Motherboard Bus In the 68040 support circuitry the watchdog timer generates a reset to the processor if the processor hangs up The 68040 has 128KB of EPROM to store the boot program the power up diagnostics the PeerWay Boot program and a debugging program The Main Memory Interface MMI ASIC controls the Dynamic Random Access Memory DRAM and performs the Error Detection and Correction EDAC function The dynamic RAM is 16 megabytes arranged as 4 Meg x 32 plus 4 Meg x 7 for EDAC syndrome bits The EDAC generates a 7 bit check word from a 32 bit data word to detect and correct all DRAM signal bit errors A 512KB Fast Static RAM is used for code that must run faster than normal such as interrupt routines The 68040 uses the same motherboard as the 68000 based Ol Processor Card The Buffered Motherboard Interface BMI generates the 68000 compatible signals The 68040 does not have the keyboard buffers found on the 68000 OI Processor cards Keyboard communications are handled by the printer interface board OI Card Cage SV 3 7 29 Ol Processor 68040 LEDs Figure 3 7 18 shows the Ol Processor 68040 LEDs G DS1 m DS2 O DS6 O DS7 CO DS8 Card Good No faults are detected on the card Card Fault A fault has been detected on the Processor Ca
221. code that is required to run faster than normal such as interrupt routines The OI Processor 68020 uses the same motherboard as the 68000 based OI Processor Card The required 68000 compatible signals are generated by the Bus Controller ASIC The OI Processor 68020 does not have the keyboard buffers found on the 68000 OI Processor cards Keyboard communications are handled through the printer interface board Ol Processor 68020 LEDs Figure 3 7 20 shows the Ol Processor 68020 LEDs DS1 B DS2 DS6 5 DS7 O DS8 RS3 Consoles Card Good No faults are detected on the card Card Fault A fault has been detected on the Processor Card Display Active Processor is updating Video Generator RAM Keyboard Active Processor is operating on an instruction from a keyboard Controller I O Processor is working on a data update from a Controller Figure 3 7 20 Ol Processor 68020 LEDs Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 33 Ol Processor 68020 Jumpers Figure 3 7 21 shows the location of the movable jumpers on the 68020 Table 3 7 13 gives jumper positions Jumpers HD1 HD2 and HD6 are hardwired NOTE Cards with Boot ROM 9 15 or greater automatically do a PeerWay boot after three failures to boot from disk This is done even if HD3 is set to Disk Boot Figure 3 7 21 Ol Processor 68020 Jumper Locations Table 3 7 13 OI Processor 68020 Jumper Positions Position 1 2 Position 2 3 PeerWay Boot Disk Boot Normal OI
222. controllers ROM checksum error RAM EDAC error Error in the watchdog timer circuit To prevent endless switching between CPs no more than two nonmanual CP switches are allowed in a 5 5 minute period The PeerWay Node screen will display the PeerWay statistics and errors for the primary CP Pressing the EXCHG key will display the statistics and errors of the Redundant CP A CP can be disabled by use of the Enable Disable Switch In order to troubleshoot you may need to remove the cards from the ControlFile one at a time or move the other CP to the suspected faulty slot ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 31 CP LEDs Test Points and Enable Disable Switch RS3 ControlFiles The Coordinator Processor has LEDs to indicate card status Figure 4 2 14 shows the CP LEDs and test points The Enable Disable Switch turns the CP on and off The Enable Disable Switch can be used as follows during operation If a primary CP with redundant backup is disabled the primary CP goes out of service The backup CP assumes control If the Nonvolatile Memory is not present and enabled some information will be lost when the primary CP goes out of service Loss of information is critical with enhanced CP images such as CPBAT xx or CPMAXxx If a primary CP with no backup is disabled all communications between CPs in the ControlFile and between the ControlFile and the PeerWay will halt Processing will resume when the switch is en
223. cters per inch and 6 lines per inch It should be operated at 4800 baud The printer dimensions are Height 130mm 5 1 in Width 570 mm 22 4 in Depth 330 mm 13 0 in Weight 8 5 kg 18 7 Ib For further information see the Fujitsu DL3800 User s Manual 1984 3318 0008 and the Fujitsu DL3800 Maintenance Manual 1984 3318 0011 The RS 232 serial port is located under a door on the right side of the unit An internal cable trough is provided to lead the cable to the rear of the unit The unit is delivered with the forms tractor in the rear position where it pushes paper that is fed from the rear The tractor can be moved to the top position where it pulls paper that is fed from the rear or from the bottom See the User s Manual for the procedure on changing the forms tractor position Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Set Up RS3 Consoles The set up menu parameters are displayed by printing them out and using the print carriage position to select the desired values There is a red cursor line on the clear plastic print guide assembly I To verify the setup 1 Put the printer in setup mode Put the printer off line press ONLINE until the ONLINE light goes out Hold both the FONT and MENU buttons until the printer beeps or Turn the printer off Hold both the FONT and MENU buttons Turn the printer on The printer will beep 2 The printer will print a header describing the setup procedure a Help menu and the lt
224. d Ol COLOR VIDEO on the PWA It uses a 15 5 KHz horizontal scan rate Figure 3 7 27 shows a functional diagram of the card Control Vertical and Horizontal Clock Signals Logic Character Memory Serial CRT Refresh Controller Memory Attribute Memory Red Blue and Green signals to CRT Figure 3 7 27 Character Graphics Video Generator Card Functional Diagram RS3 Consoles Inputs to the Character Graphics Video Generator card include address lines and data lines from the Controller Processor card through the console motherboard The input signals include the DTACK signal for synchronization the SYSTEM CLOCK signal and the RESET signal The output signals of the Character Graphics Video Generator card include red blue and green color signals and alarm contact signals Color signals are sent to the CRT monitor and alarm contact signals are sent to the alarm output panel Video information goes out with the red blue and green color signals In addition the sync signal is superimposed on the green color signal The horizontal and vertical clock signals for the CRT are created by the CRT controller 68B45 The CRT controller sets horizontal and vertical timing for output signals and refresh memory addressing Ol Card Cage RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 43 The RAM on the Character Graphics Video Generator card is divided into three sections Refresh Character and Attribute Refresh RAM output data is 16 bits w
225. d the black front cover is set for the console tape drive SCSI address 4 The switch settings should not be changed Figure 3 5 13 shows the dip switch settings OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 3 5 14 Scorpion 5945S Tape Drive 1984 1989 000x Dip Switch Positions Scorpion 5945C Tape Drive The 1984 1927 000x Magnetic Tape Drive has an exposed jumper and switch assembly These should not be changed from the factory settings shown in Figure 3 5 14 NOTE The chip at position U2 on the SCSI controller board must be at revision level A08J or higher ON MAPA OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 Jumper in Position E F Figure 3 5 15 Scorpion 5945C Tape Drive 1984 1927 000x Dip Switch Positions RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 26 RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 6 1 Section 6 Printers Several printers are used This section will cover the following e Fujitsu DL3800 e Fujitsu DL4600 e Fujitsu DL2600 e Fujitsu DPL24 e T1810 Table 3 6 1 gives a cross reference between the model number located on the back of the printer and the printer type Table 3 6 1 Printer Types Model No Printer Type M3389A Fujitsu DL3800 M3367A Fujitsu DL4600 M3345A DL2600 M3333C DPL24 RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 2 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer The Fujitsu DL3800 color printer 1984 3318 000x runs at 300 characters per second cps draft quality and 100 cps letter quality It prints 10 chara
226. d Configuration for Different Node is generated this indicates that the Controller Processor configuration image stored in the NV Memory is for a different node number and the Coordinator Processor will not allow the Controller Processor to start up with an incorrect image A Wipe Bubble or Kill Controller command must be used to clear the configuration from the NV Memory before the controller will operate If you wish to start up the Controller Processor it is first necessary to clear the NV Memory image by using the Wipe Bubble command This is done on the command console screen by typing IW B X Y ENTER X Node and Y controller slot Place the Controller Processor switch to DISABLE to clear the NV Memory Place the Controller Processor switch to ENABLE to start properly with 10096 free space Controller Processors SV 4 3 33 Table 4 3 15 shows the LED status for Controller Processor Faults Table 4 3 15 Controller Processor Fault Indications Yellow LED Fault Condition CPU Test Fault Boot ROM Checksum Fault Vector Test Fault Nondestructive RAM Destructive RAM Test or EDAC Fault Sync Bus Test Levels 1 amp 2 and Checks on Interrupts i Watchdog Timer MPC CC MUX and PLC Controller Processor LEDs Figure 4 3 13 shows the LEDs Enable Disable Switch and test points for the MultiPurpose Contact Multiplexer and PLC Controller Processor cards RS3 ControlFiles Controller Proce
227. d Ol Power Regulator must be set for 24 VDC as shown in Table 3 7 9 Table 3 7 9 Ol Jumper Settings for a System Power Supply Unit Ol Power Regulator 01984 1137 000x ControlFile Power Regulator 01984 3505 000x Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 24 Ol Power Supply Fuses Figure 3 7 16 shows the locations of the Ol Power Supply fuses Table 3 7 10 shows fuse data Table 3 7 10 Ol Power Supply Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse ELENLN WE AR AZ 1984 1137 000x G09140 0047 AGC 15 311015 15 A 32 V Regular G09140 0023 MDQ 1 313001 1 A 250 V Slow Blow 1984 1017 000x G09140 0044 AGC 7 1 2 31107 5 7 5 A 32 V Regular G09140 0023 MDQ 1 313001 1 A 250 V Slow Blow RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 25 Ol Processor RS3 Consoles The OI Processor family is offered in these groups Ol 68040 10P5527001x marked Ol PROCESSOR V 1984 3202 00xx marked Ol PROCESSOR V OI 68020 1984 1540 000x marked Ol PROCESSOR 68020 W ASIC 1984 1161 0008 marked Ol PROCESSOR 68020 OI 68000 10P57140008 and 1984 2759 0008 marked Ol PROCESSOR III 1984 2137 0008 marked OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG 1984 2122 0007 marked Ol PROCESSOR 1 MEG 1984 2120 0008 marked Ol PROCESSOR 1984 2107 0005 marked Ol PROCESSOR 1984 1061 0005 marked Ol PROCESSOR Each group is described individually in this section The OI Processor family is used in the Multitube Command Console MTCC
228. d in the user manual that accompanies the unit If the unit goes out of adjustment first try the Brightness and Contrast dials at the front If this fails you can restore the default settings by 1 Open the hinged door in front Check that the User Preset switch is set to Preset 2 Press the Recall Program button Multitube Command Console CRT Sony RS3 Consoles The Sony CRT 1984 3286 000x 1984 3246 000x or 1984 2633 000x is a 14 inch color unit that connects to the Keyboard Interface via a D Sub connector and twisted pairs of wires This CRT requires video isolation provided by the keyboard interface card These models have been used Each requires the use of an adapter cable as shown in Table 3 1 16 All are interchangeable Table 3 1 16 Adaptor Cables for Sony CRTs Part No Model No Adaptor Cable 1984 3286 000x CPD 1430 1984 3287 9500 CPD 1304S 1984 3246 000x C 1404S 1984 3245 0001 1984 2633 000x CPD 1304 1984 3005 9030 Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 28 Figure 3 1 12 shows typical wiring for the Sony CRT _ Monitor Rear RGB Video Cable AC Power Connector Base NL J L aS 1 Monitor To 30 VDC RS 422 Keyboard Red Green and Blue AC Power Distribution Communications Input Cables Source Box
229. d with a Joystick upgrade kit Touchpad 1984 2844 000x A Touchpad should be replaced with a Joystick upgrade kit Touchpad Keyboard 1984 1981 000x Electronics Board A Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board should be replaced with a Joystick upgrade kit The membrane keyboard may be replaced with any dash 1984 2335 000x number 000x keyboard assembly or with a Joystick upgrade kit Keyboard Cursor Control Modified Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 11 Joystick The Joystick 1984 3038 000x is used with the Hardened Command Console It replaces the Touchpad Replacement requires use of a Joystick Upgrade Kit 1984 3040 000x The upgrade kit contains a joystick a new membrane keyboard a Trackball Electronics Board and miscellaneous hardware The Trackball Electronics Board replaces the Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board The Joystick uses either the Trackball 68HC05 10P5285000x or 1984 2662 000x or the Trackball Keyboard 1984 1975 000x keyboard electronics boards They are completely interchangeable The Joystick cannot be used in a CE compliant console The Joystick is used in conjunction with a membrane keyboard 1984 2335 000x The keyboard dash number must be 0003 or higher NOTE The Joystick is sensitive to radio frequency interference in the 400 500 MHz range For example a walkie talkie operated within one foot of the Joystick may ca
230. dedicated to I O for that slot Pins 1 through 20 of the Ol Processor 68000 edge connector are for interface with the loop callup keyboard and remote callup panels using the RS 422 protocol Fusing is provided for the 5 and 30 volt inputs There are also address and data bus buffers for the motherboard bus lines that communicate to the cards in the card cage Ol Processor 68000 LEDs QOL 990900 RS3 Consoles Figure 3 7 23 shows the Ol Processor 68000 LEDs DS1 D2S DS3 DS4 DS6 DS7 DS8 CARD GOOD No faults are detected on the card CARD FAULT A fault has been detected on the Processor Card EXT LOOP SEL 30V FUSE Fuse F1 is bad FUSE BLOWN 5V Keyboard fuse blown DISPLAY ACTIVE Processor is updating Video Generator RAM KEYBOARD ACTIVE Processor is operating on an instruction from a keyboard CONTROLLER I O Processor is working on a data upgrade from a Controller Figure 3 7 23 Ol Processor 68000 LEDs OI Card Cage SV 3 7 37 Ol Processor 68000 Jumpers Figure 3 7 24 shows the location of the one movable Ol Processor 68000 jumper The 10P57140008 1984 2759 000x model has no movable jumpers Table 3 7 14 shows jumper positions and effects for the Ol Processor 68000 HD2 JN O Figure 3 7 24 Ol Processor 68000 Fuse and Jumper Location Table 3 7 14 Ol Processor 68000 Jumper Positions Card Jumper HD2 Jumper HD2 Position 2 3 Position 1 2
231. dundant and clears out the configuration for the adjacent slot because a redundancy indication for one controller is assumed for both If the controller processor loses RS 422 communications with the FIC the redundant controller will take over Note that this will happen any time an FIC is removed from the FlexTerm Also if an Instrument High or Low alarm is generated on a redundant controller pair the redundant controller will also take over assuming that the A D on the primary controller has failed If the controller switchover was for one of these reasons the alarm indication on the ControlFile Status Screen can be cleared by rebooting the redundant controller Controller Processors MLC Function SV 4 3 21 Instrument HIGH and LOW alarms must be configured to ensure that the redundant controllers will switchover in case of a controller A D fault Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized If both controllers have active alarms the controller with the lowest priority alarm will take over as primary controller RS3 ControlFiles This circuit description refers only to the MultiLoop Controller and Single Strategy cards as shown in Figure 4 3 8 Nonvolatile RAM The MultiLoop Processor and Single Strategy cards contain a Nonvolatile RAM 2K X 8 that can be altered electrically and does not lose its data when power is lost The NVRAM is used to store calibration data for the analog inputs and outputs There are no ca
232. e 4 2 35 4 2 16 CP Il Software Jumper Positions 00 eee 4 2 36 4 2 17 CP Il Factory Set Jumpers 0 0 ccc eee 4 2 36 4 2 18 CP l Factory Set Jumpers 00 ccc eee 4 2 37 4 2 19 OP FUSOS ceteri re tee tfe acides Suntec tec ante eater ede aaa coated a 4 2 38 4 2 20 Nonvolatile Memory Cards ccc eee 4 2 39 4 2 21 Nonvolatile Memory Parts Replacement suuss 4 2 40 4 2 22 RAM NV Memory Retention 0 00 c eee ee 4 2 44 4 2 23 RAM NV Memory LED Sequences 00 6c eee eee eee ee 4 2 47 4 2 24 RAM NV Memory Battery Jumper Positions o o o o 4 2 48 4 2 25 RAM NV Memory Jumper Positions 0 0 00 cece eee 4 2 48 4 2 26 RAM NV Memory Fuse Data 0 cece ee 4 2 49 4 2 27 Bubble NV Memory Fuses 0 cece eee tees 4 2 53 4 3 1 MPC Communication Rates 00 eee eee 4 3 2 4 3 2 Controller Images and Associated Card Cages or FlexTerms 4 3 3 4 3 8 MPC Parts Replacement 00 cence eee 4 3 3 RS3 ControlFiles Contents SV vi RS3 ControlFiles 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 4 3 9 4 3 10 4 3 11 4 3 12 4 3 13 4 3 14 4 3 15 4 3 16 4 3 17 4 3 18 MPC5 Jumper Label s lesse ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code MPC5 MPC II Jumper Label 0000055 ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code MPC2 MPC I MPC Il and MPC5 Fuses
233. e DC Power Cable Assemblies rare C meme Chasis CE Compliant with inline fuses TOF 50840001 1054180901 Required with IBM Deskstar drive 10P54180001 itself only EMC Compliant Table 3 5 3 Cable 10P56840001 Inline Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse wt Cable F1 amp F2 G01940 0046 AGC 10 311010 10 A 32 V Regular Rev A G01940 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250 V Regular Rev B RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 5 Quantum QM32100 Table 3 5 4 shows values of the Quantum QM32100 jumpers Table 3 5 4 10P58570001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers Warning The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical contact with the mounting frame in the console Use either the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating pads between the drive and the yellow can RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 6 Quantum Thunderbolt Table 3 5 5 shows values of the Quantum Thunderbolt jumpers Table 3 5 5 10P58050001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers ON Jumper ON Jumper Warning The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical contact with the mounting frame in the console Use either the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating pads between the drive and the yellow can RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 7 IBM Deskstar 540 Table 3 5 6 shows values of the IBM Deskstar 540 jumpers Table 3 5 6 10P5665000x IBM Deskstar 540 Jumpers Warning
234. e Field Interface Module FIM susesesleseeennnnnL 6 3 46 Discrete FIM Online Replacement sees 6 3 48 Discrete FIM Redundancy ocococccccccocc eh 6 3 48 Discrete FIM Precision eee Rit Meet Sale t 6 3 49 Discrete FIM EEDS iii dana ciel 6 3 50 Discrete FIM LED Patterns 0 ee cece eee ee 6 3 51 Section 4 Multipoint Analog I O MAIO lseeeeese 6 4 1 Multipoint Analog I O Termination Panels lsssesellesesenne 6 4 2 MAIO16 Termination Panel sssssssssees ene 6 4 4 MAIO16 Termination Panel Installation elles 6 4 7 Checklist for CE Installation 0 0 cece cece eee 6 4 7 MAIO16 Termination Panel Loop Power sssssese seres 6 4 7 MAIO16 Termination Panel Field Wiring sellers 6 4 9 Wire Landing renta trate Dea t tae nene ea ees 6 4 9 Shield Grounding 0 ccc eee cnet eee 6 4 10 I O Point Type Jumpers sssssssse II Ie 6 4 10 Output Poltica Be ede A a et eee 6 4 11 System Powered Input Point 0 000 ccc e eee eee eee 6 4 12 Self Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference 6 4 13 Self Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel 6 4 14 Marshaling Panel Cable 00 c cece eee 6 4 15 MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels 000 cece eee ee 6 4 15 MAIO16 Termination Panel Jumpers 000 eee eee eee es 6 4 16 MA
235. e Trackball Keyboard 1984 1779 000x is marked TRACKBALL SW MATRIX on the PWA There are no field replaceable parts RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 5 Pedestal Command Console Rotating Alphanumeric Keyboard The Command Console Rotating Alphanumeric Keyboard 1984 1825 000x is a single assembly which includes the keyboard and brackets There are no field replaceable parts Pedestal Command Console Keyswitch Assembly The Command Console Keyswitch Assembly 1984 0657 000x is a single assembly which includes the cable There are no field replaceable parts RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 6 Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface The Keyboard Interface 1984 1782 000x and 1984 1921 000x is used in the Basic Command Console and the Pedestal Command Console to connect the keyboards with the console electronics 1984 1782 000x is marked Ol KEYBOARD INTERFACE on the PWA 1984 1921 000x is marked OS KEYBOARD INTERFACE on the PWA The Keyboard Interface is used to combine signals from all of the keyboard assemblies into one cable to the Ol Processor Board All communications to the Ol Processor Board are in the RS 422 format The console will report bad keys shorted or excessive length keystroke by the message Keyboard Error X YY where X represents the keyboard number always 1 on Pedestal Command C
236. e Video Generator LEDs Monochrome Video Generator Raster Test Button A momentary ON pushbutton called the Raster Test Button forces a raster on the screen to help distinguish between a failed Video Generator card or a failed CRT Figure 3 3 5 shows the location of the test button RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 10 Monochrome Video Generator Fuse The monochrome Video Generator card has a fuse in the 12 volt line to the CRT Figure 3 3 6 shows the location of the fuse Table 3 3 1 gives fuse data Figure 3 3 6 Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Location Table 3 3 1 Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Data Fuse FRSI Part No Bussman Part No Littelfuse Part No Characteristics G09140 0032 MDL 2 313002 2 A 250 V Slow Blow RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 11 MiniConsole CRT The MiniConsole CRT 1984 0672 000x is a green phosphor 9 inch monitor It requires 12 volts DC for power and TTL level signals for the horizontal and vertical signals The video drive is analog and the intensity is remotely controlled by increasing or decreasing the drive amplitude to change the CRT brightness The CRT will not accept composite video There is one circuit card that has all components mounted except the CRT and yoke MiniConsole Printer Interface The Printer Interface card 1984 1011 000x is described in section 5 of this chapter MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive The MiniConsole 5
237. e aaa MUX Multiplexer Controller Processor PLC Programmable Logic Controller Processor 0 cece eens MUX and PEG BEDS esser E Debe ERE IEEE RUP ERI bees MUX and PLG Fuse atico Del it Controller Processor LEDS ssssssesees n Controller Processor LED Sequence on Power Up LLssse MPC CC MUX and PLC Controller Processor LEDs MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs Controller Processor Enable Disable Switch 0c cece e eee ee Controller Processor Jumpers 0 0 eect eee Controller Processor Redundancy 000 e eect e eee eens RS3 ControlFiles 4 2 49 4 2 49 4 2 49 4 2 50 4 2 52 4 2 53 4 2 53 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 5 4 3 7 4 3 10 4 3 12 4 3 12 4 3 15 4 3 18 4 3 19 4 3 20 4 3 21 4 3 24 4 3 24 4 3 24 4 3 25 4 3 26 4 3 26 4 3 27 4 3 28 4 3 29 4 3 29 4 3 30 4 3 30 4 3 31 4 3 32 4 3 32 4 3 33 4 3 35 4 3 36 4 3 37 4 3 39 Contents SV iii List of Figures Figure 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 6 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 6 4 2 7 4 2 8 4 2 9 4 2 10 4 2 11 4 2 12 4 2 13 4 2 14 4 2 15 4 2 16 4 2 17 4 2 18 4 2 19 4 2 20 4 2 21 4 2 22 4 2 23 4 3 1 4 3 2 RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Card Cage Front 00 cece cece eee ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Locations
238. e clock signal An internal phase locked loop synchronizes the cards internal clock with the receive signal clock Both the clock signal and the data are buffered and sent to the Coordinator Processor card advanced data link controller ADLC The Clear To Send CTS signal is asserted by a counter to detect when data is present on the receive line The CP line status CPLST is received isolated and fed directly to the Coordinator Processor card CPLST provides several functions e TAP Watchdog time out RTS active for too long Cable disconnected e BUFFER 5 VDC out of tolerance Oscillator failed Table 4 2 1 shows parts replacement data for the card Table 4 2 1 Parts Replacement for PeerWay Buffer Marked PEERWAY BUFFER 1984 1502 000x 1984 1402 000x on the PWA 1984 1402 000x No name marked on the PWA ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 4 PeerWay Buffer LEDs and Test Points The PeerWay Buffer has LEDs to indicate card status Figure 4 2 3 shows the LED indicators for the PeerWay Buffer The two test points are shown in Figure 4 2 3 LEDS RTS Request To Send signal active Enables DS7 transmission on the PeerWay TXD DS6 Transmiting to the PeerWay to Transmiting to the PeerWay PeerWay BUS ACTIVE Card active Data is being transmitted or DS5 received through the Coordinator Processor 5 V FAULT PeerWay buffer voltage comparators have sensed DS4 that the main re
239. e home position to display the Configure Command Console screen Cursor to the printer entry area and verify that these settings are valid BAUD 4800 Fl YES L PG 66 GRAPHICS YES 1 To run the functional test from a MiniConsole 1 Type CM ENTER to display the Configure Minicon screen Cursor to the printer entry area and verify that these settings are valid BAUD 4800 Fl YES L PG 66 Printers SV 3 6 15 1 To perform a Fujitsu DL2600 printer functional test 1 Take the printer off line by pressing ONLINE Press LF The paper should advance one line Hold LF The paper should advance continuously 2 Press FF The paper should advance to the head of form 3 Move the paper bail to the released position Press RESET and FF together The paper should unload Pressing RESET and FF together should cause the paper to reload 4 Press RESET and FF together Release them and press LF The paper should advance in a microstep for each depression of LF 5 Return the printer to online status by pressing ONLINE 6 Operate the printer from the system console Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Operation l To operate the printer from a Command Console 1 Place the cursor at home Type C C P ENTER or use NEXT OPTION to scroll through options to CONFIG COLOR PALETTE Press ENTER 2 With the cursor at home type S G and ENTER The printer should print the CONFIG COLOR PALETTE screen 3 Verify
240. e top and the most significant MS is at the bottom A jumper has the listed value in the 1 2 position and a 0 value in the 2 3 position Total the values and add 2 to get the node address Figure 3 7 12 PeerWay Interface Jumper Locations Table 3 7 6 PeerWay Interface Jumper Values Value at 1 2 Value at 2 3 Ol Card Cage PeerWay Address Jumpers moo Ge O Gute O OIC JA HD1 at 1 2 2 HD2 at 1 2 4 HD3 at 1 2 8 HD4 at 2 3 0 SV 3 7 19 Sum of Jumpers 1442 Node Address 16 Figure 3 7 13 Setting the Node Address Jumpers NOTE Setting the jumper for use on a PeerWay other than PeerWay number 1 requires that you calculate the jumper setting Jumper Setting HN P 1 32 Where HN is the node number as shown on the CCC screen P is the PeerWay number The result is the desired jumper setting value RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 20 Ol Power Supply 30 V A gt gt 30 V B 30 V A RTN 30 V B RTN The Ol POWER SUPPLY 1984 1137 0001 regulates the incoming 30 VDC bus to 5 volts for the Ol Card Cage circuitry and to 12 volts for the CRT and the isolated supplies on the Printer Interface See Figure 3 7 14 for an Ol Power Supply functional diagram The 1984 1017 000x MINICON POWER REGULATOR is replaced by the 1984 1137 0001 OI Power Supply Bead o gt gt Volt
241. ead and write function A separate read write select provides separation and data bus buffering The EDAC controller decodes the check bits that are stored along with the data bits A 16 bit word is used in conjunction with the 16 bit microprocessor Six additional bits are used to store a pattern that can be decoded to indicate the exact bit pattern in the data word If any single bit is not as indicated by the EDAC check bits the EDAC Controller automatically corrects for the error and rewrites the data into the RAM location correctly If any multiple bit errors are found the EDAC will trigger a bus error to indicate problems to the operator s station Each dynamic RAM chip is arranged in a 64K x 1 bit pattern RAM capacity is 128K bytes or 64K words with 8 bits per byte and 2 bytes per word There are six additional bits with each word as check bits The 40 MHz clock oscillator is divided down to provide the timing requirements of the microprocessor and the remainder of the support devices on the card The 68000 series microprocessor controls all the functions on the card and is monitored by the watchdog timer If it is not reset periodically by the microprocessor the watchdog timer toggles the reset line to the microprocessor which forces a restart All the LEDs are controlled by the software driven LED latch which includes the Card Enable green Card Fault red and three yellow status LEDs The card ENABLE DISABLE switch is read th
242. ealed The board must be removed for access to the jumpers NOTE The table printed on some boards refers to HD1 HD4 as J1 J4 Table 3 1 9 Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions Main Keyboard Option Keyboard 1 Option Keyboard 2 Option Keyboard 3 Table 3 1 10 provides replacement data Table 3 1 10 Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement Keyboard Electronics board 1984 2871 000x 1984 1970 000x Completely interchangeable Keyboard Electronics board 1984 1970 000x 1984 2871 000x Completely interchangeable Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 13 Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board The Trackball Assembly and the Joystick use either e 10P5285000x marked TRACKBALL 68HC05 on the PWA e 1984 2662 000x marked TRACKBALL 68HCO5 on the PWA u a 975 000x marked TRACKBALL KEYBOARD on the The boards are fully interchangeable except that only the 10P5285000x can be used in a CE compliant console Table 3 1 11 gives parts replacement data Table 3 1 11 Trackball Electronics Board Replacement 1984 2662 000x Boards are interchangeable TRAS KRALL Sore TOR 9289090 1984 1975 000x except in CE Complaint consoles 10P5285000x Boards are interchangeable THACIBALEGBEIG0S 1994 2062 000 1984 1975 000 except in CE Complaint consoles 10P5285000x Boards are interchangeable TRACKBALL KEYBOARD 19841975 000X 084 0660 000 ex
243. eased performance Replacing an older Ol Processor with this card requires pixel graphics and may require new software The major functional blocks of the card are the 68040 microprocessor Clock Watch Dog and Interrupt Encoder Main Memory Interface MMI Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC Dynamic RAM 16 MB Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM for the boot program 128KB Static Random Access Memory SRAM 512KB Zero Wait State Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter DUART Optional for software debugging Buffered Motherboard Interface BMI for the 68000 motherboard bus Hardware read and write latches Figure 3 7 17 shows the functional diagram for an Ol Processor 68040 Clock and Watch Dog ras SRAM DUART Interrupts 8 512KB o 32 Bit Address 5 gt 68040 32 Bit Data Buffered Micro gt Motherboard Processor Interface Control gt 68000 Motherboard DRAM MMI Read and Write pus 16MB ASIC Latches Figure 3 7 17 Ol Processor 68040 Functional Diagram RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 28 RS3 Consoles The OI Processor 68040 runs at a clock rate of 50 and 25 MHz The 68040 microprocessor runs internally at 50 MHz and all external bus operations are timed by the 25 MHz clock There are internal 2KB instruction and data ca
244. ece OES as 5 4 9 PLC Controller Processor Redundancy ooocccccccccc 5 4 10 PLC Port I O Card Redundancy 0 00 cece cece eens 5 4 11 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xx Port O Card cc ona ee p ERE POLVERE Shan E MERGE MIRA Mes 5 4 13 RS 422 RS 232 Port I O Card oocccccccccccc sess 5 4 13 RS 422 RS 232 Port I O Card RS 232 Pin Assignments 5 4 15 RS 422 RS 232 Port I O Card LEDs 00 cece eee 5 4 16 RS 422 RS 232 Port I O Card Jumpers 00 cece eee 5 4 17 RS 422 RS 232 Port I O Card Fuse 0 0 0 c cece eee eee 5 4 19 RS 422 RS 422 Port I O Card ooccccccccccc 5 4 20 RS 422 RS 422 Port I O Card RS 422 Pin Assignments 5 4 22 RS 422 RS 422 Port I O Card LEDs 00 cece eee eee 5 4 22 RS 422 RS 422 Port I O Card Jumpers 00 0c cece eee eee 5 4 23 RS 422 RS 422 Port I O Card Fuse 00 cece eee eee 5 4 24 Section 5 MultiLoop and Single Strategy FlexTerm Hardware 5 5 1 MultiLoop FlexTerm 0 0 cece teens 5 5 2 Single Strategy FlexTerm 0 2 ccc e een 5 5 4 Single Strategy FlexTerm Analog Wiring 00 cece eens 5 5 5 Single Strategy FlexTerm Contact Wiring 0 cee eee eee eee 5 5 5 Single Strategy FlexTerm Contact Fuses c cee eee ee eee eee 5 5 6 Analog Input RIE Sci a a headend 5 5 7 Non lsolated Analog Input FIC ooocccccccccccocccn 5 5 8 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC LE
245. ed Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 19 1984 1978 000x Keyboard Interface 1984 1978 0004 is used for standard keyswitch applications The card does not provide video isolation Figure 3 1 7 shows typical connections Keyboard Keyboard Power Cable p Communications Cable J942 J412 O yee Gee GND E e Re f 1 PS HD2 F2 DS3 Keyswitch J408 J409 ae J411 5 J410 O Option Keyboard Top View Configuration Keyboard Operator Keyboard Figure 3 1 7 Typical 1984 1978 000x Keyboard Interface Without Video Isolation Connections Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 20 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface The remote keyswitch option is supported by e 1984 3222 1004 e 1984 2889 1004 1984 3222 1004 Keyboard Interface 1984 3222 1004 is used with the remote keyswitch option No keyswitch is mounted on the card A 1984 3267 xxxx Cable Keyboard Interface to Remote Keylock plugs into J415 to provide the remote keyswitch A wire jumper must be in J414 Figure 3 1 8 shows the normal connections RS 422 Video Input Isolated Video Isolated Video Keyboard RGB Cables Output Output Keyboard Communications Coaxial TE a is ME Power Cable Cable loud Twisted Pair
246. ed at a time Up to eight Controller Processor cards can be configured in any combination including standalone units or as redundant pairs Figure 4 1 1 shows the front of a ControlFile Card Cage PEERWAY A PEERWAY B POWER REGULATOR POWER REGULATOR COORDINATOR PROCESSOR COORDINATOR PROCESSOR NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR RS3 ControlFiles Support Section Controller Processor Cards Figure 4 1 1 ControlFile Card Cage Front ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 1 2 RS3 ControlFiles The ControlFile motherboard interconnects the power and signals of all cards in the ControlFile Card Cage Power and signal connections include e DC power A and B e PeerWay Tap Boxes A and B e Cage alarm contacts e O Card Cage connectors e Plenum Fan Power except 0023 The motherboard is a multilayer card The inner layers carry power and ground and the outer layers carry the data address and control signals across the motherboard The data address and control lines are fully redundant Each line extends from one Coordinator Processor CP card to the Controllers Coordinator Processor Controller Processor and Nonvolatile Memory cards have redundant buffering to i
247. ed for the magnetic bubble memory and control circuitry Bus A arbitration circuit on the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory card determines which redundant motherboard port is accessing the card The proper buffers are then enabled to transfer asynchronous data on the card A LED latch is driven by the bus through a software driven latch to light the green red or yellow status LEDs There is also a read buffer on the card that determines the state of the ENABLE DISABLE toggle switch RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section RS3 ControlFiles SV 4 2 53 The data bus operating off the motherboard asynchronous bus is then buffered to a synchronous bus for data transfer to those devices that are used to transfer the data to and from the nonvolatile memory There are four RAM chips used for buffering data to and from the nonvolatile memory The buffer RAM size is 16K x 16 The direct memory access controller DMAC and Bubble Memory Controller circuitry are designed for 8 bit words so that a set of buffers multiplexes the 16 bit words into two successive 8 bit words for transfer to the DMAC The DMAC transfers data between the Bubble Memory Controller and RAM The bubble memory controller changes the parallel data to serial data and provides the needed timing for operation of the bubble memory support circuitry The serial data is then transferred to the selected magnetic bubble memory MBM modules for storage Each MBM module contains 5 support
248. ed on the card Card Fault A fault has been detected on the Interface card Write Data The Interface card is writing to one of the Disk Drives Head Load The read write head on a disk drive is in the loaded position Read Data Data is being transmitted from the disk drive to the Interface card Ready The disk drive is sending a signal that it is ready for use Drive Sel 1 Disk drive number 1 is doing an active command Drive Sel 2 Disk drive number 2 is doing an active command CMD Request A request for data to or from the drives is awaiting execution CMD Active The system is currently sending a command for data transfer O O O O O O O O O Retry System is doing rereads or rewrites because of incomplete data on the first try Figure 3 3 8 Floppy Interface SCSI LEDs RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 14 Floppy Disk Power Supply Regulator input power cable The Floppy Disk Power Supply 1984 1050 000x provides 12 volt power to the drives and serves to connect the various cables The card mounts on the top of the MiniConsole chassis and is connected to the console via one power cable as shown in Figure 3 3 9 NOTE Used only on MiniConsoles that use the 1984 1017 0001 Power Regulator card Fan Floppy Disk Power Supply Disk Powe Cables A N Disk Drive Number
249. ed to ensure against hangups of the microprocessor CAUTION Disable the NV Memory and then the Coordinator Processor cards before removing any card other than a PeerWay Buffer card from the ControlFile Failure to do so may result in a corrupted data transfer ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 44 ControlFile Motherboard Bus A Bus B Dual Port Buffers 64K Dual Port Memory Dual Port Address Translation Bus Arbitration Buffers 64K EPROM Boot amp Power Up Diagnostics 64K Program RAM Microprocessor Memory MC68000 Microprocessor i Reset Microprocesso irs i From Battery Control Circuit LEDs Programmable Interface Timer Enable Disable Switch BRAM Power BRAM Buffers From Battery Control Circuit BRAM Enable Disable Signal From Battery Control Circuit Figure 4 2 18 RAM Nonvolatile Memory Block Diagram Figure 4 2 19 shows the battery control circuit The battery control circuit monitors the 5 VDC supply and the battery voltages If the 5 VDC supply falls below the threshold value the battery control circuit preserves the contents of the battery backed random access memory BRAM e Causes the microprocessor to issue an alarm to the Coordinator Processor e Signals the microprocessor to halt reads and writes to the BRAM e Disables the BRAM to prevent further reads or writes e Supplies the BRAM with power from the
250. eld current is going through the circuit open loop A precision zener is multiplexed into each A D converter to check conversion accuracy A programmable timer module PTM is used to measure the time periods required for the A D conversion A clock for these time periods is derived from the clock divider circuit A set of synchronous buffers is used to isolate the data bus for the PTM The PTM is a synchronous device from the 68000 system asynchronous bus Controller Processors SV 4 3 22 RS3 ControlFiles Hybrids There are four different hybrids used to process the analog input signals into the MLC Card The first hybrid has input voltages fed in for differential buffering and filtering The filtering is in two stages The first filter only allows voltage ramp changes of less than an 18 Hz rate change through a single pole op amp filter This output is then fed into a two pole op amp filter for further limiting to a 3 75 Hz rate change A circuit gain of 1 to 1 is used and close tolerance resistors laser trimmed are specified to avoid losing accuracy in the system This hybrid contains two identical isolated circuits that use 12 V and 12 V for power The second hybrid is a multiplexer circuit that selects one of four inputs or the self check reference voltage to be routed to the A D converter Each hybrid contains two identical circuits to route signals to two A D converters Both use common control lines for switching The si
251. ence teen eens Detecting a PeerWay Fault oocoooccocccoccc Using the PeerWay Overview Screen oocoooccooocccocc PeerWay Fault Diagnostics 00 ccc cect Diagnosing a Console or SCI PeerWay Problem 0e nann Diagnosing a ControlFile PeerWay Problem sseseesuss With One ControlFile on the PeerWay 2 0 cece eee eee With Multiple ControlFiles on the PeerWay oocccccccccccoco co PeerWay Cable Fault Diagnostics 0 00 e eee Troubleshooting Twinax PeerWay Cables 000 cece eee eee Troubleshooting Fiber Optic PeerWay Cables 0 cece eens Section 3 Troubleshooting Consoles 0cceee eee e renee General Console Troubleshooting Procedures 00c eee eee eee Console Power Up Diagnostics 00 cece eee eee eee Console Off Line Diagnostics 0 ccc eens Memory DUDA GEE ed Phos wees Automatic Controller Memory Dump Capture 00 eee eee Other Commands s i He yaks A ei pe etd a Controller Memory Dump Recommendations 000ee eres Memory View Screen 000 cee cnet hen Node D mp Sereen 5o oper ia ra ee peak ee ets Menu Confidence Screen 000s cece ene nen Keyboard Problems a cc sectors ob deer eee ends Ft poe pU epe CRT Problems iro perl EIE DET IS PRESE E TM CURES ARS Troubleshooting OI Card Cage Problems 0c cee ee eee eee Section
252. enerator LEDs 0 00 ceeeeueeee 3 7 44 Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse 0 00 e cence eee ee 3 7 45 Printerinterace we fois cane ee ee e RC DP ERE Der D EDI Eg 3 7 46 Printer Interface LEDS pat a one E RERO equ 3 7 49 Printer Interface Jumpers oooccccccccc enn 3 7 51 RS3 Consoles Contents SV v SCSI Small Computer System Interface 0 00 cece eee eee 3 7 52 SCSI LEDS 1 sxevwuSu4 A ENERO ee eee 3 7 55 SCSI J mpels 2 iaa Gl een aet et E EUR ERR Penn 3 7 56 1984 3301 000x SCSI Board 2 eee eee 3 7 56 1984 1140 0001 OI SCSI Host Adapter ssuluusssslluusus 3 7 58 OI Nonvolatile Memory oooooccccccccc IH mn 3 7 60 OL Bubble Memory veis Leber eR kee eee bee eka es 3 7 62 Ol Bubble Memory LEDs 000 cece cece III 3 7 65 OI Bubble Memory LED Sequences 00 cece eect eee 3 7 66 OI Bubble Memory Jumpers sssssssse e nh 3 7 67 OI NV BAM elk d RR lead ais eR RR ge t Rc a pc eina 3 7 69 OI NV RAM LEDs and Test Points 000 ee cece eee 3 7 74 OI NV RAM LED Sequences o oococcccccccccc teens 3 7 77 Ol NV RAM J mpers seca ee irc eee a Ook See phew ered 3 7 78 OI NV RAM Battery Replacement 000 e cece eee eee 3 7 81 RS3 Consoles Contents SV vi List of Figures Figure 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 3 1 7 3 1 9 3 1 10 3 1 11 3 1 12 3 1 13 3 1 14 3 1 15 3 1 16 3 1 17 3
253. eplacement data Table 3 2 2 Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement Part Name on PWA Replaces 1984 1921 000x OS KEYBOARD INTERFACE 1984 1782 000x RS3 Consoles 1984 1782 000x OI KEYBOARD INTERFACE Loe Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 8 Pedestal Command Console CRT Power Transformer Power RS3 Consoles The model 7211 19 Inch color CRT 1984 1872 000x is a character based CRT manufactured by Conrac Inc It is used on both the Pedestal Command and the Basic Command Consoles Figure 3 2 5 shows a block diagram of the CRT circuitry See Section 7 of the Conrac 7211 maintenance manual 7900 0317 0023 for a complete diagram Red Video Video 1 CRT Processor Grn Video Character 15 5 KHz Based Horizontal Blu Video Scan Horz amp Vert Sync Horz And Vert Scan Scan Power Board H V Shutdown ABL G2 Power High G3 Focus Low Voltage Voltage Regulator Module 2ND Anode Board Power Figure 3 2 5 Conrac 7211 CRT Block Diagram The 7211 monitor uses RGB video signals The Vertical and Horizontal sync are superimposed on the Green video signal The Video Processor removes the sync signals from the Green signal and passes them to the Scan Board The Video Processor conditions the color video and passes them to the CRT Guns The Scan Board generates the Vert and Horz drive signals to the CRT yokes C
254. eps time for the system and is backed up by battery e Battery backed RAM e RS 232 Printer Interface which drives a printer capable of handling standard ASCII text e RS 422 Interface for the Multitube Console The card is used in these components e Multitube Command Console e Command Console e Basic Command Console e MiniConsole e Supervisory Computer Interface SCI Table 3 7 17 shows parts replacement data Table 3 7 17 Printer Interface Parts Replacement 1984 1011 0001 1984 1011 0002 Lol No RS 422 Interface 1984 1011 0003 1984 1011 0001 1984 1011 0004 1984 1011 0002 RS 422 Interface for Multitube Consoles Figure 3 7 30 shows the functional diagram for the Printer Interface card Ol Card Cage Keyboard Interface Keyboard To Motherboard Bus RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 47 Printer 5 V ISO 12 V Serial 5 Interface RS 232 to Printer d 12V LED Latch OPTO Isolator 12V Power 12 V ISO Regulator Isolated 12V ISO NVRAM Supplies 5 V ISO Battery 5V br r gt U o omo romHmHzoo Buffer DU Comparator Battery Charger Real Time Clock 17 Jan 1986 16 22 31 ON m e Battery OFF Figure 3 7 30 Printer Interface Functional Diagram All operations of the Printer Interface card are handled by the Console Processor so all data exchange on the bus is handled by t
255. er Maintenance and troubleshooting are covered in chapters 9 and 10 PEERWAY A COORDINATOR PROCESSOR PEERWAY B NONVOLITILE MEMORY POWER REGULATOR POWER REGULATOR COORDINATOR PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR Support Section Controller Processor Cards Figure 4 2 1 ControlFile Card Cage Front RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 2 PeerWay Buffer PeerWay Buffer cards 1984 1502 000x and 1984 1402 000x communicate serial data and control signals between the Coordinator Processor and the PeerWay tap for transmission on the PeerWay Two PeerWay Buffer cards are required for interface to the A and B PeerWays and each can communicate its data with either of the two Coordinator Processor cards Figure 4 2 2 shows a functional diagram for a PeerWay Buffer card 5 V Voltage Sense 30 V A lt H Bo lt te Switching APER Regulator 9 V Unregulated 30 V B lt gt Unreg Isolated m d D 5 V ISO gt I meum 2 6 5 V ISO To PeerWay Tap T X Data RX Data Manchester E Encoder A A dci Coordinator Processor lt S w o 2
256. er Card 5 2 28 Contact Controller Processor See CC Contact FIC 5 2 23 RS3 Service Manual fuses 5 2 27 jumpers 5 2 26 LEDs 5 2 25 Contact Field Interface Card 5 2 23 CONTACT FIELD TERMINATION 5 2 13 Contact FlexTerm 5 2 2 5 2 7 FIC addressing 5 2 8 fuse 5 2 12 jumpers 5 2 10 Motherboard 5 2 7 replacement 9 2 13 wiring 5 2 8 Contact FlexTerm Extender Card 5 2 28 Contact FlexTerm Il 5 2 7 CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD 5 2 7 CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD ll 5 2 7 Contact I O 5 2 23 CONTACT I O PROCESSOR 4 3 28 Contact Marshaling Panel 5 2 16 fuse 5 2 19 wiring 5 2 17 CONTACT PROCESSOR 4 3 28 Contact Termination Board 5 2 13 fuse 5 2 15 wiring 5 2 14 Contact Termination Panel 5 5 5 fuses 5 5 6 ControlFile 4 2 1 5 V DC Only Power Regulator 4 2 7 fuse 4 2 12 jumpers 4 2 11 LEDs and test points 4 2 9 Card Cage 4 1 1 jumpers 4 1 3 Motherboard Data Bus Terminators 4 1 5 Power Regulator 5 and 12 V DC 4 2 13 fuses 4 2 19 jumpers 4 2 18 LEDs and test points 4 2 16 Support Section 4 2 1 troubleshooting 10 4 1 ControlFile fan filter cleaning 9 1 9 CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR 4 2 13 CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR 5V ONLY 4 2 7 ControlFile Power Regulator Card adjustment 9 1 21 checking voltages 9 1 19 ControlFile Status screen 10 4 7 ControlFile Terminator Board 4 1 7 ControlFile Terminator Il 4 1 5 Controller Processor 4 3 1 Contact 4 3 28 Enable Disable Switch 4 3 36 jumpers
257. er Configurations RS3 Power System Power Supply Units are intended to operate in an N 1 redundancy configuration There should always be one extra power supply module connected to a DC bus to provide redundancy Separate DC output terminals are provided for each power supply module on the front of the housing as shown in Figure 1 3 6 Standard RS3 system cabinets are available with cable entry openings in both the top and bottom panels The System Power Supply Unit and DC Distribution Bus can be mounted as appropriate for bottom cable entry or top cable entry A typical system might have three cabinets with three primary supplies and one redundant supply The redundant supply is normally load sharing with the primary supplies If a primary or redundant supply fails there will be no power loss at the load No 8 AWG insulated wire orange for 26V and brown for 26V is used to connect the System Power Supply Unit DC outputs to the DC Distribution Bus Use either the 1 meter cable 10P58277001 or the 3 meter cable 10P58277003 to make this connection Do not exceed 2 15 0 12 Nem 19 1 Ibfein torque on the DC output terminals of the System Power Supply Unit Use separate wire channels for high voltage 110 220 VAC lines and low voltage 4 20 mA signal lines to maintain as much separation as possible between voltage and signal wiring A minimum of 203 mm 8 in is recommended System Power Supply Units RS3 Power SV 1 3
258. ers 3 7 78 LED Sequences 3 7 77 OI POWER SUPPLY 3 7 20 OI Power Supply 3 7 20 fuses 3 7 24 jumpers 3 7 23 LEDs and test points 3 7 22 Ol Processor 3 7 25 OI Processor 68000 3 7 34 fuses 3 7 38 jumpers 3 7 37 LEDs 3 7 36 OI PROCESSOR 68020 3 7 30 Ol Processor 68020 3 7 30 fuses 3 7 33 jumpers 3 7 33 LEDs 3 7 32 OI PROCESSOR 68020 W ASIC 3 7 30 Ol Processor 68040 3 7 27 fuses 3 7 29 jumpers 3 7 29 LEDs 3 7 29 OI PROCESSOR V 3 7 27 OI Remote Power Supply 1 2 20 fuse 1 2 22 OI SCSI HOST ADAPTER 3 7 52 online replacement Discrete FIM 6 3 48 Multipoint I O 6 1 6 Operator Interface Card Cage See Ol Card Cage operator keyboard 3 1 6 jumpers 3 1 7 Optical Isolator Module Contact I O 5 2 20 Discrete I O 6 3 38 High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel 6 3 45 Optical PeerWay 2 2 1 2 2 2 grounding 2 2 10 Optical Repeater Attenuator 2 2 8 jumpers and LEDs 2 2 8 Index SV Index 14 Optical Tap Box 2 2 3 connecting cables 2 2 5 Option Keyboard 3 1 9 jumpers 3 1 9 Replacement Subassembly 3 1 9 OPTO Isolator 5 2 20 Opto Electric cable 2 2 5 2 2 7 ORR5 1 6 3 38 OS KEYBOARD INTERFACE 3 2 6 Output Bypass Card 5 1 18 5 1 19 fuses 5 1 22 LEDs 5 1 21 operating instructions 5 1 21 Output Bypass Unit 5 5 34 P Pansonic JU474 2AEG 3 5 18 JU475 3AEG 3 5 18 JU475 4AEG 3 5 18 parts replacement 9 2 1 Password Keyboard Interface 3 1 15 PC compatible keyboard
259. ery Backup LEDs and Controls A Output Current Indicator LED Bar Graph The AC DC power supply has power indicators and controls on the front panel Figure 1 2 3 shows the location of the LEDs and controls Table 1 2 3 shows the significance of each CAUTION Under certain failure conditions 30VDC can be present even though both LED indicators are off Check all AC DC power supplies for both red LED fault indications and equal output current indication All the supplies on the same DC distribution system should show approximately the same current flow indications within 3 to 6 amps 1 to 2 segments on the LED indicator Check each DC distribution system individually Battery Fault Red LED OUTPUT CURRENT 30 Battery Test Pushbutton Power Supply Normal Indicator Green LED Power Supply Fault Indicator Red LED Battery ON OFF Toggle Switch AC Input Indicator Orange Figure 1 2 3 Power Supply With Battery Backup Panel Features RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 8 Table 1 2 2 Power Supply With Battery Backup Indicators and Controls BATT ON OFF Toggle Switch Removes the battery backup circuit from the system when in OFF position The Battery Test Pushbutton is used to manually enable the 16 amp 5 second battery test If b
260. es as shown in Figure 1 3 6 Terminal blocks are provided for two AC input sources This enables each power supply module in the housing to be connected to a separate AC source The chassis of the power supply housing is internally bonded to the ground terminal of each AC input terminal block Inputs from each terminal block are routed through a single pole 15 ampere circuit breaker to a terminal block for use by auxiliary equipment such as fans NOTE The cabinet fans used with the RS3 System Power Supply Units are not autosensing Depending on the AC input 110 VAC or 220 VAC the correct fan must be specified according to the input voltage AC power is supplied to the AC fan in the RS3 system cabinet from the auxiliary outputs on the RS3 System Power Supply Unit System cabinets use an AC fan RMP cabinets use a DC fan RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 8 26 VDC PS1 Output Notes 2 gt Input 1 L N 2L g E EIER P Output 1 E AUX E Output 2 o 26 VDC PS2 Output N p D Input2 1 Rocker ON OFF switch circuit breaker for auxiliary AC outputs 2 gt Input 1 and Input 2 shall be supplied from separate dedicated circuit breakers Figure 1 3 6 System Cabinet DC Output Terminals System Cabinet DC Pow
261. es associated with this supply Figure 1 2 9 shows the assembly L1 P803 with 1984 3023 ime L P847 with 10P5645 Jumper 110 220 Volts 1984 3023 only GND Figure 1 2 9 10P5645000x and 1984 3023 000x MTCC Remote Power Supply MTCC Remote Power Supply Jumper On the 1984 3023 000x power supply an internal jumper wire changes the input voltage from 110 volts to 220 volts The jumper wire is in place for 110 volt input 0001 and removed for 220 volt input 0002 NOTE The 10P5645000x power supply is autosensing for AC input voltage and does not require a jumper RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 19 MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuse There is an internal fuse on the AC input Table 1 2 10 gives fuse data Table 1 2 10 MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse ve F1 power supply a 1984 3023 000x G09140 0064 GMC5 5 A 250 V Miniature F1 power supply P 10P5645000x G09140 0041 MTH5 312005 5A250V 1 1 4 in RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 20 Ol Remote Power Supply RS3 Power The OI Operator Interface Remote Power Supply 1984 1046 000x is used when powering a Multitube Command Console Command Console or MiniConsole from a remote location A remote location is defined as being more than 200 feet from the system The Ol remote power supply is either mounted inside the electronics cabinet of a Multitube Command Console inside a Command Console pedestal or
262. ess multiplexing for the RAM chips and handles the refresh cycle The dynamic RAM chips have separate pins for the read and write function A separate read write select provides separation and data bus buffering The EDAC controller decodes the check bits that are stored along with the data bits A 16 bit word is used in conjunction with the 16 bit microprocessor Six additional bits are used to store a pattern that can be decoded to indicate the exact bit pattern in the data word If any single bit is not as indicated by the EDAC check bits the EDAC Controller automatically corrects for the error and rewrites the data into the RAM location correctly If any multiple bit errors are found the EDAC will trigger a bus error to indicate problems to the operators station RAM capacity is 2 Megabytes with 8 bits per byte and 2 bytes per word An additional six bits associated with each word are the check bits The clock oscillator is divided down to provide all the timing requirements of the microprocessor and the remainder of the support devices on the card The system clock rate is selected by jumper as either 12 MHz MPCI operation or 16 MHz MPCII operation The MC68HCO000 microprocessor controls all the functions on the card and is monitored by the watchdog timer If it is not reset periodically by the microprocessor the watchdog timer toggles the reset line to the microprocessor which forces a restart All the LEDs are controlled by the LED latc
263. eyboard e Ethernet Cable e RS3 Network Interface RNI e Ethernet Hubs e Router e Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 2 RS3 Operator Workstation RS3 Consoles The workstation Figure 3 4 1 consists of a computer keyboard mouse CRT and speakers The workstation 10P5627xxxx 166 MHz and 10P5693xxxx 200 MHz can also have a tape drive a printer and an optional operator keyboard The workstation personal computer is shipped with installation and service manuals provided by the PC manufacturer Lo JONA Figure 3 4 1 RS3 Operator Station PC The workstation requires e An AC power source for the PC CRT speakers and printer e A hardware keylock device supplied with the software e A 10BaseT Ethernet cable to the hub or RNI e Uninterruptible power system UPS Two suitable uninterruptible power systems are Liebert Power Sure PS600 60 NRTL Liebert Power Sure PS600 50 CE At least one workstation on the process network should have these peripheral devices e A tape drive for backup of all workstations on the process network e A printer that can be used by any workstation on the process network The optional tape drive is a 3200 MB Travan Refer to the tape drive user s manual The optional printer is a HP870Cxi Color Printer 10P55800004 This printer has an auto sensing universal Power supply for 100 2
264. face LEDs 3 7 49 3 7 32 Printer Interface Card 0003 0004 With RS 422 interface LEDs 3 7 50 3 7 33 Printer Interface Jumper Locations 0 0c ee eee 3 7 51 3 7 84 SCSI Board 2 Functional Diagram 0 00 c cee ee 3 7 53 3 7 85 Ol SCSI Host Adapter Functional Diagram 00005 3 7 53 3 7 36 SCSI Card LEDs cummins et ey cere ed e 3 7 55 3 7 87 SCSI Board 2 1984 3301 000x Jumper Locations 3 7 56 3 7 88 Ol SCSI Host Adapter 1984 1140 0001 Jumper Locations 3 7 58 3 7 89 Ol Bubble Memory Block Diagram 0 00 cece eee 3 7 63 RS3 Consoles Contents RS3 Consoles 3 7 40 3 7 41 3 7 42 3 7 43 3 7 44 3 7 45 3 7 46 OI Bubble NV Memory LEDs OI Bubble Memory Jumpers OI NV RAM Memory Block Diagram 0 600000 cee eee eee RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit oooooooooooo OI NV RAM LEDs OI NV RAM Memory Test Points 000 cece eee eee OI NV RAM Memory Jumpers SV ix 3 7 65 3 7 67 3 7 70 3 7 72 3 7 74 3 7 75 3 7 78 Contents SV x List of Tables Table Page 3 1 1 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Numbers 3 1 5 3 1 2 Main Keyboard Parts Replacement eee eee 3 1 7 3 1 3 Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions for Use in Main KeyboatQ eS UR RURexX C Dex E ae eunt E 3 1 7 3 1 4 Trackball Keyboard Parts Replacement Lsssuu 3 1 8 3 1 5
265. fault There are several versions of the Nonvolatile Memory card Table 4 2 21 covers parts replacement data NOTE Only RAM NV Memory cards may be used in a ControlFile that uses the 5 V Only Power Regulator Table 4 2 21 Nonvolatile Memory Parts Replacement Deme o pm mmm 1984 1483 000x 1984 1224 000x HE E NV BUBBLE MEMORY 1984 1224 000x E ow Lied eds NV BUBBLE MEMORY RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 43 RAM NV Memory RS3 ControlFiles The RAM Nonvolatile memory uses a 16 MHz MC68000 microprocessor All functions of the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory are duplicated by the microprocessor which makes the RAM card a fully qualified replacement for the bubble card The RAM card reads and writes at approximately twice the speed of the bubble card Figure 4 2 18 shows a functional diagram of the RAM Nonvolatile Memory Bus arbitration circuitry controls which ControlFile bus will be used for each transaction Addresses sent by the Coordinator Processor are translated from those used with the bubble memory to those used with the RAM This allows a RAM card to replace a bubble memory card The MC68000 microprocessor simulates the actions of the bubble card A 64K EPROM is used to hold the microprocessor boot and power up diagnostic programs and holds the operating program of the NV Memory A 64K program RAM supplies the microprocessor with program memory and working storage A watchdog timer is provid
266. from software These are to be used as alarm relay contacts Fusing for the CRT is on the card along with failed fuse LED indicators NOTE You can install the card in a cage along with a Coordinator Processor and a Power Regulator to determine if the card is good RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 8 Timer Horizontal SYNC Vertical SYNC uu l ertica CRT Kd 12 V el gt Test Button Momentary Contact Switch CRT Control Blink 5 V Norma Parallel Anal Character or nalog Shift Driver an Register Select Alarm Output Board Good Alarm Board L Fault To Processor Bus Figure 3 3 4 Monochrome Video Generator Functional Diagram RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 9 Monochrome Video Generator LEDs The monochrome Video Generator card has LEDs to determine the card status Figure 3 3 5 shows the LEDs for the Monochrome Video Generator card LED Meaning O Card good No faults are detected on the video generator DS1 card Controller processor lights DS1 when power up O diagnostics are completed DS2 Card fault DS2 lights if the video generator card does not pass power up diagnostics DS3 Indicates that fuse F1 is bad F1 supplies 12 volts to the CRT MONITOR e 4 Raster test button Figure 3 3 5 Monochrom
267. g it such as HIA Bubble Memory and SCI Bubble Memory The term bubble is often used for a RAM OI NV Memory The OI Nonvolatile Memory provides e NV memory for the Ol Processor e RS 232 communications interface to a host computer or other device e RS 422 communications interface to a host computer or other device e Real Time Clock RTC RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 61 Table 3 7 24 gives parts replacement data for the Ol Nonvolatile Memory The OI NV RAM has much higher data transfer rates between the OI Processor and the OI NV Memory and may have a larger memory There may be system restrictions on replacing a RAM card with a Bubble card Table 3 7 24 OI NV Memory Replacement Data 1984 1547 0001 0002 1984 1547 0003 0004 1984 1167 0001 0002 1984 1147 0001 1984 1167 0002 1984 1147 0001 1984 1167 0002 1984 1147 0001 256K RAM 0001 has X 25 0002 has X 25 disabled 512K RAM 0003 has X 25 0004 has X 25 disabled 256K Bubble Memory 0001 has X 25 0002 has X 25 disabled Original 256K Bubble Memory 1994 1147 0001 EEG Does not have X 25 capability OI Card Cage SV 3 7 62 Ol Bubble Memory RS3 Consoles The OI Bubble Memory uses bubble memory modules for NV memory service There are two part numbers 1984 1147 0001 marked Ol BUBBLE MEMORY on the PWA 1984 1167 0002 marked Ol BUBBLE MEMORY SC on the PWA See Table 3 7 24 O
268. gnal switching is done by FET ICs that have a high off resistance and low on resistance The third hybrid is the A D converter integrator The circuit makes up a dual slope integrator A D that has a sample rate of 16 samples per second Control signals from the Programmable Timer Module PTM turn on the input voltage to ramp up the charge on a capacitor to discharge to zero volts using the precision 5 5 V reference into the minus input of the op amp This type of A D converter is unaffected by resistor and capacitor tolerances and value changes because of temperature variation The fourth hybrid is the precision 5 5 volt reference generated by a special temperature compensated IC with buffered output Power Up Diagnostics During initial power up of the card the microprocessor does its primitive diagnostics from data stored in programs loaded in the EPROM Once the Coordinator Processor has downloaded the operating program from the bubble memory the operating system stored in RAM takes over Controller Processors SV 4 3 23 68000 To Mother Board Micro Buses Processor Dual Port Address Data Control Bus Buffer Address Data Control Bus Error Dynamic Detection RAM Correction Refresh amp Control Control Programmable 128K Dynamic RAM 6 BITS EDAC Dual Port Serial Comm Controllers MUX oe Control Ref Ec O IA UM Wu Nu
269. gulator is out of operating tolerance voltage is high or low FUSE BLOWN Replace Fuse F1 Supplies power to the PeerWay DS3 Buffer Power Regulator SUSO The status timer has timed out indicating the RTS Signal has been enabled too long and the jabber halt relay has opened The RTS signal is forced OFF to STATUS FAULT keep the node from interfering with the PeerWay The DS2 fault could be the status timer in the PeerWay Tap the RTS signal on the Coordinator Processor the Tap Board connection or loss of the onboard clock which is a PeerWay Buffer or Coordinator Processor problem STATUS GOOD The timer on the PeerWay Tap is in its normal DS1 operating mode Test Points for 5 VDC Yellow 5 VDC test point Return 5 VDC return Brown Figure 4 2 3 PeerWay Buffer LEDs RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 5 PeerWay Buffer Jumpers Figure 4 2 4 shows the jumper locations for PeerWay Buffer card 1984 1502 000x Card 1984 1402 000x has no jumpers Jumpers should be moved only for a loop back test Table 4 2 2 shows the jumper positions NOTE The PeerWay node address of the ControlFile is set by jumpers on the ControlFile motherboard HD2 HD3 HD4 HD5 HD8 y 4 y 1 1 D LLLI d HD6 HD7 N Sd 3 Y i i z F1 Figure 4 2 4 PeerWay Buffer 1984 1502 000x Fuse and Jumper Locations Table 4
270. h which includes the Card Enable green Card Fault red and three yellow status LEDs The card ENABLE DISABLE switch is read through a buffer to indicate to the processor when it should disable processing During initial power up of the card the microprocessor does diagnostics from data stored in programs loaded in the 64K x 16 EPROM After the MultiPurpose Controller Il has successfully completed the diagnostic tests it informs the Coordinator Processor which IMAGE it is jumpered for and requests the operating program The Controller now executing its own internal program will then request the Coordinator Processor to download any configuration data stored in the Nonvolatile Memory Controller Processors SV 4 3 9 Communication with up to eight Field Interface Card communication lines is handled by the four dual port serial communication converters that transfer the parallel data from the card data bus to serial NRZ data Each communication converter is capable of supporting two Field Interface Card communication lines The serial data from the communication chip at TTL level is then converted to RS 422 and sent to the Field Interface Cards through the cables Receive data is ina similar format RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 10 MPCI Function Figure 4 3 4 shows a functional diagram for the MultiPurpose Controller Processor MPCI Mero LED xd Latch processor Dual Port Address Data Control
271. h DS6 and DS7 light DS7 Yellow Page 1 is active Page 0 and page 1 store information for the CRT display Depending on the amount of screen information either DS6 or DS7 lights or both DS6 and DS7 light DS8 Yellow Hardware alarm contact The signal sent to light DS8 has also been sent to open or close the hardware alarm contact DS9 Yellow Process alarm contact The signal sent to light DS9 has also been sent to open or close the process alarm contact DS10 Yellow Diagnostic routine is in progress during a power up procedure DS11 Yellow Screen blank is active On a normally functioning Character Graphics Video Generator Card DS11 shows a slight but constant flicker Figure 3 7 28 Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 45 Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse Figure 3 7 29 shows the location of the fuse on the Character Graphics Video Generator Table 3 7 16 shows fuse data Figure 3 7 29 Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse Location Table 3 7 16 Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse Bussman Littelfuse G09140 0032 MDL 2 312002 2A 250 V slow blow RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 46 Printer Interface RS3 Consoles The Printer Interface card 1984 1011 0003 is marked MINICONSOLE PRINTER INTERFACE on the PWA It has these functions e Real Time Clock RTC which ke
272. harge LEDs will blink on briefly 5V POWER CHARGE DS10 Same as 12 V Power Charge above INPUT B STATUS Bus B 24 VDC or 30 VDO from the DC distribution DS9 system is within operating tolerance Normally OFF if only one DC bus is used INPUT A STATUS Bus A 24 VDC or 30 VDC from the DC distribution system DS8 is within operating tolerance The 12 VDC regulator is within operating tolerance If 12 V STATUS HD2 is jumpered DS7 is forced ON and 12 VDC is DS7 disabled ae SENT The 12 VDC regulator is within operating tolerance 5 V STATUS The 5 VDC regulator is within operating tolerance DS5 CARD FAULT DS4 One of the regulator sections 5 12 12 VDC is out of operating tolerance Replace the card 12 V FUSE BLOWN Replace Fuse F1 x 12 VDC supply sections of the Power DS3 Regulator 5V i wid Replace Fuse F2 Power to the 5 VDC Power Regulator CARD GOOD 5 12 and 12 VDC Supplies are within operating DS1 tolerance Does not include status of the DC buses Test Points BROWN Ground return BLUE 12 VDC Regulator YELLOW 5 VDC Regulator RED 12 VDC Regulator WHITE 5 V Relative current indication GREEN 12 V Relative current indication Figure 4 2 9 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 18 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12
273. has been cycled or the Reset button is pressed RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 17 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Self Test The self test prints the character set for each type style and each language followed by a vertical line in each column There are eight type styles and eight languages on the standard printer I To initiate the printer self test 1 Turn the power off Hold the self test FF switch down Turn the power on The self test will begin Release the self test switch oF ON The self test will stop if The reset button is pressed The power is turned off The top cover is opened a9 TT p The printer runs out of paper Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Vertical Alignment RS3 Consoles The Adjust switch is used to adjust the vertical alignment of the print columns Due to mechanical inaccuracies of the carriage movement across the paper an electrical adjustment is used to ensure that a character will print in exactly the same spot whether the printhead is moving left or right The vertical alignment is factory set and should not require field adjustment It can be modified by this procedure L To check and modify the vertical alignment 1 Initiate the printer self test When all character sets have been printed a vertical line will be printed in each column 2 Observe the vertical alignment and make adjustments as required with the Adjust switch 3 Stop the self test by pressing the reset button tu
274. hbutton is inactive Table 1 2 4 shows the jumper positions Table 1 2 4 Battery Charger Board Jumper Positions wmm pose JO n 1 2 N O Contact is normally open Alarm contact for power supply fault 2 3 N C Contact is normally closed O e 1 2 N O Contact is normally open Plann COMA IO DANE TAUI 2 3 N C Contact is normally closed 3 1 2 W BAT Test Battery every 24 hours Battery connection 2 3 W O BATT Do not test Battery RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 12 NOTE Any adjustments to the battery voltage must be made with the BATT switch in the OFF position Table 1 2 5 Battery Charger Card Test Points Test Point Function Reference to ground TP1 TP2 Reference voltage 2 35 volts adjusted by variable resistor R1 TP3 Battery voltage 27 6 volts adjusted by variable resistor R2 Battery Charger Card Fuses Figure 1 2 4 shows the fuse locations Table 1 2 6 gives fuse data for the Battery Charger card Table 1 2 6 Battery Charger Card Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse be G09140 0016 AGC 1 2 312 500 5 A 250 V Quick Acting G09140 0030 AGC 2 312002 2 A 250 V Quick Acting Battery Replacement To replace the batteries on the Battery Charger card 1 Turn the BATT switch to the OFF position Remove the battery box Install new batteries Reinstall the battery box Turn the BATT switch to the ON position gr a Se US RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 13 AC DC Power Supply
275. he features needed for larger process networks Up to eight hubs can be stacked as a single repeater TP and fiber optic hubs can be mixed in the stack Options provide network management connections to the plant LAN Two versions of LinkBuilder FMS II hubs are used e 12 Port TP 3C16670A 12 shielded RJ 45 TP connectors e 24 Port TP 3C16671A 24 shielded RJ 45 TP connectors The FMS II hubs are equipped with a standard attachment unit interface AUI port and a slot for a plug in Transceiver Interface Module The 12 Port TP hub can use either the AUI port or the transceiver port the 24 Port hub can use both Each LinkBuilder FMS II hub includes LEDs for power status packet reception packet collision network management and hub ID Each port has LEDs for partition and link status All LinkBuilder FMS II hubs offer e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management Accepts optional network management modules e RMON Management Standard Remote Monitoring RMON automates network management to reduce network traffic and errors e Built in security Easy to enable security features can be used to protect data and LAN resources e Media choices You can create mixed media stack with 12 port and 24 port RJ 45 twisted pair hubs and 6 port ST fiber hubs e Backbone choices Backbone links include a standard attachment unit interface AUI port plus optional Transceiver Interface Modules for AUI BNC coaxial ST fiber and twis
276. he batteries It is located on the partition panel in front of the printed circuit board Table 1 2 11 shows fuse data Table 1 2 11 OI Remote Power Supply Fuse FRSI Bussman Littelfuse 50527 0004 0004 S60 50 A 300 V Time 50A300V Time Delay RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 23 DC DC Power Supply System Power RS3 Power RTN The DC DC Power Supply 1984 0393 000x supplies power to remotely powered devices The DC DC supply receives 30 volts DC from the system power supplies and uses a 25 K Hz switching regulator to provide a 24 volts DC or 15 volts DC volt output to external devices The output of the DC DC power supply is preset at the factory The output of the DC DC power supply is wired in parallel to five pairs of terminal blocks Each terminal block has positive and negative terminals The positive terminal of each output is fused at 3 amps Do not exceed the rated output current of the supply Figure 1 2 11 shows a functional diagram for connecting a single DC DC power supply Output Terminal Block 24 or 15VDC 3 Amps RTN r0 EOS 60 1 10 3 Amps 9 Lo xo 8 3 Amps f Lux ole 3 Amps 5 H M 4 i 3 Amps 3 2 Gara V Figure 1 2 11 DC DC Power Supply Functio
277. he battery provides for continuation of the clock readings over power failures and for times when the card may be removed from the card cage RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 72 Battery Backed RAM The battery backed RAM BRAM consists of the RAM chips and required control and battery backup circuits It is accessed only by the OI processor over a dedicated NVRAM bus Figure 3 7 43 shows the battery control circuit Power BRAM toBRAM Enable Disable Signal Power Control Circuits Current Monitoring Signal 5 VDC Battery Voltage Isolated Supply Diode Isolation Battery Low Voltage Battery Check aa Test y Low Battery Alarm Battery to Read Latch Test Points Battery Test Push Button Battery 1 Battery 2 Figure 3 7 43 RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit The battery control circuit monitors the 5 VDC supply and battery voltages If the 5 VDC supply falls below the threshold value the battery control circuit acts to preserve the contents of the BRAM e Disables the BRAM to prevent further reads or writes e Resets the Ol processor e Supplies the BRAM with power from the batteries RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 73 When the 5 VDC supply rises to the threshold level the battery control circuit restores normal BRAM operation The battery control circuit continuously monitors the unloaded voltage of each battery If a battery voltage falls below
278. he processor LEDs are driven from a data latch to indicate card status Another output from the latch is a software battery charge enable The 8 MHz clock is divided down and distributed The Programmable Array Logic PAL decodes the addressing for the various addressable devices on the card A data buffer puts the battery status indications on the data bus for the processor The card has 4 NVRAM chips to retain data if power is removed Data to and from the EEROM is buffered for read and write Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 48 RS3 Consoles NOTE In current software revision levels NVRAM is no longer used The Printer Interface card contains the serial interface which transfers the parallel data and the printer format RS 232 data All data on and off the card are isolated by optical isolators The consoles support any RS 232 serial communications printer that uses X On X Off or data terminal ready DTR signals to indicate when the printer buffer is full If the printer does not use X On X Off or DTR select a slower baud rate Compatible printers should have eight bits no parity no automatic line feed and one stop bit The real time clock RTC generates e Seconds e Minutes e Hours e Day of the Week e Day of the Month e Month e Year including Leap Year The RTC is backed up by three Nicad battery cells A jumper that disables power during shipping must be repositioned before the card is placed in service While in ser
279. he raster size and S7 Lo Hi or Med frequency NOTE This assumes use of Pixel Graphics Switches Switches S4 1 S2 and and S5 f Switch S6 S3 should shouldbe Switch S7 should be be set to 75 set to should be set to Ohm INTERNAL setto HI position 2 ON OFF switch RFI EM AC power Figure 3 1 15 Conrac 7241 CRT Back View Table 3 1 18 lists the FRSI part number for Conrac 7241 components Table 3 1 18 Conrac 7241 Components FRSI Part Number Conrac Part Number Scan Board Selectable 1984 1651 0018 162885 77 BNC Selectable 1984 1651 0033 162938 74A Video Processor Board 1984 1651 0004 162838 72 High Voltage Module 1166 0524 0010 106513 6 Low Voltage Regulator Board 1984 1651 0007 162931 71 CRT Socket Board 1984 1651 0019 162921 72 Control Board 1984 1651 0020 162951 71 Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 32 Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Failures In certain cases a failure of the Scan board 1984 1651 0018 also causes a failure of the Low Voltage Regulator board 1984 1651 0007 NOTE If you suspect that the Scan board is bad always check the Low Voltage Regulator board before you replace the Scan board Failure to do this can result in damage to the new Scan boa
280. he slave A ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator may be paired with a 5 VDC and 12 VDC Power Regulator in ControlFiles that use RAM NV Memory Table 4 2 4 shows parts replacement data Table 4 2 4 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Parts Replacement 1984 1505 000x Replaces these cards ONLY in 1984 3505 000x ControlFiles that use NVRAM 1984 1432 000x and MPC Processors CAUTION When inserting a Power Regulator card push it partially in and pause to allow the capacitors to charge The LED will blink once Then seat the card firmly Failure to allow the capacitors to charge can result in burned edge connector contacts RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 8 A DC Input A The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator has one output e 5 volts with over voltage and current protection Figure 4 2 5 is a functional diagram for the ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator 5 V Voltage Sense Comparators 12V Bus Buffers 12V Input Voltage B Input Voltage A 24 V or 30 V 24 V or 30 V p Be ipit E Ma ae eel O m gt gt 5 V Master Current zz Over Voltage 415 V Sense 5 Ji LN 4 Switching Slave Voltage Adjust Input Regulator Slave Current Output De Slave Voltage Adjust Output Slave Current Input gt
281. he table side panels To remove a side panel lift the panel up an inch or two and then pull out CAUTION The console Keyboard Interface contains electrostatic sensitive devices Use a grounding wrist strap while working with the card 2 Remove the console Keyboard Interface card from the monitor base by removing the two screws at the front of the console base and pulling out the assembly Figure 3 1 11 shows the screw locations a r Tabletop d Remove screws and pull out Keyboard Interface Card Figure 3 1 11 Removing the Console Keyboard Interface Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 24 Keyboard Interface LEDs The 10P5084x00x 1984 3222 x00x and 1984 2889 000x Keyboard Interface cards have three LEDs Table 3 1 13 shows their meanings Table 3 1 13 Keyboard Interface LEDs Yellow Flashes when receiving data from the printer interface Yellow Flashes when sending data to the printer interface Red Fuse F1 is blown Keyboard Interface Jumper The 10P5084x00x 1984 3222 x00x and 1984 2889 000x Keyboard Interface cards have one jumper that indicates the software revision level loaded in the console 1984 3222 x00x also has a jumper wire in J414 unless the 0004 dual keyswitch option is installed Table 3 1 14 gives the jumper settings Table 3 1
282. her PeerWay before using either disable or test mode Normal Mode When S1 and S2 are both thrown to the right normal operation results Disabled Mode When S1 and S2 differ the twinax to fiber optic connection is turned off Test Mode When S1 and S2 are both thrown to the left the fiber optic transmitter sends a 5096 duty cycle signal on the fiber The Receive LED on all tap boxes connected to this fiber should be ON This verifies that both transmitter and receiver are functioning within specification Table 2 3 4 shows all cases Table 2 3 4 Normal Test Switch Settings Fiber Optio Transmitter Test Mode RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 9 PX Fuses Table 2 3 5 gives fuse data for the PX Table 2 3 5 PX Fuses FRSI Littelfuse Schurter F1 F2 G50382 0009 273 125 MSF 034 4210 1 8 A 125 V Plug In G50382 0019 273 001 MSF 034 4221 1A 125 V Plug In RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 10 RS3 PeerWay Hybrid PeerWay FISHER ROSEMOUNT RS3 Service Manual Chapter 3 Consoles Section 1 Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station 3 1 1 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies ooooooc oooo 3 1 4 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Error Reporting 3 1 5 Configuration Keyboard and Enhanced Engineering Keyboard 3 1 6 Operator Keyboard 0 0 ccc en 3 1 6 Main Keyboard 2 epe rpe
283. horizontal position Align the power supply module with the guide rails in the housing Slide the power supply module into the housing making sure that the bottom right edge of the power supply module engages the plastic guide rail in the housing NOTE If you are installing only one power supply module in a housing install it in the right side of the housing 4 5 6 Continue inserting the power supply module until the locking pawl reaches the stop Using a screwdriver slowly turn the locking screw counterclockwise one quarter turn while observing the pawl to ensure that it freely rotates 90 degrees to the vertical position and engages the slot in the bottom of the housing If the pawl does not rotate to the vertical position move the power supply module in or out of the housing slightly to align the pawl with the slot in the housing Turn the locking screw approximately 10 additional turns counterclockwise until it stops to fully seat the blind mate connector The remaining turns draw the power supply module into the housing and seat the blind mate electrical connector CAUTION Do not apply power to the power supply module until the blind mate connector is fully seated Failure to fully seat the connector may result in damage to the power supply module and power supply housing System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 15 Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs The power supply housing includes two auxiliary AC outputs
284. hrough auxiliary output so AC voltage ranges for auxiliary devices cabinet fans must be properly defined The power supply module outputs are provided with overvoltage overcurrent and short circuit protection A pair of isolated test jacks on the front of each power supply module enable monitoring of output current Each power supply module has two front mounted LEDs e The amber LED indicates that the power supply module s AC input is energized e The green LED indicates that the DC output voltage is within tolerances Each power supply module has an alarm relay that connects to a terminal block on the power supply housing Alarm relays are energized during normal operation and de energized if the DC output is out of tolerance or if the cooling fan fails The alarm relay contacts are rated to 5 amperes at 250 VAC or 5 amperes at 30 VDC for a resistive load A current limited interlock loop limited to 100 mA is provided to allow connection of other external alarm circuits See Alarm Wiring on page 1 3 11 for more information The power supply housing includes separate AC input terminal blocks for each power supply module enabling each power supply module in a housing to be connected to a separate AC source Inputs from each terminal block are routed through a single pole 15 ampere circuit breaker to an auxiliary AC output terminal block that can be used to power auxiliary equipment such as cabinet fans Individual power s
285. ial regulation The primary and secondary of the transformer have selectable taps for 50 or 60 Hz line frequency The primary also has taps for 115 or 220 volts AC input The third winding on the primary side is isolated and has a parallel capacitor This provides transformer output voltage regulation by providing extra voltage to the circuit from the power stored in the resonant circuit The third winding also inherently limits current NOTE Because the transformer is self regulating no other power conditioning should be necessary Do not use an isolation transformer voltage regulating power source or uninterruptible power supply with a ferroresonant transformer as its output device unless it is rated at least 3 kVA for each standard AC DC power supply it powers Use of a smaller ferroresonant transformer can result in oscillations An optional Battery Charger card in the power supply slowly charges the backup batteries protects against momentary AC voltage drops and contains contacts for external alarms if the output voltage drops below 26 volts DC The Battery Charger card and batteries are not required for DC output from the power supply A 10 segment LED display shows the current output of the power supply in 3 amp increments RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 5 govpc 22A F2 30A Y DCOut 3 1 17
286. iate the Fujitsu DL2600 printer self test Either 1 Turn the power off Hold the FUNCTION key down and turn the power on or 2 a Hold down ALT and press SETUP b Press FUNCTION until FUNCTION SELF TEST is displayed c Press SELECT or ITEM to start the test 1 To pause the test 1 Press either ALT or SETUP To resume press the same button again 1 To stop the test Either 1 Turn the power off and then on Or 2 Press FUNCTION Vertical alignment is set at the factory and should not require field adjustment However if the alignment is off use the following procedure RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 14 J To adjust Fujitsu DL2600 printer vertical alignment 1 Load full width paper 2 Turn the power off Hold FF and LF and turn the power on The display reads VER ALIGNMENT 0 The printer prints a series of vertical lines 3 Ifthe lines are not aligned press LF or FF until they are aligned The display may range from 7 to 8 4 When the lines are aligned press RESET The display will read SAVING NOW and the alignment will be saved Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Functional Test RS3 Consoles The functional test checks almost all printer features First verify the operator interface setup and then run the functional test NOTE For software Version 11 verify that PRINTER is set to FUJITSU 1 To run the functional test from a Command console 1 Type CCC ENTER at th
287. ide and gives data for each character location on the screen Attribute and Character data load into RAM on power up Attribute RAM provides a table for translations between color and pixel information Character RAM contains the character font The 8 bit output of the Character RAM is synchronized with the output from the Refresh RAM This output contains two bits for each color allowing 4 color intensities for each color The video output section includes three digital to analog converters DACs that convert digital signals into analog signals to drive the red blue and green electron guns The card has a momentary contact switch to drive the CRT gun in order to help determine if the CRT is working External alarm contacts are driven from this card This is the first board checked by the processor after it has run its own diagnostics Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 44 Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs The Character Graphics Video Generator card has LEDs to indicate the card status Figure 3 7 28 shows the LEDs DS1 Green No faults are detected on the card DS1 lights when the card completes power up diagnostics DS2 Red Card fault DS2 lights if the Video Generator Card fails power up diagnostics DS3 Red Not used DS6 Yellow Page 0 is active Page 0 and page 1 store information for the CRT display Depending on the amount of screen information either DS6 or DS7 lights or bot
288. ide of the housing PS1 position The housing contains input and output connectors alarm connectors and circuit breakers for the auxiliary outputs All connections are on the front of the housing Rear and side access to the housing are not required Figure 1 3 1 shows a housing with two power supply modules installed RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 2 Blind Mate 446 mm Connector 17 55 in gt A Power oo m Supply Housing 343 13 5 Y i 38 1 mm a 1 5 in Current ia A Max Monitor Test Baie mel DC Output Points an Connector Fan AC Input is PS1 AUX AC Output 1 5 22i 133 AC Input yo PS2 AUX AC TT p Powor PONE Power pud Output 2 Alarm Contact Supply 2 Switch Supply 1 ORE Outputs LED Breaker Indicators and Current Monitor Test Points Figure 1 3 1 System Power Supply Unit with Two Power Modules Installed RS3 Power System Power Supply Units Housing SV 1 3 3 DC Output and Figure 1 3 2 shows the System Power Supply Unit housing 12P0236X012 The housing mounts on standard 483 mm 19 in EIA rails in an RS3 system cabinet Rack height is 133 mm 5 25 in with a depth of 343 mm 13 5 in from the mounting flange The housing supports two power supply modules and contains separate DC output terminals for each powe
289. ideo Generator The Video Generator can drive the CRT at varying brightness levels The remote intensity can be controlled character by character or ona whole screen basis This is done by data attributes stored along with each character and converted from digital to an analog bias in the video drive The drives to the CRT are transistor to transistor logic TTL signals for the horizontal and vertical synch and analog signals for the video The monochrome CRT screen is 80 characters wide and 24 lines high There is a possible total of 1920 character spaces on one screen The ASCII character designation and the attributes are stored in one of two memories on the Video Generator card The CRT Controller reads data for two consecutive characters from the upper memory while the processor is writing data to the lower memory Each character occupies two addresses in RAM memory The first address contains the attributes for the character Character attributes include normal or inverted video blink underline and gray scale brightness A full screen update takes place 30 times a second The CRT controller handles all CRT interface timing functions The card also buffers the data to the microprocessor and another circuit arbitrates access to RAM by the microprocessor and the CRT controller The LED latch driver is driven from the processor card It also enables the cursor from screen to screen CRT display enable and two DC relay drivers driven
290. ies SV 1 2 10 CAUTION Use caution in removing and replacing boards in the power supply Some boards are not keyed to prevent improper insertions 11 Replace the card in the power supply by performing the above steps in reverse order Jumpers JO J192 T1 C Battery Charger Circuit Card e p o Figure 1 2 4 Accessing the Battery Charger Card RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 11 Battery Charger Card Jumpers and Test Points The Battery Charger card in the AC DC power supply has three jumpers and three test points Figure 1 2 5 shows the jumper and test point locations HD3 TP1 TP2 TP3 Fi a R1 R2 HD1 F2 HD2 p O L Figure 1 2 5 Battery Charger Board Fuse and Jumper Locations Jumpers HD1 and HD2 determine the alarm contact condition for power supply and battery fault alarms If the jumpers are in the normally open position the contacts will be open for no alarm and closed for an alarm Jumper HD3 controls use of the battery check circuitry and the BATT FAULT alarm contacts When HD3 is in the 1 2 position the battery is tested every 24 hours and the BATT FAULT alarm contacts are active When HD3 is in the 2 3 position no testing of the battery occurs the BATT FAULT alarm contacts are not used and the battery test pus
291. ile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator may be jumpered for 30 VDC or 24 VDC input It should be jumpered for 30 volt DC input unless it is necessary to use 24 VDC input to allow a 24 volt uninterruptible power supply source to tie in with a ControlFile Figure 4 2 7 shows the jumper locations for the ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Table 4 2 5 shows the jumper positions LLL LEN HE HH EEHEEH EHE E E BL EL G A Figure 4 2 7 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper and Fuse Locations Table 4 2 5 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper Positions Jumper HD1 Position 1 2 Position 2 3 30 V Input 24 V Input RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 12 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse Figure 4 2 7 shows location of the ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator fuse Table 4 2 6 gives the fuse value and part number Table 4 2 6 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse Bussman Littelfuse m G09140 0061 ABC 20 314020 20 A 250 V Regular RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 13 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC RS3 ControlFiles The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC 1984 1505 000x and 1984 1432 000x provides power to all cards in the ControlFile except the two PeerWay Buffer cards The cards are marked CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR on the PWA A redundant Power Regulator is optional If two Power Regulators a
292. iming The 8 MHz clock is used for the PeerWay interface The 128 kB erasable programmable read only memory EPROM provides the microprocessor boot program power up diagnostics PeerWay boot program and a debugger The 128 kB zero wait state fast static random access memory SRAM is organized into 32 bit words to hold programs such as interrupt routines that must run as fast as possible Four megabytes of dynamic random access memory DRAM provides one megabyte of 32 bit working storage for the microprocessor Thirty nine bits are used thirty two for data and seven for the EDAC check bits The Error Detection And Correction EDAC scheme corrects single bit errors and detects multiple bit errors The RAMCON ASIC provides for all of the timing requirements of the dynamic RAM chips and the EDAC circuitry The synchronous bus provides a compatible interface between the microprocessor and the PeerWay for standard PeerWay communications It also serves to interface the programmable timers PTM DMA controller advanced data link controller ADLC and SRAM Bus A arbitration circuit ARB controls access to the synchronous bus by either the DMA or the MC68020 microprocessor Buffers provide an interface with the standard ControlFile motherboard bus This allows communications between the MC68020 processor on the CP IV and the processors that are on other cards in the ControlFile There is also a 16 bit data path for communication between t
293. in the nonvolatile memory See Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Nonvolatile Memory card hardware error on read If the Nonvolatile Memory card was enabled the card should be replaced RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 36 CP Jumpers The Coordinator Processor variations are A e CP5 e CP IV e CP IV e CP II e CP l CP5 10P57360007 CP5 may be used with MPCII and MPC5 Controller Processors It does not have any jumpers CP IV 10P50870004 and 1984 4164 0004 CP IV may be used with MPCI MPCII MPC5 CC MLC MUX SSC and PLC Controller Processors It has one moveable jumper Table 4 2 14 shows the jumper positions for CP IV Table 4 2 14 CP IV Jumper Positions ume Postion ram n HD3 to Mica Working with MPCII or MPCS Controller Processors 1 2 only Factory Setting OTHER Working with a mix of MPCI CC MLC MUX SSC 2 3 and PLC Controller Processors RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 37 Figure 4 2 15 shows fuse and jumper locations HD 7 Figure 4 2 15 CP IV and CP IV Fuse and Jumper Locations CP IV 1984 4064 000x CP IV may be used only with MPCII Controller Processors It has no field adjustable jumpers Figure 4 2 15 shows fuse and jumper locations Table 4 2 15 shows the jumper positions for CP IV HD1 HD2 and HD8 are hardwired HD3 through HD6 are factory set to 1 2
294. inet door or as close to the power supply as practical Standard fuse sizes are listed on the label be sure to record any changes from the standard RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 38 RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 3 1 Section 3 System Power Supply Units The RS3 System Power Supply Unit is standard equipment in an RS3 Millennium Package RMP It is also standard equipment in most newer RS3 system cabinets The RS3 System Power Supply Unit normally consists of two power supply modules 12P0238X012 anda housing 12P0236X012 This section describes physical and electrical descriptions of the System Power Supply Unit along with installation instructions and specifications NOTE The 12P0238X012 power supplies cannot be mixed with 10P5658 XXXX 1984 2298 XXXX 1984 0298 XXXX 10P5664 XXXX or 1984 0390 XXXX AC DC power supplies on the same DC bus Physical Description The RS3 System Power Supply Unit is installed in an RS3 system cabinet or an RMP cabinet providing regulated DC power for equipment installed in the cabinets The System Power Supply Unit does not require an AC entrance panel The System Power Supply Unit with two power supply modules has a 2400 watt output capacity with 74 amperes available at 8096 loading A housing can contain either one or two 1200 watt power supply modules that provide DC power If a housing contains only one power supply module it should be installed in the right s
295. ing may be inaccurate e The ribbon may come off of the guides or come loose during printing If the setting is too high e Printing may be light and or characters may be missing RS3 Consoles Printers O To 1 SV 3 6 19 adjust the paper thickness lever Move the lever to position 9 to move the printhead as far as possible from the platen Initiate the self test Move the lever to a lower number until the print quality is as desired Stop the self test by pressing the reset button or turning off the power Paper jams may be caused by Poor paper quality or improper thickness Improper adjustment of the paper thickness lever Scraps of paper in the feed path Misalignment of the box of paper that is feeding the printer The box should sit directly beneath the printer infeed slot Improper alignment of the paper catch basket clear a paper jam Turn off the power and open the front cover Note the setting of the paper thickness lever Set the lever to 9 to give the maximum clearance between printhead and platen 3 Place the printhead at either end of the line 4 Carefully pull the jammed paper out of the printer Rotate the RS3 Consoles platen knob to remove all scraps from beneath the platen Center the printhead and insert paper into the form tractors Rotate the platen knob to feed the paper If the paper does not feed freely use 4 or 5 sheets of paper folded together to push out any sc
296. ire connected from the bus bar to the chassis ground lug This is the only connection point of the DC return system to ground DC Power Distribution Bus assemblies may be daisy chained using the DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper Cable 1984 0373 00xx or 2 gauge wire The current limit is 180 amps Each DC Power Distribution Bus assembly may hold up to six DC Output cards which are used to supply power to individual card cages and devices DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 4 Connector to Card Cage Bus A Power Supplies pet momo de ELS ene A pests mus gt N W alee hal FUSE F1 FUSE F2 FUSE F1 FUSE F2 E Bus B B8 Ba Power Supplies Figure 1 4 3 DC Power Distribution Bus RS3 Power DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 5 DC Output Card From DC Power Supplies Power for system devices is tapped from the bus bars by mounting DC Output cards 1984 1264 000x on the bus bars as shown in Figure 1 4 4 The card is marked DC OUTPUT on the PWA Each DC Output card has a fuse and terminal for both bus A and bus B An LED in parallel with each fuse lights to indicate a blown fuse A fuse reference chart at the bottom of each output card indicates the proper size of fuse to be used in each position A standard DC distribution system has buses A and B jumpered together to give bus A B Devices may take power from either the bus A
297. is used in data transfer with the Bubble Memory and the Serial Communication Controller because of their high data transfer rates The Bubble Memory consists of bubble chips and control circuitry There are two serial communications channels e Channel A is an RS 422 communications port e Channel B is an RS 232 port Only one channel is used at a time The choice is made by software from the Operator Console Jumpers are used to configure the communications ports The Baud rate on the communications channel is set by software Other jumpers allow configuration as a terminal clock supplied externally or as a modem this card supplies the clock and to select a loopback test The loopback jumpers connect transmit with receive data and request to send with clear to send signals Three LEDs monitor each communications channel The Real Time Clock supplies real time clock services for the OI Processor card These include periodic interrupts time and date keeping and 50 bytes of battery backed RAM The clock is backed up by a nicad battery and an associated charging circuit The battery provides for continuation of the clock readings over power failures and for times when the card may be removed from the card cage Jumpers are provided to disable the battery when the card will be unused for a period of more than a few hours The 8K x 8 Static RAM is accessible by both the OI Processor and the DMA Controller The Read Latch has a battery statu
298. ists of a twisted pair of wires within an overall shield The electrical specification is RS 422 a form of high speed data communication using two lines driven differentially between 5 volts and ground The twinax shield is used to shield the data lines from outside electrical interference Twinax PeerWay cables are used in pairs called A and B In order to identify the cables the A cable should be color coded green and the B cable should be color coded blue The cable connectors can be marked with a felt tip marker Corresponding A and B PeerWay tap boxes are marked with green and blue labels T style connectors are used to connect the twinax cable to the bulkhead connector on the PeerWay tap Figure 2 1 7 shows the cable connections to a Tap Box CAUTION The connector must have an insulating sleeve to prevent accidental grounding of the Twinax PeerWay shield Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 10 PeerWay B PeerWay A o o olo O PEERWAY PEERWAY TAP TAP A B O ollo H 3 O E Ly Drop Cables Figure 2 1 7 PeerWay Tap Box Connection RS3 PeerWay PeerWay A To Next PeerWay PeerWay B Tap O O Electrical PeerWay Twinax PeerWay Cable Termination SV 2 1 11 Both ends of each standard 100 ohm twinax PeerWay cable are equipped with a 100 ohm impedance terminator 1984 1065 0001 Extended length 124 ohm cable is e
299. itrates access between the Ol processor and the DMAC DMAC The DMAC always has first access to the bus The DMAC is used in data transfers between the Serial Communication Controller and the Communication Static RAM This frees the Ol processor for other tasks 8K x 8 Communication Static RAM Buffer The 8K x 8 Static RAM is accessible by the OI Processor Diagnostic Latches The Read Latch has battery status lines and configuration information The Write Latch changes pages of the NV RAM and starts battery tests The LED Latch drives the status LEDs Serial Communication Controller There are two serial communications channels e Channel A is an RS 422 communications port e Channel B is an RS 232 port Only one channel may be used at a time The choice is made from the Operator s console by software Jumpers are used to configure the communications ports The Baud rate on the communications channel is set by software Other jumpers allow configuration as a terminal or as a modem Jumpers are also used to select a loopback test The loopback jumpers directly connect transmit with receive data and request to send with clear to send signals Three LEDs monitor the activity of each communications channel Real Time Clock The Real Time Clock supplies real time clock services for the Ol Processor card including time and date periodic interrupts and 50 bytes of battery backed RAM The clock is backed up by the battery control circuit T
300. ives 30 VDC Fan Regulator Input Power Cable 5 VDC SV 3 5 19 Mini Floppy Interface Card Disk Data Cable Disk Data Cable ana ne Disk Drive Number 1 Disk Drive Number 2 Figure 3 5 7 MiniConsole 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drives Top View RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 20 MiniConsole 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers Jumpering depends on the particular drive model in hand Pansonic JU475 4AEG Figure 3 5 8 shows jumper positions The drive select jumpers are marked DS1 DS2 DS3 and DS4 In a two drive installation the left drive should be jumpered as drive DS1 and the right drive as DS2 Jumper TM must be installed in drive 1 and removed from drive 2 Jumper TM must be installed for a single drive installation HS HM HL1 HL UA DC DO NDO RDY MS EX GX 1E MX BX EMEN X DD TH 1M TM NH OF E PH ST DS1DS2DS3DS4
301. l Command Console CRT 0 00 cece cnet ene 3 2 8 Pedestal Command Console Disk Interface Card SCSI 3 2 11 Remote Command Console Power Supply 0 00c eee e eee 3 2 11 Pedestal Command Console Printer Interface Card 000 0 00 oo 3 2 11 Section 3 MiniConsole cac nk rRNA externa KORR RR 3 3 1 MiniConsole Keyboards 00 cece eect en 3 3 4 MiniConsole Power Regulator Card 000 cece eee eee eee 3 3 6 MiniConsole PeerWay Interface Card 00 e cece eee 3 3 6 MiniConsole Ol Processor Card 0 00000 cee cece tees 3 3 6 Monochrome Video Generator o o occcccccccccoccn 3 3 7 Monochrome Video Generator LEDs 0 0 c cece teenies 3 3 9 Monochrome Video Generator Raster Test Button o o ooooooo 3 3 9 Monochrome Video Generator Fuse 0c cece eee eee 3 3 10 MiniCorisole CRT 5 cate ee ep caw e aa end Saw eta Obie 3 3 11 MiniConsole Printer Interface 0 0 cece eect eee 3 3 11 MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive sssssssese III 3 3 11 MiniConsole Floppy Interface SCSI 00 cece eee 3 3 12 MiniConsole Floppy Interface SCSI LEDs 00 00 cece 3 3 13 Floppy Disk Power Supply 000 cece eee eee tenets 3 3 14 Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses 00sec eee eee eens 3 3 16 Remote MiniConsole Power Supply 000 cece eee e eee 3 3 16 Section 4 HS3 Operator Statio
302. l Isolation Arbitra Local Loop Back B RTS B gt Transmit B RAM LED lt E Receive B Latch pa Status B pe 5 V Unregulated 9 V gt B Return gt Optical Isolation RTN 9V To Motherboard Bus RTN 9 V Figure 3 7 10 PeerWay Interface Functional Diagram RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 16 RS3 Consoles NOTE The PeerWay node address must be an even number The PeerWay node address is independent of SCSI device addresses used in the Card Cage Bus buffers on the PeerWay Interface isolate the board synchronous bus for the Direct Memory Access Controller DMAC Advanced Data Link Controller ADLC Programmable Timer Module PTM write buffer read buffer RAM 2K X 8 and a software driven LED latch The RAM buffers transmissions for the PeerWay The DMAC transfers data from buffer memory to and from the ADLC The ADLC changes data from parallel to serial for transmission and from serial to parallel data for receiving The PTM runs the bus access scheme controlling timeout functions to allow other devices to access the bus at given times The Manchester Encoder Decoder HD6409 encodes data for transmitting to Non Return to Zero NRZ format NRZ format encodes data and a synchronous clock in the same signal Rising and falling edges of the transmitter signal keep the phase lock loop oscillator in the receive
303. l NV Memory Replacement Data for Ol Bubble Memory replacement data The Ol Bubble Memory card is composed of Bus Arbitration control Direct Memory Address DMA Controller 8K x 8 Static RAM Serial Communications Controller Magnetic Bubble Memory Real Time Clock Read and Write Latches Figure 3 7 39 is a block diagram of the OI Bubble Memory card OI Card Cage SV 3 7 63 E I DMA rom Controller Mother gt Board un Synch Address Bus uffers RS 422 ra Serial gt Interface Communication Controller gt A t gt RS 422 Interface Address Decodes ES Address i Decode Memory ie 8K x 8 rbitration Static RAM Control T To From LED Mother Bubble Latch Board nee la Memory uffers Chips and Ti P Latch Write Latch Real Time Clock Read gt b Latch Synch Data Bus Figure 3 7 39 OI Bubble Memory Block Diagram RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 64 RS3 Consoles Bus Arbitration Control arbitrates access between the Ol Processor and the DMAC The DMAC always has first access to the bus The DMAC
304. lFile Support Section SV 4 2 47 Test Points LEDS BATTERY 2 LOW Battery 2 voltage is low DS10 Replace both batteries One at a time Iz BATTERY 1 LOW Battery 1 voltage is low Q Replace both batteries One at a time R The Coordinator Processor is accessing the main operating programs of a Controller Processor or itself The CP is reading from Nonvolatile Memory to download data to a card or is writing to the Nonvolatile Memory from the ControlFile The Nonvolatile Memory is being read by the Coordinator Processor 5 VDC BAD n DS3 Replace Fuse F1 CARD BAD Enable Disable switch is at DISABLE ENABLE DS2 or the card failed power up diagnostics O ae CARD GOOD DS1 Card passed power up diagnostics Enable Disable Switch The Enable Disable Switch is read by the Coordinator Processor during operation The result is that it knows when it can or cannot access the Nonvolatile Memory Nonvolatile memory functions resume when the switch is enabled and the card has successfully passed power up diagnostic tests Figure 4 2 20 RAM NV Memory LEDs Test Points and Enable Disable Switch RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 48 RAM NV Memory LED Sequences RS3 ControlFiles Normal operation of the RAM NV Memory is signified by the green LED being ON and the yellow LEDs flashing The red Card Bad LED will be on when the Enable Disable Switch is in the DI
305. lar RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 32 Controller Processor LEDs The LED function of all Controller Processor cards is essentially identical Some of the cards have two red LEDs at the top to indicate the condition of the and 12 volt fuses Controller Processor LED Sequence on Power Up RS3 ControlFiles When the Controller Processor switch is placed in the ENABLE position the Power Up Diagnostics sequence begins In case of a failure of any of the tests the sequence stops and begins again The sequence stops at the fault indication The red LED card fault will remain on and the green LED will not come on at all This process will continue until the controller is replaced or the test finally passes If the Controller Processor green LED card enabled lights and then goes out and the red LED comes back on this indicates that the Controller Processor has passed the power up diagnostics but the operating program has not been downloaded to the Coordinator Processor from the NV Memory There may be a problem with the Coordinator Processor NV Memory configuration data or else there may be no image present to be downloaded If the green and the yellow LEDs come on for about one second and then the diagnostic cycle starts again the Controller Processor is waiting for the image from the Coordinator Processor There may be a problem with the Coordinator Processor or the NV Memory If the alarm Save
306. liary 5 1 57 termination panel Direct Discrete 6 3 14 Direct Discrete l 6 3 4 Discrete High Density Isolated 6 3 41 Discrete Multi FIM 6 3 23 Isolated Discrete 6 3 28 Standard Remote 6 5 2 TERMINATOR CONTROLFILE BOTTOM 4 1 7 test points Analog Transfer Card 5 1 16 Battery Charger Card 1 2 11 ControlFile 5 and 12 V DC Power Regulator 4 2 16 5 V DC Only Power Regulator 4 2 9 CP 4 2 29 Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 16 Isolated Analog Output 5 5 29 Non Isolated Analog Input FIC 5 5 10 Non Isolated Analog Output FIC 5 5 24 NV Memory bubble 4 2 52 RAM 4 2 44 4 2 46 OI NV RAM 3 7 74 PeerWay Buffer 4 2 4 Smart Transmitter FIC 5 5 13 Thermocouple and Voltage FEM 5 3 16 Thermocouple FEM calibrating 8 4 3 Index thermocouple sensor redundancy 8 2 7 TI 810 printer 3 6 20 TI 960B 7 5 6 TI Communications Card 7 5 6 TIC definition 10 2 13 TIC Master 10 2 13 Time Interval Controller See TIC tool kit 9 3 1 tools recommended 9 3 1 TOUCH PANEL 3 1 10 Touchpad 3 1 10 TOUCHPAD KEYBOARD 3 1 13 Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board 3 1 13 tower electronics cabinet 3 7 2 TP 8 Hub 3 4 11 TRACKBALL 68HCO05 3 1 13 Trackball Assembly 3 1 8 TRACKBALL KEYBOARD 3 1 13 Trackball Keyboard 3 1 8 Assembly 3 1 8 cleaning 9 1 5 Pedestal Command Console 3 2 4 replacement subassembly 3 1 8 replacing trackball 9 1 5 Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board 3 1 13 TRACKBALL SW MATRIX 3 2 4 troubleshooting
307. libration pots on the FICs To calibrate the FICs current is monitored at the FIC and the proper value is entered into the operators station This value is compared with the current output or input and the calibration value is corrected Each time the controller writes a new output or reads a new input the controller automatically adjusts the value stored in the NVRAM See Chapter 8 Calibration for details Because Multiplexer calibration constants are stored in an area of nonvolatile memory contents should be reentered when the Nonvolatile Memory is replaced or changed Calibration data for serial I O points is stored in memory on the FICs Analog Input The MultiLoop Processor and Single Strategy cards have an analog input section that performs the analog to digital A D conversion The analog input section is used for two purposes The first is to bring in the 4 20 mA input and drop it across a precision 250 ohm resistor on the Input FIC This voltage is then fed to the analog input of the MLC Card and digitized through the A D section The second is on a 4 20 mA output loop which is dropped across a 125 ohm resistor on the output FIC This voltage is fed to the MLC Card to be digitized and used as a verification that the output current is of the correct value The MLC Card can correct the digital value communicated to the output FIC for up to a 5 error and will generate an alarm on any error greater This can also indicate that no fi
308. lt FUNCTION gt gt menu The red cursor on the print guide is positioned at the SAVE amp END function Printers SV 3 6 3 3 Press LOCK to move the cursor to the LIST function Press FONT to select it The printer will print the list of options currently in memory 4 Verify the options against Table 3 6 2 and Table 3 6 3 If any options require changing use the set up procedure below L To set up the Fujitsu DL3800 printer 1 Have continuous form paper loaded The setup procedure will require several sheets 2 Put the printer in set up mode Put the printer off line press ONLINE until the ONLINE light goes out Press both the FONT and MENU buttons until the printer beeps or Turn the printer off Press both the FONT and MENU buttons Turn the printer on The printer will beep 3 The printer will print a header describing the setup procedure a Help menu and the lt lt FUNCTION gt gt menu The red cursor on the print guide is positioned at the SAVE amp END function 4 Press LOCK to move the cursor to the MENU1 function Press FONT to select it The printer will print the first item in the menu and the options for the item 5 The cursor will stop at the option currently stored in memory This option will have a short underline on the paper Use LOCK to move the cursor to the desired option 6 Use FONT to select the option When an option is selected it is completely underlined The next item in the menu is
309. ly Functional Diagram s 1 2 23 1 2 12 Redundant DC DC Power Supply Functional Diagram 1 2 24 1 2 13 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply Functional Diagram 1 2 26 1 2 14 Typical Remote I O Power Supply Assembly 4 1 2 29 12 18 31095508 Power SUDDIy c cdex see cerns oor ita 1 2 30 1 2 16 10P5409 Power Supply 0 0 ccc eee e ee 1 2 33 1 2 17 10P5701 Power Supply css esse ad vedere pet sus ro tO CHA Y 1 2 35 1 2 18 10P5756 Power Supply 0 0 cece cece ee 1 2 36 1 3 1 System Power Supply Unit with Two Power Modules Installed 1 3 2 1 3 2 System Power Supply Unit Housing Only 0 1 3 3 1 3 3 DC Output and Alarm Connections lusesselssssssseen 1 3 3 1 3 4 Input and Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers 1 3 4 1 3 5 Power Supply Module ccc cence ene 1 3 5 1 3 6 System Cabinet DC Output Terminals 0000 eee 1 3 8 1 3 7 Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units 1 3 10 1 3 8 Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power S pply UNIS a vee nade een Vesa haan ele heen ERR PIA 1 3 11 1 3 9 Alarm Connections 000 eects 1 3 11 1 3 10 Alarm Connection Example 0000 c cece eee eee eee 1 3 12 1 9 11 Input and Auxiliary Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers 0 00 cee eee ete eee 1 3 15 Contents SV iv RS3
310. m drive 2 The resistor pack must be installed for a single drive installation MS MM HA OA DA UA DD IX SP i o 1M DO DC LR RD i l AT Resistor Pack Figure 3 5 10 Pansonic JU475 2AEG 5 25 Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 23 Magnetic Tape Drive Magnetic Tape Drives used in the Multitube Command Console and the Pedestal Command Console are e 10P5685000x Tandberg 5623 e 1984 3389 000x Viper 2150S e 1984 3289 000x Viper 2060S e 1984 1989 000x Scorpion 5945S e 1984 1927 000x Scorpion 5945C NOTE The Viper 2150S and Tandberg 5623 can read tapes written by any of the other drives None of the other drives can read a tape written by the Viper 2150S or Tandberg because they use a different higher density tape data format The Viper 2150S Viper 2060S and Tandberg 5623 require minimum boot ROM and software versions Figure 3 5 11 shows the magnetic tape drive assembly Table 3 5 20 shows parts replacement data CAUTION Use extreme care when connecting the 50 pin connector All pins must be c
311. ment data NOTE To maintain CE compliance replace subassemblies only with subassemblies bearing the CE mark Table 3 1 5 Option Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement 1984 2871 000x 1984 1970 000x KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS Keyboard Electronics boards are completely interchangeable E x i Keyboard Electronics boards are 1984 1970 000x 1984 2871 000x KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS completely interchangeable Jumpers on the Keyboard Electronics board must be set to indicate that the board is being used with Option Keyboard 1 2 or 3 Jumper positions are shown in Table 3 1 6 NOTE The table printed on some boards refers to HD1 HD4 as J1 J4 Table 3 1 6 Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions Option Keyboard 1 Option Keyboard 2 Option Keyboard 3 Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 10 Touchpad The Touchpad 1984 2844 000x or 1984 2321 000x is used with the Hardened Command Console It is marked TOUCH PANEL on the printed wiring assembly PWA The touchpad is sometimes called a Scratchpad The touchpad is used in conjunction with a membrane keyboard 1984 2335 000x and the Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board 1984 1981 000x NOTE The touchpad is obsolete and should be replaced with a Joystick Table 3 1 7 provides replacement data Table 3 1 7 Touchpad Replacement Touchpad 1984 2321 000x A Touchpad should be replace
312. mpers ssuuuussse 5 1 10 Analog Transfer Card sssssssssssssseees een 5 1 13 Analog Transfer Card LEDs and Test Points 00000 5 1 16 Analog Transfer Card Fuse ooooccccocccccc esses 5 1 17 Output Bypass Card OBC 20 ees 5 1 18 Output Bypass Card Operating Instructions o ooooooooo 5 1 21 Output Bypass Card LEDs oococcccccc teen ees 5 1 21 Output Bypass Card Fuses 0c ccc cnc eee eens 5 1 22 Analog Card Cage Field Interface Cards 0 0 00 ccc ences 5 1 23 Analog FIG iot ie ete Mead tet a t Eee eee fai 5 1 24 Analog FIC Redundancy o o occcccccccccccn ees 5 1 28 Analog FIG EEDS ss xii s e Ear RR KEEPER 5 1 30 Analog FIC Jumpers ssssssssese e nn 5 1 31 Anal g FIC FUSES x ce uem trahe iere oa rein 5 1 34 Analog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard ssuuu 5 1 35 Analog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs 5 1 36 Analog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Jumpers 5 1 37 Analog FIC W Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Fuses 5 1 37 Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Kit oooococccccocccccco 5 1 37 Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Installation 5 1 38 Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs iiiuusesllussssse 5 1 40 Pulse l O EIG o 44e era epi ih eer UPC LE REESE 5 1 41 Pulse l O EIG EDS roce ou fe pia eben Ferte I OP 5 1 43 Pulse l O FIG Ju
313. mpliant console Replaces the keyboard top only Has no base or cable 10P5285000x Keyboard Electronics Board 68HCCO5 1984 1975 000x 1984 2662 000x CE compliant Can replace any other keyboard electronics board 1984 2662 000x Keyboard Electronics Board 68HCCO5 10P5285000x 1984 1975 000x Keyboard electronics boards are Interchangeable except for CE compliance 1984 1975 000x6 Keyboard Electronics Board 10P5285000x 1984 2662 000x Keyboard electronics boards are Interchangeable except for CE compliance 1984 1653 0003 Normal Trackball Trackball Trackball Replaces the black box containing the trackball 1984 1653 0004 Teflon Sealed Trackball RS3 Consoles Trackball The entire 1984 1631 0006 Keyboard Assembly must be replaced if the sealed trackball fails Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 9 Option Keyboard The Option Keyboard 1984 1632 000x with 32 Callup Buttons is a part of the Operator Keyboard or a free standing keyboard The keyboard top may be replaced with the Option Keyboard Replacement Subassembly 1984 1694 000x The subassembly is without base or cable The Option Keyboard uses Keyboard Electronics board 1984 2871 000x or 1984 1970 000x They are completely interchangeable The same board with different jumper settings is also used in the Main Keyboard Table 3 1 5 provides parts replace
314. munity EN 50082 2 Radiated Radio Frequency RF continuous wave 20 to 1000 MHz at 35 V m EMC Compliance Radiated RF 80 amplitude modulation of a 1 kHz sinewave 20 to 1000 MHz at 35 V m Radiated RF pulsed with a 1 Hz square wave 20 to 1000 MHz at 35 V m Surge Withstand ANSI IEEE C62 41 1991 Category B3 transients with output to remain within specified tolerance RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 22 Table 1 3 1 System Power Supply Unit Specification continued Item Specification Applicable Safety Standards CSA C22 2 No 234 M90 CSA C22 2 No 142 M1987 CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 EN 60950 including Clause 2 3 EN 61010 1 UL 1950 Agency Approvals NRTL C certified CE Alarm Relay Contacts rated at 5 A 30 VDC and 5 A 250 VAC Test Jacks Monitor output current O to 100 of full load 0 to 1 VDC Holdup Time 20 ms minimum output to remain within 596 of nominal at full load Parallel Operation Up to 4 power supply modules current share within 1096 Overload Protection Overload and short circuit protection automatic recovery Thermal Protection Shutdown on overtemp automatic reset Overvoltage Protection Output protected at 105 to 11096 Reverse Voltage Protection Protected to load rating Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C 32 to 158 F rated wattage to 60 C 140 F derating of 2 5 C above 60 C Storage Temperatu
315. n Floppy Interface SCSI 1 0 2 cece Floppy Interface SCSI LEDs 000 cece eee eens MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drives With 1984 1017 0001 Power Regulator Only rrer rei a mere De Reb eR rdi eek Mahe dee cet Floppy Disk Power Supply Block Diagram With 1984 1017 0001 Power Regulator Only Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuse Location 00ee eee RS3 Operator Station PC 00 cee Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters Inches Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters Inches ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Card 0 cece cee ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Connection RS3 Network Interface oooococccccccccc ene RNI Wirte on Label cnr og nee neve bre eee Hard Disk Drive Front View 00000 cece eee eee 1984 2780 000x ProDrive 80S Jumper Positions 1984 2780 000x ProDrive 80S Drive Jumpers and Terminators 1984 2307 000x Quantum Q280 Drive Jumpers and Terminators 1984 1928 000x 40 Meg Hard Drive Jumpers 1984 2837 000x 3 5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Dip Switch Positions MiniConsole 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drives Top View Pansonic JU475 4AEG 5 25 Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions Pansonic JU475 3AEG 5 25 Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions Pansonic JU475 2AEG 5 25 Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions Magnetic Tape Dri
316. n iuris a aa tee hake Ra din 3 4 1 RS3 Operator Workstation 0 00 eee 3 4 2 ROS GATS PET 3 4 3 ROS CRT Hitachi HM 4721 D 0 2 eee 3 4 3 ROS CRT liyama Vision Master s sess 3 4 3 ROS Operator Keyboard ooooccccccccccc ennaa anea 3 4 4 ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board 10P56910001 3 4 6 ROS Operator Keyboard Connections 0c cece eee nee 3 4 7 Ethernet Cable acc nep AE eR eee 3 4 8 RS3 Consoles Contents SV iii RS3 Network Interface RNI 0 0 cee eee eae 3 4 9 Ethernet HUDS stc eed OET ERLEEN RRA 3 4 11 MPE S UDS cortar nes th a eds a eea aaa net 3 4 11 EMS IMHAUDS es ou ee eae a Sa eke e odas 3 4 12 FIUDJACCESSOMES asec inte vede ene ie dae EE Lec dea 3 4 13 FMS Il Network Management Module 0 0c cence eee 3 4 13 Transceiver Interface Modules 0 cece eee eens 3 4 14 Hub Specifications jas eser be ead ea DERE P ERBERBR Pema 3 4 14 HOUtO ceres obo rd rd er RID UPS ele IE DEVO HERR 3 4 15 Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS ooocccccccccccccccn 3 4 16 UPS SoftWare Setup e obediente 3 4 17 Section 5 Disk and Tape Drives o 3 5 1 Hard Disk Drive citas Stade IER UR CE Debes 3 5 2 Quantum QM32100 o occccccccc e n 3 5 5 Quantum Thunderbolt o ococcccccccccccnc een 3 5 6 IBM Deskstar S40 co cc tances see men Gee ae eren i aere 3 5 7 Quantum ProDrive LPS 2708 0 cece cee 3
317. n or the top half of the screen is green and the bottom is black adjust the synch gain pot The synch gain pot R301 is on the Video Processor board 1984 1651 0004 Turn the pot to a higher gain clockwise until the screen returns to normal If this does not work replace the Video Processor board Conrac 7241 CRT Power up Diagnostics Failures RS3 Consoles Failure of the Video Generator Color Test or the Synch Test during boot up of a pixel graphics console is often due to a floating DC bus It can also be caused by the switches on the BNC card not being set to 75 ohms Prior to March 1988 remotely powered devices such as MTCC CC and OI Electronics were shipped without a ground wire to the DC RTN terminal of the AC DC Remote Power Supply 1984 1046 000x Install 12 gauge green insulated wire between the DC RTN lug of the power supply and the designated chassis ground connection on all remotely powered devices Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 35 Multitube Command Console CRT Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 The Barco CD 551 CRT 1984 3065 000x is a 20 inch color unit that connects to the Keyboard Interface via the RGB coaxial cables 1984 1691 0003 This CRT requires the video isolation provided by the 1984 2889 000x Keyboard Interface Kits are available to allow replacement of a CONRAC monitor with a Barco monitor Barco technical documentation is available e CD
318. nal Diagram Power Supplies SV 1 2 24 An optional power switching box can be used to create a redundant DC power supply Figure 1 2 12 shows a functional diagram for connecting redundant DC DC power supplies Output Terminal Block System DC DC 24 VDC or 15 VDC 3 Amps y Power O 20 MONET ARTO Supply A RTN 5 3 Amps o 9 reo ENF 8 O e 7 3 Amps gem eene Do E Power Supply 2 4 Q Amps l5 rto dw O l4 24 or 15 VDC L9 3Amp LO 3 2 Figure 1 2 12 Redundant DC DC Power Supply Functional Diagram Table 1 2 12 gives specifications for the DC DC Power Supplies Table 1 2 12 DC DC Power Supply Specifications 5 with input voltage gt 15 volts Output voltage 1984 0393 0001 set 24 volts DC 1984 0393 0002 set 24 volts DC 1984 0393 0003 set 15 volts DC Output voltage range 4 4 volts DC to 30 volts DC Output current 0 to 12 amps Output ripple 50 millivolts 0 25K Hz 150 millivolts total RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 25 DC DC Power Supply Fuses Table 1 2 13 shows fuse data for the DC DC Power Supply Table 1 2 13 DC DC Power Supply Fuses FRSI Bussman Littelfuse oy G09140 0036 MDL 3 313003 3 A 250 V Slow Blow RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 26 AC DC Unregulated Power Supply The
319. nd digitized through the A D section The second is on a 4 20 mA output loop The loop current is dropped across a 125 ohm resistor on the Analog Output Field Interface card This voltage is fed to the controller card to be digitized and used as a verification that the output current is of the correct value The controller can correct the digital value communicated to the Analog Output FIC for up to a 5 error and will alarm on any error greater This can also indicate that no field current is going through the circuit open loop Calibration To calibrate the FICs current is monitored at the FIC with an accurate device and the proper current is entered into the operator s station This current is compared with the current output or input and the calibration value is corrected Each time the controller writes a new output or reads a new input the controller automatically adjusts with the value stored in the NVRAM Controller Processors SV 4 3 26 SSC LEDs Redundancy The Single Strategy Controller can be installed in any slot A through H When a Single Strategy Controller is used as a redundant pair only slots AB CD EF and GH can be used as redundant pairs Flat and round cables are used for redundancy Flat cables have two connectors at one end These two connectors connect to the adjacent controller slots For the round cable version two short cables are connected from the two adjacent controller slots to a special connection board
320. ndard AC DC power supply it powers Use of a smaller ferroresonant transformer can result in oscillations Output current is measured by measuring the voltage drop across a 0033 ohm precision resistor that is in series with the output The POWER LED and the PS FAULT relay are on a replaceable board 1984 3442 0003 marked POWER SUPPLY DISPLAY III on the PWA Power Supplies 60 Cycle 50 Cycle _ 115V or 220V 60 Cycle L 50 T Cycle SV 1 2 15 DC Out gt e s gt F1 30A J2 2 3 12 59 170 000 UF a TB2 3 12 5 Q POWER LED PS FAULT Alarm Contacts k Display Board TB2 4 1984 3442 0003 0033 Q DC Return gt NNW J2 1 TB2 2 TB2 1 MEASURED VOLTAGE Contacts Figure 1 2 7 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Functional Diagram AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Measuring Output Current RS3 Power Output current is measured by reading the voltage drop across a 0033 ohm precision resistor in series with the output TB2 contacts 1 and 2 provide access to the resistor A table is provided on the front panel to assist in converting the measured voltage drop to output current Steps in the table correspond to LED segments on the 2298 0298 and 10P5658000x power supplies The precise current output can be calculated from Ohm s Law E I R E R Volts Resistance Volts 0 0033 303 x Volts 303 x Voltage Reading Po
321. ner of the fan and remove the fan There are two sets of rivets four that hold the fan to the power supply module and four that hold the fan grill to the fan Because the fan and grill are removed as a unit only the rivets that hold the fan to the power supply module must be removed Power Supply Collar amp Rivet Typical 4 places Fan Mounting Flange et E Typical 4 places Figure 1 3 13 Replacing the Fan and Grill in a Power Supply 4 5 6 Remove the fan from the power supply module Position the new fan on the power supply module At each fan mounting hole insert a plastic collar until the lip of the collar seats on the fan Use a new collar from the replacement fan kit System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 18 7 Press a plastic pin into the collar until it seats on the collar flange This expands the collar to hold the fan to the power supply module 8 Position the new grill from the replacement fan kit on the fan 9 At each grill mounting hole insert a plastic collar until the lip of the collar seats on the grill Use a new collar from the replacement fan kit 10 Press a plastic pin into the collar until it seats on the collar flange This expands the collar to hold the grill to the fan 11 Connect the fan power connector to the power supply module 12 Install the power supply module in the housing following the steps in nstalling a Power Supply in a Housing Replacing
322. ng The 128 kB erasable programmable read only memory EPROM provides the microprocessor boot program power up diagnostics PeerWay boot program and a debugger The 512 kB zero wait state fast static random access memory SRAM is organized into 32 bit words to hold programs such as interrupt routines that must run as fast as possible Four megabytes of static random access memory provides one megabyte of 32 bit working storage for the microprocessor The synchronous bus provides a compatible interface between the microprocessor and the PeerWay for standard PeerWay communications It also serves to interface the programmable timers PTM DMA controller advanced data link controller ADLC and SRAM Bus A arbitration circuit ARB controls access to the synchronous bus by either the DMA or the MC68EC040 microprocessor Buffers provide an interface with the standard ControlFile motherboard bus This allows communications between the MC68EC040 processor on the CP5 and the processors that are on other cards in the ControlFile There is also a 16 bit data path for communication between two redundant CP boards This interface is identical to that used on CP I CP Il and CP IV CP IV Circuit Description RS3 ControlFiles The versions of the CP IV perform all the functions of the CP II but have increased memory and processor speed A MC68020 microprocessor is used CP IV will work with MPC I processors MPC5 processors or MPCII
323. nrac monitor has internal video isolation so that you can cable it directly from the OI Card Cage The 7241 monitor uses RGB video signals with the Vertical and Horizontal sync superimposed on the Green video signal The Video Processor removes the sync signals from the Green signal and passes them to the Scan Board The Scan Board generates the Vertical and Horizontal drive signals to the CRT yokes The High Voltage Module is monitored and controlled from the Scan Board Control of High Voltage Shutdown is on the Scan Board All the power that is needed by the complete CRT is developed and controlled by the Power Transformer and the Low Voltage Regulator Board A separate 120 VAC input is required for the Conrac Monitor Red Video Grn Video Video zi Processor Blu Video Horz amp Vert Sync Horz and Vert Coils Control Board Power AC HV HV Power Inp Pwr ABL Shutdown Sel Blk G3 Focus HV Module Low Power Power Voltage Transformer Regulator Board 2nd Anode Power Figure 3 1 14 Conrac 7241 CRT Block Diagram Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 31 Figure 3 1 15 shows the switches and connections at the rear of the monitor Switch settings S1 S2 and S3 set up the input impedance for the RGB coaxial input S4 and S5 are set up to use internal Vertical and Horizontal sync S6 selects t
324. ntroller processor loses RS 422 communications with the FIC the redundant controller will take over Note that this will happen any time an FIC is removed from the FlexTerm The alarm indication on the ControlFile Status Screen can be cleared by rebooting the redundant controller Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized If both controllers have active alarms the controller with the lowest priority alarm will take over as primary controller CC LEDs The LEDs of all Controller Processor cards are essentially identical See the LED description later in this section CC Fuse Figure 4 3 11 shows the location of the fuse on the Contact Controller Processor Table 4 3 12 gives fuse data Figure 4 3 11 Contact Controller Processor Fuse Location Table 4 3 12 Contact Controller Processor Fuse FRSI Bussman Littelfuse m Part No Part No Characteristics Card 1984 1374 000x 1984 1445 000x G09140 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250V Regular RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 30 MUX Multiplexer Controller Processor PLC Programmable Logic Controller Processor The Multiplexer Controller Processor MUX and the Programmable Logic Controller Processor PLC use the same card e 1984 1494 0001 marked MULTIPLEXER PROCESSOR on the PWA It is superseded by the MultiPurpose Controller Processor MPC 1984 2500 0005 Table 4 3 13 shows parts replacement data Table 4 3 13 MUX and PLC
325. o ground loops that are very hard to locate Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 8 RS3 PeerWay 1 To ground the Twinax PeerWay Shield on Tap Boxes 1984 0488 and 1984 0489 Mounting Plate SHIELD Oak ON PeerWay PeerWay SHIELD GND HOLD Figure 2 1 6 PeerWay Tap Ground Jumper Remove the PeerWay Tap by loosening the four captive screws that secure it to the mounting plate Refer to Figure 2 1 6 Turn the Tap over to expose the circuit board Place the jumper in the GND ground position Reinstall the Tap on the mounting plate Repeat the procedure for the adjoining PeerWay tap B To prevent a multiple ground of the Twinax PeerWay shield check all other taps on the PeerWay to make sure that the grounding screws or jumpers are in the OPEN or HOLD position Check that no connector body can touch grounded metal Grounding a connector body can lead to ground loops that are very hard to locate Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 9 Twinax PeerWay Cable RS3 PeerWay Twinax PeerWay cable provides the communication connection between electrical PeerWay nodes The twinax PeerWay transmits messages serially at a rate of one million bits per second As many as 32 system devices such as ControlFiles and consoles can be connected to the twinax PeerWay The twinax PeerWay cable cons
326. oard m Buffer Buffer Address Ed Jumpers OSC DIV gt From 40MHz 1 MHz Reference SYNC Redundant or Bus CP Board 48MHz Buffer SYNC Bus 8 Data Bits ADLC Advanced Data Link Controller ASYNC Asynchronous DMAC Direct Memory Access Controller LED Light Emitting Diode OSC Oscillation PTM Programmable Timer Module RAM Random Access Memory ROM Read Only Memory SEL Select SYNC Synchronous CD EL A SS To PeerWay Buffer A B Buffer To PeerWay Buffer B Figure 4 2 13 CP I and CP II Coordinator Processor Functional Diagram RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 28 RS3 ControlFiles The 68000 series microprocessor is an asynchronous device operating on a 10 or 12MHz clock The peripheral chips used on the Coordinator Processor including the PTM DMAC and ADLC are synchronous devices operating at a maximum of 2 MHz These synchronous devices interface to the asynchronous bus through a separate internal synchronous bus The synchronous bus is 8 bits wide and interfaces to the processors lower 8 bits for the PeerWay buffer Address and bidirectional data bus buffers transfer information to be communicated on the PeerWay into special buffer RAM This RAM size is 4K x 8 Data is then transferred through the direct memory access controller DMAC to the advanced data link controller ADLC where the information is transformed to NR
327. ocate Table 3 7 5 Ol Card Cage 10P5282000x Fuses Fuse FRSI Part No Bussman Part No Characteristics F1 PS G09140 0029 MDQ 1 1 2 1 5 A 250 V Slow Blow RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 14 Ol Card Cage 1984 0660 0001 The 1984 0660 0001 Ol Card Cage has an open chassis Figure 3 7 9 shows the connector layout on the back of this Ol Card Cage Description Description MEL o red and black wires on older units 2 PemgA ss IPemayA 0 10 CRT Coor Color a _ o E ERL I D AE 7 DC Power for Disk Floppy and Tape Drives Power for Disk DC Power for Disk Floppy and Tape Drives and Tape Drives 15 Keyboard Cable old units only Keyboard Cable old units ony old units only 5 VDC Power for Disk Drive 30 VDC for Keyboard Interface Figure 3 7 9 Ol Card Cage 1984 0660 0001 Back View RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 15 PeerWay Interface The PeerWay Interface 1984 1045 0003 transforms parallel data from the processor bus into synchronous serial data for transmission on the PeerWay The PeerWay Interface also determines the PeerWay node address of the console and associated Ol card cage It is marked MC PEERWAY on the printed wiring assembly PWA Figure 3 7 10 shows a block diagram Unregulated 9 V A Return B e D 5 V RS 422 5 V Local Loop Back A RTS A gt Transmit A pa Receive A q Status A Optica
328. odem M or a Terminal T For X 25 synchronous operation both must be set to the same value These jumpers are hardwired in cards ordered for non X 25 asynchronous operation NOTE The M and T positions of HD20 and HD21 are reversed Loopback Test Jumpers Use jumpers marked L and R only for local loopback tests Set them on Run Normal R for operating the card HD7 and HD10 are used for RS 232 HD15 16 17 and 18 are used for RS 422 operation NOTE The Modem or Terminal jumpers must be removed for the RS 232 local loopback test Be sure to replace them correctly when the test is completed Board Address Decode Jumpers The Board Address Decode jumper HD19 distinguishes between two OI NV RAM cards inserted in the card cage at the same time One must be jumpered as PRIMARY the other as 2NDARY secondary This is needed to restore bad data in the BRAM The bad card is jumpered PRIMARY and the known good card is jumpered 2NDARY When the card cage is powered up the Ol Processor boots from the secondary good card and begins operation The operator can copy data to the primary bad card PeerWay Boot Jumper The PeerWay Boot jumper HD5 is used to force a PeerWay boot Set it to NORM for normal operation To force a PeerWay boot power down the card cage Set the jumper to PWAY and restore cage power The OI Processor will boot from the PeerWay Power down again and return the jumper
329. of phase If primary AC power is restored the relay switches back automatically from the secondary AC source to the primary AC source Alarm output relay contacts indicate which AC line is being used Note that this provides dual power sources but no duplication of circuit breakers etc Figure 1 1 3 shows a dual feed AC entrance panel If fuse F1 or F2 is blown the associated INPUT lamp goes out which indicates that power cannot be switched over from one AC line to the other WARNING Dangerous AC voltage may be present even if the AC IN indicator is not lit If the input fuse is blown AC may still be present at the input terminal block The lamps labeled OUTPUT indicate AC out of each of the three circuit breakers 10 amp for 230 VAC and 15 amp for 115 VAC WARNING For personal safety use a circuit breaker lockout device to ensure that an opened breaker is not accidentally closed while you working on the line Output Lamp Plastic Terminal Block Input Lamps Guard Alarm Output Terminal Block e Primary ii e kd E e AC Input ON Q ON amp ON pe og O Leo O REG O Secondary N N AC Input T Q 9 e GG Input Fuses AC Output AC Breaker Common Normally Closed Normally Open Figure 1 1 3 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel RS3 Power AC Input SV 1 1 5
330. oling Fan 00 cece teens 1 3 16 Replacing a Power Supply 0000 cece cece eee eens 1 3 18 Removing a Power Supply Housing from a System Cabinet 1 3 18 Installing a Housing in a Cabinet illius 1 3 19 Installing a Power Supply in a Housing sees 1 3 20 Removing a Power Supply from a Housing sssseluuussse 1 3 21 SpeCIfICallOTiS x x iet nn e ais M a VUA a RR AR a a 1 3 21 Section 4 DC Power Distribution 0 ccc eee eee eee eee 1 4 1 DC Power Distribution Bus 0 eee 1 4 3 DC Output Card 5 erani kanaa eaaa IRURE INEDITO Des 1 4 5 DG Output Gard FUSES i oo ei ae i ds 1 4 6 DC Distribution Cabling ssssssssssesss III 1 4 7 Standard DC Distribution Cabling 0 0 cece eee 1 4 7 Redundant DC Power Distribution Cabling sellus 1 4 8 DC Power Distribution System Color Codes 00 cece eee 1 4 10 Section 5 Redundant Power i200 seei idee ee edee cc arar 1 5 1 Chapter 2 PeerWay Section 1 Electrical PeerWay eleeeeeeeees 2 1 1 Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes 00 cece eee en 2 1 3 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xi PeerWay Tap Test Points oocooocccccc a E E EET A 2 1 6 PeerWay Tap FUSES ooccoccccccc en 2 1 6 Grounding an Electrical PeerWay 0 eee 2 1 7 Twinax PeerWay Cable 00 ccc eee eens 2 1 9 Twinax PeerWay Cable Termination
331. oller Processor II MPCII Dual Port and Memory Control A amp B Drivers mux Address 2 Megabyte CP Interface Dual Port RAM Driver A amp B Transceiver Data In Data Out Driver H Write Latch Dual Port Address Memory Data Dual Port Data Driver Transceiver 8 Serial 1 0 Channels MC68HCO000 12 or 16 MHz Address a F Ei rogrammaoie Interface Timer Data Debug DUART 64kx16 Boot EPROM Figure 4 3 3 MPCII Functional Diagram RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 8 RS3 ControlFiles The MPCII can operate either as an MPCI or as an MPCII The data from two redundant Coordinator Processors on separate redundant buses are selected and buffered on the card to isolate the two in case of a failure of either bus These two buffers come together at the dual port bus that also has the 2 Megabyte dynamic RAM with EDAC The remainder of the card is separated from the dual port bus because the Coordinator Processor must have restricted access to the dynamic RAM on the controller in order to permit it to download the operation and configuration data After the data is downloaded the Controller Processor limits the memory access of the Coordinator Processor to the area containing the dynamic and configuration data The MPCII card contains dynamic RAM and EDAC control circuitry The dynamic memory controller does the required addr
332. ommunications Termination Panel ll Jumpers 6 2 8 Remote Communications Termination Panel sseeuuse 6 2 9 Remote Communications Termination Panel Installation 6 2 9 Remote Communications Termination Panel I Wiring 6 2 9 Remote Communications Termination Panel Jumpers 6 2 10 Fiber Optic I O Converter 0 0 c ccc cece I nn 6 2 11 Fiber Optic I O Converter Power Wiring 0 00 cece eee eee 6 2 14 Fiber Optic I O Converter Communications Wiring lusus 6 2 15 Fiber Optic I O Converter Fiber Optic Link 00 eee eee 6 2 15 Fiber Optic I O Converter LEDs sseserseee mm 6 2 16 Section 3 Multipoint Discrete I O MDIO eeeeeeese 6 3 1 Direct Discrete Termination Panels 0c cee eee eee ees 6 3 3 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il 00 e cece 6 3 4 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il Installation 6 3 8 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il Field Wiring 6 3 9 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il Jumpers 0 00 6 3 10 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Il Fuses 00 2 0 eee 6 3 13 Direct Discrete Termination Panel 00 c cece eee ees 6 3 14 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Installation 6 3 16 Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring 6 3 16
333. ompleted A low battery is indicated by either of the two red Battery Low LEDs being ON If the red Card Bad LED and the green LED are flashing alternately e One battery is low e BRAM chips have been swapped out due to a bad SRAM chip e The current draw of the battery backed RAM is too high Replace the batteries or the card as soon as is practical ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 49 Table 4 2 23 RAM NV Memory LED Sequences Yellow LED Fault Condition Pattern Red Card Bad LED ON Green LED OFF MC68000 Microprocessor test EPROM checksum test Program amp Dual Port ROM test Not used Interrupt test Parallel Interface test Not used OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON Watchdog Timeout test ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 50 RAM NV Memory Jumpers Figure 4 2 21 shows the location of the jumpers on the NV RAM card Table 4 2 24 gives the battery jumper settings The batteries should be disabled only if memory backup is not desired Table 4 2 25 shows the other jumper locations Jumper HD3 is factory set at 1 2 but is not presently used by the software Test Points we e HD4 Battery Jumpers HD6 amp HD7 7 Batteries Figure 4 2 21 RAM NV Memory Fuse Jumper and Test Point Locations Table 4 2 24 RAM NV Memory Battery Jumpe
334. ompletely interchangeable CAUTION The power supply unit is heavy approximately 32 kg 70 Ib CAUTION The top surface of the power supply may be hot Figure 1 2 1 shows the power supply front panel Table 1 2 1 gives parts replacement data Power Supplies SV 1 2 3 OUTPUT CURRENT POS x PS OUTPUT Figure 1 2 1 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Front Panel RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 4 CAUTION N Use only the following rechargeable sealed lead acid batteries in the power supply Always replace batteries in pairs Do not mix batteries from different manufacturers e Portalac PE 7 0 12R e Panasonic LCR 12V6 5BP Table 1 2 1 AC DC Power Supply With Battery Backup Parts Replacement eme o Em 1984 0298 000x 10P5658000x 1984 2298 000x The 10P5658000x supply is CE compliant 1984 0390 000x S Supplies are fully interchangeable with same voltage 1984 2298 000x 1984 0298 000x and frequency E T js Supplies are fully interchangeable with same voltage 1984 0298 000x 1984 2298 000x and frequency Either supply may replace a 0390 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup but the BATT 1984 2298 000x switch must be turned OFF or 1984 0390 000x 1984 0298 000x NOTE The PS FAULT alarm jumper HD1 must be set to 2 3 because the 0390 contacts are Normally Closed N C Figure 1 2 2 shows the functional diagram The AC DC power supply uses a ferroresonant core transformer for part
335. on jumpers These jumpers should not be changed Table 3 5 9 1984 3100 000x Productive LPS 105S Drive Option Jumpers OFF ON Self Seek Test Option Table 3 5 10 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers They set the drive to address 5 Table 3 5 10 1984 3100 000x ProDrive LPS 105S Drive Address Jumpers AO ON Jumper Warning The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical contact with the mounting frame in the console Use either the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating pads between the drive and the yellow can RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 11 Quantum ProDrive 80S 3 5 Inch 100 MB Hard Disk Table 3 5 11 shows the factory setting of the 1984 2780 000x Quantum ProDrive 80S Drive Option jumpers These jumpers should not be changed Table 3 5 11 1984 2780 000x ProDrive 80S Drive Option Jumpers ES OFF Enable Parity Option E Table 3 5 12 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers These should be set to drive address 5 Table 3 5 12 1984 2780 000x Productive 80s Drive Address Jumpers ON Jumper Warning The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical contact with the mounting frame in the console Use either the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating pads between the drive and the yellow can Figure 3 5 2 shows the address jumper positions for a drive address of 5 Drive Address Jumpers set to address 5
336. onnected properly Also be careful to route cables as they were originally routed Table 3 5 20 Magnetic Tape Drive Parts Replacement Tandberg tape drive with embedded SCSI controller NOTE The Tandberg can read 10P5685000x 1984 3389 000x tapes written by any of the drives below Of the drives listed only the Viper 2150S can read tapes written by the Tandberg Viper 2150S tape drive with embedded 1984 3289 000x SCSI controller NOTE The Viper 2150S 1984 3389 000x 1984 1989 000x can read tapes written by any of the drives 1984 1927 000x below The drives below CANNOT read tapes written by the Viper 2150S 1984 1989 000x Viper 2060S tape drive 1984 3289 000x 4984 1927 000x with embedded SCSI controller Scorpion 5945S tape drive 1984 1989 000x 1984 1927 000x vith embedded SCSI controller Scorpion 5945C tape drive 1984 1927 000x with SCSI controller board RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 24 O a O Tape Drive Front Tape Drive Rear Figure 3 5 11 Magnetic Tape Drive Magnetic Tape Drive Cabling and Grounding In a Multitube console the magnetic tape drive must connect to one end of the SCSI bus with the SCSI master O I card cage 1 SCSI address 0 in the middle of the bus The SCSI address i
337. onnection configurations They include e FMS II Network Management Module e Transceiver Interface Modules These modules are not available from FRSI FMS II Network Management Module RS3 Consoles The FMS II Network Management Module 3C 16630 provides SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol capabilities for all hubs in the stack Smart Agent intelligent agents automatically gather and collate critical information and minimize network management traffic The module fits internally and does not use any of the slots or connectors on the hub The network management card has its own Ethernet and IP address Only one network management card is needed in a stack of up to eight hubs This module is not available from FRSI RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 14 Transceiver Interface Modules A Transceiver Interface Module can be plugged into any FMS II hub to provide connections for fiber and coaxial cables Available modules include e Twisted pair 3012063 one RJ 45 connector e BNC coaxial 3C1206 6 one BNC connector e ST fiber 3C1206 5 two ST connectors e Fan Out 3C1206 4 one male AUI connector e AUI 3C1206 0 one female AUI connector These modules are not available from FRSI The fiber optic transceiver can be used to provide additional fiber optic ports on a fiber optic hub or to provide a fiber optic port on a twisted pair hub Hub Specifications TP 8 FMS II 12 port TP FMS II 24 port TP RS3
338. ons 10 3 16 Menu Confidence screen 10 3 20 messages broadcast 10 2 14 point to point 10 2 14 MicroVAX Il QBI Hardware Kit 7 4 3 MicroVAX II PeerWay Marshaling Panel 7 4 3 MicroVAX PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel 7 4 4 7 4 6 mini floppy interface card 3 5 18 MINICON POWER REGULATOR 3 7 20 MiniConsole 3 3 1 CRT 3 3 11 Floppy Disk Drive 3 3 11 floppy disk drive jumpers 3 5 20 Floppy Interface SCSI 3 3 12 keyboards 3 3 4 Ol Processor Card 3 3 6 PeerWay Interface Card 3 3 6 Power Regulator Card 3 3 6 Printer Interface 3 3 11 Remote Power Supply 3 3 16 MINICONSOLE PRINTER INTERFACE 3 7 46 MLC 4 3 20 function 4 3 21 LEDs 4 3 32 fuses 4 3 24 LEDs 4 3 35 MODE Pushbutton 5 1 19 Monochrome Video Generator 3 3 7 fuse 3 3 10 LEDs 3 3 9 Raster Test Button 3 3 9 MPC 4 3 2 fuses 4 3 19 LEDs 4 3 33 MPC Analog Card Cage 5 1 2 MPC Analog FIC 5 1 24 MPC Contact Card Cage 5 2 2 MPC Contact FlexTerm 5 2 2 MPC CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD 5 2 4 MPC Marshaling Panel 5 1 54 MPC5 4 3 2 MPCI 4 3 2 function 4 3 10 MPCII 4 3 2 function 4 3 5 4 3 7 RS3 Service Manual jumpers 4 3 12 4 3 15 MTCC Remote Power Supply 1 2 18 fuse 1 2 19 jumper 1 2 18 MTL 4014 6 6 22 4021 6 6 22 4023 6 6 22 4025 6 6 22 4041B 6 6 29 4041P 6 6 29 4045B 6 6 29 4046P 6 6 29 MTL IS Termination Panels 6 6 14 6 6 25 MULTI LOOP PROCESSOR 4 3 20 MULTI STRATEGY PROCESSOR 4 3 20 Multi FIM Discrete
339. onsoles and YY represents the key The alphanumeric keyboard is not reported Table 3 2 1 shows the map of key numbers to keyboard Table 3 2 1 Command Console Key Map Key Number Keyboard a p Command Console Entry Keyboard 1984 1731 000x 64 68 Trackball and Cursor Control 1984 1779 000x 72 87 Block Configuration 1984 1776 000x 27 31 NOTE It is extremely important to verify proper connector orientation before applying power to the Command Console Failure to do so may result in permanent damage to the Keyboard Interface circuitry RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 7 Be sure to line up the colored stripe on the ribbon cable with the embossed triangle on the Keyboard Interface connector Figure 3 2 4 shows the 1984 1921 000x Keyboard Interface and connections Loop Callup Keyboard Keyboard Interface Card Configuration Keyboard J336 Trackball Keyboard O 4333 J339 Cable installed with 1 2 twist Card Cage Motherboard Rotating Keyboard odo lll B i y Command Entry Keyboard Figure 3 2 4 Basic and Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface 1984 1921 000x Table 3 2 2 gives parts r
340. ontact FICs monitor and control up to six optical isolator modules each These modules can be AC or DC in various voltage ranges NOTE This card and image will only work with a standard I O contact FlexTerm Communication Communication with up to 16 Contact FICs is handled by the four dual port serial communication converters that transfer the parallel data from the data bus to serial RS 422 data Redundancy The Contact Controller can be installed in any slot A through H When a Contact Controller is used as a Redundant pair only slots AB CD EF and GH can be used as redundant pairs Flat and round cables are used for redundancy Flat cables have two connectors at one end These two connectors attach to the adjacent controller slots For the round cable version two short cables are connected from the two adjacent controller slots to a special connection board The third connector on this board is used to attach to the FlexTerm This connector board also has a jumper between pins 7 and 8 to indicate to the controller that it is redundant Controller Processors SV 4 3 29 It is important to note that a redundant flat cable cannot be used on a nonredundant controller for the upper connectors Should a redundant flat cable be used on a nonredundant controller the controller assumes it is redundant and clears out the configuration for the adjacent slot because a redundancy indication for one controller is assumed for both If the co
341. ontrol of High Voltage Shutdown is on the Scan Board The High Voltage Module is monitored and controlled from the Scan Board All the power that is needed by the complete CRT is developed and controlled by the Rectifier Filter Board and the Low Voltage Regulator Board A separate 120 VAC input is required for the Conrac 7211 Monitor Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 9 Figure 3 2 6 shows the connections to the CRT Terminator switches must be in the 75 ohm position Ground Wire amp AC Power Figure 3 2 6 Conrac 7211 CRT Back View RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 10 Table 3 2 3 lists the FRSI part numbers for components of the Conrac 7211 CRT Table 3 2 3 Conrac 7211 CRT Components FRSI Scan Board 15 75 kHz 1166 0524 0016 lo BNC Differentia 1166 0524 0044 Video Processor Board Differential 1166 0524 0045 A 7 E Replaced by BNC Single Ended 1166 0524 0011 1166 0524 0044 f Replaced by Video Processor Board Single Ended 1166 0524 0012 1166 0524 0045 RS3 Consoles Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console SV 3 2 11 Pedestal Command Console Disk Interface Card SCSI The Pedestal Command Console uses the same Disk Interface card 1984 1140 000x as the Multitube Console See the discussion in this chapter Section 6 Ol Card Cage
342. oooooommmmm o 3 5 16 3 5 18 1984 2837 000x 4 Bit Switch Setting 00oooooommmmm o 3 5 17 3 5 19 5 25 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Parts Replacement 3 5 18 3 5 20 Magnetic Tape Drive Parts Replacement 0e sees 3 5 23 3 6 1 Printer Types iscbrue tea ently ed uei pe lend lee gar egls 3 6 1 3 6 2 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer MENU1 and MENU2 Options 3 6 4 3 6 3 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer HARDWARE Menu Options 3 6 5 3 6 4 Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Setup Menu 1 and2 3 6 7 3 6 5 jitsu DL 4600 Printer Setup Hardware Features 3 6 7 3 6 6 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Thickness seusessse 3 6 10 3 6 7 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup 0 0 0 00 cece eee ee eee 3 6 11 3 6 8 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup 00000 c cece eee eee 3 6 12 3 6 9 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings o ocoooooocooooo 3 6 16 3 6 10 TI 810 Processor Board Jumpers 0 cece eee 3 6 20 3 6 11 TI810 Printer Motherboard Jumpers 0 00 e eee eee 3 6 20 3 6 12 T1 810 Printer Baud Rate Pencil Switches o 3 6 21 3 6 13 TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks 00 eee eee 3 6 21 3 7 1 Alarm Output Board FUSES 0 0c cece eee ee 3 7 6 3 7 2 OI Card Cage Parts Replacement 0 00 c cece 3 7 7 3 7 3 EMC OI Card Cage 10P52820001 Connectors and Fuses 3 7 11 3 7 4 CE Compliant Cables
343. oop MLC e Single Strategy SSC e Contact CC e Multiplexer MUX e PLC Interface PLC CAUTION Disable the NV Memory and then the Coordinator Processor cards before removing any card other than a PeerWay Buffer card from the ControlFile Failure to do so may result in a corrupted data transfer PEERWAY A PEERWAY B POWER REGULATOR POWER REGULATOR NONVOLITILE MEMORY CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR CONTROLLER PROCESSOR COORDINATOR PROCESSOR COORDINATOR PROCESSOR Support Section Controller Processor Cards Figure 4 3 1 ControlFile Card Cage Front RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 2 MPC MultiPurpose Controller Processor RS3 ControlFiles The MultiPurpose Controller MPC Processor card replaces the Contact Controller Processor CCP Programmable Logic Controller PLC Controller Processor and Multiplexer MUX Controller Processors The current versions of the MPC follow e MultiPurpose Controller Processor 5 MPC5 10P57520007 Labeled MPC5 on the printed wiring assembly PWA e MultiPurpose Controller Processor Il MPCII 10P50400006 1984 4068 000x Labeled MULTIPURPOSE CONTROLLER II on the PWA e MultiPurpose Controller Processor MPC or MPCl
344. or Board Bottom 1984 1243 0001 goes in the lower position It is marked TERMINATOR CONTROLFILE BOTTOM on the PWA NOTE Install the board with the component side inward The pair of terminators must be installed as shown in Figure 4 1 6 RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 1 8 J226 J224 ege fos um ata 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i D D D 1 D 1 D 1 1 1 1 D D i 1 1 1 1 1 y 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D D i D 1 D D 1 1 1 D i D j SLOT H SLOTG to o NE f D 1 D D D UPPER UPPER 1 ail L au La Must show six rows Correctly installed terminators must match this figure exactly of pins here ControlFile Terminator 1984 1231 000x ee Oe y 107 106 ControlFile Terminator 1984 1243 000x Must show 2 1 2 rows of pins here RS3 ControlFiles Figure 4 1 6 ControlFile Motherboard Terminator Board Installation ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 2 1 Section 2 ControlFile Support Section The ControlFile support section consists of e PeerWay Buffer e 5 VDC Only Power Regulator e 5VDC and 12 VDC Power Regulator e Coordinator Processor CP e Nonvolatile NV Memory e RAM Nonvolatile Memory e Bubble Nonvolatile Memory The ControlFile Card Cage is covered in section 1 of this chapter The Controller Processor cards are covered in section 3 of this chapt
345. or MLC and SS Image Jumper HD6 Jumper HD7 Jumper HD8 NOTE A Controller Processor must be set to the proper communications Baud rate for the I O in use Table 4 3 18 shows the jumper settings for 10 4K baud communications and for industry standard communications Table 4 3 18 Communications Jumper Positions Not for MPC5 mati Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper Fisher Rosemount 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 10 4K Baud Industry Standard 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 9600 Baud Controller Processors SV 4 3 39 Controller Processor Redundancy RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors may be used in redundant pairs with one being the primary and the other the backup A controller switch causes the roles to reverse the primary takes up the backup function and the backup takes on the primary function A controller switch can occur when e The user performs a manual switch from the ControlFile Status screen e The primary Controller Processor no longer communicates with the backup Controller Processor e The primary Controller Processor communicates with the backup Controller Processor but has a higher priority error condition than the backup Controller Processor Controller Processor error conditions in priority order are ROM checksum error A D problems MLC and SS only FIC communication channel failure FIC communication error NVRAM write error RAM EDAC error MPC and MPCII only Image error
346. or battery replacement Follow recommended procedures in powering down the Operator Interface Card Cage Use static protection whenever handling the Ol RAM NV card CAUTION If one battery is low replace the low battery first to ensure data retention l To replace the batteries 1 Disable battery one by moving jumper HD1 to OFF 2 Remove and replace battery one 3 Enable battery one by moving jumper HD1 to ON 4 Repeat for battery two using jumper HD2 Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 82 RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage FISHER ROSEMOUNT RS3 Service Manual Chapter 4 ControlFiles Section 1 ControlFile Card Cage Lleeeeeeese 4 1 1 ControlFile Jumpers sssssesseee RII IH hn 4 1 3 ControlFile Data Bus Terminators 000 ee cee eee tenes 4 1 5 ControlFile Terminator ll 2 0 00 c cece III 4 1 5 ControlFile Terminator Boards 0 000 cece tenet eee 4 1 7 Section 2 ControlFile Support Section 1 eee eee eee 4 2 1 PeerWay Buffer cascos n Aud ahi ue AR RR ale tes Re dees 4 2 2 PeerWay Buffer LEDs and Test Points 1 eee 4 2 4 PeerWay Buffer Jumpers ussssssssssesee een 4 2 5 PeerWay Buffer Fuse sssuusssesesseeese nnn 4 2 6 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator 0 000 cece e eee ee 4 2 7 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points 4 2 9 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumpers LLu
347. orking with wiring Replace them exactly as shown in the appropriate figure NOTE ControlFile 10P52960001 has the terminators built into the motherboard The following versions are in use e ControlFile Terminator II 1984 3270 0001 e ControlFile Terminator Board Top 1984 1231 0001 e ControlFile Terminator Board Bottom 1984 1243 0001 ControlFile Terminator Il RS3 ControlFiles The ControlFile Terminator II 1984 3270 0001 is marked CF TERMINATOR II on the PWA This board is used in both top and bottom positions It must be installed as shown in Figure 4 1 5 NOTE The board is installed with the component side inward The holes in the board must be on the right side for both the top and the bottom board The solder side is marked UP and DOWN to assist in orienting the board ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 1 6 J226 J224 p SLOT H store i i i UPPER UPPER 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M M dis Correctly installed terminators ee e must match this figure exactly ee e Must show 15 rows of pins here e e 7 ControlFile Terminator II 1984 3270 0001 RS3 ControlFiles Figure 4 1 5 ControlFile Motherboard Terminator II Installation ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 1 7 ControlFile Terminator Boards ControlFile Terminator Board Top 1984 1231 0001 is used in the top position ControlFile Terminat
348. ositions for Use in Main Keyboard HD1 HD2 HD3 HD4 Main MainKeyboard Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 8 Trackball Keyboard Assembly Part No 10P5324000x The Trackball Assembly 1984 1631 000x is a part of the Operator Keyboard or of a free standing trackball keyboard The Trackball top may be replaced with the Trackball Keyboard Replacement Subassembly The subassembly is without base or cable Two versions exist e 10P5324000x e 1984 1693 000x CE compliant For all consoles For all except CE compliant consoles NOTE For a CE compliant console be sure to replace CE compliant parts only with CE compliant parts The Trackball Keyboard Replacement Subassembly includes a Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board The trackball is contained in a small black box 1984 1653 000x Two versions are available 0003 for normal use and 0004 for severe environments NOTE Most trackball problems can be cured by cleaning the trackball See Chapter 9 Maintenance for instructions Table 3 1 4 gives parts replacement data Table 3 1 4 Trackball Keyboard Parts Replacement Trackball Keyboard Replacement Subassembly Replaces 1984 1693 000x Characteristics CE compliant Useable in any console Replaces the keyboard top only Has no base or cable 1984 1693 000x Trackball Keyboard Replacement Subassembly 10P5324000x Not for a CE co
349. ource If in doubt measure all terminals before disconnecting wiring System Power Supply Units A SV 1 3 19 4 Remove the power supply modules from the housing if desired a Make sure the AC power switch on the front of the power supply module is in the off O position b Using a screwdriver turn the locking screw clockwise until the locking pawl rotates to the horizontal position c Using the handle on the front of the power supply module pull the power supply module out of the housing 5 Provide sufficient support for the housing to prevent it from dropping If the two power supply modules have not been removed from the housing the System Power Supply Unit can weigh as much as 13 29 kg 29 3 Ib Remove the four M6 Phillips Screws and M6 cage nuts securing the power supply housing to the rails of the cabinet Retain the screws and nuts for reinstallation of the power supply housing CAUTION The DC Distribution Bus and associated power cables may have DC power still applied if the load is backed up by a redundant power source located elsewhere Personal injury and equipment damage can occur if a DC Distribution Bus or cable is accidentally shorted Turn off any backup power sources Installing a Housing in a Cabinet A RS3 Power Fisher Rosemount Systems recommends that you install the housing first without power supply modules then install the power supply modules in the housing The System
350. ource with a zener diode If the output voltage of the supply goes above or below tolerance levels the failure LED lights and the status bit to the processor card is set LEDs indicate output voltage status Table 3 7 7 shows parts replacement data Model 1984 1137 0001 is used in any console You can jumper the card for 30 VDC input or 24 VDC input This card has higher current ratings for added current requirements It has two unregulated 9 volt outputs 500 mA each that are run to the PeerWay Interface for the isolated 5 volt regulators When jumpered for 30 volt input startup voltage is 26 volts and shutdown voltage is 14 volts When jumpered for 24 volt input startup voltage is 20 volts and shutdown voltage is 11 4 volts Model 1984 1017 000x is an earlier version used in the MiniConsoles Basic Command Consoles and SCls Table 3 7 7 Ol Power Supply Parts Replacement 24 VDC or 30 VDC Input Replaces any 1984 1137 0001 1984 1017 0001 12 V Output 3 Amps 1984 1017 000x 5 V Output 20 Amps 30 VDC Input 1984 1017 000x 12 V Output 2 Amps 5 V Output 11 Amps OI Card Cage SV 3 7 22 Ol Power Supply LEDs and Test Points The Ol Power Supply has LEDs to monitor the voltages as shown in Figure 3 7 15 Power from power buses A and B is diode isolated and fed through fuses F1 and F2 An LED indicates if a fuse has opened There are test points for the 5 volt yellow brown and 12 volt Red Brown supplies Model 1984
351. p left hand side of the Printer Processor Board The part may be obtained from Texas Instruments TI 810 Printer Printing Half Page of Data RS3 Consoles If only about half a page is printed at a time check to be sure that DNB is enabled on the Printer Processor Board This Data Terminal Not Busy enables the terminal buffer control to stop data transfer from the console until the buffer is empty and ready for more data TI service personnel may change the jumper or replace the Printer Processor Board with the jumper in the wrong location for operation with RS3 I To enable DNB 1 Set jumpers E4 E5 E6 to E5 E6 Printers SV 3 6 24 RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 7 1 Section 7 Ol Card Cage RS3 Consoles This section covers the OI Operator Interface Card Cage also called the Console Card Cage The major components covered in this section are the Electronics Cabinet Alarm Output Panel Ol Card Cage PeerWay Interface Power Regulator Ol Processor Video Generator Character Graphics Video Generator Pixel Graphics Printer Interface Small Computer System Interface SCSI OI Nonvolatile Memory Bubble RAM The OI Card Cage is used with the Multitube Command Console MTCC System Manager Station SMS Command Console CC Basic Command Console BCC Hardened Command Console HCC System Resource Unit SRU Supervisory Computer Interface SCI Highway Interface Adapter HIA
352. periodically by the microprocessor the watchdog timer toggles the reset line to the microprocessor which forces a restart All the LEDs are controlled by the LED latch which includes the Card Enable green Card Fault red and three yellow status LEDs The card ENABLE DISABLE switch is read through a buffer to indicate to the processor when it should disable processing During initial power up of the card the microprocessor does diagnostics from data stored in programs loaded in the 128K x 8 FLASH After the MPC5 has successfully completed the diagnostic tests it informs the Coordinator Processor which IMAGE it is jumpered for and requests the operating program The Controller now executing its own internal program will then request the Coordinator Processor to download any configuration data stored in the Nonvolatile Memory Communication with up to eight Field Interface Cards is handled by the eight serial communication converters that transfer the parallel data from the card data bus to serial NRZ data Each communication converter is capable of supporting one Field Interface Card communication line The serial data from the communication chip at transistor to transistor logic TTL level is then converted to RS 422 and sent to the Field Interface Cards through the cables Receive data is in a similar format Controller Processors SV 4 3 7 MPCII Function Figure 4 3 3 shows a functional diagram of the MultiPurpose Contr
353. ply Fuses ooooccccccccc 3 3 16 3 4 1 Hub Specifications oocooocccoccccccn tees 3 4 14 3 4 2 Typical Power Consumption Examples ce eee eee 3 4 16 3 5 1 Hard Disk Drive Parts Replacement 0 cece eee eee 3 5 3 3 5 2 Hard Disk Drive DC Power Cable Assemblies 3 5 4 3 5 3 Cable 10P56840001 Inline Fuses 0000 cece eee eee 3 5 4 3 5 4 10P58570001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers 3 5 5 3 5 5 10P58050001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers 3 5 6 RS3 Consoles Contents SV xi 3 5 6 10P5665000x IBM Deskstar 540 Jumpers uses 3 5 7 3 5 7 10P5280000x ProDrive LPS 270S Drive Address Jumpers 3 5 8 3 5 8 1984 3100 000x ProDrive LPS 170S Drive Address Jumpers 3 5 9 3 5 9 1984 3100 000x Productive LPS 105S Drive Option Jumpers 3 5 10 3 5 10 1984 3100 000x ProDrive LPS 105S Drive Address Jumpers 3 5 10 3 5 11 1984 2780 000x ProDrive 80S Drive Option Jumpers 3 5 11 3 5 12 1984 2780 000x Productive 80s Drive Address Jumpers 3 5 11 3 5 13 1984 2307 000x Q280 Version 1 Drive Option Jumpers 3 5 13 3 5 14 1984 2307 000x Q280 Version 2 Drive Option Jumpers 3 5 13 3 5 15 1984 2307 000x Q280 Drive Address Jumpers 3 5 14 3 5 16 1984 1928 000x 40 Meg Drive Jumpers esses 3 5 15 3 5 17 1984 2837 000x 8 Bit Switch Setting 0o
354. ply Modules 000 c cece eee enna 1 3 5 Electrical Description sites taco pta p e Ree ded 1 3 6 Planning 5 ce re e e eU E OE eet exa e 1 3 7 System Cabinet and AC Wiring 0 6 00 cece eee 1 3 7 System Cabinet DC Power Configurations 00 cece eee eee 1 3 8 Alarm WANING s cercada er e EE IEEE UO ERR 1 3 11 Special Conditions 0 cece nh 1 3 12 Installation iR Ries eee Relat eels ENDE ES 1 3 13 Physical Installation ree e e Sa Alea aA s 1 3 13 Installing a Housing in a Cabinet 0 eee eee 1 3 13 Installing a Power Supply in a Housing sees 1 3 14 Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs 0 tees 1 3 15 Maintenance ss otra widen ce ia Gee ose en Gea eda 1 3 16 General Maintenance 0 00 ccc ete en 1 3 16 Replacing a Cooling Fan 0 cece eects 1 3 16 Replacing a Power Supply 0 000 cece eects 1 3 18 Removing a Power Supply Housing from a System Cabinet 1 3 18 Installing a Housing in a Cabinet 0 eee 1 3 19 Installing a Power Supply in a Housing 0c eee eee eee eee 1 3 20 Removing a Power Supply from a Housing 6 2 ee eee ee 1 3 21 Specifications oer e ee beds Galen acd a Wale aes Re e RA ade ada Re 1 3 21 Section 4 DC Power Distribution 000 eee e eee eee eee 1 4 1 DC Power Distribution Bus 0 cece 1 4 3 DG Output Card uc Ret he eoe beide e pM E 1 4 5 D
355. power supply module in the housing 1 Ensure that the AC power switch on the front of the power supply module is in the off O position and that the locking pawl is in the horizontal position Align the power supply module with the guide rails in the housing Slide the power supply module into the housing making sure that the bottom right edge of the power supply module engages the plastic guide rail in the housing NOTE If you are installing only one power supply module in a housing install it in the right side of the housing 4 5 6 Continue inserting the power supply module until the locking pawl reaches the stop Using a screwdriver slowly turn the locking screw counterclockwise one quarter turn while observing the pawl to ensure that it freely rotates 90 degrees to the vertical position and engages the slot in the bottom of the housing If the pawl does not rotate to the vertical position move the power supply module in or out of the housing slightly to align the pawl with the slot in the housing Turn the locking screw approximately 10 additional turns counterclockwise until it stops to fully seat the blind mate connector The remaining turns draw the power supply module into the housing and seat the blind mate electrical connector CAUTION Do not apply power to the power supply module until the blind mate connector is fully seated Failure to fully seat the connector may result in damage to the power
356. powered by 5 V and is independent of 12 V changes If the LED goes out the 5 V fuse has blown on the disk drive Two power connectors are provided for the two disk drives 5 gt gt 5 V Disk From MC Red Green 12 V Drive LED Return Voltage Return Comparato M s Circuit y 30 V A 12 V Regulator Over Voltage Protection and gt 5 V Disk 30 V B Current Limit V 4 12 gt 12 V Drive F1 Return e gt Fan Power Return _ 1 Figure 3 3 10 Floppy Disk Power Supply Block Diagram With 1984 1017 0001 Power Regulator Only RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 16 Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses Figure 3 3 11 shows the location of the fuses on the Floppy Disk Power Supply Table 3 3 2 gives fuse data Figure 3 3 11 Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuse Location Table 3 3 2 Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses Fuse FRSI Part No Bussman Part No Littelfuse Part No Characteristics F1 G09140 0011 MDQ 1 4 313 250 1 4 A 250 V Slow Blow F2 G09140 0045 AGC 8 den 8 A 250 V Regular Remote MiniConsole Power Supply The Remote MiniConsole Power Supply 1984 1089 000x is described in Section 2 of Chapter 1 RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 4 1 Section 4 RS3 Operator Station This section describes the RS3 Operator Station ROS hardware It covers e RS3 Operator Workstation e Operator K
357. pply DC power to distributed I O termination panels mounted in I O cabinets The supply is assembled as required from these components Remote I O Power Supply AC Distribution Block DC Distribution Block AC DC Distribution Block DC I O Power Cable s Fuse Label DIN Rail optional 10P55030001 10P55030002 1984 4302 0001 1984 4302 0002 1984 4329 0001 1984 4329 0002 1984 4329 0003 1984 4329 0004 1984 4337 xxxx 1984 4433 xxxx 1984 4350 000x 1984 4309 0004 Figure 1 2 14 shows a typical assembly RS3 Power 230 VAC 115 VAC 110 VAC 220 VAC 2 circuits 10 circuits 1 circuit 2 AC 10 DC circuits Bus A cable Bus B cable Power Supplies SV 1 2 29 L 1 jJ DC Distribution Block d AC Distribution Block DI p o p ol o o p ol p p Ol D Ol Power Supply Figure 1 2 14 Typical Remote I O Power Supply Assembly RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 30 10P5503 for I O Applications This configuration supplies power to I O panels located away from the main system DC bus Figure 1 2 15 shows the unit Description f Description Front view Top view DC output P837 Orange 24 v Green LED P838 Brown Return AC input P834 Black L1 Test socket for output voltage measurement P835 White L2 N P836 Green Ground Potentiometer for output voltage adjustment Figure 1 2 15 10P550
358. quipped with a 124 ohm impedance terminator 1984 1065 0002 The terminator eliminates noise and reflections on the cable Figure 2 1 8 shows terminator connections In a system with four nodes or less and in which a twinax cable is not needed all connections can be made through a single PeerWay Tap with four 100 ohm terminators installed on the twinax connectors PeerWay B PeerWay A Terminators PEERWAY TAP A PEERWAY TAP B Drop Cables Figure 2 1 8 Electrical PeerWay Termination RS3 PeerWay Electrical PeerWay SV 2 1 12 Installing Twinaxial Connectors Two types of connectors are available e Crimp Type 100 ohm cable only 1167 0016 0001 e Solder Type 100 ohm cable G12885 0001 124 ohm Beldin cable G12885 0006 124 ohm Intercomm cable G12885 0008 NOTE An insulating sleeve should be placed over the metal barrel of the connector to prevent inadvertent grounding of the twinax shield 3 To install a crimp type twinaxial connector 1 Strip the cable as shown in Figure 2 1 9 2 Refer to the crimping instructions 48047401 shipped with the connector for installation instructions 3 Put an insulating sleeve over the connector NOTE A Connector Crimp Tool 1167 0016 0002 is required A Crimp Tool Kit 1167 0016 0007 is available The kit has 20 connectors and a crimp tool c 15 08 0 4 mm 0 59 0 016 in 9
359. r the resident emulations and all of the characters in the currently selected set Printing is in seven colors 1 To initiate the Fujitsu DL3800 Printer self test 1 Put the printer in setup mode Select SELF TST from the lt lt FUNCTION gt gt menu 2 Pause printing by pressing FONT or MENU Resume with FONT or MENU 3 Press ONLINE to exit the self test Printers SV 3 6 6 Fujitsu DL4600 Printer The Fujitsu DL4600 color printer 1984 0543 000x runs at 333 cps draft quality and 111 cps letter quality It prints 10 characters per inch and 6 lines per inch It should be operated at 4800 baud The printer dimensions are Height 190mm 7 5 in Width 582 mm 22 9 in Depth 386 mm 15 2 in Weight 18 kg 39 7 Ib Double and triple bin paper handling attachments are available from Fujitsu For further information see the Fujitsu DL4600 User Manual 1984 0543 0009 and the Fujitsu DLA600 Maintenance Manual 1984 0543 0008 Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Set Up U To set up the Fujitsu DL4600 printer 1 Press NEXT DISPLAY until enter setup appears in the display window Press F1 so Menu 1 appears in the display window Scroll through the options and verify the settings in Table 3 6 4 Scroll with F2 Change options with F3 2 Press F1 so Menu 2 appears in the display window Scroll through the options and verify the settings Menu 2 must be identical to Menu 1 RS3 Consoles Printers
360. r Positions Battery 2 enabled Battery 2 disabled Battery 1 enabled Battery 1 disabled Table 4 2 25 RAM NV Memory Jumper Positions 1984 2347 0011 nme eae 1 Meg RAM 1 2 1984 2347 0021 1 2 2 3 Hard wired 2 Meg RAM 2 3 2 3 1984 2347 0041 Hard wired Hard wired Hard wired 4 Meg RAM RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 51 RAM NV Memory Battery Replacement The batteries should be replaced periodically or whenever one of the Low Battery LEDs lights Replace both batteries but disable them one at a time to allow the other to retain the RAM contents Use only 3 6 volt lithium batteries G52932 0002 l To replace the batteries NOTE Backup to disk before you remove the NV memory card for battery replacement Follow recommended procedures in powering down the ControlFile see below Use static protection whenever handling the NV RAM CAUTION If one battery is low replace the low battery first to ensure data retention 1 Disable the battery by moving the jumper to 2 3 OFF Jumper HD7 is for battery one HD6 is for battery two 2 Remove and replace the battery Mark the date of battery manufacture on the BT1 DATECODE label area 3 Enable the battery by moving the jumper back to 1 2 ON 4 Repeat for battery two using the other jumper RAM NV Memory Fuse Figure 4 2 21 shows the location of the fuse on the RAM Nonvolatile Memory card T
361. r Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points 4 2 16 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Jumpers 4 2 18 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses 4 2 19 Coordinator Processor CP 000 eeuna annee 4 2 20 CP IV Circuit Description 0 000 cece 4 2 21 CP I and CP II Circuit Description 0 eee 4 2 24 CP Coordinator Processor Redundancy 0e cece eee eee 4 2 27 CP LEDs Test Points and Enable Disable Switch 4 2 29 CP LED Sequences sussssesses ee nh 4 2 31 GP JumpeltsS i2 slg rdpe3ekRR he a e EIE enr dee 4 2 34 CP IV 10P50870004 and 1984 4164 0004 002000 4 2 34 CP IV 1984 4064 000X oooooccccocccccc n 4 2 35 CP 11 1984 1594 000x ssssssseeseee n 4 2 36 CP I 1984 1448 0001 or 1984 1240 0001 00 02 4 2 37 CP FUSOS pot peterem eee e edere e Ir det e MATE CD eins 4 2 38 NV Nonvolatile Memory sssssssee RA n 4 2 39 HAM NV Memory cnn airports 4 2 41 RAM NV Memory LEDs and Test Points 0 0 0 0 e eee eee ees 4 2 44 RAM NV Memory LED Sequences ssessssssssees erre 4 2 46 RAM NV Memory Jumpers ssssssee e 4 2 48 RAM NV Memory Battery Replacement suse 4 2 49 RAM NV Memory Fuse ssssssseee e en 4 2 49 NV Memory and Powering Down the ControlFile 4 2 49 Bubble NV Mernory eri
362. r ra ER petens 3 1 7 Trackball Keyboard Assembly 0 0 00 c cece eee 3 1 8 Option Keyboard i She Se ea oho Gee at a 3 1 9 Touchpad A bee eee i bie a oe be tek ool doa ee Di eel cn Seales ee 3 1 10 JOYSTICK sat ore ste gtd ore et ee rectas eR epe teat dee See erie bt 3 1 11 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics 0ooooooco oooo 3 1 12 Keyboard Electronics Board 00 cece cette 3 1 12 Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board 0 cece eee eee 3 1 13 Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board 0 cece eee ees 3 1 13 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Interface 00e eee eee 3 1 14 Password Keyboard Interface 0 06 e eects 3 1 15 Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface 0 cece ences 3 1 16 10P50840004 1984532220004 c nre tk lat ee teen tee dee dead wee 3 1 17 1984 29889 0004 cc testar Bin Phe Soe a Saeed 3 1 18 1984 21978 000X 2 cuco m he deh ole ine VERRE DOE Leeder ee 3 1 19 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface 6c cece ee eee ee 3 1 20 1984 3222 1004 cocoa b en Bests Gane nee Sees 3 1 20 1984 2889 1004 oic See a Bee Us 3 1 22 Keyboard Interface Access oooccccccccccccn 3 1 23 Keyboard Interface LEDs 0 0 cece ete es 3 1 24 Keyboard Interface Jumper 0 c cece eee ees 3 1 24 Keyboard Interface FUSES oococcccccccccc 3 1 25 Console CRIS 1 oci pe ee lyase cis othe al WM KE NE Ee ee 3 1 26 ROS CRT IIYAMA Vision Master
363. r supply AC Input and Auxiliary AC Alarm Connections Blind Mate Connectors Guide Rails Output Connectors Auxiliary jojoelele AC Output Circuit Breakers O O OE RS3 Power zh O OJO O O O ojojojolojo fos e Ke fo fo fo fo olololololo Figure 1 3 2 System Power Supply Unit Housing Only Figure 1 3 3 shows the DC output block on the housing The housing contains separate DC output terminals for each power supply module The figure also shows the alarm connections on the housing The alarm connections do not require wire terminating lugs DC Output Block PS1 RIGHT 26 VDC OUTPUT 26 VDC OUTPUT PS2 Alarm Connections LEFT SSS v n Figure 1 3 3 DC Output and Alarm Connections System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 4 Figure 1 3 4 shows the AC input connectors and the auxiliary AC output connectors and circuit breakers CAUTION N European installations require external switches or circuit breakers that break both the line and neutral connections of the AC inputs The circuit breakers provided for the auxiliary AC outputs are single pole and break only the line side The housing includes terminal blocks for two AC input sources This en
364. r tap box set set the SHIELD jumper to GND on both tap boxes A and B A zero length twinax segment a PX with no twinax attached must have the screw set at GROUND on both A and B tap boxes RS3 PeerWay There are three LEDs as shown in Table 2 3 3 Table 2 3 3 PX LEDs The PX is running and has adequate power applied Fiber Optic Transmit ON flickering when messages XMT are being transmitted on the fiber optic channel ON Yellow continuously indicates a stuck transmitter or transmitter in test mode Fiber Optic Receive ON flickering when messages are being received on the fiber optic channel ON continuously indicates a stuck transmitter at the other end of the fiber or transmitter in test mode Hybrid PeerWay SV 2 3 8 PX Switches There are two sets of switches S1 and S2 control the Normal Test mode of operation S3 controls the output power of the fiber optic transmitter The switches are reached through holes in the faceplate Fiber Optic Power Switch Switch S3 controls the power output of the fiber optic transmitter At the HIGH POWER setting full transmitter power is output At the LOW POWER setting the output is about 7 to 10 dB lower This is used in place of an external attenuator Normal Test Switches The PeerWay Extender has three operating modes normal disabled and test The modes are controlled by switches S1 and S2 You must force PeerWay traffic to the ot
365. raps remaining in the paper path When the paper feeds normally return the paper release lever to the original setting and close the front cover Turn the power on and operate If this does not clear the jam remove the platen to access the feed mechanism See the Fujitsu Maintenance Manual 1984 0510 0021 for the platen removal procedure Printers SV 3 6 20 TI 810 Printer The Texas Instruments 810 1984 031 7 000x is a basic printer See the Operator Manual 1984 0317 0005 for details TI 810 Printer Jumpers and Switches Jumpers on the TI 810 Processor Board are set as shown in Table 3 6 10 Table 3 6 10 TI 810 Processor Board Jumpers ip mg Jumpers on the Tl 810 Motherboard are set as shown in Table 3 6 11 Table 3 6 11 TI 810 Printer Motherboard Jumpers E1 E2 JUMPERED E3 E4 JUMPERED E11 E12 E13 E11 E12 RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 21 The seven dip switches pencil switches located under the access door are set as shown in Table 3 6 12 This sets the printer up for e 4800 Baud e No Parity e No Automatic Linefeed e No Automatic Top of Form NOTE Printer power must be cycled on and off after you change any switches Table 3 6 12 T1 810 Printer Baud Rate Pencil Switches TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks The test points and proper voltages are listed in Table 3 6 13 Table 3 6 13 TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 22
366. rator Station 25 SV 3 4 5 Figure 3 4 3 shows the dimensions of the operator keyboard with trackball Top View 490 19 3 yp UN 56 66 2 1 2 6 ee 46 i 1 8 1 0 RS3 Consoles Side View With Trackball Side View w o Trackball Figure 3 4 3 Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters Inches RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 6 ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board 10P56910001 ON OFF ON OFF RS3 Consoles CAUTION Observe normal electrostatic discharge ESD precautions when handling the keyboard interface circuit board Observe the ESD precautions in your computer manual when installing the board in the computer Interface card dip switch settings are shown in Figure 3 4 4 SW3 SW2 e o ON e o OFF e 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 Switch SW1 Switch SW4 ON e 9 0 OFF e oo 00 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Switch SW3 Switch SW2 Figure 3 4 4 ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Card RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 7 ROS Operator Keyboard Connections The 9 pin D sub connector end of interface cable 10P56700015 Figure 3 4 5 is connected to the keyboard interface card serial port on the back of the PC The 8 pin connector end of the interface cable is connected to the
367. rd Clear To Send Keyboard is connected and ready to accept data Indicates data being transmitted to the printer TXD A v CTS A Y TXD B CTS B Clear To Send Printer is connected and ready to accept data NV Write The nonvolatile RAM is being written to 9 Clock A one second pulse that the RTC is running e Software Clock Console s internal software clock is running Figure 3 7 32 Printer Interface Card 0003 0004 With RS 422 interface LEDs RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 51 Printer Interface Jumpers Figure 3 7 33 shows the location of the battery jumper on the Printer Interface Table 3 7 18 gives the jumper values The Printer Interface battery jumper must be in the ON 1 2 position when the card is installed in a console and in the OFF 2 3 position when the card is shipped or stored The battery jumper is in the OFF position when the card is shipped from stock All other jumpers are factory set and should not be moved E o Clock Battery Jumper HD1 0 ET TEST CONFIGURATION Figure 3 7 33 Printer Interface Jumper Locations Table 3 7 18 Printer Interface Jumper Placement EB Em A Nm aie battery eae Clock battery disconnected Storage position a as an Test disabled HD7 HD9 Normal position RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 52 SCSI Sm
368. rd Display Active Processor is updating Video Generator RAM Keyboard Active Processor is operating on an instruction from a keyboard Controller I O Processor is working on a data update from a Controller Figure 3 7 18 Ol Processor 68040 LEDs Ol Processor 68040 Jumpers Table 3 7 12 shows the jumper settings Table 3 7 12 Ol Processor 68040 Jumper Positions Position 1 2 Position 2 3 Ol Processor 68040 Fuses The OI Processor 68040 has no fuses RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 30 Ol Processor 68020 The OI Processor 68020 1984 1540 0009 and 1984 1161 0009 is used in consoles and System Resource Units SRUS requiring larger memory and faster processing than that provided by the 68000 based OI Processor 1984 1540 0009 is marked Ol PROCESSOR 68020 W ASIC on the PWA The daughterboard circuitry is contained in Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC chips 1984 1161 0009 is marked Ol PROCESSOR 68020 on the PWA This card has an attached daughterboard The OI Processor 68020 performs 68000 based OI Processor functions but has more memory and is enhanced for increased performance Replacing an Ol Processor with this card requires new software and pixel graphics Figure 3 7 19 shows the functional diagram for an OI Processor 68020
369. rd Table 3 1 19 shows the nominal voltages on the Low Voltage Regulator board If any voltages are missing or are far from nominal replace the Low Voltage Regulator board before you replace the Scan board Also check for AC ripple Table 3 1 19 Conrac 7241 Low Voltage Regulator Test Points Test Point Nominal Voltage Ground 6 3 VDC 5 3 6 6 14 0 VDC 138 142 84 VDC 82 3 88 2 35 VDC 34 95 35 05 RS3 Consoles 24 VDC 23 9 24 1 Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 33 Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Adjustments Horizontal or vertical adjustments require the use of different pots on the Scan board 1984 1651 0018 Table 3 1 20 lists the adjustments on the Scan board and Figure 3 1 16 shows the pot location Table 3 1 20 Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustments Vertical Hold Vertical Center Vertical Height Vertical Linearity Horizontal Hold Pixel Board Horizontal Hold Character Board Horizontal Center Horizontal Width Pixel Board Horizontal Width Character Board Side Pincushion Static Phase Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 34 Figure 3 1 16 Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustment Locations Conrac 7241 CRT Black Video or Black Bars on Screen If there are black bars across the scree
370. rdware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4XXX 1 2 cece eee ee eee 7 4 5 RS3 Service Manual Contents VAX 3xxx VAX 4xxx PeerWay Marshaling Panel sus 7 4 6 VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDS 0 00 ee ee eae 7 4 7 VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards 0000 c cece 7 4 8 VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 CPU Card Jumpers 0005 7 4 10 VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 PeerWay Interface Card Jumpers 7 4 13 VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 PeerWay Interface Card LEDs 7 4 15 Section 5 Diogenes Interface 22 20 cc eee e eee eee eee o 7 5 1 OI NV Memory Card 00 ehh 7 5 4 Diogenes Interface Software 20 cece eee 7 5 5 Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card 0 2 cee eee 7 5 6 Diogenes Communication Convertor BOX 00 cece eee eee 7 5 7 Section 6 RS3 Network Interface RNI Lseeeeeeeee 7 6 1 RNI PeerWay Node Label 00 cece ne 7 6 3 RNI System Cabling 0 0 cece een 7 6 4 Serial Port ec kel igen eileen ado WD AERE er Apu 7 6 6 Boot Data vin TI ri Gari elk ML tra ee pes Ged 7 6 6 Crash D mmps cobre E OEC HEC e GP LLL 7 6 6 ANN NE tri pa a D IH 7 6 7 RNI LEDs and Reset Switch oococococcccccoccc essere 7 6 8 HNI JUMPER E A ER detur EE 7 6 9 HNIEUSe oit omn DELE Ob ee p og DESAIN be ese rg bM 7 6 10 Chapter 8 Calibration Section 1 Calibrating Serial I O Field Interface Cards
371. re 67 to 185 F 55 to 85 C Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Airborne Contaminants Designed for operation in environmental conditions per ISA S71 04 1985 gaseous corrosion level G2 Altitude Sea level to 2440 meters 8000 feet without derating Cooling Fan Brushless DC Reliability 200 000 hours MTBF minimum at 25 C 77 F Mounting Rack mountable power supply housing with blind mate connectors for power supply modules Dimensions Overall housing 483 mm 19 in wide x 133 4 mm 5 25 in high x 343 mm 13 5 in deep from mounting flange Weight RS3 Power Housing 5 66 kg 12 5 Ib Power Supply Module 3 81 kg 8 4 Ib System Power Supply Units SV 1 4 1 Section 4 DC Power Distribution This section describes the DC power distribution system and the DC Output card A standard non redundant DC power distribution system consists of one or more AC DC Power Supplies feeding one or more DC Distribution Bus assemblies as shown in Figure 1 4 1 Each DC Distribution Bus assembly consists of three 1 x 14 inch copper bus bars with a current carrying capacity of 200 amps DC Distribution Bus assemblies may be daisy chained as required using DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper cables Bus A is frequently jumpered to bus B giving bus A B AS A Geet SS DC Bus to DC Bus te See hc ae 1 Bus A B Power Supplies Jumper on eee Up to Six
372. re used the one in the left slot becomes the master and controls the output of the one in the right slot the slave The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC may be used in ControlFiles with either RAM NV Memory or Bubble NV Memory The card may replace a 5 VDC Only Power Regulator in a ControlFile that has only RAM NV Memory It may be used as a redundant card in either slot of a RAM NV Memory only ControlFile Table 4 2 7 shows parts replacement data Table 4 2 7 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Parts Replacement 30 VDC or 24 VDC input selectable by jumper 1984 1432 000x 1984 1505 000x 3 or 6 amp 12 VDC output selectable by jumper 1984 3505 000x ONLY in a ControlFile with NVRAM CAUTION Disable the NV Memory and then the Coordinator Processor cards before removing any card other than a PeerWay Buffer card from the ControlFile Failure to do so may result in a corrupted data transfer The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC has three outputs e 5 volts at 42 amps with over voltage and current protection e 12 volts at 3 or 6 amps with over voltage and current protection e 12 volts at 3 or 6 amps Voltage regulation follows the 12 volt supply CAUTION When inserting a Power Regulator card push it in part way and pause to allow the capacitors to charge The LED will blink once Then seat the card firmly Failure to allow the capacitors to charge can result in burned edge connector
373. ree legends one above the key one on the key and one below the key Keys will be specified using the label appropriate for the action being performed SETUP EXT FUNCTION ITEM SELECT ONLINE FF LF RESET SETUP LOAD MICRO LF ALT Figure 3 6 1 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Control Panel Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Error Messages There are four types of error messages that may be displayed on the printer control panel 1 Operational 2 Paper handling 3 Serial interface 4 Memory RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 10 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Handling 1 To load the paper 1 Pull the paper release lever towards the front of the printer 2 Pull the paper bail lever toward the front of the printer 3 Hold the ALT key and press LOAD 4 Return the paper bail lever to the former position I To adjust for paper thickness 1 Set the paper thickness adjustment lever located on the right side under the front cover as indicated in Table 3 6 6 If the lever is set too low the paper may be damaged at the edges line feeding may be off or the ribbon may come loose If the lever is set too high the printing may be light or characters may be missing Table 3 6 6 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Thickness me o m mewma 5 RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 11 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Set Up L To set up the Fujitsu DL2600 printer 1 Hold down ALT and then pre
374. required address multiplexing for the RAM chips and handles the refresh cycle The dynamic RAM chips have separate pins for the read and write functions A separate read write select provides the separation and data bus buffering The EDAC controller decodes the check bits that are stored along with the data bits There are 16 data bits and six check bits If any single bit is not as indicated by the EDAC check bits the EDAC controller will automatically correct for the error and rewrite the data into the RAM location correctly An alarm message is annunciated at the console to indicate a weak RAM bit If multiple bit errors are found the EDAC triggers a bus error also annunciated at the console Each dynamic RAM 2600 chip is arranged in a 64K x 1 bit pattern A word in memory is 16 bits 8 bits to a byte 2 bytes to a word and 128K bytes are mapped to a 64K x 16 6 bits EDAC The positions of the node address jumpers are read into a buffer that stores the addresses A second set of jumpers is configured identically for redundancy ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 27 Cage Cage Alarm Alarm Contacts Bootstrap KOMBE Bus Buffer To Bus A or B Slot Selective o Error Motherboard m Detection Bus Buffer S Correction a Control t5 RAM 68000 tn Micro 6 Bits EDC Processor p 128K a or Dynamic 512K Refresh and Control x Board To Enable Disable Redundant RR Motherboard CP B
375. rface 2 0 cece tenet en 3 7 15 PeerWay Interface LEDs and Test Points 0 ccc cece eens 3 7 17 PeerWay Interface Jumpers 0 00 cc tenes 3 7 18 Ol Power Supply ipn etr Re Re exe ERR ERG UR yeaa 3 7 20 Ol Power Supply LEDs and Test Points 0c cee ee eee eee 3 7 22 Ol Power Supply Jumpers sssssssssese eh 3 7 23 OI Power Supply Jumpers for a System Power Supply Unit 3 7 23 Ol Power Supply Fuses ssssssssssese nh 3 7 24 Ol Processor ils RR xe T RC Re dee Gate add xe 3 7 25 Ol Processor 68040 ooocccccccccc eh 3 7 27 Ol Processor 68040 LEDs 1 kee eae 3 7 29 Ol Processor 68040 Jumpers 00 eects 3 7 29 Ol Processor 68040 FUSES ooococccccocccc aaeeea 3 7 29 Ol Processor 68020 oio odie eee athlete Ree AE as no a 3 7 30 Ol Processor 68020 LEDs ooooccccoccccccc seh 3 7 32 Ol Processor 68020 Jumpers oocccccccccc ee 3 7 33 Ol Processor 68020 FUSES ssssssssssssses s 3 7 33 Ol Processor 68000 0 cece ee hn 3 7 34 Ol Processor 68000 LEDs 0 0 cece eects 3 7 36 Ol Processor 68000 Jumpers 000 cece tee 3 7 37 Ol Processor 68000 FUSES ccc eee eae 3 7 38 Pixel Graphics Video Generator 0 000s cece eee 3 7 39 Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs 0 000 c cece e eens 3 7 41 Character Graphics Video Generator 000 esee 3 7 42 Character Graphics Video G
376. rive Q280 Version 2 Drive Option jumpers These jumpers should not be changed Table 3 5 14 1984 2307 000x Q280 Version 2 Drive Option Jumpers Wait Spin Option No pum Enable Parity Option Tm ins ow was 09 Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 14 Table 3 5 15 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers Only address 5 is valid Table 3 5 15 1984 2307 000x Q280 Drive Address Jumpers Drive Address Jumper AO Jumper A1 Jumper A2 OFF No Jumper ON Jumper OFF There are three SCSI terminating resistors that remain in place unless the drive is not the last unit on the SCSI bus Figure 3 5 4 shows the location of jumpers and terminating resistors DC Power areas SCSI Bus Cable Jumpers ne SCSI Terminators Pin 1 Figure 3 5 4 1984 2307 000x Quantum Q280 Drive Jumpers and Terminators RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 15 Quantum ProDrive Q540 5 25 Inch 40 MB Hard Disk Table 3 5 16 shows jumper settings for the 1984 1928 000x 40 Meg Winchester Hard Drive Table 3 5 16 1984 1928 000x 40 Meg Drive Jumpers me Js xx IEC IIS IEC es IC eee Figure 3 5 5 shows the location and settings for jumpers on the 40 Meg hard disk ESS E A EAN A NN A A A A Ee a i a ee po 1 Red trace on E BE TT Cable goes here a e OE Pin 1 o 88 CAUTION 022200858 cz Use extreme care when connecting the 50 pin connector All pins mus
377. rking voltage used for these circuits whichever is higher Use 2 07 mm 14 AWG to 0 812 mm 18 AWG wire for the connection Special Conditions Ensure that all other devices are mounted above the Operator Interface Ol electronics to ensure compliance with temperature requirements The OI must be the lowest device mounted in a system cabinet RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 13 Installation The typical factory prepared cabinet installation is shipped with the System Power Supply Unit mounted However this section provides installation procedures in the event you need to install a System Power Supply Unit Physical Installation This subsection explains how to e Install a power supply housing in a cabinet e Install a power supply module in a housing Installing a Housing in a Cabinet A RS3 Power Fisher Rosemount Systems recommends that you install the housing first without power supply modules then install the power supply modules in the housing NOTE The System Power Supply Unit can weigh as much as 13 29 kg 29 3 Ib if two power supply modules are installed The following procedure describes installation of a power supply housing in a system cabinet 1 Place all external circuit breakers that control AC power inputs to the power supply housing in the OFF position CAUTION The DC Distribution Bus and associated power cables may have DC power still applied if the load is
378. rning off the power or opening the top cover Printers SV 3 6 18 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Error Signals The error lamp lights and the buzzer sounds if the printer detects a communications problem or a circuit malfunction 1 Communications Error A is substituted for any character received with an error 2 Circuit Malfunction Refer to the Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Maintenance Manual 1984 0510 0021 for troubleshooting procedures Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Paper Handling The printer functions best with 20 pound standard perforation paper Micro perforation paper will often burst the perforations before the paper feeds through the printer causing paper jams Standard perforation paper of 15 pound weight should not be used This paper lacks the body to reliably feed through the printer tractor mechanism The paper thickness lever adjusts the spacing between the printhead and the platen to compensate for various paper thickness It is located at the extreme right side under the printer cover It is marked from 1 to 9 Each graduation moves the printhead about 05 mm 002 in One graduation corresponds roughly to one sheet of paper NOTE The lever should NOT be set to 1 for one thickness of paper Follow the procedure below to adjust the paper thickness level properly If the lever is set too low e Paper may be damaged at the left and right margins e Printing may smear as the paper is advanced e Line feed
379. rnpers ici vies este ner lie EE PERLES S 5 1 44 Pulse 1 0 EIG F ses osse tebe ated e ea eae T ES 5 1 45 Temperature Input FIC 2 1 eh 5 1 46 Temperature Input FIC LEDs ssssseseseee ees 5 1 51 Temperature Input FIC Jumpers 0 ccc cece eres 5 1 52 Temperature Input FIC Fuses 0 0 0 cece eee eee es 5 1 53 RS3 Service Manual Contents SV xix Analog Extender Card 0 0 c cece cence eh 5 1 53 Analog Marshaling Panel 00 cece eects 5 1 54 Cold Junction Compensator 006 eee 5 1 57 Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block 0 00 cece eee 5 1 57 Section 2 Contact Card Cage oooococcocccncc 5 2 1 Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm ccc cece eee tenes 5 2 2 Contact Card Cage eect teen eae 5 2 4 Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing sce e eee eee eee 5 2 5 Contact Card Cage Wiring 0 eee 5 2 6 Contact FlexTerm a a aaa r eena a ene een 5 2 7 Contact FlexTerm FIC Addressing sellers 5 2 8 Contact FlexTerm Wiring 00 cee cette eee 5 2 8 Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumpers 05 5 2 10 Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Fuses 00005 5 2 12 Contact Termination Board 0 cece eee teens 5 2 13 Contact Termination Board Wiring 00 cece cece 5 2 14 Contact Termination Board Fuses cece eee eee eee 5 2 15 Contact Marshaling Panel
380. rocessor s There is also space for the configuration data of nine Controller Processors This space consists of configurations for up to eight Controller Processors and one extra working file so that the last file is not deleted until a new one is completed The data can be downloaded through the PeerWay from a disk or the card may be shipped with configuration data already loaded A memory map for all data is stored in the nonvolatile memory header table in the nonvolatile memory ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 42 Once the Coordinator Processor is through its startup diagnostics it uses its boot ROM to download read the operating program from the Nonvolatile Memory The Coordinator Processor then accesses the RAM on each Controller Processor in turn and downloads writes the operating and configuration program to each Periodically the Coordinator Processor takes a snapshot of the configuration and dynamic data in each Controller Processor and transfers it to nonvolatile memory As a result if a power loss occurs the Controller Processor can be restarted with accurate data The Nonvolatile Memory has dual port buffers so it can be controlled by either Coordinator Processor card if redundant Coordinator Processor cards are used The card cage has two slots for nonvolatile memory cards These are not intended for redundancy but are useful during troubleshooting and recovery from a Nonvolatile Memory or Bubble Memory
381. rogram that identifies the bad areas of of each bubble in hexadecimal code This information is stored in several locations in the MBM If these locations should become corrupted the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory card must be returned to the factory to be restored ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 54 Bubble NV Memory LEDs and Test Points Figure 4 2 23 shows the LEDs Enable Disable Switch and test points for the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory cards LEDS The Coordinator Processor is accessing the main operating programs of a Controller Processor or itself The PROGRAM ACCESS card is reading from Nonvolatile Memory to download data DS8 to a card or is writing to the memory card from the disk drive WRITE The Nonvolatile Memory Card is being written to by the DS7 Coordinator Processor READ The Nonvolatile Memory Card is being read by the DS6 Coordinator Processor 12V Acc pA Replace Fuse F2 Supplies 12 VDC to the card 5 V FUSE BLOWN Replace Fuse F1 Supplies 5 VDC to the card DS3 A fault is detected on the Nonvolatile Memory or the Enable Disable Switch is DISABLED If the switch is ENABLED and this LED is ON replace the card CARD FAULT DS2 CARD ENABLED The Enable Disable Switch is ENABLED and no hardware DS1 faults are detected on the NV Memory Enable Disable Switch The Enable Disable Switch is read by the Coordinator Processor during operation The result is that it knows when it can or
382. roller Processors MPC5 Function SV 4 3 5 Figure 4 3 2 shows a functional diagram of the MultiPurpose Controller Processor 5 MPC5 Dual Port and Memory Control Memory Control A and B Drivers CP Interface A and B Transceiver Dual Port Address Driver MC68EC020 Address 2 Megabyte Dual Port RAM 32 Bit to 16 Bit Data Data Transceiver Dual Port Data Transceiver 8 Serial 1 0 Channels e 24 MHz Address Field Programmable interface Timer Data RS3 ControlFiles Debug DUART Figure 4 3 2 MPC5 Functional Diagram Controller Processors SV 4 3 6 RS3 ControlFiles The data from two redundant Coordinator Processors on separate redundant buses are selected and buffered on the card to isolate the two in case of a failure of either bus These two buffers come together at the dual port bus that has 2 Megabytes of RAM The remainder of the card is separated from the dual port bus The Coordinator Processor must have unrestricted access to the RAM on the controller in order to permit it to download the operation and configuration data After the data is downloaded the Controller Processor limits the memory access of the Coordinator Processor to the area containing the dynamic and configuration data The MC68HC020 microprocessor controls all the functions on the card and is monitored by the watchdog timer If it is not reset
383. rough a buffer to indicate to the processor when it should disable processing During initial power up of the card the microprocessor does diagnostics from data stored in programs loaded in the 8K x 16 EPROM After the MultiPurpose Controller has successfully completed the diagnostic tests it informs the Coordinator Processor which IMAGE it is jumpered for and requests the operating program The controller now executing its own internal program will then request the Coordinator Processor to download any configuration data stored in the Nonvolatile Memory Communication with up to eight Field Interface Cards is handled by the four dual port serial communication converters that transfer the parallel data from the card data bus to serial NRZ data Each communication converter is capable of supporting two Field Interface Card communication lines The serial data from the communication chip at TTL level is then converted to RS 485 and sent to the Field Interface Cards through the cables Receive data is in a similar format Controller Processors SV 4 3 12 MPC LEDs The LEDs of all Controller Processor cards are essentially identical See the LED description later in this section MPC5 Jumpers MPC5 jumpers differ from those on the other Controller Processor cards Figure 4 3 5 shows MPC5 jumper locations Table 4 3 4 shows the MPC5 jumper label Figure 4 3 5 MPC5 Fuse and
384. rrent in the primary at 40 kHz The regulator has power supplied through a pre regulator circuit The secondary of the transformer has a grounded center tap and a set of rectifiers to produce the 12 volt and 12 volt outputs The output of the 12 volt is sensed and the input pulse width to the transformer is varied to control the output voltage The card may be jumpered to provide either 3 amps or 6 amps at 12 volts The current outputs of the 12 volt and 12 volt supplies are combined through an error amplifier and this output is compared to the current output of the supplies on the slave card The voltage of the slave card is then adjusted to ensure that both Power Regulator cards share the load in the card cage All voltage outputs and both buses are monitored through a comparator for voltage tolerance Each has a yellow LED to indicate that the power is good If the 5 volt 12 volt or 12 volt regulator fails a red LED lights In case of failure all output lines are statused and buffered to the Coordinator Processor card through the motherboard bus to generate alarms ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 15 Voltage Sense Comparators 5V B 12 V us CA 12V Bullets Input Voltage B DC Input A Input Voltage A 24 or 30V DC Input B P Sr ese O SIE e e gt gt 45V 24 or
385. rs locked onto the transmitter clock frequency Serial data is presented to the transmitter section of the card The transmit and receive sections are connected to the PeerWay Tap by a cable that carries the following signals e 9volts unregulated DC e Transmit signal RS 422 to PeerWay e RTS signal RS 422 enables PeerWay Tap transmitter e Local Loop Back Signal RS 422 enables online relay e Status RS 422 returns status of the local loop back LLB relay and watchdog timer e Receive signal RS 422 from PeerWay An analog watchdog timer monitors the RTS signal and disables the transmitter if the length of the transmission exceeds 67 milliseconds A backup watchdog timer on the PeerWay Tap has the same function Signals are isolated from chassis ground by special isolated voltages and optical isolators on the PeerWay Interface TIL 155 OPTOs handle DC signals RTS LLB and STATUS and high speed 6N137s OPTOs manage the transmit and receive signals All signals are transmitted in RS 422 format a differential signal transmission at TTL voltage levels The two output lines of the transmitter are driven 180 degrees out of phase and a voltage comparator at the receive end changes the signal back to a single TTL line Two 3 terminal voltage regulators are included to regulate the 9 V from the Power Regulator card down to 5 V The 5 volt sources supply voltage to the A and B PeerWay isolated circuits Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 17
386. s 1 4 10 RS3 Power Contents SV vi RS3 Power Contents SV 1 1 1 Section 1 AC Input This section describes the AC power distribution system AC Entrance Panel The AC Entrance Panel 10P5662000x and 1984 0303 000x supplies AC power to the DC power supplies and distributes AC power to the fans in the cabinets The AC entrance panel is designed as a single or dual feed entrance to use with one or two AC input power sources NOTE The System Power Supply Unit does not require an AC entrance panel Table 1 1 1 shows the AC input wire connections Figure 1 1 1 shows a functional diagram for the AC distribution system through the AC entrance panel Table 1 1 1 AC Input Wiring 115 VAC Wiring 230 VAC Wiring CAUTION N If the caution symbol shown on the left is present on the cabinet door near the handle then multiple mains supply circuits are located within the cabinet Disconnect all mains supplies prior to servicing CAUTION Use supply wires suitable for 115 C above surrounding ambient if input current exceeds 20 amperes RS3 Power AC Input SV 1 1 2 Output Lamp a Input Lamp e pe o lt AC Line Primary AC aA l Filter e po e lt 0 5A i F1 Alarm i F2 oe Contacts 1 i AB gt lt lt gt rl an AC Lines to C AC D
387. s DC output block PS1 RIGHT 26 VDC OUTPUT 26 VDC OUTPUT Alarm connections 0009090 2959 SS v 0 N alarm interlocks Figure 1 3 9 Alarm Connections ALARM INTL Alarm connection detail Note The connections marked INTL are for RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 12 To cause either power supply module relay to function as a combined alarms relay connect any number of external alarm contacts that are closed during normal equipment operation in series and wire them across the interlock terminal connection of the power supply module Refer to Figure 1 3 10 for an example Internal to Power Supply External to Power Supply INTL Ext Alm 1 Ext Alm 2 Connection made with no external alarms To Alarm Contacts Power Circuits Alarm Relay Contacts Figure 1 3 10 Alarm Connection Example If the interlock connections of an installed power supply module are not connected to external alarm contacts jumper the connections to enable the power supply module alarm relay to operate properly To use only one combined alarm for a cabinet wire the output alarm contacts for one power supply module into the interlock circuit of the other power supply module Alarm relay contacts are rated to 250 VAC Use wiring with insulation rated at least 300 Volts or twice the wo
388. s Coaxial La Lt 4942 A OL JL JL jb JL JL JL J491 J492 J493 J495 J496 J497 O D ed i Pa DS2 DS3 DS1 JE J408 J409 me a 3414 l 6 J410 Q n d M amp 1984 3267 Configuror Keyboard Trackball Cable oid Keyboard Remote Keylock Operator Keyboard Figure 3 1 8 Typical 1984 3222 1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface Connections Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 21 NOTE When this card replaces 1984 2889 0004 a 1984 3297 xxxx Cable Keyboard Interface to Keyswitch Cable Assembly is required The adaptor cable plugs into J415 to replace the short cable soldered onto the 2889 The original 1984 3067 xxxx cable with keylock is plugged into the adaptor cable as shown in Figure 3 1 9 Keyswitch J408 J409 J411 J410 Configuror Keyboard Figure 3 1 9 Typical 1984 3222 1004 Replacing 1984 2889 1004 A 1984 3297 xxxx Adaptor Cable and 1984 3067 xxxx Remote Keylock Cable Trackball Keyboard Operator Keyboard Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and Sys
389. s are in the HOLD position RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 12 1 al TR Fiber Optic Tap B Fiber Optic Tap A Optical Tap m 1 Optical Tap Electrical Tap X Electrical Tap X Ground Ground Mounting Plate CAUTION Do not turn the tap box over if the fiber optic cables are attached Back side of Tap A NOTE Set the jumpers in Tap A and Tap B the same way Figure 2 2 11 Grounding the Optical Tap Box RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 13 Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories Each fiber optic cable has two separate fibers One fiber is used to transmit data and one fiber is used to receive data Fiber optic cables are used in pairs called A and B The A cable should be color coded green and the B cable should be color coded blue The cable connectors can be marked with a felt tip marker Corresponding A and B tap boxes are marked with green and blue labels The fiber optic cable is terminated with ST connectors that have less than 0 7 dB loss per connector See the Site Preparation and Installation Manual SP for procedures to install fiber optic connectors WARNING Use care when handling optical cables The ends are subject to damage from chipping dus
390. s for a Binary Coded Decimal BCD weighted input to the processor There are 32 different keys that can be used with the switch Loop 1 Loop Alarm through LED Latches Loop 32 Typical WX yp 32 Momentary Pushbuttons for Callup Panel Strobe Latch Driver 12 Momentary Pushbuttons for Loop Control Microprocessor Driven Operator Keyboard Strobe Sense Buffers Bus Buffers To MC Processors Figure 3 3 3 MiniConsole Front Panel Keyboard Functional Diagram RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 6 MiniConsole Power Regulator Card The Power Regulator card 1984 1137 000x or 1984 1017 000x is described in Section 5 of this Chapter MiniConsole PeerWay Interface Card The PeerWay Interface card 1984 1045 000x is described in Section 5 of this Chapter MiniConsole Ol Processor Card The OI Operator Interface Processor card 1984 2137 000x 1984 2122 000x 1984 2120 000x 1984 2107 000x or 1984 1061 000x is described in Section 5 of this Chapter RS3 Consoles MiniConsole SV 3 3 7 Monochrome Video Generator The Monochrome Video Generator 1984 1002 000x is used in the MiniConsole to generate the signals necessary to drive the 9 inch monochrome CRT It is marked MC VIDEO GENERATOR on the printed wiring assembly PWA Figure 3 3 4 shows the functional diagram of a Monochrome V
391. s line and provides for software differentiation between the two generations of Ol Bubble Memory boards The Write Latch is used for bubble memory testing The LED Latch drives the status LEDs OI Card Cage Ol Bubble Memory LEDs SV 3 7 65 29999999Q RS3 Consoles Figure 3 7 40 shows the LEDs on the OI Bubble NV Memory DS1 No faults are detected on the card DS1 lights when the card Green has passed power up diagnostics IP R 4 DS Red A fault has been detected on the card DS2 lights when the card has failed power up diagnostics DS6 Yellow TXD for RS 422 channel DS7 Yellow RXD for RS 422 channel DS8 Yellow CTS for RS 422 channel DS9 Yellow RXD for RS 232 channel DS10 Yellow CTS for RS 232 channel DS11 Yellow TXD for RS 232 channel DS12 Yellow Status LED 1 Operation Program Access Power up Test Low order bit of test number DS13 Yellow Status LED 2 Operation Writing to the Bubble Power up Test Middle bit of test number DS14 Yellow Status LED 3 Operation Reading from the Bubble Power up Test High order bit of test number Figure 3 7 40 OI Bubble NV Memory LEDs OI Card Cage SV 3 7 66 Ol Bubble Memory LED Sequences RS3 Consoles In normal operation the green LED DS1 is ON DS6 through DS8 flash for RS 422 communications DS9 thro
392. s set on the O I SCSI Host Adapter board 1984 1140 000x DC power for the tape drive comes from P981 P956 on a Pedestal Console This is the SCSI master O l card cage DC power cable The Scorpion 5945C SCSI board is powered from P982 P955 on a Pedestal Console NOTE Be sure that pin 1 of the SCSI cable matches pin 1 of the tape drive connector RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 25 Magnetic Tape Drive Jumper and Switches Tandberg 5623 or 9245 Tape Drive The 10P5685000x magnetic tape drive has a configuration jumper block The jumpers must be set as indicated in Figure 3 5 12 OUT IN PARITY 2 1 0 TERMPWR Figure 3 5 12 Tandberg 5623 or 9245 10P5685000x Configuration Jumpers Viper 2150S and 2060S Tape Drive The 1984 3389 000x and 1984 3289 000x Magnetic Tape Drives have a configuration jumper block The jumpers must be set as indicated in Figure 3 5 13 BUFFER DISCONNECT V SERIAL ers s SIZE 16K t DIAGNOSTIC m CF1 eje ID1 ole mme 018 PARITY ENABLE CFO ele DO HE nr OPERATION BUFFER SCSI BL MODE DISCONNECT iD SIZE 16K Figure 3 5 13 Viper 2150S 1984 3389 000x and 2060S Tape Drive 1984 3289 000x Jumper Block Scorpion 5945S Tape Drive The 1984 1989 000x Magnetic Tape Drive has no exposed jumpers or switches A dip switch located behin
393. set to the processor should the processor hang LEDs are driven on the card by a latch to indicate card status The OI Processor 68020 has 128K bytes of EPROM memory that is used to store the boot program the power up diagnostics the PeerWay Boot program and a debugging program The Bus Controller ASIC generates the control signals for the external cache memory the Fast Static RAM memory and the 68000 motherboard interface The Bus Controller ASIC also generates the signals that are used by the processor to determine external bus size and transfer status of the current bus cycle The RAM Controller ASIC generates all control signals for the EDAC error detection and correction circuitry and the dynamic RAM memory and it multiplexes the addresses for the dynamic RAM memory The dynamic RAM memory array is 1 megabyte by 32 bits or 4 megabytes The Ol Processor Card 68020 uses 1 megabit by 1 bit dynamic RAM devices The memory array requires a total of 39 parts 32 parts for data and 7 parts for the check bits used in the EDAC The error detection and correction EDAC circuitry contains a 32 bit EDAC The EDAC generates a 7 bit check word from a 32 bit data word to detect and correct all signal bit errors in the dynamic RAM memory Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 32 In addition to the internal cache memory on the 68020 processor there is a 16K byte external cache memory and a 112K byte Fast Static RAM memory The Fast Static RAM contains
394. solate failures and prevent the failures from affecting the other cards Redundant PeerWay Buffer cards each have their own bus The dedicated Coordinator Processor bus is a 32 bit parallel bus that allows data transfer between redundant Coordinator Processor cards There are two rows of connectors across the backplane of the motherboard an upper and a lower The upper row is used by the MultiPurpose Controller Each Controller slot has a corresponding connector that allows connection to the Analog Card Cages and or FlexTerms The lower row is used by MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controllers for the 1 to 5 V input signals and the 5 to 2 5 V feedback signals from MultiLoop FlexTerms Table 4 1 1 shows the parts replacement matrix Table 4 1 1 Parts Replacement for the ControlFile Card Cage Provides EMC compliance when used with MPC II 10P50400006 or MPC5 10P57520007 1984 3048 000x 10P5296000x 1984 0023 000x 1984 3048 000x 1984 0023 000x Has integral blower assembly ControlFile Card Cage SV 4 1 3 ControlFile Jumpers RS3 ControlFiles Two groups of jumpers on the ControlFile indicate its node number address The jumpers must be set to the same address If they differ the lowest node address will be used and a PeerWay Jumpers Bad alarm message will be issued Figure 4 1 2 shows the jumper locations The jumpers are on the back solder side of some motherboards and on the front connector side of
395. sole Printer Interface 0 0 c ccc eet teens 3 3 11 MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive ssessssese I 3 3 11 MiniConsole Floppy Interface SCSI ssiusesesesseserresesesreh 3 3 12 MiniConsole Floppy Interface SCSI LEDs uuueseeususe 3 3 13 Floppy Disk Power Supply ocooooccccoccccc mI Ie 3 3 14 Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses 0 0 0c cee eee eee eee eee 3 3 16 Remote MiniConsole Power Supply 000 0 cece eee e eee eee 3 3 16 Section 4 RS3 Operator Station 0 22 3 4 1 RS3 Operator Workstation iissssssssesssseesse eh 3 4 2 ROS CRITS tuci n tad don ete teu ede bead vehi 3 4 3 ROS CRT Hitachi HM 4721 D sssaaa 3 4 3 ROS CRT liyama Vision Master 000 eee eee eee 3 4 3 ROS Operator Keyboard oooccccccccccc ene 3 4 4 ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board 10P56910001 3 4 6 ROS Operator Keyboard Connections 00 ccc cece eens 3 4 7 Ethernet Cable see Roc XOU X OU ala ene 3 4 8 RS3 Network Interface RNI ssssesssssseeee nh 3 4 9 Ethernet El DS gt 4 estate oan cig A ae ee igs 3 4 11 TP 8 H b c eR e e Rede o Medea Dales deed 3 4 11 FMS Il H bs ii eu ne pee eder depu ee 3 4 12 Hub Accessories io eR ERR Rr RR ROC RR Y RENE 3 4 13 FMS Il Network Management Module 000 cece eee 3 4 13 Transceiver Interface Modules cece eee eee 3 4 14 Hub Specifications 0 cece
396. ss SETUP The display shows SET UP MODE and then FUNCTION STYLE 2 Press ITEM to enter the style level 3 Press SELECT to display each of the items listed in Table 3 6 7 When the correct item is displayed press ITEM to enter it in memory Table 3 6 7 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup EMULATE CHR SET DPL24C SET 2 USA PAGE LG TOP MRG DC3 CDE 11 0 IN 1 LINE ENABLE GRPH LF jm GAN AUTO CR LFT END 1 COLM FONT COUR10 PPR OUT DETECT COLOR AUTOSEL indicates a factory setting LANGUAGE 4 Press FUNCTION until FUNCTION INTERFACE is displayed Press ITEM to enter the function level RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 12 5 Press SELECT to display each of the items listed in Table 3 6 8 When the correct item is displayed press ITEM to enter it in memory Table 3 6 8 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup TYPE SERIAL PROTOCL XON XOFF WORD LG 8 BIT DUPLEX FULL FORMAT 8NONE 1 CONTROL 3 WIRE 6 Press FUNCTION until FUNCTION SAVE is displayed Press ITEM to have the printer save the selected options in nonvolatile memory 7 Press ONLINE to resume normal operation RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 13 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Self Test During the printer self test the following items are printed e The current setups e The firmware revision level e A series of complete character sets in alternating colors at the maximum paper width I To init
397. ssors SV 4 3 34 Block Evaluation DS8 CP Access DS7 Interrupt DS6 5 V Fuse Blown DS3 Card Fault DS2 Card Enable DS1 RS3 ControlFiles LEDs The microprocessor is evaluating an input or output block With redundant Contact Processors this LED indicates which card is active The Coordinator Processor is accessing the Contact Processor s RAM memory and transferring configuration and dynamic data to the NV Memory If the Contact Processor loses memory current data is quickly reloaded from NV Memory The Contact Processor is resetting its watchdog timer to prevent timing out or to acknowledge the synchronizing clock pulse Replace Fuse F4 Supplies 5 VDC to the Contact Processor A fault has been detected on the Contact Processor or the ENABLE DISABLE Switch is in the DISABLE position If the switch is enabled and this LED is on replace the Contact Processor The ENABLE DISABLE Switch is enabled and no hardware faults are detected on the Contact Processor ENABLE DISABLE Switch Test Points Figure 4 3 13 MPC CC MUX and PLC Controller Processor LEDs and Test Points Controller Processors SV 4 3 35 MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs Figure 4 3 14 shows LEDs Enable Disable switch and test points for the MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor cards la 12 V Fuse Blown i LEDs Replace Fuse F1 supplies 12 VDC to the card
398. standard keyboard cable Interface Cable 10P56700015 Keyboard and Standard Cable P262 9 Pin D sub Connector I Il Connects to serial port of interface card on back of PC P261 8 Pin Connector Connects interface cable to standard keyboard cable Figure 3 4 5 ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Connection RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 8 Ethernet Cable RS3 Consoles The RS3 process network uses 10BaseT cable 10BaseT cable uses two pairs of 0 14 0 34 mm 22 26 AWG wires one pair to transmit and one to receive data signals The wires in each pair are twisted together along the length of the cable This allows segment lengths of up to 100 meters 328 feet There are two additional pairs of wires in the cable that can be used for telephone or other use The cable has an 8 pin RJ 45 connector at each end e Category 5 cable in plenum grades must be used e Cables must be routed away from power lines or other sources of interference NOTE For CE compliant applications shielded 10BaseT cable is required Stranded wire cable is suitable only for short runs where flexibility is required Cable is available with color coded jackets with or without connectors Standard cable for use with a hub has the connection wired straight through Crossed cable is available with the transmit and receive cables crossed over for null modem connections Crosso
399. su DL3800 Printer Set Up 0 0 eee 3 6 2 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Self Test ooooooccccccccccco ee 3 6 5 Fujitsu DL4600 Printer 0 eects 3 6 6 Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Set Up 2 0 2 eee 3 6 6 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer 0 eee III 3 6 9 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Error Messages 0 cee eee eee eee 3 6 9 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Handling eee eee eee eee 3 6 10 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Set Up 2 0 0 eee 3 6 11 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Self Test 0 0 e cece eee eee 3 6 13 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Functional Test 0 cece eee 3 6 14 Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Operation 0 ccc eee eee eee ee 3 6 15 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer 0 00 ccc teens 3 6 16 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings 0 cee 3 6 16 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Self Test ooooocccccccccccor ee 3 6 17 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Vertical Alignment 00 cece 3 6 17 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Error Signals 0 0 c cece eee eee 3 6 18 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Paper Handling 2 cece ee eee eee 3 6 18 TES810 Prnter tees ea di hacia at 3 6 20 TI 810 Printer Jumpers and Switches 00 cece eee eee 3 6 20 TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks 00 c cece eee 3 6 21 TI 810 Printer Modification for 30 5 Cm Paper 00 eee eee 3 6 22 TI 810 Printer Modification for Lowercase Printing sss 3 6 23 TI 81
400. supplies bad RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage SV 3 7 78 OI NV RAM Jumpers Figure 3 7 46 shows the location of the jumpers on the Ol NV RAM card Table 3 7 29 lists jumper values o PEERWAY BOOT BD ADDR PAY DECODE NORM a 2NDARY HD5 PRIMARY HD19 RTC PWR BATT amp PS PSONLY NVM SIZE HD3 Al 512 KB HD13 12 11 9 8 Hb Battery 1 RS 232 Modem Terminal ON OFF Remove for loopback test HD1 2 Battery ON OFF M aA Battery 2 HD20 HD20 21 RS 422 Synchronous MI A Modem Terminal T Note Reversal Jrurur vr fo 7 HD7 10 HD15 16 17 18 RS 232 RS 422 Run Normal Loopback Test Loopback Test Run Normal Figure 3 7 46 OI NV RAM Memory Jumpers Battery Jumpers Set battery jumpers HD1 and HD2 to OFF when RAM battery is not needed Jumper HD3 RTCPWAR selects battery backup for the Real Time Clock This jumper is hardwired Modem or Terminal Jumpers Jumpers HD8 9 11 12 and 13 select RS 232 operation as either a Modem M or a Terminal T Set them all to the same value NOTE Remove jumpers HD8 9 11 12 and 13 for the RS 232 local loopback test Be sure to replace them correctly when the test is completed RS3 Consoles OI Card Cage RS3 Consoles SV 3 7 79 Jumpers HD20 and HD21 select RS 422 operation as either a M
401. supply module and power supply housing System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 21 Removing a Power Supply from a Housing Individual power supply modules can be removed from a housing while the housing is installed in a cabinet or after the housing has been removed from a cabinet To remove a power supply module from the housing 1 Make sure the AC power switch on the front of the power supply module is in the off O position 2 Using a screwdriver turn the locking screw clockwise until the locking pawl rotates to the horizontal position 3 Using the handle on the front of the power supply module pull the power supply module out of the housing Specifications Table 1 3 1 contains the specifications for the System Power Supply Unit Table 1 3 1 System Power Supply Unit Specification Item Specification 85 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz single phase line to neutral Internally fused Input Voltage Undervoltage protected Input power indicators Output Voltage 26 00 1 00 VDC isolated from chassis internal OR ing diodes Output Power 1200 watts 46 amperes 26 VDC at 60 C 140 F Auxiliary Output Terminal blocks and circuit breakers for auxiliary AC output Leakage Current 3 5 mA maximum at 240 VAC 60 Hz input Inrush Soft start 50 A peak maximum for one cycle or less at 240 VAC Power Factor 0 98 minimum at full load meets EN 60555 2 harmonics limit Emissions EN 50081 2 Im
402. t and dirt The cable may be damaged if it is bent at too small a radius Installing Fiber Optic Connectors A kit 1984 1189 0001 is available for splicing fiber optic cables Refer to the instructions received with the kit for installing the fiber optic connector Figure 2 2 12 shows the connector components Straight Coupling Plastic Cap Straight In Line Plug Key Way Key Figure 2 2 12 Fiber Optic Connector RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 2 14 RS3 PeerWay Optical PeerWay SV 2 3 1 Section 3 Hybrid PeerWay A hybrid PeerWay has electrical twinax segments and fiber optic segments The PeerWay Extender PX allows creation of a hybrid PeerWay with both twinax and fiber optic segments The PX transfers information between the twinax and the fiber optic segments and acts as a regenerative repeater It also provides two standard PeerWay drops which directly connect to the twinax segment The PX is designed to be fully compatible with both twinax PeerWay products and fiber optic PeerWay products A pair of Highway Interface Adapters HIA can be used to allow communications between a twinax and a fiber optic PeerWay but the two PeerWays each retain their individual set of node numbers Figure 2 3 1 shows insertion of a fiber optic link in a twinax PeerWay The PXs are shown at the physical end of the twinax segments Actually they can be located
403. t and a hardware reset The microprocessor has approximately 67 milliseconds to respond to the watchdog low level interrupt before the watchdog issues a reset signal to the microprocessor LEDs are driven on the card by a software latch to indicate good bad and card status The Programmable Array Logic chips PAL provide address decoding for all individual circuits on the card The card contains the dynamic RAM and the Error Detection and Correction EDAC control circuitry The Dynamic Memory Controller does the required address multiplexing for the RAM chips and handles the refresh cycle The dynamic RAM chips have separate pins for the read and write functions A separate Read Write select function provides the separation and data bus buffering The EDAC Controller decodes the check bits that are stored along with the data bits A 22 bit word is stored in dynamic RAM with 16 data bits and six check bits If any single bit error is indicated by the EDAC check bits the EDAC controller will automatically correct the error and rewrite the data into the dynamic RAM location If any multiple bit errors are found the EDAC will trigger a bus error which causes the board to reset and indicate problems to the operator One pair of EPROMs provides a program for power up diagnostics They contain information necessary for downloading the operating program from a disk or tape OI Card Cage SV 3 7 36 The first 20 pins in each card slot are
404. t be connected properly AA E A teet C e e NE Nor E o oooO tt te Hard Disk Drive Power SCSI Controller Power Figure 3 5 5 1984 1928 000x 40 Meg Hard Drive Jumpers RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 16 Floppy Disk Drive Two sizes of floppy disk drives are used e 3 5 inch disk for Multitube Command Console e 5 25 inch disk for MiniConsole 3 5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive The 3 5 inch Floppy Disk Drive 1984 2837 000x is used with the Multitube Command Console The assembly includes the drive and a SCSI controller board The SCSI address of the drive is fixed as is the position of the drive on the SCSI bus Therefore there is no requirement for address changes or terminators The switch on the left side of the drive must be placed in the position nearest to the rear end of the drive unit There are two factory set switches on the SCSI board assembly These must be set as indicated in Table 3 5 17 and Table 3 5 18 Table 3 5 17 1984 2837 000x 8 Bit Switch Setting RS3 Consoles Disk and Tape Drives SV 3 5 17 Table 3 5 18 1984 2837 000x 4 Bit Switch Setting The switch settings are shown in Figure 3 5 6 This drive is always used at the same address and position on the SCSI bus Thus there is no requirement for changing the drive address or bus termination DC Power Connector SCSI Bus Cable Connector 8 Bit Switch Red trace on cable goes here Pin 1 4 Bit Switch
405. tated replacement part as designated in the user documentation Any part of a device that is not listed as a replacement part is not to be replaced in the field but must be returned to the factory for repair Changes for This Release RS3 Service Manual e Numerous corrections and minor revisions have been made throughout the manual e Information on the RS3 Millennium Package RMP the System Power Supply Unit and the MPC5 Controller Processor with 4 Meg NV Memory has been incorporated into the manual Information of the MAI16 and Loop Power Module has also been incorporated About This Manual SV vi Revision Level for This Manual RS3 Service Manual releases are independent of software releases New equipment and information is added to the Service Manual in each release and older material is updated You should always use the latest version of the Service Manual For This Refer to This Document Software Version Part Number NOTE The x in the part number is O for US size 8 1 2 x 11 inches or 1 for A 4 size References to Other Manuals References to other RS3 user manuals list the manual chapter and sometimes the section as shown below Sample Entries For see CC 3 For see CC 1 1 Manual Title Chapter Manual Title Chapter Section Abbreviations of Manual Titles AL Alarm Messages BA ABC Batch CB ControlBlock Configuration CC Console Configuration DT Disk
406. ted pair connections RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station Hub Accessories SV 3 4 13 LinkBuilder FMS II hubs are equipped with a number of simple to use features that help safeguard the network against security breaches As part of the 3Com patented LAN Security Architecture these security features come standard with the hubs e Need To Know Protects sensitive data on the network by checking destination addresses on each packet and sending readable packets only to authorized nodes e Disconnect Unauthorized Device If an unauthorized device attempts to log on the hub automatically records and or disables it and logs the event at the management station e Audit Log Automatically tracks changes involving users and devices on the network giving the manager a complete record e Multiple User Levels ensure that only authorized users have access to critical network functions Passwords can be used to identify network managers RMON support comes standard with FMS II hubs and allows industry standard tracking storing and analysis of network traffic as well as powerful diagnostic capabilities The RMON agent reduces the SNMP traffic over LAN and Wide Area network WAN connections and improves response time on the SNMP workstation and reduces costs SmartAgents enhance RMON by adding autocalibration of thresholds actions and events Accessories for the FMS II hub family allow addition of network management and additional c
407. tem Manager Station SV 3 1 22 1984 2889 1004 Keyboard Interface 1984 2889 1004 provides the remote keyswitch function with the aid of a short cable soldered into the J411 keyswitch position A 1984 3067 xxxx Cable Keyboard Interface to Remote Keylock is plugged into the socket on the short cable Figure 3 1 10 shows this use RS 422 Video Input Isolated Video lsolated Video Keyboard RGB Cables Output Output Keyboard Communications Coaxial RGB Cable RGB Cables Power Cable Cable Ground Twisted Pairs Coaxial Wire 3942 av OL JL IL Ji s Jl NL J491 J492 J493 J495 J496 J497 HD2 pe ss F1 Pa P Cable soldered DS3 DS1 DS2 to J411 position J408 J409 0 rd b Configuror Keyboard Figure 3 1 10 Typical 1984 2889 1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface Connections x 1984 3067 xxxx Cable and Remote Keylock Trackball Keyboard Operator Keyboard Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 23 Keyboard Interface Access 1 To access the Keyboard Interface card 1 A portion of the connection cabling is typically routed through the legs of the Multitube Command Console table To access the interior of the table legs you must remove t
408. terface to CRT coaxial cable 1984 1691 0003 is approximately 1 meter 39 in long Do not use a longer cable between the KVI and the CRT Use Keyboard Video Interface 10P50840004 or 2004 Use keyboards trackball printer and CRT bearing the CE mark and install them in a control room environment 5 Power the cage from a CE approved power supply such as the system DC bus or a MARK Remote Power Supply 10P5409000x 6 The door at the front of the Ol Card Cage must be closed for the unit to meet EMC specifications Table 3 7 4 CE Compliant Cables Fan Power Y Cable for use with local power supply Keyboard Video Interface KVI Power Cable RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 13 The filterboard includes both Alarm Panel and Alarm Output Board functions RGB video output is provided by J646 J648 The filterboard provides optical isolation for two sets of alarm contacts that connect to TB1 and TB2 Figure 3 7 8 shows wiring for the alarm circuits The optical isolators are rated for 5 to 40 VDC maximum and up to 1 0 amp The isolators are fused as shown in Table 3 7 1 DC Power Supply ji eue External Enunciator Alarm Relay 1 TB1 Output 1 TB2 Output 2 External Enunciator Alarm Relay 2 Figure 3 7 8 Alarm Circuit Wiring CAUTION Do not power the alarm circuit with AC Use of AC and AC rated optical isolators can result in problems that are very hard to l
409. that are independent of the power supply modules Figure 1 3 11 shows the layout of the AC input and auxiliary output terminal blocks and circuit breakers O O AC Input PS1 Auxiliary i I RIGHT Sano Hom INPUT 1 1 Output 1 a SES Auxiliary AC Circuit so 60 Hz LOT Or Mad Output 1 Breaker O Os OL OFF AuxiLiARY O Ol N AUXILIARY 15AMPS OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 1 i Os O Auxiliary Output 2 Circuit ee los oO Le LEFT AC Input AX OUT 2 PUT p Breaker on uae OnO N INPUT 2 PS2 50 60 Hz O Oll Os OL Ve TES Auxiliary AC OFF AUXILIARY N AUXILIARY Output 2 samps OUTPUT2 O O OUTPUT2 O O Figure 1 3 11 Input and Auxiliary Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers Figure 1 3 12 shows a schematic diagram for one set of AC inputs and auxiliary AC outputs Each housing has two identical circuits one for each power supply module Note that the circuit breakers on the housing control only the auxiliary AC outputs and do not control power to the power supply modules Use wire with insulation rated for a minimum of twice the rated mains supply voltage that feeds the auxiliary circuit RS3 Power System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 16 To Power Supply Note Each Housing Contains Two Circuits Auxiliary AC Circuit Terminal Block Breaker L N AC Input i L Auxiliary N AC as Ou
410. that the printed output is in color that all characters are visible and that the paper advanced one page 1 To operate the printer from a MiniConsole 1 Select the main menu screen by typing M M ENTER Press PRINT 2 Press PRINT The printer should print the main menu screen 3 Verify that the printout has all characters visible and that the paper advanced one page RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 16 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer The Fujitsu DPL24C color printer 1984 0510 000x has graphics resolution of 001 x 001 inch with an 8 bit image mode It prints at 240 characters per second cps draft quality and 80 cps letter quality Character spacing is 10 characters per inch 136 characters per line Line spacing is 6 lines per inch See the Fujitsu DPL24C User Manual 1984 0510 0022 for user details See the Fujitsu DPL24C Maintenance Manual 1984 0510 0021 for hardware details Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings The printer should be set to operate at 4800 Baud and 6 lines per inch Table 3 6 9 shows the settings of the dip switches on the Printer Control Panel Don t care indicates switches that can be in either position Table 3 6 9 Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings Don t Don t care RA 3 The Form Length switches should be set to 66 for 27 9 cm U S 11 inch paper and to 72 for 30 5 cm 12 inch paper NOTE New switch settings will take effect after printer power
411. the primary card goes out of service The backup card takes over processing at which time the primary card can be removed NOTE Before removing the primary CP card first disable the Nonvolatile Memory card and the secondary CP card For more information on removing and installing cards see SV 9 1 If the switch is disabled on a redundant backup the backup ceases to perform background tests and tells the Coordinator Processor that it is out of service It can return to backup status after it passes power up diagnostic tests and data is downloaded from the NV Memory If the switch is disabled on a primary card with no backup present all communication between this Controller Processor and the Coordinator Processor halts Any links from this Controller Processor to another Controller Processor will not be serviced Processing resumes when the switch is returned to ENABLE but only after the card passes power up diagnostic tests and data is downloaded from the NV Memory Failure on one Controller Processor does not affect other Controller Processors or PeerWay communications Controller Processors SV 4 3 37 Controller Processor Jumpers Each Controller Processor has jumpers to determine hardware and software functions Most jumpers are hardwired and should not be adjusted Other jumpers can be adjusted NOTE MPCII and MPC5 jumpers differ from those used on the other Controller Processor cards See pages 4 3 15 through 4 3 14
412. then printed 7 Set MENU to the options shown in Table 3 6 2 RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 4 Table 3 6 2 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer MENU1 and MENU2 Options en onton m emm wee ww l 8 Press ONLINE to return to the lt lt FUNCTION gt gt menu Press LOCK to position the cursor at MENU2 Press FONT to select MENUA Set the options in MENU2 as shown in Table 3 6 2 9 Press ONLINE to return to the lt lt FUNCTION gt gt menu Press LOCK to position the cursor at HARDWARE and press FONT to select it Set the options in the HARDWARE menu as shown in Table 3 6 3 RS3 Consoles Printers SV 3 6 5 Table 3 6 3 Fujitsu DL3800 Printer HARDWARE Menu Options PPR OUT CNTONLY INTRFCE SERIAL PRT DIR BI DIR FORMAT 8NONE1 WORD LG 8 BIT PROTOCL XON XOFF 8KBYTE BUFFER NOTE Do not use a DSR IGNORE buffer size larger than 8 kilobytes FEEDER REAR DUPLEX FULL 10 Press ONLINE to return to the lt lt FUNCTION gt gt menu Press LOCK to position the cursor at SAVE amp END and press LOCK to select it The configuration will be saved in memory The printer will be in ONLINE mode ready for use 11 The printout serves as a record of the configuration Selected options have full underlines Options that were changed have a partial underline at the original value Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Self Test RS3 Consoles The self test operation prints test pages containing the printer firmware version numbe
413. tical See the LED description later in this section RS3 ControlFiles The jumpers of all Controller Processor cards except MPCII are essentially identical See the jumper description later in this section Controller Processors SV 4 3 27 SSC Fuses Figure 4 3 10 shows SSC fuse locations Table 4 3 10 gives fuse data Figure 4 3 10 SSC Fuse Locations Table 4 3 10 SSC Fuses 1984 1371 000x G09140 0016 AGC 1 2 312 500 1 2 A 250 V Quick Acting F2 G09140 0041 MTH 5 312005 5 A 250V Regular 1984 1442 000x RS3 ControlFiles Controller Processors SV 4 3 28 CC Contact Controller Processor RS3 ControlFiles The Contact Controller Processor CC is superseded by the MultiPurpose MPC Controller Processor 1984 2500 000x There are two CC models e 1984 1445 000x marked CONTACT I O PROCESSOR on the PWA e 1984 1374 000x marked CONTACT PROCESSOR on the PWA Table 4 3 11 shows parts replacement data Table 4 3 11 Contact Controller Processor Parts Replacement Characteristics 1984 2500 000x 1984 1445 000x CONTACT PROCESSOR 1984 2500 000x 1984 1374 000x CONTACT I O PROCESSOR The Contact Controller Processor has no analog circuitry but it does have eight RS 422 communications ports communicating to two contact FICs in parallel The Contact Processor can control two Contact FlexTerms thus having a total of 96 contact modules with eight Contact FICs on each C
414. tion Control e DMA Controller e 8Kx8 Communication Static RAM buffer e Serial Communication Controller e Battery Backed Static RAM e Real Time Clock e Diagnostic Latches Figure 3 7 42 is a block diagram of the OI NV RAM OI Card Cage SV 3 7 70 From Mother To From Mother Board From Mother Board To From Mother Board Address Buffers Address Decodes Address Decode Bus Arbitration Control Data Buffers and Latch NVM Address Buffers NVM Data Buffers RS3 Consoles Synch Address Bus Synch Data Bus Power Monitoring Circuit NVM Address Bus NVM Data Bus 16 bits Figure 3 7 42 Ol NV RAM Memory Block Diagram DMA Controller RS 422 Serial Interface Communication Controller _ i RS 422 Interface Memory 8K x 8 Static RAM LED Latch Write Latch Real Time Clock Read le Latch Battery Backed Static RAM 256KB or 512KB Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 71 Bus Arbitration Control Most addresses are the same for the bubble and RAM cards The OI processor senses the type of nonvolatile memory in use and adjusts addresses as required Bus Arbitration Control arb
415. tion of the card The other portion of the card may be used for another device NOTE The Pxxx tags on the cable will not match the Jxxx tags on the DC Output card A B DC Distribution Power Cable B Bia Ne EE gt ie E oe S To Device Power A Connectors A amp B l i EE B Orange Ps U S Orange Black Sse Figure 1 4 5 Non redundant DC Power Cable DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 8 Redundant DC Power Distribution Cabling When using bus A B DC Power Distribution Cable with a redundant DC power system attach it to the DC Output card as shown in Figure 1 4 6 This applies to all devices in which a single power cable can carry the load NOTE The fuses in the sides of the output card of buses A and B must be identical E Brown U SS MS S lt a zm RH A e To Device i a Power lt i ao Connector 4 B E Pe TR U GEGEN S ds Ma Orange Black B Figure 1 4 6 Redundant DC Power Cable NOTE The Pxxx tags on the cable will not all match the Jxxx tags on the DC Output card See Table 1 4 2 Table 1 4 2 Power Cable Plugs and Jacks P233 4 J234 P235 6 J236 P237 8 J237 P239 40 J240 RS3 Power DC Power Distribution SV 1 4 9 Bus A DC Power Distribution Cable 1984 0158 00xx and bus B DC Power Distribution Cable
416. tionality with an MPCII image or vice versa may result in operating problems When MPC functionality is selected HD2 set to 2 3 the clock runs at the MPCI card speed of 12 MHz When MPCII functionality is selected HD2 set to 1 2 the clock runs at the MPCII card speed of 16 MHz Image Select HD6 HD8 These jumpers select one of the images shown on the label under Processor Type Six images are listed for MPC functionality and four for MPCII functionality The actual image loaded depends on the system configuration CAUTION Selecting an MPCI image with HD2 set for MPCII functionality or the reverse may result in operating problems MPC2 Image Functionality HD4 HD5 HD9 These jumpers are read by an MPCII image to select one of the three MPCII functions Normally a combination of Image Select and MPC2 Image Functionality jumpers will be specified for MPCII operation The ControlFile Status screen has a three digit Jumper Code field that shows the placement of all jumpers except the Communication Rate jumpers HD21 HD24 This code is shown when using an MPCII image Jumper position 1 2 is 1 and 2 3 is 0 The first digit reports the position of HD2 The second digit reports the positions of HD6 HD7 and HD8 as an octal number 0 7 with HD6 as the high order bit The third digit reports on HD4 HD5 and HD9 If HD2 is set incorrectly for an MPCII Image the code will start with 0 and be in red Ta
417. tput Figure 1 3 12 Power Supply Housing AC Input and Auxiliary AC Output Schematic Diagram Maintenance Maintenance requirements for the System Power Supply Unit are described in the following subsections General Maintenance Each power supply module has test points for monitoring the current output The test point voltages serve as an indicator and are not an absolute measure of a power supply module s output Replacing a Cooling Fan The only regular maintenance required for the System Power Supply Unit is replacing the cooling fans on the power supply modules The recommended maintenance interval for replacing the fan is 3 5 years 42 months For fan replacement you will need a replacement fan kit 12P0239X012 RS3 Power System Power Supply Units RS3 Power Fan power connector SV 1 3 17 CAUTION Fan replacement at recommended intervals is necessary because a fan failure causes the power supply module to shut down which may cause critical control equipment to lose power To replace a cooling fan See Figure 1 3 13 1 Remove the power supply module from the housing to gain access to the plastic rivets that connect the fan to the power supply module See Removing a Power Supply from a Housing Disconnect the fan power connector from the power supply module Using a small screwdriver or other suitable tool pry the pin out of the plastic rivets at each cor
418. ugh DS11 flash for RS 232 communications DS12 through DS14 flash as reads and writes are made to the RAM The boot sequence has the red LED DS2 ON with the three yellow status LEDs DS12 DS13 DS14 flashing At the end of a successful power up test the green LED lights If the power up test fails the red LED stays ON and the failed test will be displayed in the status LEDs as indicated in Table 3 7 25 Note that the status of DS12 is not usually significant Table 3 7 25 Ol Bubble LED Sequences SIBI EEDS Failed Test DS12 13 14 OFF Unable to initialize OFF OFF Write failure ON ON Read failure NE Read or write failure NES Both 30 VDC power supplies bad Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 67 Ol Bubble Memory Jumpers Figure 3 7 41 shows jumper locations on the Ol Bubble Memory card Table 3 7 26 gives jumper values Set the jumper for the Real Time Clock battery HD1 to OFF 2 3 if you remove the card for more than a few hours The Board Address Decode jumper HD19 is used to distinguish between two Ol NV RAM cards inserted in the card cage at the same time You must jumper one as DOWNLOAD the other as NORMAL so data in the NORMAL card may be restored See Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Consoles for the detailed restoration
419. ular 5 V5C G09140 0061 ABC 20 314020 20 A 250 V Regular RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 20 Coordinator Processor CP The Coordinator Processor CP governs communications between Controller Processor cards and between the ControlFile and the PeerWay The Coordinator Processor updates the nonvolatile memory database with current operating data and manages the downloading of program and operating data from nonvolatile memory to individual Controller Processors When redundant Controller Processors are used the Coordinator Processor determines which of the two is active and executes the actual exchange of control from one to another The Coordinator Processor monitors status bits PeerWay protocol and communication with the optional redundant Coordinator Processor The Coordinator Processor is responsible for e Backing up Controller Processors e Loading Controller Processors e Controlling nonvolatile memory e Communications on the PeerWay e Communications between Controller Processors in the ControlFile e Maintaining Links e Running Batch Coordinator Processor models are shown in Table 4 2 10 Table 4 2 10 Coordinator Processors COORDINATOR CP5 10P57360007 Coordinator Processor 5 PROCESSOR 5 EMC compliant COORDINATOR CP IV 10P5087000x Coordinator Processor IV PROCESSOR IV EMC compliant COORDINATOR CP IV 1984 4164 000x Coordinator Processor IV PROCESSOR IV COORDINAT
420. up Because of this cards are not interchangeable and are keyed to prevent incorrect slot insertion Pins 21 through 60 solder and component side are common across the bus They are 30 VA and B 30 V return 5 5 return 12 V 12 V return Isolated 9 V A and B Isolated 9 V return lines Address bus A0 through A15 Data bus DO through D16 Control bus Interrupt 1 through 6 Data Transfer Acknowledge DTACK Upper and Lower Data Strobe Read Write System Clock Reset Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 10 Ol Card Cage 10P52820001 The EMC compliant Ol Card Cage is built in a shielded enclosure with a door in front and a special filterboard 10750450001 at the rear Figure 3 7 7 shows the connectors and fuses on the rear of the Ol Card Cage Table 3 7 3 lists the Ol Card Cage connectors and fuses o Q o RS3 Consoles O 5 TO 40 VDC MAX 1 0 AMP D D DO TE DD 22 m DU ra D D x c su O00 ODD 3 013 L 1 cr 8o E O oe e D KEYBOARD SCSI POWER O RL1 J920 OPTO 1 HARDWARE ALARM PURB PURA 12 Q RL2 OPTO 2 PROCESS RLRRM a C 3908 J907 Q 1 SCSI C3 C Poner J933 O FISHER lt ROSEMOUNT SYSTEMS INC C3 C OI FILTERBOARD POLER PWA 10P50460001 u 8 SWITCH O a REV R y J084 Ex CE n E lO c Co AE EE E J906 15 c 3 9811 O Scsi E Q u J646 E MI E RED E VIDEO O 17 CI Jog2 A T Ojo ae J083 Co 3 O o
421. upply modules can be removed from the power supply housing and replaced without interrupting power to equipment that is redundantly powered You must power up multiple power supply modules connected to the same DC Distribution Bus consecutively all within approximately 2 3 seconds If too much time elapses between the power up of the first and last power supply modules one or more of the modules may go into over current mode until together they are able to supply the load System Power Supply Units SV 1 3 7 Planning The system power supply housing fits on standard 483 mm 19 in EIA rails in front access system cabinet assemblies and occupies three units of vertical rack space Outline dimensions of the housing are shown in Figure 1 3 1 This section provides information on using System Power Supply Units in a typical RS3 system cabinet installation System Cabinet and AC Wiring You will need to provide AC power to the system cabinets from an external circuit breaker panel and wire the power leads to the AC input terminal blocks on the power supply housing Use wire with insulation rated at least twice the working voltage of the circuit Fisher Rosemount Systems recommends that each 1200 watt power supply module be powered from a 30 ampere circuit breaker In no case should a power supply module be powered from a circuit breaker larger than 30 amperes Each power supply housing contains one or two power supply modul
422. use the cursor to move across the screen Table 3 1 8 provides replacement data Table 3 1 8 Joystick Parts Replacement Joystick 1984 3038 000x Itself 1984 2844 000x 1984 2321 000x Joystick Upgrade Kit 1984 3040 000x Replaces the touchpad Trackball 68HC05 Keyboard 10P5285000x Electronics Board 1984 2662 000x Keyboard electronics board 1984 1975 000x CE compliant Trackball 68HC05 Keyboard 1984 2662 000x Electronics Board 10P5285000x 1984 1975 000x Keyboard electronics board Trackball Keyboard 1984 1975 000x 1984 2662 000x Keyboard electronics board Electronics Board Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles RS3 Consoles and System Manager Station SV 3 1 12 Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics The keyboard assemblies use these electronics boards e Keyboard Electronics Board e Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board e Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board Keyboard Electronics Board The Keyboard Electronics board 1984 2871 000x or 1984 1970 000x is used in both the Main Keyboard and the Option Keyboard Both are marked KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS on the PWA They differ in the microprocessor used but they are completely interchangeable Jumpers on the Keyboard Electronics board must be set to indicate whether the board is being used with the Main Keyboard or with Option Keyboard 1 2 or 3 Jumper positions are shown in Table 3 1 9 The jumpers on 1984 1970 000x are conc
423. ussse 4 2 11 ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse 0 eee e eee ee 4 2 12 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC 000 eee eee eee 4 2 13 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points 4 2 16 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Jumpers 4 2 18 ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses 4 2 19 Coordinator Processor CP 000 cc cece eects 4 2 20 CP IV Circuit Description 6 eae 4 2 21 CP I and CP II Circuit Description 0 cece eee 4 2 24 CP Coordinator Processor Redundancy 1 26 sce ee eee ee 4 2 27 CP LEDs Test Points and Enable Disable Switch 4 2 29 CP LED Sequences 0 cece cece eee 4 2 31 CP JUIMPOIS 3 5 adc abia teda 4 2 34 CP IV 1050870004 and 1984 4164 0004 002 00 4 2 34 CP IV 1984 4064 000X 0 0 cece eee 4 2 35 CP 11 1984 1594 000x 0 eee 4 2 36 CP I 1984 1448 0001 or 1984 1240 0001 0002000 4 2 37 GP EUS S inspiro usc SR IEEE UD Ies 4 2 38 NV Nonvolatile Memory ssssssseeem m RH n 4 2 39 HAM NV Memory coso orcos tard al da eek pA iid edd 4 2 41 RAM NV Memory LEDs and Test Points sw ke eee ee 4 2 44 RAM NV Memory LED Sequences 0 0 cece eee eee eee 4 2 46 RAM NV Memory Jumpers teens 4 2 48 RS3 ControlFiles Contents SV ii RAM NV Memory Battery Replacement kee eee ee R
424. ut Adjustment should not be required Attach a voltmeter to the test jack to monitor the output voltage Adjust the voltage 1 Volt with the adjustment potentiometer AU1 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuses Table 1 2 19 shows fuse data for the Remote Power Supply Table 1 2 19 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuse FRSI Wickman Schurter NT 3 15 A 250 V RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 35 10P5701 for Operator Interface Applications This configuration supplies power to Ol card cages located away from the main system DC bus Figure 1 2 17 shows the unit Description Brown Return AC input Black L1 DC output oy 24 v White L2 N Green Ground Figure 1 2 17 10P5701 Power Supply NOTE A cooling fan assembly is required for the cabinet holding the power supply RS3 Power Power Supplies SV 1 2 36 10P5756 for Operator Interface Applications This configuration supplies power to Ol card cages located away from the main system DC bus Figure 1 2 18 shows the unit AC input P850 1 Black L1 P850 2 White L2 N P850 3 Green Ground ern Im 2 DC output cable connector P981 goes to J907 PWRA on the OI Card Cage Figure 1 2 18 10P5756 Power Supply The power supply can be mounted in a Suspended Cabinet 7U a 11U or a 13U enclosure using the power supply mounting bracket which is part of the assembly The bracket attaches to the drive mounting
425. ve sssssssssee me Tandberg 5623 or 9245 10P5685000x Configuration Jumpers Viper 2150S 1984 3389 000x and 2060S Tape Drive 1984 3289 000x Jumper Block 0 00 c cece eee eens Scorpion 5945S Tape Drive 1984 1989 000x Dip Switch Positions Scorpion 5945C Tape Drive 1984 1927 000x Dip Switch Positions Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Control Panel 0 cee e eens TETO Jumper Wire unm Rte dies rect RS Standard Electronics Cabinet Front View ssssuue Standard non EMC Electronics Cabinet Rear View SV vii 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 8 3 3 9 3 3 10 3 3 12 3 3 13 3 3 14 3 3 15 3 3 16 3 4 2 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 7 3 4 9 3 4 10 3 5 4 3 5 11 3 5 12 3 5 14 3 5 15 3 5 17 3 5 19 3 5 20 3 5 21 3 5 22 3 5 24 3 5 25 Contents SV viii 3 7 3 System Manager Station 0 0 0 cece eee 3 7 4 3 7 4 Alarm Output Panel oooccccccccccc 3 7 5 3 7 5 Alarm Output Board Wiring 00 cece eee 3 7 6 3 7 6 Ol Card Cage Front 2 cc cece tee 3 7 7 3 7 7 Rear View of EMC Ol Card Cage 10P52820001 3 7 10 3 7 8 Alarm Circuit Wiring 000 cece eee 3 7 13 3 7 9 OI Card Cage 1984 0660 0001 Back View 00005 3 7 14 3 7 10 PeerWay Interface Functional Diagram sselususe 3 7 15 3 7 11 PeerWay Interface LEDs 00 cece eee eee 3 7 17 3 7 12 PeerWay Interface Jumper Locations
426. ver cable is used only when a workstation is connected directly to an RNI without a hub RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 9 RS3 Network Interface RNI The RS3 Network Interface RNI 10P53330001 provides a connection between the PeerWay and an Ethernet Local Area Network It is a node on the PeerWay and a host on the Ethernet Software in the RNI provides a connection between PeerWay messages and Ethernet messages Service issues are covered in the Service Manual SV Volume 2 The RNI Figure 3 4 6 requires e ADC power source 18 36 V e An Ethernet 10BaseT cable to the hub or workstation e PeerWay Drop cables to the PeerWay Tap Box set All connections are made to the front of the RNI as shown below a ETHERNET A CONSOLE 18 36 VDC 10BASET PEERWAYB PEERWAY A SERIAL 1 SUCH INPUT POWER eje ib sun TM TR RO 10 BASE Ethernet 10BaseT connector Ethernet 10Base2 connector not used PeerWay B drop cable Console Serial connector for field service use PeerWay A drop cable 6 DC power connector to RS3 DC power bus Figure 3 4 6 RS3 Network Interface RS3 Consoles RS3 Operator Station SV 3 4 10 The write on label Figure 3 4 7 provides space to record the PeerWay Node address of the RNI the Ethernet host name of the RNI and which Ethernet port is in use The MAC Address machine address will be filled out at the factory This is the unique Ethernet address of the RNI PEERWAY NOD
427. vice the batteries are charged ata constant 7 mA rate Data is buffered both in and out of the RTC There is a port for the Keyboard Interface board to communicate with the console on this card Only the Multitube consoles interface on this card all others interface on the OI processor Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 49 Printer Interface LEDs Printer Interface cards 0001 and 0002 those without the RS 422 interface have seven LEDs to indicate card status Figure 3 7 31 shows the LEDs of cards 0001 and 0002 Card good No faults are detected on the card Card fault A fault has been detected in the communication link TXD Indicates data being transmitted to the printer CTS Clear To Send Printer is connected and ready to accept data NV Write The nonvolatile RAM is being written Clock A one second pulse that the RTC is running Software Clock The internal software clock of the console is running Figure 3 7 31 Printer Interface Card 0001 0002 Without RS 422 Interface LEDs RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 50 Printer Interface cards 0003 and 0004 those with the RS 422 interface have nine LEDs to indicate card status Figure 3 7 32 shows the LEDs of cards 0003 and 0004 Card good No faults are detected on the card Card fault A fault has been detected in the communication link Y Indicates data is being transmitted to the keyboa
428. wer Distribution Cable 1 4 7 Bypass Mode 5 1 19 C C 12243 5 2 20 6 3 38 1285 2 1 12 12918 9 1 3 52932 0002 4 2 49 C 1404S 3 1 27 C52932 0002 3 7 81 C53394 0250 0005 5 1 55 cabinet electronics 3 7 2 cabinet door filter cleaning 9 1 9 cabinet fan screen cleaning 9 1 9 cabinet filter cleaning 9 1 8 cabinet surface cleaning 9 1 11 cable A Bus DC Power Distribution 1 4 9 AC DC Power Supply to DC Bus 1 4 3 B Bus DC Power Distribution 1 4 9 Bus A B DC Power Distribution 1 4 7 DC Bus to DC Bus 1 4 3 DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper 1 3 9 fiber optic 2 2 13 Keyboard Interface to Dual Keyswitch 3 1 17 Keyboard Interface to Keyswitch 3 1 21 Keyboard Interface to Remote Keylock 3 1 20 3 1 22 Opto Electric 2 2 7 QBUS Board 1 to Board 2 7 4 3 7 4 5 QBUS Boards to MP 7 4 3 7 4 5 twinax PeerWay 2 1 9 calibrating 4 20 MA FEM 8 4 7 Analog I O FIC 8 5 1 Input Points 8 5 8 Isolated Output Points 8 5 7 Non Isolated Output Points 8 5 6 Output Points 8 5 3 8 6 1 8 6 4 Multiplexer FEMs 8 4 2 MUX FEM 8 4 1 Pulse Input FIC 8 3 1 RS3 Service Manual SV Index 5 Serial I O FIC 8 1 1 Analog Input Points 8 1 5 Analog Output Points 8 1 2 Temperature Input FIC 8 2 1 Thermocouple FEM 8 4 3 Voltage Input FEM 8 4 3 calibration checking 9 1 18 CC 4 3 28 LEDs 4 3 33 fuse 4 3 29 CF TERMINATOR II 4 1 5 Character Graphics Video Generator 3 7 42 fuse 3 7 45 LEDs 3 7 44 checking 4 20 MA
429. wer Supplies SV 1 2 16 AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup Alarm Contacts The front panel provides a set of terminals for power supply fault alarm contacts PS FAULT These are normally closed N C The contact will be opened if the green PS NORM LED goes out The supply continues to supply power when the alarm condition is active The contacts are rated for switching a resistive load Rating for 1984 0390 000x e 200 Volts DC e 500 mA e 10 Watts Rating for 10P5664000x e 100 Volts DC e 500 mA e 10 Watts NOTE The PS FAULT contacts of the 1984 0390 000x and 10P5664000x power supplies are normally closed N C AC DC Power Supply Without Battery Backup LEDs and Fuses RS3 Power The AC DC power supply without battery backup has two indicators on the front to indicate status Figure 1 2 8 shows the location of the lights Table 1 2 8 shows the meaning of each light Table 1 2 9 shows the power supply fuse CAUTION Under certain failure conditions 30 VDC may be present even though both LED indicators are off Check all AC DC power supplies for green LED normal indications and equal output current All supplies on the same DC distribution system supply approximately the same current within 3 to 6 amps Check each DC distribution system individually Power Supplies SV 1 2 17
430. wo redundant CP boards This interface is identical to that used on CP I and CP II RS3 ControlFiles ControlFile Support Section SV 4 2 26 CP I and CP II Circuit Description RS3 ControlFiles Figure 4 2 13 shows the functional diagram of a CP I and CP II Coordinator Processor An on card oscillator generates all timing required for card functions The oscillator runs at either 40 MHz or 48 MHz depending on the model used and is divided down to various clock outputs distributed throughout the card The processor is a 68000 series 16 bit microprocessor Interrupts are prioritized according to importance so the tasks are handled ina reasonable order A watchdog timer requires periodic resetting by the healthy processor or it will reset the micro Buffering is provided on the card to the ControlFile motherboard for either the left or right motherboard bus depending on which slot is selected An on card bootstrap EPROM is provided that consists of two EPROMs arranged in 16 bit words EPROMs store power up diagnostics and the boot program required to download the operating program from nonvolatile memory to RAM or from the PeerWay by a PeerWay Boot procedure NOTE The PeerWay Boot procedure may not be supported by all combinations of hardware and software The CP I and CP II Coordinator Processor contains dynamic RAM memory and error detection and correction EDAC control circuitry The dynamic memory controller performs the
431. y 0 0 cece eee 2 3 1 2 3 2 PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly 00 eee eee 2 3 2 2 3 3 PeerWay Extender PX 0 0 cece eee eee eee eere 2 3 4 2 3 4 PX System Cabling cocosgoicaco coral Maen a hee a 2 3 5 RS3 PeerWay Contents SV iii List of Tables Table Page 2 1 1 PeerWay Tap Box Parts Replacement ssseue 2 1 3 2 2 1 Optical Tap Box Replacement Data cece eee eee 2 2 4 2 2 2 Electrical Tap Box Replacement Data 2c eee eee 2 2 7 2 2 3 Optical Repeater Attenuator Jumper Settings issue 2 2 8 2 3 1 PX Parts Replacement Data 0 cece eee ees 2 3 3 2 3 2 PX System Cabling Components 0 cece eee eee 2 3 6 2 3 3 PX LEDS coy tienda iene lc RR x Blatt 2 3 7 2 3 4 Normal Test Switch Settings 00 cece eee eee eee 2 3 8 2 3 5 PXFUSOS aawite rina gabe enn ce Abe Rr ce o RA Roles 2 3 9 RS3 PeerWay Contents SV iv RS3 PeerWay Contents SV 2 1 1 Section 1 Electrical PeerWay This section describes hardware and shows functional diagrams for the electrical PeerWay The electrical PeerWay includes twinax PeerWay cables and PeerWay taps The PeerWay is fully redundant Each PeerWay carries half the traffic and either one can carry the full load if the other fails Two sets of twinax PeerWay cables and PeerWay Tap Boxes provide independent communication paths between the nodes Figure
432. y SCSI 3 7 52 3 7 57 distribution block AC 1 2 28 DC 1 2 28 Distribution Blocks 1 2 37 Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel 1 1 4 fuses 1 1 5 dump memory 10 3 12 automatic 10 3 12 viewing 10 3 16 DVM 9 3 2 E EIA Options SCI 7 2 15 EIGHT LINE COMM CONNECT 5 1 4 Elcon Intrinsically Safe Termination Panel 6 6 3 Analog Applications 6 6 9 Discrete Applications 6 6 6 electrical PeerWay 2 1 1 grounding 2 1 7 termination 2 1 11 Electrical Tap Box 2 2 6 Electronics Cabinet 3 7 2 Engineering Keyboard 3 1 6 Enhanced Engineering Keyboard 3 1 6 Ethernet cable 3 4 8 hubs 3 4 11 Extender Card Analog 5 1 53 Analog FIC 5 5 33 Contact Card Cage 5 2 28 Contact FlexTerm 5 2 28 MPC 5 1 53 SIO 5 1 53 F FEM 5 3 14 Thermocouple 5 3 16 Universal Voltage 5 3 16 Voltage 5 3 16 fiber optic cable and accessories 2 2 13 Cable Tie Panel Assembly 2 2 3 connector kit 2 2 13 I O Converter 6 2 11 installing connectors 2 2 13 Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly 2 2 3 Fiber Optic I O Converter 6 2 11 fiber optic PeerWay troubleshooting cables 10 2 42 Fiber Optic Power Meter 9 3 3 RS3 Service Manual FIBER OPTIC REPEATER 2 2 8 Fiber Optic Source meter 9 3 3 FIC 5 1 23 5 5 1 4 20 MA 5 1 24 4 20 mA W Smart Daughterboard 5 1 35 Analog 5 1 24 Analog Input 5 5 7 Analog Output 5 5 20 Detail screen 10 5 18 Field I O Status screen 10 5 13 Isolated Analog Input 5 5 15 Isolated Analog Output 5
433. y cables have two connectors at one end These two connectors connect to the corresponding controller connectors on the ControlFile Motherboard A redundant flat cable cannot be used on a nonredundant controller Should a redundant flat cable be used on a nonredundant controller the controller assumes it is redundant and clears the configuration for the adjacent slot This is true of MPC Controller Processors that are running the CC image Redundancy on Serial I O card cages both Analog and Contact is handled differently The redundant controllers are connected to the I O cage by separate cables and redundancy jumpering is done at the I O card cage s If the Controller Processor loses RS 485 communications with the Field Interface Card the redundant controller will take over Note that this will happen any time a Field Interface Card FIC is removed from a FlexTerm or I O Card Cage Hardware alarm code 19 will be generated when this occurs Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized If both controllers have active alarms the controller with the lowest priority alarm will operate as primary There are two rows of connectors across the backplane of the ControlFile motherboard an upper and a lower Only the upper row is used by the MultiPurpose Controller Each Controller slot has a corresponding connector on the top row of connectors This connector allows connection to the serial I O Analog Card Cages and or FlexTerms Cont
434. y requires replacement replace both batteries Backup RAM data to disk before changing the batteries Remove one battery at a time to allow the other battery to power the RAM Replace the lower reading battery first See Chapter 9 Maintenance for the complete battery replacement procedure RS3 Consoles Ol Card Cage SV 3 7 74 OI NV RAM LEDs and Test Points Figure 3 7 44 shows the LEDs on the OI NV RAM card DS1 Green No faults are detected on the card DS1 lights when the card has passed power up diagnostics DS Red A fault has been detected on the card DS2 lights when the card has failed power up diagnostics DS4 Yellow Battery 1 is low Replace both batteries battery 1 first DS5 Yellow Battery 2 is low Replace both batteries battery 2 first DS6 Yellow TXD for RS 422 channel DS7 Yellow RXD for RS 422 channel DS8 Yellow CTS for RS 422 channel DS9 Yellow RXD for RS 232 channel DS10 Yellow CTS for RS 232 channel DS11 Yellow TXD for RS 232 channel Status LED 1 Operation Program Access DS12 Yellow Power up Test Low order bit of test number DS13 Yellow Status LED 2 Operation Writing to the Bubble Power up Test Middle bit of test number DS14 Yellow Status LED 3 Operation Reading from the Bubble Power up Test High order bit of test number Figure 3 7 44 OI NV RAM LEDs

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

libretto istruzioni notice d'instructions instruction booklet  Baixar Manual  ユニバーサルデザイン懇談会  Liste des chaînes radio FM valable dès le 1 août 2015  - MAKE 01  iVMS-7200  @HEADER 1B = GETTING STARTED    ASTAT XBm - Gepowercontrols.com  Hip Smarthome - Systems User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file